Series

Connection Manual
(Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
AZBIL (former YAMATAKE) CONTROL EQUIPMENT
OMRON PLC
OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
KEYENCE PLC
KOYO EI PLC
JTEKT PLC
SHARP PLC
SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER
CHINO CONTROLLER
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
TOSHIBA PLC
PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these precautions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

WARNING resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

● If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection : The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For other than bus connection : The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

● Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

A-1
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone
out.
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display section dims, while the input of the touch switch(s)
remains active.
This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in "screensaver" mode, who then tries to
release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section, which may cause a touch switch to
operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out.
<When using the GT1655-V, Handy GOT, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, or GT105 >
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, or GT1662>
The POWER LED blinks (green/orange) and the monitor screen appears dimmed.
<When using the GT104 >
The monitor screen appears blank.
<When using the GT103 or GT102 >
The monitor screen appears dimmed.
● The display section of the GT16, GT1595-X, GT14, GT12 or GT1020 are an analog-resistive type
touch panel.
If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around
the center of the touched point, if any, may operate.
Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
● When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
● To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against
unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable
networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private
networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and
system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting
vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

CAUTION
● Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
● Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

A-2
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network, the available IP address is restricted according
to the system configuration.
• When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
• When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.0.18) for the controllers except the GOT in the network.
Doing so can cause the IP address duplication. The duplication can negatively affect the
communication of the device with the IP address (192.168.0.18).
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
● Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT to/from the panel.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.

● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the communication unit, option function board or multi-color display board onto/from the
GOT.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

● Before mounting an optional function board or Multi-color display board, wear a static discharge wrist
strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity.

CAUTION
● Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User's
Manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.

● When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.

● When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GOT (GT16, GT15), fit it to the extension
interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

A-3
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When mounting the multi-color display board onto the GOT (GT15), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.
Loose tightening may cause the unit and/or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact.
Overtightening may damage the screws, unit and/or GOT; they might malfunction.

● When mounting the option function board onto the GOT (GT16), connect it to the corresponding
connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range.

● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT15), fully connect it to the connector
until you hear a click.

● When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT(GT11), fully connect it to the connector.

● When inserting a CF card into the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), push it into the CF card interface of
GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.

● When inserting/removing a SD card into/from the GOT(GT14), turn the SD card access switch off in
advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card.
● When inserting/removing a CF card into/from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT11), turn the CF card access
switch off in advance.
Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card.
● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), make sure to support the SD card by hand, as it
may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT(GT14) and break.
● When removing a CF card from the GOT, make sure to support the CF card by hand, as it may pop out.
Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break.
● When installing a USB memory to the GOT(GT16, GT14), make sure to install the USB memory to
the USB interface firmly.
Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact.
● Before removing the USB memory from the GOT(GT16, GT14), operate the utility screen for
removal.
After the successful completion dialog box is displayed, remove the memory by hand carefully.
Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop, resulting in a damage or failure of the memory.
● For closing the USB environmental protection cover, fix the cover by pushing the mark on the latch
firmly to comply with the protective structure.
● Remove the protective film of the GOT.
When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
● Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight, high temperature, dust, humidity,
and vibrations.
● When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

A-4
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

CAUTION
● Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT
power supply section by applying Class D Grounding (Class 3 Grounding Method) or higher which is
used exclusively for the GOT.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
● Be sure to tighten any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.8N•m.
Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal.
● Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque.
If any solderless spade terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes
loose, resulting in failure.

● Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

● Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

● Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

● The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts,
from entering the module during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

● Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

● Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and
terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

● Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the
connector of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

A-5
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen (such as turning ON or
OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of
the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual
carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

WARNING
● Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including the SoftGOT-GOT
link function, the remote personal computer operation function, and the VNC server function.
If these functions are used to perform remote control of control equipment, the field operator may not
notice the remote control, possibly leading to an accident.
In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network
environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases.
Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field
site and ensure safety.

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.

● Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

● Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.

● Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.

A-6
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

● When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.

● Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit.

Doing so may damage the unit.

● Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

● Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metal, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

● Replace battery with GT15-BAT(GT16, GT15) or GT11-50BAT(GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10) by

Mitsubishi electric Co. only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.

● Dispose of used battery promptly.

Keep away from children. Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION
● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. However,
the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use
elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute
the touch panel calibration.

● When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

A-7
[BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT (and the PLC CPU in the case
of a bus topology) and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight (when
using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user).
Not doing so can cause an electric shock.
Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or
control panel to drop, resulting in an injury.

CAUTION
● Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the
user.
Not doing so can cause an injury.

● Before replacing a backlight, allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT
with the backlight replaceable by the user.
Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight.

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste.

● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate
them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be
used.)

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(For details on models subject to restrictions, refer to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.)

● Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the
User's Manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.
Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

A-8
INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi Electric GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 9
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 9
MANUALS............................................................................................................................................... A - 18
QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. A - 20
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 22
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................. A - 27

1.PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface............................................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting)................................................................... 1 - 3
1.1.2 I/F communication setting................................................................................................... 1 - 11
1.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 1 - 13
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT............................................................................. 1 - 14
1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT................................................................... 1 - 14
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT ............................................................ 1 - 15
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection ............................................................................. 1 - 16
1.3.1 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 1 - 16
1.3.2 Option unit .......................................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.3.3 Conversion cables .............................................................................................................. 1 - 17
1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter ........................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.3.5 Serial multi-drop connection unit ........................................................................................ 1 - 17
1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter .............................................................................. 1 - 17
1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position) ............................ 1 - 18
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection ....................................................................... 1 - 25
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications ............................................................................................ 1 - 25
1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method ...................................................................... 1 - 28
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT ............................................................................................. 1 - 29
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor ............................................................ 1 - 32
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment........................................................................ 1 - 33
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring .................................................................................................... 1 - 38
1.6.1 Check on the GOT.............................................................................................................. 1 - 38
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) ............. 1 - 41
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (station monitoring function)............. 1 - 43

A-9
 CONNECTIONS TO NON-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
2.CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
2.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL................................... 2 - 3
2.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 ................................ 2 - 4
2.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
2.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 14
2.3.2 RS-422/485 cable ............................................................................................................... 2 - 15
2.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 2 - 20
2.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 2 - 20
2.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 2 - 20
2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting ........................................................................................................ 2 - 21
2.5.1 Connecting to X-SEL .......................................................................................................... 2 - 21
2.5.2 Connecting to SSEL, ASEL, PSEL ..................................................................................... 2 - 22
2.5.3 Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON ................................................................................. 2 - 22
2.5.4 Connecting to ERC2 ........................................................................................................... 2 - 23
2.5.5 Station No.settings.............................................................................................................. 2 - 23
2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 2 - 24
2.6.1 IAI robot controller (IAI X-SELController)............................................................................ 2 - 24
2.6.2 IAI robot controller (IAI PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 controller) ....................................... 2 - 29
2.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 2 - 35

3.CONNECTION TOAZBIL (former YAMATAKE) CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
3.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.2.1 Connecting to DMC10 .......................................................................................................... 3 - 4
3.2.2 Connecting to DMC50 .......................................................................................................... 3 - 5
3.2.3 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36................................................................... 3 - 6
3.2.4 Connecting to SDC20/21 ...................................................................................................... 3 - 7
3.2.5 Connecting to SDC30/31 ...................................................................................................... 3 - 9
3.2.6 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G ....................................................................................... 3 - 10
3.2.7 Connecting to SDC45/46 .................................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.2.8 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX........................................................................ 3 - 13
3.2.9 Connecting to CMF015, CMF050 ...................................................................................... 3 - 14
3.2.10 Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2 ..................................................................................... 3 - 16
3.2.11 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C ................................................................................. 3 - 17
3.2.12 Connecting to CMC10B ...................................................................................................... 3 - 18
3.2.13 Connecting to AHC2001 ..................................................................................................... 3 - 19
3.2.14 Connecting to NX series ..................................................................................................... 3 - 21
3.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.3.2 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 23
3.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 46
3.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 3 - 46
3.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 3 - 46

A - 10
 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting..................................................................................................... 3 - 48
3.5.1 Connecting to DMC10 ........................................................................................................ 3 - 48
3.5.2 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G ....................................................................................... 3 - 48
3.5.3 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36 ................................................................ 3 - 48
3.5.4 Connecting to SDC20/21, SDC30/31 ................................................................................. 3 - 49
3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L ...................................................................................................... 3 - 49
3.5.6 Connecting to DMC50 ........................................................................................................ 3 - 50
3.5.7 Connecting to SDC45/46 .................................................................................................... 3 - 50
3.5.8 Connecting to CMS, CMF015............................................................................................. 3 - 50
3.5.9 Connecting to CML, CMF050 ............................................................................................. 3 - 50
3.5.10 Connecting to MQV ............................................................................................................ 3 - 50
3.5.11 Connecting to MPC ............................................................................................................ 3 - 51
3.5.12 Connecting to PBC201-VN2 ............................................................................................... 3 - 51
3.5.13 Connecting to MVF ............................................................................................................. 3 - 51
3.5.14 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C .................................................................................. 3 - 52
3.5.15 Connecting to RX ............................................................................................................... 3 - 52
3.5.16 Connecting to CMC10B ...................................................................................................... 3 - 52
3.5.17 Connecting to AHC2001 CPU module ............................................................................... 3 - 53
3.5.18 Connecting to AHC2001 SCU module ............................................................................... 3 - 53
3.5.19 Station number setting........................................................................................................ 3 - 53
3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set...................................................................................................... 3 - 54
3.6.1 AZBIL SDC/DMC Series..................................................................................................... 3 - 56
3.6.2 AZBIL DMC50 .................................................................................................................... 3 - 56
3.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 3 - 58

4.CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 4 - 2
4.2 Serial Connection ............................................................................................................................ 4 - 4
4.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C or CQM1.......... 4 - 4
4.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to CQM1H.................................................................. 4 - 6
4.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2M..................... 4 - 7
4.2.4 System Configuration for connecting to CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E ........................................ 4 - 10
4.2.5 System Configuration for connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX,
C200HG, or C200HE .......................................................................................................... 4 - 12
4.2.6 System Configuration for connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D ....................................... 4 - 14
4.2.7 System Configuration for connecting to C1000H or C2000H ............................................. 4 - 16
4.2.8 System Configuration for connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1 ................... 4 - 17
4.2.9 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................... 4 - 18
4.2.10 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 4 - 23
4.2.11 PLC Side Setting ................................................................................................................ 4 - 24
4.2.12 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter .............................. 4 - 24
4.2.13 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E ...................................................... 4 - 25
4.2.14 Connecting to CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1 .............................................................. 4 - 27
4.2.15 Connecting to connection cable ......................................................................................... 4 - 28
4.2.16 Connecting to rack type host link unit ................................................................................. 4 - 28
4.2.17 Connecting to serial communication unit ............................................................................ 4 - 31
4.2.18 Connecting to communication board, serial communication board (CQM1-SCB41)......... 4 - 31
4.2.19 Connecting to serial communication board (CS1W-SCB21(-V1), CS1W-SCB41(-V1)) ..... 4 - 32
4.2.20 Connecting to RS-422A/485 Option board ......................................................................... 4 - 33
4.2.21 Connecting to RS-422A converter ...................................................................................... 4 - 34

A - 11
 4.3 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 35
4.3.1 System configuration .......................................................................................................... 4 - 35
4.3.2 GOT side settings ............................................................................................................... 4 - 36
4.3.3 PLC side setting.................................................................................................................. 4 - 39
4.3.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 40
4.4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 4 - 41
4.4.1 OMRON PLC (OMRON SYSMAC)..................................................................................... 4 - 41
4.4.2 OMRON PLC (OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ) ......................................................................... 4 - 42

5.CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 5 - 2
5.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 5 - 3
5.2.1 Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series ........................................................................... 5 - 3
5.2.2 Connecting to the INPANEL NEO ........................................................................................ 5 - 5
5.3 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 6
5.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 6
5.3.2 RS-485 cable ........................................................................................................................ 5 - 7
5.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 12
5.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 5 - 12
5.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 5 - 12
5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ............................................................................................. 5 - 14
5.5.1 Connecting E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN ............................................................................ 5 - 14
5.5.2 Connecting E5ZN ............................................................................................................... 5 - 14
5.5.3 Connection to interface converter (K3SC-10)..................................................................... 5 - 14
5.5.4 Station No. settings............................................................................................................. 5 - 15
5.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 5 - 16
5.6.1 OMRON temperature controller (OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO)............................. 5 - 16
5.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 17

6.CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.2 Serial Connection ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 3
6.2.1 Connecting to KV-5500, KV-5000......................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.2.2 Connecting to KV-3000......................................................................................................... 6 - 4
6.2.3 Connecting to KV-1000......................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.2.4 Connecting to KV-700........................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.2.5 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................... 6 - 10
6.2.6 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 6 - 14
6.2.7 PLC Side Setting ................................................................................................................ 6 - 15
6.3 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 17
6.3.1 Connecting to KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500..................................................................... 6 - 17
6.3.2 GOT side settings ............................................................................................................... 6 - 18
6.3.3 PLC side setting.................................................................................................................. 6 - 19
6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.4.1 KV-700/1000/3000/5000..................................................................................................... 6 - 21

A - 12
7.CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC
7.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 7 - 2
7.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.2.1 Connecting to SU-5E or SU-6B ............................................................................................ 7 - 3
7.2.2 Connecting to SU-5M or SU-6M ........................................................................................... 7 - 5
7.2.3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series .................................................................................. 7 - 7
7.2.4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 06 series .................................................................................. 7 - 9
7.2.5 Connecting to D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260....................................................................... 7 - 11
7.2.6 Connecting to PZ ................................................................................................................ 7 - 13
7.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
7.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
7.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
7.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 7 - 22
7.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 7 - 22
7.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 7 - 22
7.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 23
7.5.1 Connecting to SU-5E/6B .................................................................................................... 7 - 23
7.5.2 Connecting to SU-5M/6M ................................................................................................... 7 - 24
7.5.3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series ....................................... 7 - 24
7.5.4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series .............................................................................. 7 - 24
7.5.5 Connecting to PZ Series..................................................................................................... 7 - 24
7.5.6 Connecting to U-01DM ....................................................................................................... 7 - 25
7.5.7 Connecting to D0-DCM ...................................................................................................... 7 - 26
7.5.8 Connecting to D2-DCM ...................................................................................................... 7 - 26
7.5.9 Station No. settings ............................................................................................................ 7 - 26
7.6 Device Range that Can Be Set...................................................................................................... 7 - 27
7.6.1 KOYO EI PLC (KOYO KOSTAC/DL).................................................................................. 7 - 27
7.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 7 - 28

8.CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.2.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD or PC3JD-C ........................................................ 8 - 2
8.2.2 Connecting to PC3J or PC3JL.............................................................................................. 8 - 4
8.2.3 Connecting to PC2J, PC2JS or PC2JR ................................................................................ 8 - 6
8.2.4 Connecting to PC2JC, PC216P or PC2J16PR..................................................................... 8 - 8
8.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.3.2 RS-422 cable ...................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.4 GOT Side Settings......................................................................................................................... 8 - 14
8.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 8 - 14
8.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 8 - 14
8.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 16
8.5.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC3JG-P, PC3J, PC3JL, PC2J,
PC2JS or PC2JR ................................................................................................................ 8 - 16
8.5.2 Connecting to PC2JC ......................................................................................................... 8 - 16
8.5.3 Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR .............................................................................. 8 - 17
8.5.4 RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting ........................................................................ 8 - 17

A - 13
 8.5.5 Link unit setting................................................................................................................... 8 - 18
8.5.6 Station number setting........................................................................................................ 8 - 18
8.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 8 - 19
8.6.1 JTEKT PLC (JTEKT TOYOPUC-PLC) ............................................................................... 8 - 19
8.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 8 - 20

9.CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................... 9 - 2
9.2 System Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 9 - 3
9.2.1 Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU .................................................................................. 9 - 3
9.2.2 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH......................................................... 9 - 4
9.2.3 Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU ................................... 9 - 5
9.2.4 Connecting to Z-512J ........................................................................................................... 9 - 6
9.3 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 7
9.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 7
9.3.2 RS-422 cable ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 8
9.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 9 - 10
9.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 9 - 10
9.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 9 - 10
9.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 9 - 11
9.5.1 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU.................................... 9 - 11
9.5.2 Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J.............................................................. 9 - 12
9.5.3 Connecting to the link unit (JW-21CM) ............................................................................... 9 - 12
9.5.4 Connecting to the link unit (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM) ......................................................... 9 - 13
9.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 9 - 15
9.6.1 SHARP PLC (SHARP JW) ................................................................................................. 9 - 16

10.CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 10 - 2
10.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.2.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300 Series, PC-900 Series
(PC-955-[ ]/M,C5, PC-935-[ ]/M,C5) ................................................................................. 10 - 3
10.2.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series
(PC-955[ ]/M,C, PC-935-[ ]/M,C)....................................................................................... 10 - 4
10.2.3 When connecting to DCL-33A Series ................................................................................. 10 - 5
10.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 6
10.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 6
10.3.2 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 7
10.4 GOT Side Settings ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 12
10.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 10 - 12
10.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 10 - 12
10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting ................................................................................................ 10 - 13
10.5.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, DCL- 33A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301- M, PCD-300 Series,
PC-900 Series (PC-955-[ ]/M,C5, PC- 935-[ ]/M,C5) ........................................................ 10 - 13
10.5.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series
(PC-955-[ ]/ M,C, PC-935-[ ]/M,C) .................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.5.3 Connecting to communication converter (IF-400)............................................................. 10 - 13
10.5.4 Station No. settings........................................................................................................... 10 - 14

A - 14
 10.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 10 - 15
10.6.1 SHINKO indicating controller (Shinko Technos Controller) .............................................. 10 - 15
10.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 10 - 16

11.CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 11 - 2
11.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.2.1 Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000,
DB2000 series .................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.2.2 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000, AL3000, AH3000 series ................................................. 11 - 5
11.2.3 Connecting to SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000 series ......................................................... 11 - 7
11.2.4 Connecting to GT120 Series .............................................................................................. 11 - 9
11.3 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
11.3.1 RS-232 cable .................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
11.3.2 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 11 - 11
11.3.3 RS-485 cable .................................................................................................................... 11 - 16
11.4 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 11 - 25
11.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 11 - 25
11.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 11 - 25
11.5 Controller Side Setting................................................................................................................. 11 - 27
11.5.1 Connecting to LT230, LT300 Series ................................................................................. 11 - 27
11.5.2 Connecting to LT400, LT830 Series ................................................................................. 11 - 27
11.5.3 Connecting to DZ1000, DZ2000 Series............................................................................ 11 - 27
11.5.4 Connecting to DB1000, DB2000 Series ........................................................................... 11 - 28
11.5.5 Connecting to GT120 Series ............................................................................................ 11 - 28
11.5.6 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000 ....................................................................................... 11 - 28
11.5.7 Connecting to AL3000, AH3000 ....................................................................................... 11 - 28
11.5.8 Connecting to SE3000...................................................................................................... 11 - 29
11.5.9 Connecting to JU .............................................................................................................. 11 - 29
11.5.10 Connecting to KE3000...................................................................................................... 11 - 30
11.5.11 Connecting to LE5000 ...................................................................................................... 11 - 30
11.5.12 Connecting to converter SC8-10 ...................................................................................... 11 - 31
11.5.13 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 11 - 32
11.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 11 - 33
11.6.1 CHINO controller (CHINO Controllers) ............................................................................. 11 - 33
11.7 Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 11 - 34

12.CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 12 - 2
12.2 Serial Connection .......................................................................................................................... 12 - 3
12.2.1 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC T series ................................................ 12 - 3
12.2.2 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC V series ................................................ 12 - 4
12.2.3 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................................... 12 - 5
12.2.4 GOT Side Settings.............................................................................................................. 12 - 7
12.2.5 PLC Side Setting ................................................................................................................ 12 - 8
12.3 Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 9
12.3.1 System configuration for connecting to Unified Controller nv Series.................................. 12 - 9
12.3.2 GOT side setting............................................................................................................... 12 - 10
12.3.3 PLC side setting ............................................................................................................... 12 - 12

A - 15
 12.3.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 12
12.4 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 12 - 13

13.CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

13.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 13 - 2
13.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 13 - 3
13.2.1 Connecting to TC3, TC6, TC8 ............................................................................................ 13 - 3
13.2.2 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100 ......................................................................................... 13 - 3
13.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 4
13.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 13 - 4
13.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 13 - 5
13.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 13 - 5
13.5 PLC Side Setting ........................................................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.5.1 Connecting to TC3, TC8 series .......................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.5.2 Connecting to TC6 series ................................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.5.3 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100 ......................................................................................... 13 - 6
13.6 Device Range that Can Be Set ...................................................................................................... 13 - 7
13.6.1 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC (TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini) ................................................. 13 - 8

14.CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 14 - 2
14.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 14 - 2
14.2.1 Connecting to MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L series ............................................... 14 - 2
14.2.2 Connecting to MINAS A5 series ......................................................................................... 14 - 3
14.3 Connection Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
14.3.1 RS-232 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
14.3.2 RS-485 cable ...................................................................................................................... 14 - 4
14.3.3 RS-232/RS-485 cable......................................................................................................... 14 - 8
14.4 GOT Side Settings ......................................................................................................................... 14 - 9
14.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................... 14 - 9
14.4.2 Communication detail settings............................................................................................ 14 - 9
14.5 Servo Amplifier Side Setting ........................................................................................................ 14 - 10
14.5.1 Connecting to MINAS A4/A4F/A4L................................................................................... 14 - 10
14.5.2 Connecting to MINAS A5.................................................................................................. 14 - 10
14.5.3 Station number setting...................................................................................................... 14 - 10
14.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................................................................................................... 14 - 11
14.6.1 PANASONIC servo amplifier (PANASONIC MINAS-A4 Series) ...................................... 14 - 11
14.6.2 PANASONIC servo amplifier (PANASONIC MINAS-A5 Series) ...................................... 14 - 12
14.7 Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 14 - 13

15.CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.1 Connectable Model List ................................................................................................................. 15 - 2
15.2 System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 15 - 3
15.2.1 Connecting to FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, or FP0R............................................................. 15 - 3
15.2.2 Connecting to FP1-C24C or FP1-C40C ............................................................................. 15 - 3
15.2.3 Connecting to FP2 or FP2SH ............................................................................................. 15 - 4
15.2.4 Connecting to FP3 or FP5 .................................................................................................. 15 - 5

A - 16
 15.2.5 Connecting to FP10(S) ....................................................................................................... 15 - 6
15.2.6 Connecting to FP10SH ....................................................................................................... 15 - 8
15.2.7 Connecting to FP-M(C20TC) or FP-M(C32TC) .................................................................. 15 - 9
15.2.8 Connecting to FP .............................................................................................................. 15 - 10
15.2.9 Connecting to FP-X .......................................................................................................... 15 - 11
15.3 Connection Diagram .................................................................................................................... 15 - 13
15.3.1 RS-232 cable .................................................................................................................... 15 - 13
15.3.2 RS-422 cable .................................................................................................................... 15 - 16
15.4 GOT Side Settings....................................................................................................................... 15 - 18
15.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)............................................. 15 - 18
15.4.2 Communication detail settings.......................................................................................... 15 - 18
15.5 PLC Side Setting ......................................................................................................................... 15 - 19
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set.................................................................................................... 15 - 20
15.6.1 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX PLC (Panasonic MEWNET-FP) ........................... 15 - 21

INDEX
REVISIONS

A - 17
MANUALS

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.

 Screen creation software manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product -

SH-080866ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB9)

SH-080867ENG
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC1)

SH-080861ENG
GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB1)

SH-080862ENG
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB2)

 Connection manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080868ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC2)

SH-080869ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC3)

SH-080870ENG
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MC4)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT SH-080871ENG
Stored in CD-ROM
Works3 (1D7MC5)

 Extended and option function manuals

Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080858ENG
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA7)

SH-080859ENG
GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA8)

SH-080863ENG
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions) for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MB3)

 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080860ENG
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MA9)

A - 18
 GT16 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080928ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD3)

SH-080929ENG
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility) Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7MD4)

JY997D41201
GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D41202
(09R821)

 GT15 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080528ENG
GT15 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7M23)

 GT14 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

JY997D44801
GT14 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R823)

 GT12 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

SH-080977ENG
GT12 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(1D7ME1)

 GT11 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

JY997D17501
GT11 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R815)

JY997D20101
GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM JY997D20102
(09R817)

 GT10 manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name Packaging
(Model code)

JY997D24701
GT10 User's Manual Stored in CD-ROM
(09R819)

A - 19
QUICK REFERENCE

 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3

Setting available functions on GT Designer3

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action
1/2, 2/2

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3

 Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the
GOT

Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric
Products) for GT Works3
Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT (Multi-channel function)

Establishing communication between a personal computer and a

controller via the GOT (FA transparent function)

Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the • GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
GOT Electric Products 1) for GT Works3
• GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi
Connecting Non-Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT Electric Products 2) for GT Works3

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,
MODBUS Products, Peripherals) for GT Works3
Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT

 Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

Reading data from the GOT
(Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2

Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

A - 20
  Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
options) of each GOT • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
• GT14 User's Manual
• GT12 User's Manual
Installing the GOT • GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT10 User's Manual

• GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)

• GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT15 User's Manual
• GT14 User's Manual
Operating the utility
• GT12 User's Manual
• GT11 User's Manual
• GT11 Handy GOT User's Manual
• GT10 User's Manual

Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT

Configuring the MES interface function
Works3

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Configuring the extended function and option function
Functions) for GT Works3

Using a personal computer as the GOT GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3

A - 21
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

 GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD
GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD
GT1675M-S Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD
GT1675 GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VN Abbreviation of GT1675-VNBA, GT1675-VNBD
GT1672 GT1672-VN Abbreviation of GT1672-VNBA, GT1672-VNBD
GT1665M-S Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD
GT1665
GT1665M-V Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662 GT1662-VN Abbreviation of GT1662-VNBA, GT1662-VNBD

GT1655 GT1655-V Abbreviation of GT1655-VTBD

GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1672, GT1665, GT1662, GT1655, GT16 Handy GOT
GT1595 GT1595-X Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD
GT1585V-S Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD
GT1585
GT1585-S Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD
GT1575V-S Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD
GT1575-S Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD
GT157 GT1575-V Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD
GT1575-VN Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD
GT1572-VN Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD
GT1565-V Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD
GT156
GT1562-VN Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD
GT1555-V Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GOT1000 GT155 GT1555-Q Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

Series GT1550-Q Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD
GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155
GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD
GT145
GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD
GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q
GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD
GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD
GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275, GT1265
Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1155-Q
GT115 GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-Q Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD
GT11 Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,
GT1055-Q Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD
GT105
GT1050-Q Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-Q Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD
GT104
GT1040-Q Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD
Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,
GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030 GT1030-LWLW, GT1030-HBD, GT1030-HBD2, GT1030-HBL, GT1030-HBDW, GT1030-HBDW2,
GT1030-HBLW, GT1030-HWD, GT1030-HWD2, GT1030-HWL, GT1030-HWDW, GT1030-HWDW2,
GT1030-HWLW
Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,
GT1020 GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW
GT10 Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

A - 22
 Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT16
Handy GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD
Handy GOT
GOT1000
GOT GT11 GT1155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD
Series
Handy
GOT GT1150HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD

GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series
GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

 Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
Bus connection unit
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
RS-422 conversion unit GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P
Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication
GT15-J71GP23-SX
unit
CC-Link IE Field Network Communication Unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

*1 A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

*2 A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
*3 A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

 Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4
RGB input unit GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1
Video/RGB unit
Video/RGB input unit GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1
RGB output unit GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT
Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR
CF card unit GT15-CFCD
*1 GT15-CFEX-C08SET
CF card extension unit
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

*1 GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

A - 23
  Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
CF card GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC,
Memory card GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM-8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC
NZ1MEM-2GBSD, NZ1MEM-4GBSD, NZ1MEM-8GBSD, NZ1MEM-16GBSD, L1MEM-2GBSD,
SD card
L1MEM-4GBSD
Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC
GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,
Option function board
GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M
Battery GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT
GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,
GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,
GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,
For GT16 GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW,
GT16-50PSCB, GT16-50PSGB, GT16-50PSCW, GT16-50PSGW,
GT16-90PSCB-012, GT16-80PSCB-012, GT16-70PSCB-012,
GT16-60PSCB-012, GT16-50PSCB-012, GT16H-60PSC
GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,
GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,
For GT15 GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
Protective Sheet GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW
For GT14 GT14-50PSCB, GT14-50PSGB, GT14-50PSCW, GT14-50PSGW
For GT12 GT11-70PSCB, GT11-65PSCB
GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW,
For GT11
GT11H-50PSC
GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,
GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,
For GT10
GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW
GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO,
Protective cover for oil
GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV
Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND
GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,
Attachment
GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85
GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-70VLTTA, GT16-70VLTN,
Backlight GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT, GT16-60VLTN, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT, GT15-70SLTT,
GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN
Multi-color display board GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB
Connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S, GT16H-CNB-42S
Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H-50ESCOV, GT16H-60ESCOV
With wall-mounting Attachment GT14H-50ATT
Memory loader GT10-LDR
Memory board GT10-50FMB
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S, GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

A - 24
 Software
Abbreviations and generic terms Description

GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DND-GTWK3-E and SW DND-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series
GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000
GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC-IQWK (iQ
MELSOFT Navigator
Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)

Abbreviation of SW DND-GXW3-E and SW DND-GXW3-EA type programmable controller

GX Works3
engineering software

Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

GX Works2
engineering software
GX Simulator3 Abbreviation of GX Works3 with the simulation function
GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function
Controller simulator
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)

GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package

GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN-VIEWER-E type software package

PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DND-MTW2-E)

MT Developer Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series

MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW DNC-MRC2-E type Servo Configuration Software

MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software

FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator
Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
FX Configurator-FP
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)
FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version (SW D5C-ACT-E, SW D5C-ACT-EA)

MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version (SW D5C-SHEET-E, SW D5C-SHEET-EA)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

 License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

A - 25
  Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation
AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation)
OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation
JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation
SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.
HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.
FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC Co., Ltd.
PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ALLEN-BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms
LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA
SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG
SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG
RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation
MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co., Ltd.
PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller
Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation
Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation
Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation
CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION
PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD
GOT (server) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function
GOT (client) Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

Windows font
(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)
Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
Intelligent function module
to the base unit

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
MODBUS/RTU
communication

MODBUS/TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network

A - 26
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

 Symbols
Following symbols are used in this manual.

BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name

Not connectable model name

5.1 Connectable Model List 5-2

Applicable model name

Shows GT16.

Shows GT15.

Shows GT14.

Shows GT12.

Shows GT11.

Shows GT11 (BUS).

Shows GT11 (SERIAL).

Shows GT10.

Shows GT105 ,GT104 .

Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 24V).

Shows GT1020,GT1030 (input power supply : 5V).

1. 2. 3. …
Indicates the operation steps.
2.
[ ]: Indicates the setting items displayed on
the software and GOT screen.
3.

4.
Refers to the information required.

Refers to information useful

Click! for operation.

Indicates the location of related content.

Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.

A - 27
  About system configuration
The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual.

The configuration of The cable connecting The configuration of

equipment connected the GOT to the the GOT connected to
to GOT is shown. equipment is shown. equipment is shown.
For the option devices,
refer to the following.
1.3 Option Devices
for the Respective
Connection

RS-422 connector
QCPU GOT
conversion Cable
A representative example
Connection cable of the system configuration
is described with an
illustration.

Indicates the connection diagram Indicates the maximum distance between

number of cables to be prepared by the PLC and GOT.
the user.
Refer to the connection diagram
section in each chapter.
System Configuration Examples

(When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT16, with RS-422 cable)
1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable [FA-CNV2402CBL] to the [MELSEC-Q].
Indicates the commercially available 2) Connect the option [GT16-C02R4-9S] to [GT16].
cable models that can be used. 3) Connect [MELSEQ-Q] and [GT16] with the connection cable [GT01-C30R4-25P].

Since the above page was created for explanation purpose, it differs from the actual page.

A - 28
 1
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
PREPARATORY PROCEDURES

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
1.

FOR MONITORING 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14
1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16 4
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . 1 - 25

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . 1 - 33
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 38

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1-1
1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
MONITORING
The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.

Setting the communication interface

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and
Each chapter GOT Side Settings
perform the communication setting.

Writing the project data and OS

Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option 1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT
OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.

Verifying the project data and OS

Verify the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT
OS, project data and communication settings are properly
written onto the GOT.

Attaching the communication unit and 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

connecting the cable 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
Each chapter System Configuration
Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the
Each chapter Connection Diagram
connection cable according to the connection type.

Verifying GOT recognizes connected

equipment 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication
Settings] of the Utility.

Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, etc.

1-2 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

 1
1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment.
When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication
driver before writing to GOT.
Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.

1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 2

CONNECTION TO
Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
 Setting

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting. 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
POINT
Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. 7
Mitsubishi Electric Products 20. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-3

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
  Setting item
This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F.
When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].

Item Description

Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Type
(2)Setting [Controller Type]

Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected.For the settings, refer to the following.
I/F
(3)Setting [I/F]

Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following.
Driver
(1)Setting [Driver]

Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

(1) Setting [Driver]

The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
For the settings, refer to the following.
[Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

1-4 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 (2) Setting [Controller Type]
1

PROCEDURES FOR
The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used.
For the settings, refer to the following.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Type Model name Type Model name
XSEL-J RX
XSEL-K AZBIL SDC/DMC Series CMC10B
XSEL-KE AHC2001
XSEL-KT
XSEL-KET
CPM1
CPM1A
2
XSEL-P CPM2A

CONNECTION TO
XSEL-Q CPM2C

CONTROLLER
IAI X-SEL CONTROLLER XSEL-JX CQM1

IAI ROBOT
XSEL-KX CQM1H
XSEL-KTX CJ1H
XSEL-PX CJ1G
XSEL-QX CJ1M
SSEL CP1H 3
ASEL CP1L

CONNECTION TO
PSEL CP1E

AZBIL CONTROL
PCON-C C200HS

EQUIPMENT
OMRON SYSMAC
PCON-CG C200H
PCON-CF C200HX
PCON-CY C200HG
PCON-SE C200HE
PCON-PL CS1H 4
PCON-CA CS1G
PCON-PO CS1D

CONNECTION TO
IAI ROBO CYLINDER ACON-C C1000H

OMRON PLC
ACON-CG C2000H
ACON-CY CV500
ACON-SE CV1000
ACON-PL CV2000
ACON-PO
SCON-C
CVM1
CS1H
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SCON-CA CS1G
ERC2 CS1D

CONNECTION TO
DMC10 CJ1H

CONTROLLER
OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ
DMC50 CJ1G
SDC15 CJ1M
SDC25 CJ2H
SDC26 CJ2M
SDC35 E5AN 6
SDC36 E5EN

CONNECTION TO
SDC20 OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO E5CN

KEYENCE PLC
SDC21 E5GN
SDC30 E5ZN
SDC31 KV-700
SDC40A KV-1000
SDC40B KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000 KV-3000
AZBIL SDC/DMC Series
SDC40G KV-5000 7
SDC45 KV-5500
SDC46 JW-21CU
CONNECTION TO

CMS JW-31CUH
KOYO EI PLC

CMF015 JW-50CUH
CMF050 JW-22CU
CML JW-32CUH
SHARP JW
MQV JW-33CUH
MPC
MVF
JW-70CUH
JW-100CUH
8
PBC201-VN2 JW-100CU
CONNECTION TO

AUR350C Z-512J
AUR450C
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-5

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 Type Model name Type Model name
TC3-01 T2 (PU224)
TC3-02 T3
TC6-00 T3H
TOSHIBA MACHINE Tcmini
TC8-00 T2E
TS2000 TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V Series T2N
TS2100 model 2000(S2)
SU-5E model 2000(S2T)
SU-6B model 2000(S2E)
SU-5M model 3000 (S3)
SU-6M MINAS A4
PZ3 PANASONIC MINAS-A4 Series MINAS A4F
D2-240 MINAS A4L
D2-250-1 FP0-C16CT
D2-260 FP0-C32CT
D0-05AA FP0R
D0-05AD FP1-C24C
D0-05AR FP1-C40C
D0-05DA FP2
KOYO KOSTAC/DL D0-05DD FP2SH
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES
D0-05DD-D FP3
SUNX MEWNET-FP Series
D0-05DR FP5
D0-05DR-D FP10(S)
D0-06DD1 FP10SH
D0-06DD2 FP-M(C20TC)
D0-06DR FP-M(C32TC)
D0-06DA FP-
D0-06AR FP-X
D0-06AA ACS-13A / , ,C5
D0-06DD1-D JCS-33A- / ,C5
D0-06DD2-D JCR-33A- / ,C5
D0-06DR-D JCD-33A- / ,C5
PC3JG-P-CPU JCM-33A / , C5
PC3JG-CPU JIR-301-M ,C5
PC3J-CPU PCD-33A- /M,C5
PC3JL-CPU PC935- /M,C5
PC2JC-CPU PC955- /M,C5
JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC Series Shinko Technos Controller Series
PC2J16P-CPU PC935- /M,C
PC2J16PR-CPU PC955- /M,C
PC2J-CPU FCD-13A- /M,C
PC2JS-CPU FCD-15A- /M,C
PC2JR-CPU FCR-13A- /M,C
LT350 FCR-15A- /M,C
LT370 FCR-23A- /M,C
LT450 FIR-201-M,C
LT470 DCL-33A- /M, ,C5
DZ1000
CHINO Controllers DZ2000
LT230
LT830
DB1000
DB2000
GT120

1-6 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
(3) Setting [I/F]
1

PROCEDURES FOR
The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used.
Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
(a) GT16
Extension interface 1

3rd stage Extension interface 2 2

CONNECTION TO
Standard interface 3

CONTROLLER
2nd stage (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

IAI ROBOT
Standard interface 4
(Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

1st stage 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
(Example: In the case of the GT1685)
Standard interface 2

OMRON PLC
(USB interface built in the GOT)

(b) GT15
Extension interface 1 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Extension interface 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
3rd stage

2nd stage 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
1st stage

Standard interface 1
(RS-232 interface built in the GOT)
7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

(Example: In the case of the GT1575) Standard interface 2

(USB interface built in the GOT)

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-7

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 (c) GT14

[Front view]] [Rear view]

Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

Standard interface 4
(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)

[Under view]

(d) GT12

[Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 4

(GOT built-in Ethernet interface)
Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface)
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

1-8 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 (e) GT11 1
• GT11 Serial

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
[Front view] [Rear view] 3
Standard interface 3 Standard interface 1

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-422 interface)

EQUIPMENT
Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

• GT11 Bus
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
[Front view] [Rear view]
Standard interface 3 Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in USB interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) 6
Standard interface 1

CONNECTION TO
(GOT built-in Bus interface)

KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1-9

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 (f) GT105

[Rear view]

Standard interface 1 Standard interface 3

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)

Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

(g) GT104

Standard interface 1 Standard interface 3

(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) (GOT built-in USB interface)

Standard interface 2
(GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

(h) GT1020, GT1030

Standard interface 1
(GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2
or (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) (GOT built-in RS-232 interface)

1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
1.1.2 I/F communication setting 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces.

MONITORING
Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.

 Setting
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.

2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 11

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
  Setting item
The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting.

Item Description

Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.

GT16, GT14, GT12: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4
Standard I/F Setting
GT15, GT1030, GT1020: Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2
GT11, GT105 , GT104 : Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3

Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.

The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel
setting)
CH No.
8: Used for barcode reader connection, RFID connection, PC remote operation connection, fingerprint
authentication device connection, printer (serial), or GOT (extended computer)
9: Used for connecting Host (PC)
*: Used for gateway function, MES interface function, and Ethernet download
Multi: Used for Ethernet multiple connection

I/F The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.

Set the driver for the device to be connected.

Driver
None Host (PC) Each communication driver for connected devices

Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox.
The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases.
RS232 Setting • CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] in GT15 and 16.
• CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9] or [8] in GT14.
• For GT12, GT11 and GT10

1 - 12 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 Item Description 1
Extend I/F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT.

PROCEDURES FOR
Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose.

PREPARATORY
The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used.

MONITORING
0: Not used
1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel set-
CH No. ting)
5 to 7: Used for barcode reader connection, RFID connection, and PC remote operation connection
* : For the gateway function, MES interface function, Ethernet download, report function,
hard copy (For printer output), video/RGB input, RGB output, multimedia function,
2
CF card unit, CF card extension unit, sound output, and external I/O or operation panel

CONNECTION TO
Set the driver for the device to be connected.

CONTROLLER
Driver
None Each driver for connected devices

IAI ROBOT
Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver.
Detail Setting
Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

3
POINT

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting]

EQUIPMENT
(1) Channel No.2 to No.4
Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function.
For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following.
Mitsubishi Electric Products 20. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 4
(2) Drivers

CONNECTION TO
The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F].

OMRON PLC
When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
[Setting the communication] section in each chapter
(3) [RS232 Setting] of GT14
Do not use [RS232 Setting] of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS-232/485 signal conversion
adaptor.
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
For details, refer to the following manual.

CONNECTION TO
GT14 User's Manual 7.11 RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adaptor

CONTROLLER
6
1.1.3 Precautions
CONNECTION TO
 Precautions for changing model KEYENCE PLC

(1) When devices that cannot be converted are included.

When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot
be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges) as [??]. In this case, set the device 7
again.
CONNECTION TO

(2) When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network.
KOYO EI PLC

The network will be set to the host station.

(3) When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None]
The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again.
Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device
Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List]. 8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 13

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface
 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
Write the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings onto the GOT.
For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

1.2.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT

1. Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.

2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.

Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

3. The [GOT Write] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box.
Select the [Project data, OS] radio button of the Write Data.

4. Check-mark a desired standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, extended function OS, and
Communication Settings and click the [GOT Write] button.

POINT
Writing communication driver onto GT10
When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver. under F or a standard monitor OS
Ver. under 01.08.00 is written, turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GT10 User's Manual

(Operating of transmission mode)

Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched.

1 - 14 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data and communication settings are

MONITORING
properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3.
For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1. Select [Communication] [Read from GOT…] from the menu.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
2. The [Communication configuration] dialog box appears.
Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

3. The [GOT Read] tab appears on the [Communicate with GOT] dialog box. 6
Select the [Drive information] radio button of the Read Data.

CONNECTION TO
4.
KEYENCE PLC
Click the [Info Reception] button.

5. Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 15

1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT
 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type.
For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.

1.3.1 Communication module

Product name Model Specifications

For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)

GT15-QBUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)

GT15-QBUS2
Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-ABUS
Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-ABUS2
Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model
Bus connection unit
For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)
GT15-75QBUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

For QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series)

GT15-75QBUS2L
Bus connection (2ch) unit slim model

For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-75ABUSL
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

For A/QnACPU, motion controller CPU (A series)

GT15-75ABUS2L
Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))

Serial communication unit GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))

GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)

GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-422 side connector 9-pin

RS-422 conversion unit RS-232 RS-422 conversion unit
GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 side connector 25-pin

MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

Communication module GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit

MELSECNET/10 GT15-75J71LP23-Z Optical loop unit (A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Communication module GT15-75J71BR13-Z Coaxial bus unit (A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit
communication unit

GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

CC-Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit
GT15-75J61BT13-Z
(A8GT-61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set)

Ethernet communication unit GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

1 - 16 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
1.3.2 Option unit 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Product name Model Specifications

MONITORING
Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connecting printer 1 ch

Multimedia unit GT16M-MMR For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie

GT16M-V4
Video input unit
GT15V-75V4
For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch
2
GT16M-R2

CONNECTION TO
RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch
GT15V-75R1

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
GT16M-V4R1
Video/RGB input unit For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch
GT15V-75V4R1

GT16M-ROUT
RGB output unit
GT15V-75ROUT
For analog RGB output signal 1 ch
3
CF card unit GT15-CFCD For CF card installation (B drive) For GOT back face CF card eject

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
CF card extension unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For CF card installation (B drive) For control panel front face CF card eject

EQUIPMENT
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output

For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common
GT15-DIOR
Input/Source Type Output)
External I/O unit
GT15-DIO
For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common
Input/Sink Type Output)
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
1.3.3 Conversion cables

Product name Model Specifications

RS-422 connector conversion

GT16-C02R4-9S RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-422 conversion cable (D-sub 9-pin)
5
cable

OMRON TEMPERATURE
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05

CONNECTION TO
RS-485 terminal block RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10

CONTROLLER
conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20

1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter 6

CONNECTION TO
Product name Model Specifications

Connector conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-422/485 (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-422/485 (Terminal block) KEYENCE PLC

1.3.5 Serial multi-drop connection unit 7

CONNECTION TO

Product name Model Specifications

KOYO EI PLC

Serial multi-drop GOT multi-drop connection module

GT01-RS4-M
connection unit Mitsubishi Electric Products 18. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION

1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter 8

CONNECTION TO

Product name Model Specifications

JTEKT PLC

RS-232/485 signal conversion

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)
adapter

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 17

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 1.3.7 Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation position)

This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit.
For the installation method of each unit, refer to the User's Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are
using. For the method for installing a unit on another unit, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used

 Calculating consumed current

For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader, or a RFID controller, the total current for the extension units,
bar code reader, or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply.
For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units, bar code reader, or RFID controller,
refer to the following tables. Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT.
(1) Current supply capacity of the GOT

Current supply Current supply

GOT type capacity GOT type capacity
(A) (A)

GT1695M-X 2.4 GT1595-X 2.13

GT1685M-S 2.4 GT1585V-S 1.74

GT1675M-S 2.4 GT1585-S 1.74

GT1675M-V 2.4 GT1575V-S 2.2

GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN 2.4 GT1575-S 2.2

GT1665M-S 2.4 GT1575-V, GT1572-VN 2.2

GT1665M-V 2.4 GT1565-V, GT1562-VN 2.2

GT1662-VN 2.4 GT1555-V 1.3

GT1655-V 1.3 GT1555-Q, GT1550-Q 1.3

(2) Current consumed by an extension unit/barcode reader/RFID controller

Consumed Consumed
Module type current Module type current
(A) (A)

GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2,
0.275*1 GT15V-75V4 0.2*1
GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L

GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2,
0.12 GT16M-R2 0*1
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

GT15-RS2-9P 0.29 GT15V-75R1 0.2*1

GT15-RS4-9S 0.33 GT16M-V4R1 0.12*1

GT15-RS4-TE 0.3 GT15V-75V4R1 0.2*1

GT15-RS2T4-9P 0.098 GT16M-ROUT 0.11*1

GT15-J71E71-100 0.224 GT15V-75ROUT 0.11

GT15-J71GP23-SX 1.07 GT16M-MMR 0.27*1

GT15-J71GF13-T2 0.96 GT15-CFCD 0.07

GT15-J71LP23-25 0.56 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 0.15

GT15-J71BR13 0.77 GT15-SOUT 0.08

GT15-J61BT13 0.56 GT15-DIO 0.1

Bar code reader *2 GT15-DIOR 0.1

GT15-PRN 0.09 RFID controller *2

GT16M-V4 0.12*1 GT15-80FPA 0.22

*1 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi-channel function.
For the specifications of the unit, refer to the manual included with the unit.
*2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface, add their consumed current.
(Maximum value is less than 0.3 A)

1 - 18 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 (3) Calculation example
1

PROCEDURES FOR
(a) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway

PREPARATORY
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V

MONITORING
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)

2.2 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=2.104

Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT, they can be connected to the GOT.
2
(b) When connecting the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (2 units), GT15-J71E71-100 (for the gateway

CONNECTION TO
function) and a bar code reader (0.12 A) to the GT1585-S

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Current supply capacity of GOT (A) Total consumed current (A)

1.74 0.77+0.33+0.33+0.224+0.12=1.774

Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT, such configuration is not allowed.
3
 When using a bus connection unit

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used.

EQUIPMENT
(1) Wide bus units (GT15-75QBUS(2)L, GT15-75ABUS(2)L, GT15-QBUS2,
GT15-ABUS2)
Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface.
If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above, the unit cannot be used.
4
Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units

CONNECTION TO
Serial communication unit Bus connection unit

OMRON PLC
Bus connection unit Serial communication unit

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 19

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 POINT
Cautions for using GT15-QBUS2 and GT15-ABUS2
The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15-QBUS2 or GT15-ABUS2 are
recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.

Recognized as the
3rd stage of extend Recognized as the 2nd stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2

Recognized as the
2nd stage of extend Recognized as the 1st stage
interface 1 of extend interface 2

Recognized as the 1st stage

of extend interface 1
GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

Relay connector

(2) Standard size bus connection unit (GT15-QBUS and GT15-ABUS)

A bus connection unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.

Example: Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units

Serial communication unit Bus connection unit

Bus connection unit Serial communication unit

1 - 20 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 1
 When using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network

PROCEDURES FOR
communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, or CC-Link
communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.

Example: When installing a MELSECNET/H communication unit and a serial communication unit
2
Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H
communication unit

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
MELSECNET/H Serial communication unit

IAI ROBOT
communication unit

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
POINT
Precautions for using a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit,
4
CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)

CONNECTION TO
The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET/H communication

OMRON PLC
unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit are recognized by the
GOT differently depending on the extension interface position.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.
5
Recognized as the 3rd stage

OMRON TEMPERATURE
of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
of extension interface 2

6
Recognized as the 1st stage
of extension interface 1

CONNECTION TO
MELSECNET/H communication unit

Relay connector KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 21

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
  When using a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-
Z) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z)
Install a MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link communication
unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) at the 1st stage of the extension interface.
These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
For GT16 and the GT155 , the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z, GT15- 75J71BR13-Z)
and the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z) are not applicable.

Example: When installing a MELSECNET/10 communication unit and a serial communication unit
MELSECNET/10
communication unit
Serial communication unit

 When using an Ethernet communication unit

An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.
For GT16, the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable.
Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.

Example: When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit

Serial communication unit Ethernet

communication unit
Ethernet Serial communication unit
communication unit

 When using a serial communication unit

A serial communication unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension interface.

Serial Serial
communication communication
unit unit

1 - 22 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 1
 When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit

PROCEDURES FOR
The printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit can be installed in any position (1st to 3rd stage) of the

PREPARATORY
extension interface.

MONITORING
Example: When installing a printer unit
Communication Printer unit
unit
Communication
2
Printer unit
unit

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
 When using the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or
multimedia unit
Install the video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, or multimedia unit at the 1st stage 4
of the extension interface.These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage.
When any of these units is used, the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the

CONNECTION TO
extension interface.

OMRON PLC
Communication unit Model

Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS2

MELSECNET/H communication
unit
GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CC-Link IE Controller Network
GT15-J71GP23-SX
communication unit

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Example: When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET/H communication unit

MELSECNET/H
communication unit
Video/RGB
input unit
6

CONNECTION TO
Video/RGB MELSECNET/H

KEYENCE PLC
communication unit
input unit

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 23

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 POINT
Precautions for video input unit, RGB input unit, video/RGB input unit, RGB output unit, and multimedia unit
When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above, the stage number of the communication unit
recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface.
For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side, even if the communication unit is physically
installed in the 2nd stage position, the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage.

Recognized as the 3rd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage
of extension interface 2

Recognized as the 2nd stage of

extension interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage
of extension interface 2

Recognized as the 1st stage of

extension interface 1
Video/RGB input unit

Relay connector

 When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit

Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last.
The following figures show how to install the CF card unit.

CF card unit
Serial communication
unit

Serial communication
unit

CF card unit

1 - 24 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection
 1
1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are
necessary.
For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection.

1.4.1 GOT connector specifications 2

The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side.

CONNECTION TO
Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
 RS-232 interface
Use the following as the RS-232 interface and RS-232 communication unit connector on the GOT. For the GOT side
connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector specifications
3
Hardware

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer
version*1

EQUIPMENT
GT16 ― 17LE-23090-27(D4C )
GT1595-X ― DDK Ltd.
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1585V-S ―

GT1585-STBA
B or later
C
GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
4
GT1585-STBD ― 17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.

CONNECTION TO
GT1575V-S ―

OMRON PLC
B or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-STBA
C
17LE-23090-27(D4CK) DDK Ltd.
GT1575-STBD ―
D or later GM-C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
GT1575-VTBA
E 9-pin D-sub (male) 5
inch screw fixed type

OMRON TEMPERATURE
GT1575-VTBD ―
GT1575-VN ―

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
GT1572-VN ―
17LE-23090-27(D4CK)
GT1565-V ―
GT1562-VN ―
DDK Ltd.
GT12 ―
GT155 ― 6
GT14 ―

CONNECTION TO
GT115 -Q ―

KEYENCE PLC
17LE-23090-27(D3CC)
GT105 -Q ―

GT104 -Q ―

GT1030, GT1020 ― 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT15-RS2-9P
GT01-RS4-M
―
―
9-pin D-sub (male)
inch screw fixed type
17LE-23090-27(D3CC) DDK Ltd. 7
*1 For the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version, refer to the GT15 User's Manual.
CONNECTION TO

*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and
KOYO EI PLC

GT1020.

(2) Connector pin arrangement

GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 , GT01-RS4-M GT1030, GT1020

GOT main part connector See from the back of a 8

see from the front GOT main part
CONNECTION TO

1 5
JTEKT PLC
NC
NC
CS
RS
SG
DR
ER
RD
SD

6 9
9-pin D-sub (male) 9-pin terminal block

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 25

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
  RS-422 interface
Use the following as the RS-422 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.
(1) Connector model
GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer

9-pin D-sub (female)

RS-422 conversion unit M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D2AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type

GT16*1 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.

GT14

GT12
9-pin D-sub (female)
GT115 -Q M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type
GT105 -Q

GT104 -Q

GT1030, GT1020 9-pin terminal block*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.

GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-sub (female)

M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
GT01-RS4-M fixed type

*1 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.

To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
*2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030, GT1020.

(2) Connector pin arrangement

GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104 , GT01-RS4-M

GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1

1 7
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA

RDB
RDA
SDB
9 6 SDA
SG

14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block

1 - 26 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1
 RS-485 interface

PROCEDURES FOR
Use the following as the RS-485 interface and RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT.

PREPARATORY
For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

MONITORING
(1) Connector model
GOT Hardware version*1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer

GT16*2 ― 14-pin (female) HDR-EC14LFDT1-SLE+ Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. 2

GT14 ―

CONNECTION TO
GT12 ―

CONTROLLER
GT1155-QTBD C or later

IAI ROBOT
9-pin D-sub (female)
GT1155-QSBD M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
F or later
fixed type
GT1150-QLBD

GT105 -Q C or later 3
GT104 -Q A or later

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
GT1030 B or later
9-pin terminal block*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

EQUIPMENT
GT1020 E or later

9-pin D-sub (female)

GT15-RS4-9S ― M2.6 millimeter screw 17LE-13090-27(D3AC) DDK Ltd.
fixed type

GT15-RS4-TE ― ― SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc

4
*1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version, refer to the User's Manual.

CONNECTION TO
*2 When connecting to the RS-422/485 interface, use HDR-E14MAG1+ as a cable connector.

OMRON PLC
To use HDR-E14MAG1+, a dedicated pressure welding tool is required.
For details on the connector and pressure welding tool, contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
*3 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and
GT1020.

(2) Connector pin arrangement

5
GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 ,

OMRON TEMPERATURE
GT16 GT1030, GT1020
GT104

CONNECTION TO
GOT main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a

CONTROLLER
see from the front see from the front GOT main part
8 14 5 1

1 7
6
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA

RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
SG

9 6

14-pin (female) 9-pin D-sub (female) 9-pin terminal block

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 27

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector connection method

The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.

CAUTION
 Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly.
Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.

Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable

External conductor
Outer sheath Insulating material
Nut Washer Gasket

Plug shell
Internal conductor
Clamp Contact

1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with

dimensions as shown below.
A
Cable in use A
Cut this portion of the outer sheath
3C-2V 15mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 0.39in

2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial
Clamp
cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.

Nut
Washer
Gasket

Insulating material 3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal
Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below.
Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same
dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed
C
down to the clamp.
B Clamp and external
conductor Cable in use B C

3C-2V 0.24in 0.12in

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 0.28in 0.20in

Solder here 4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.

5. Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug

shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.

Precautions for soldering

Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact.
• Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section.
• Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other.
• Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1 - 28 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side.

MONITORING
When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.

 RS-422/485 communication unit  GT16

Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.
2
Switch No. Switch No.

CONNECTION TO
Terminating Terminating

CONTROLLER
resistor*1 resistor*1

ON

ON
1 2 SW1 1 2 SW1
1

IAI ROBOT
100 OHM ON ON 100 OHM ON ON
2

2
Disable OFF OFF Disable OFF OFF

*1 The default setting is "Disable". *1 The default setting is "Disable".

3
• For RS422/485 communication unit • For GT1685M-S

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
ON

SW1
1
2

ON

OMRON PLC
Terminating resistor setting switch

Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.

 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
For details, refer to the following.
Terminating resistor setting switch

CONNECTION TO
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion (inside the cover)

CONTROLLER
adaptor
 GT14
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch. 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO

Terminating resistor selector switch

JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 29

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 GT12  GT105
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch. resistor setting switch.

Terminating resistor selector switch

Terminating resistor selector switch

 GT11
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.  GT104
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.

Terminating resistor selector switch

Terminating resistor selector switch

1 - 30 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1
 GT1030

PROCEDURES FOR
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating

PREPARATORY
resistor setting switch.

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3
Terminating resistor selector switch

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
 GT1020

EQUIPMENT
Set the terminating resistor using the terminating
resistor setting switch.

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Terminating resistor selector switch

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 31

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.

POINT
Enable the 5V power supply
Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal
conversion adaptor.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual.
GT14 User's Manual 8.2 Utility Function List

2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

 Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

O
N
1
2
3
4
5
6

Switch No.
Setting item Set value
1 2 3 4 5 6

2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

2-wire/4-wire
4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF

110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF

Terminating resistor OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF

330 - - OFF ON ON OFF

POINT
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter
For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual.
GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

1 - 32 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection
 1
1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility.
• Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status
• Communication unit installation status

For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.

2
User's Manual of GOT used.

CONNECTION TO
 When using GT16, GT12

CONTROLLER
(For GT16)

IAI ROBOT
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
2. Touch [Communication setting].

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
2.
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 33

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
 3. 4. 3. The [Communication setting] appears.

4. Verify that the communication driver name to

be used is displayed in the communication
interface box to be used.

5. When the communication driver name is not

displayed normally, carry out the following
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface

 For GT15, GT14 or GT11

1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Communication setting] from the Utility.
1.

2. Touch [Communication setting].

(The screen on the left is not displayed on
GT11.)

2.

1 - 34 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
3. 4. 3. The [Communication Setting] appears. 1

PROCEDURES FOR
4. Verify that the communication driver name to

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

5. When the communication driver name is not

displayed normally, carry out the following 2
procedure again.

CONNECTION TO
1.1Setting the Communication Interface

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 35

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
  For GT10
1. 1. After powering up the GOT, touch [Main Menu]
[Comm. Setting] from the Utility.

2. Touch [Standard I/F] on [Comm. Setting].

2.

3. The [Standard I/F] appears.

3. 4.
4. Verify that the communication driver name to
be used is displayed in the box for the
communication interface to be used.

5. When the communication driver name is not

displayed normally, carry out the following
procedure again.
1.1Setting the Communication Interface

1 - 36 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
 1
POINT

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Utility
(1) How to display Utility (at default)
When using GT16, GT1595, GT14, GT12 or GT1020

2
Utility call key
1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner
Utility display
(When using GT16, GT12) (When using GT15)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3
(When using GT105 ,

CONNECTION TO
When using GT1585, GT157 , (When using GT14, GT11)

AZBIL CONTROL
GT104 )
GT156 , GT155 , GT11, GT105 ,

EQUIPMENT
GT104 or GT1030
Utility call key
Simultaneous 2-point press

4
(When using GT1030,GT1020)

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
(2) Utility call
When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
the utility call key until the buzzer sounds.For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing
[Communication Settings] of project data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual.
6
User's Manual of GOT used.

CONNECTION TO
(4) Precedence in communication settings

KEYENCE PLC
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 37

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment
 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1.6.1 Check on the GOT

 Check for errors occurring on the GOT

Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo
amplifier and communications.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.

(When using GT15)

Error code Communication Channel No.

Error message Time of occurrence

(Displayed only for errors)

HINT

Advanced alarm popup display

With the advanced alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether
an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen).
Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.
For details of the advanced popup display, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

1 - 38 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
 1
 Perform an I/O check

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. 2
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.

CONNECTION TO
Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu.

CONTROLLER
• For GT16, GT12

IAI ROBOT
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check].
• For GT15, GT14, GT11
Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Debug & self check] [Self check] [I/O check].
For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual.
3
User's Manual of GOT used.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen.
Touching [CPU] executes the communication
check with the connected PLC.
4

CONNECTION TO
1.

OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
2. When the communication screen ends
successfully, the screen on the left is displayed. 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 39

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
  Communication monitoring function

The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT.
If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection.
Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor].
For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual:
GT10 User's Manual
(Operation of communication monitoring function screen)
Main Menu

Touch [Comm. Setting] Touch [ ]

Communication settings

Touch [Comm. Monitor]

1 - 40 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1.6.2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet 1
connection)

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2
 Confirming the communication state on Windows®, GT Designer3

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
(1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows®

IAI ROBOT
Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows®.
(a) When normal communication
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18
Reply from 192.168.0.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64
3
(b) When abnormal communication

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
C:\>Ping 192.168.0.18

EQUIPMENT
Request timed out.
(2) When using the [PING Test] of GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Communication configuration] [Ethernet] and [Connection Test] to display
[PING Test]. 4
1.

CONNECTION TO
Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [PING
Test] and click the [PING Test] button.

OMRON PLC
2. The [Test Result] is displayed after the [PING
Test] is finished.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
2.
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
Click!
1.
7
(3) When abnormal communication
At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command again.
CONNECTION TO

• Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit

KOYO EI PLC

• Cable connecting condition

• Confirmation of [Communication Settings]
• IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 41

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
  Confirming the communication state on the GOT (For GT16, GT14)
[PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT.
For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual.
GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utility)
GT14 User's Manual

1 - 42 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1.6.3 Confirming the communication state to each station (station monitoring 1
function)

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2
The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT.
When an abnormal state is detected, the function assigns the information of the faulty station to the GOT special

CONNECTION TO
register (GS).

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
(1) No. of faulty stations
(a) For the Ethernet connection (except for the Ethernet multiple connection)
The total No. of the faulty CPUs is stored.

Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
3
GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
(b) For the Ethernet multiple connection

EQUIPMENT
The total No. of the faulty devices is stored.
Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations
Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations 4
Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

CONNECTION TO
Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

OMRON PLC
POINT
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display
When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following. 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
For the data operation, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
Set the mask processing to the upper eight bits
CONNECTION TO

(b8 to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 43

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
 (2) Faulty station information
The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal)
The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.
(a) For the Ethernet connection (except for the Ethernet multiple connection)

GS231 bit 0
GS231 bit 1
GS231 bit 2
GS231 bit 3

Ethernet setting No.

Device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

(b) For the Ethernet multiple connection or the temperature controller connection
The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection/non
connection with Ethernet.
With Ethernet connection: 1 to 128
With other than Ethernet connection: 0 to 127
Example) With Ethernet connection, when PC No. 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty, GS327.b3 is set.
The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection.
Device Station No.

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual.

GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Appendix.2.3 GOT special register (GS)

1 - 44 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
 (3) Network No., station No. notification
1

PROCEDURES FOR
The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup.
If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Device
Description
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4

GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)

GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64) 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 - 45

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
1 - 46 1. PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING
1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring
 CONNECTIONS TO
NON-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
PRODUCTS

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL (former YAMATAKE) CONTROL
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
............................................... 5-1
6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 1
12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC. . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER . . . 14 - 1
15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
 2
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
2.

CONTROLLER 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4
2.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

CONNECTION TO
2.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3

OMRON PLC
2.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
2.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
5
2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 21

OMRON TEMPERATURE
2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 24

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
2.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 35

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2-1
2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT
CONTROLLER

2.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type

XSEL-J

XSEL-K

XSEL-KE

XSEL-KT

XSEL-KET

XSEL-P
X-SEL
XSEL-Q

XSEL-JX RS-232
2.2.1
XSEL-KX

XSEL-KTX

XSEL-PX

XSEL-QX

SSEL SSEL

ASEL ASEL

PSEL PSEL

PCON-C

PCON-CG

PCON-CF

PCON-CY

PCON PCON-SE

PCON-PL

PCON-PO

PCON-CA

PCON-CFA RS-232
ACON-C RS-422 2.2.2

ACON-CG

ACON-CY
ACON
ACON-SE

ACON-PL

ACON-PO

SCON-C
SCON
SCON-CA

ERC2 ERC2

2-2 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.1 Connectable Model List
 1
2.2 System Configuration

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL

Communication driver

X-SEL
SSEL
Connector
conversion GOT 2
cable IAI X-SEL

CONNECTION TO
Connection Cable

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable
Max.
GOT
Number of connectable 3
Model RS-232C Communication Cable model distance equipment
Option device Model
name adapter Type Connection diagram number

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
CB-ST-E1MW050*1 -
or (Built into GOT)
10m
RS232 connection
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
X-SEL 4
(Teaching - RS-232 CB-ST-E1MW050*1
connector) +

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection
-

OMRON PLC
diagram 3) 10m
(Built into GOT)
or
RS232 connection
diagram 4)
5
-

OMRON TEMPERATURE
X-SEL RS232 connection (Built into GOT)
10m

CONNECTION TO
(General diagram 2)

CONTROLLER
RS232C - RS-232 1 GOT for 1 Controller
port GT15-RS2-9P
connector)
RS232 connection -
10m
diagram 5) (Built into GOT)
6
-

CONNECTION TO
*1 (Built into GOT)
10m

KEYENCE PLC
CB-ST-E1MW050

GT15-RS2-9P
SSEL
ASEL CB-SEL-SJ002*1 RS-232 CB-ST-E1MW050*1
PSEL +
RS232 connection
7
-
diagram 3) 10m
(Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO

or
KOYO EI PLC

RS232 connection
diagram 4)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2-3

2.2 System Configuration
 2.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2

 When connecting to one controller

(1) When using the RS232 connection
(a) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)
Communication driver
PCON RS232C
ACON Communication
conversion GOT
SCON cable IAI ROBO CYLINDER
unit
ERC2 Connection cable

Controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication RS232C Communication Connection Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
cable conversion unit Type diagram number distance

-
PCON (Built into GOT)
- -
ACON
*1 *1 1 GOT for 1
SCON CB-RCA-SIO050 RCB-CV-MW
RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
(5m) (0.3m) Controller
ERC2 (NP/PN
specifications)*3 RS232
-
connection 15m
(Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

CB-ERC2-SIO020*1 -
+ (Built into GOT)
- -
CB-ERC2-PWBIO
ERC2 (SIO RCB-CV-MW*1 1 GOT for 1
*1 RS-232
specifications)*2 (0.3m) GT15-RS2-9P Controller
or
CB-ERC2-PWBIO RS232
-
-RB*1 connection 15m
(Built into GOT)
diagram 6)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
*2 Use ERC2- - - - - -SE- - .
*3 Use the following models.
ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

2-4 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.2 System Configuration
 (b) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
ERC2
IAI ROBO CYLINDER

2
Connection cable 1)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Terminal SIO
GOT
block converter
Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Connection Connection
Controller SIO converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT

EQUIPMENT
cable 1)*1 cable 2)

Cable Number of
Terminal Max.
Connection model connectable
block distance
Cable Model Communication Max. Option equipment
Model name diagram Connection Model
model
number
name Type
diagram
number
distance device
4
RCB-CV-

CONNECTION TO
MW*1

OMRON PLC
(0.3m) -
RS422/485 + (Built
connection CB-RCA- into
Terminal
diagram 8) GOT)
CB-ERC- block SIO050*1
or
ERC2
PWBIO (User
preparing) RCB-
(5m)
or 1 GOT for
5
(NP/PN

OMRON TEMPERATURE
or RS422/485 100m TU- RS-232 15m 16
specifications)
CB-ERC- connection SIO- Controller
*2 RS232 GT15-

CONNECTION TO
PWBIO diagram 9)
connection RS2-9P

CONTROLLER
-RB diagram 7)

-
RC -TU- RS422/485 RS232 (Built
PIO*1 connection
diagram 10)
connection
diagram 8)
into
GOT)
6
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.

CONNECTION TO
*2 Use the following models.

KEYENCE PLC
ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2-5

2.2 System Configuration
 (2) When using the RS422/485 cable
(a) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)
Communication driver
PCON
ACON
SCON IAI ROBO CYLINDER
ERC2

Connection cable 1)

Junction
GOT
box 4D
Terminal cable Connection cable 2)

Connection Junction box Connection

Controller Terminal cable GOT Number of
cable 1)*1 4D*2 cable 2) Max.
connectable
Model Connection Connection distance
Cable model Model name Option device Model*4 equipment
name diagram number diagram number
*2
RS422/485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
connection FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

GT15-RS4-9S
PCON RS422/485
ACON connection
SCON CB-RCB-
RS422/485 diagram 4) 16 Controllers
ERC2 CTL002 5-1473574-4 - 100m
connection for 1 GOT
(NP/PN (0.2m) (Built into GOT)
specifications) diagram 1)
*5

RS422/485
connection GT15-RS4-TE
diagram 5)
RS422/485 -
connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
RS422/485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
connection
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)

GT15-RS4-9S
CB-ERC2-
CTL001
+ RS422/485
ERC2 CB-ERC2- connection
(SIO RS422/485 PWBIO diagram 4) - 16 Controllers
5-1473574-4 (Built into GOT) 100m
specifications) connection for 1 GOT
*4 diagram 1) or
CB-ERC2-
PWBIO
-RB
RS422/485 GT15-RS4-TE
connection
diagram 5)

RS422/485 -
connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
*2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.
*3 For GT11 and GT10, use the following hardware versions.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.

2-6 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.2 System Configuration
 GT11 User's Manual 1
GT10 User's Manual

PROCEDURES FOR
Model name Hardware version

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD
F or later
GT1150-QLBD
GT1055-QSBD
C or later
GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
2
A or later
GT1040-QBBD

CONNECTION TO
GT1030-L D
B or later

CONTROLLER
GT1030-H D

IAI ROBOT
GT1020-L D E or later

*4 Use ERC2- - - - - -SE- - .

*5 Use the following models.
ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- - 3
(b) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Communication driver

EQUIPMENT
ERC2
IAI ROBO CYLINDER

CONNECTION TO
Connection cable 1)

OMRON PLC
Terminal
GOT
block

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable 2)

Connection Number of
Controller Connection cable 2) GOT Max.
cable 1)*1 Terminal block connectable
distance
Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Option device Model*3 equipment

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
6
RS422/485 connection FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2

CONNECTION TO
diagram 11) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2

KEYENCE PLC
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

GT15-RS4-9S
CB-ERC-
PWBIO
RS422/485 connection 7
ERC2 (NP/PN Terminal block diagram 12) 16 Controllers
or - 100m
specifications)*5 (User preparing) for 1 GOT
CONNECTION TO

CB-ERC- (Built into GOT)

PWBIO
KOYO EI PLC

-RB

RS422/485 connection GT15-RS4-TE

diagram 13)
8
-
RS422/485 connection (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO

diagram 14)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
JTEKT PLC

*2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.
*3 For GT11 and GT10, use the following hardware versions.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2-7

2.2 System Configuration
 GT11 User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

Model name Hardware version

GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD
F or later
GT1150-QLBD
GT1055-QSBD
C or later
GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
A or later
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D
B or later
GT1030-H D
GT1020-L D E or later

*4 Use the following models.

ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

 When connecting to multiple controllers

(a) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)
Communication driver
PCON PCON
ACON ACON
SCON SCON IAI ROBO CYLINDER
ERC2 ERC2

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)

Junction Junction
GOT
box 4D box 4D
Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)

Terminal Connection Junction box Connection Connection

Controller GOT
cable cable 1)*1 4D*2 cable 2) cable 3) Number of
Max.
Connection Connection Connection connectable
Cable disatance
equipment
Model name diagram
model
Model name diagram diagram Option device Model*3
number number number

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS422/485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
connection
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2

GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

GT15-RS4-9S

PCON RS422/485
ACON connection
CB-RCB- diagram 4) 16
SCON RS422/485 RS422/485 -
CTL002 5-1473574-4 100m Controllers
ERC2 (NP/PN connection connection (Built into GOT)
(0.2m) for 1 GOT
specifications) diagram 1) diagram 2)
*5

RS422/485 GT15-RS4-TE
connection
diagram 5)

RS422/485 -
connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

2-8 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.2 System Configuration
 Controller
Terminal
cable
Connection
cable 1)*1
Junction box
4D*2
Connection
cable 2)
Connection
cable 3)
GOT
Number of
1
Max.
connectable

PROCEDURES FOR
Connection Connection Connection disatance
Cable equipment
Model name diagram
model
Model name diagram diagram Option device Model*3

PREPARATORY
number number number

MONITORING
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS422/485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
connection
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2

GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)
2
GT15-RS4-9S
CB-ERC2-

CONNECTION TO
CTL001

CONTROLLER
+ RS422/485
ERC2 CB-ERC2- connection

IAI ROBOT
PWBIO diagram 4) 16
(SIO RS422/485 RS422/485 -
5-1473574-4 100m Controllers
specifications) connection connection (Built into GOT)
for 1 GOT
*4 diagram 1) or diagram 2)
CB-ERC2-
PWBIO
-RB 3
RS422/485 GT15-RS4-TE
connection

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
diagram 5)

EQUIPMENT
RS422/485 -
connection (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
*2
*3
Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.
For GT11 and GT10, use the following hardware versions.
4
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.

CONNECTION TO
GT11 User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

OMRON PLC
Model name Hardware version
GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD
GT1150-QLBD
F or later
5
GT1055-QSBD

OMRON TEMPERATURE
C or later
GT1050-QBBD

CONNECTION TO
GT1045-QSBD
A or later

CONTROLLER
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D
B or later
GT1030-H D
GT1020-L D E or later

*4 Use ERC2- - - - - -SE- - .

6
*5 Use the following models.

CONNECTION TO
ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2-9

2.2 System Configuration
 (b) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only
Communication driver

ERC2 ERC2 ERC2

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)

Terminal Terminal Terminal

GOT
block block block

Connection cable 2)

Connection
Controller Connection cable 2) GOT Number of
cable 1)*1 Max.
Terminal block connectable
disatance
equipment
Model name Cable model Connection diagram number Option device Model*3

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS422/485 connection
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
diagram 11)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2

GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

GT15-RS4-9S
CB-ERC-
PWBIO RS422/485 connection
ERC2 (NP/PN 16
or Terminal block diagram 12)
specifications)* 100m Controllers
CB-ERC- (User preparing) -
4 for 1 GOT
PWBIO - (Built into GOT)
RB

RS422/485 connection
GT15-RS4-TE
diagram 13)

RS422/485 connection -
diagram 14) (Built into GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
*2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.
*3 For GT11 and GT10, use the following hardware versions.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.
GT11 User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

Model name Hardware version

GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD
F or later
GT1150-QLBD
GT1055-QSBD
C or later
GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
A or later
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D
B or later
GT1030-H D
GT1020-L D E or later

*4 Use the following models.

ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

2 - 10 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple controllers (via SIO converter) 1
(a) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY
PCON PCON

MONITORING
ACON ACON
SCON SCON IAI ROBO CYLINDER
ERC2 ERC2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)

IAI ROBOT
Junction
box 4D
Junction
box 4D
SIO
converter
GOT 3
Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
Terminal Connection Junction Connection Connection
Controller
cable cable 1)*1 box 4D*2 cable 2) cable 3)
SIO converter*1 Connection cable 4) GOT
4
Number of
Max. Cable model
Connection Connection Connection disatance connectable

CONNECTION TO
Model Cable Model Model Communication Connection Max. Option equipment
diagram diagram diagram Model
name model name name Type diagram disatance device

OMRON PLC
number number number
number

RCB-CV-
MW*1 (0.3m)
-
+
CB-RCA- (Built 5
into
SIO050*1

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS422/485 GOT)
(5m)
connection

CONNECTION TO
or
CB-RCB- 5- diagram 2) 16

CONTROLLER
RS422/485 CTL002 1473574- RS422/485 or 15m Controllers
connection (0.2m) 4 connection RS232 for 1 GOT
GT15-
diagram 1) diagram 2) connection
RS422/485 RS2-9P
diagram 7)
connection
diagram 7) -
6
RS232 (Built

CONNECTION TO
connection into

KEYENCE PLC
PCON RCB- diagram 8) GOT)
ACON 100m TU- RS-232
SCON SIO- RCB-CV-
MW*1 (0.3m)
+ -
(Built
CB-RCA-
SIO050*1
into 7
GOT)
(5m)
CONNECTION TO

or
CB-RCB- 2
KOYO EI PLC

- CTL002*3 - - - 15m Controllers

(0.2m) RS232 GT15- for 1 GOT
connection RS2-9P
diagram 7)

RS232
-
(Built
8
connection into
CONNECTION TO

diagram 8) GOT)
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 11

2.2 System Configuration
 Terminal Connection Junction Connection Connection
Controller SIO converter*1 Connection cable 4) GOT
cable cable 1)*1 box 4D*2 cable 2) cable 3)
Number of
Max. Cable model connectable
Connection Connection Connection disatance
Model Cable Model Model Communication Connection Max. Option equipment
diagram diagram diagram Model
name model name name Type diagram disatance device
number number number
number

RCB-CV-
MW*1 (0.3m)
-
+
CB-ERC2- (Built
RS42 CB-RCA-
CTL001 into
2/485 SIO050*1
+ GOT)
connection (5m)
CB-ERC2-
5- diagram 2) or 16
RS422/485 PWBIO 1473574- RS422/485 or 15m Controllers
connection connection RS232
4 RS42 for 1 GOT
diagram 1) or diagram 2) connection GT15-
CB-ERC2- 2/485 diagram 7) RS2-9P
PWBIO connection
-RB diagram 7) -
RS232
(Built
connection into
ERC2 (SIO RCB- diagram 8) GOT)
specifications) 100m TU- RS-232
*4 SIO- RCB-CV-
MW*1 (0.3m)
-
+
CB-ERC2- (Built
CB-RCA-
CTL001 into
+ SIO050*1 GOT)
CB-ERC2- (5m)
or 2
PWBIO
- - - - 15m Controllers
RS232
for 1 GOT
or connection GT15-
CB-ERC2- diagram 7) RS2-9P
PWBIO
-RB -
RS232
(Built
connection into
diagram 8) GOT)

CB-ERC- RCB-CV-
PWBIO
MW*1 (0.3m)
-
+
or (Built
CB-RCA-
CB-ERC- RS42 into
SIO050*1 GOT)
PWBIO 2/485 (5m)
-RB connection or
ERC2 (NP/PN + 5- diagram 2) RCB- 16
RS422/485 Terminal RS232
specifications) 1473574- RS422/485 or 100m TU- RS-232 15m Controllers
connection block (User connection connection GT15-
*5 4 RS42 SIO- for 1 GOT
diagram 1) preparing) diagram 2) diagram 7) RS2-9P
2/485
+
connection
RS42 diagram 7) -
2/485 RS232
(Built
connection connection into
diagram diagram 8) GOT)
15)
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.
*2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.
*3 When not using junction box 4D, connection cable 2) or connection cable 3), connect the controller to the SIO converter directly
by the cable CR-RCB-CTL002.
*4 Use ERC2- - - - - -SE- - .
*5 Use the following models.
ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

2 - 12 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.2 System Configuration
 (b) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only
Communication driver
1

PROCEDURES FOR
ERC2 ERC2 ERC2

PREPARATORY
IAI ROBO CYLINDER

MONITORING
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) 2

CONNECTION TO
Terminal Terminal Terminal SIO

CONTROLLER
GOT
block block block converter

IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 3)

3
Connection cable 2)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Connection Connection
Controller SIO converter*1 Connection cable 4) GOT

EQUIPMENT
cable 1)*1 cable 2)
Number of
Terminal Max. Cable model
Connection Connection connectable
Cable block disatance Model Connection Max. Option equipment
Model name diagram diagram Model*3
model name diagram disatance device
number number
number 4

CONNECTION TO
RS422/485 RCB-CV-MW*1
connection (0.3m)

OMRON PLC
Terminal
diagram 15) + -
block
or CB-RCA- (Built into
(User
CB-ERC- SIO050*1 (5m) GOT)
preparing)
PWBIO RS422/485 or
ERC2 (NP/PN connection RCB- 16 5
specifications) or diagram 9) 100m TU- RS-232 15m Controllers

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS232
*4 CB-ERC- SIO- for 1 GOT
connection
PWBIO GT15-

CONNECTION TO
diagram 7)
-RB RS2-9P*2

CONTROLLER
RC -TU- RS422/485
PIO*1 connection -
diagram 10) RS232 (Built into
connection
diagram 8)
GOT) 6
*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation.

CONNECTION TO
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

KEYENCE PLC
*3 For GT11 and GT10, use the following hardware versions.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.
GT11 User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

Model name Hardware version 7

GT1155-QTBD C or later
GT1155-QSBD
CONNECTION TO

F or later
GT1150-QLBD
KOYO EI PLC

GT1055-QSBD
C or later
GT1050-QBBD
GT1045-QSBD
A or later
GT1040-QBBD
GT1030-L D
B or later
8
GT1030-H D
CONNECTION TO

GT1020-L D E or later

*4 Use the following models.

JTEKT PLC

ERC2- - - - - -NP- - , ERC2- - - - - -PN- -

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 13

2.2 System Configuration
 2.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
RS232 connection diagram 3)
GOT and the PLC.
GOT side IAI cable side

2.3.1 RS-232 cable SD(TXD) 1 3

RD(RXD) 2 2
 Connection diagram
ER(DTR) 3 1

RS232 connection diagram 1) DR(DSR) 4 4

GOT side IAI robot controller side SG 5 5

CD/NC*1 1 1
RS(RTS) 6 6

RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD CS(CTS) 7 7

SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD NC 8 8

ER(DTR) 4 4 RTS NC 9 9

SG 5 7 SG
RS232 connection diagram 4)
DR(DSR) 6 5 CTS
GOT side IAI robot controller side
RS(RTS) 7 6 DSR

CS(CTS) 8 12 EMGOUT SD(TXD) 1 3 RXD

NC 9 13 EMGIN RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD
18 VCC ER(DTR) 3 4 RTS
19 ENBTBX DR(DSR) 4 5 CTS
20 DTR SG 5 7 SG

RS(RTS) 6 6 DSR
*1 GT16/GT15: CD, GT14/GT11/GT104 /GT105 : NC
CS(CTS) 7 12 EMGOUT
RS232 connection diagram 2)
NC 8 13 EMGIN
GOT side IAI robot controller side
NC 9 18 VCC

CD/NC*1 1 1 NC 19 ENBTBX

RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD) 20 DTR

SD(TXD) 3 3 RD(RXD)

ER(DTR) 4 4 DR(DSR) RS232 connection diagram 5)

SG 5 5 SG GOT side IAI robot controller side

DR(DSR) 6 6 ER(DTR)
SD(TXD) 1 3 RD(RXD)
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS(RTS)
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD(TXD)
CS(CTS) 8 8 CS(CTS)
ER(DTR) 3 1 NC
NC 9 9 NC
DR(DSR) 4 4 DR(DSR)

*1 GT16/GT15: CD, GT14/GT11/GT104 /GT105 : NC SG 5 5 SG

RS(RTS) 6 6 ER(DTR)

CS(CTS) 7 7 RS(RTS)

NC 8 8 CS(CTS)

NC 9 9 NC

2 - 14 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.3 Connection Diagram
RS232 connection diagram 6) 2.3.2 RS-422/485 cable 1
RS232C conversion unit

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side side (RCB-CV-MW)
 Connection diagram

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
SD 1
RS422/485 connection diagram 1)
RD 2
Junction box 4D side
ER 3 E-CON Connector (Plug)
Terminating resistor
Model name : -1473562-4
220Ω 1/4W

2
DR 4
1
SG 5
2

CONNECTION TO
RS 6
3

CONTROLLER
CS 7

IAI ROBOT
4
NC 8
RS422/485 connection diagram 2)
NC 9
Junction box 4D side Junction box 4D side
RS232 connection diagram 7)
SIO converter side
E-CON Connector (Plug)
Model name : -1473562-4
E-CON Connector (Plug)
Model name : -1473562-4 3
1 1

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
CD 1 1 -
2 2

EQUIPMENT
RD (RXD) 2 2 RD
3 3
SD (TXD) 3 3 SD
4 4
ER (DTR) 4 5 SG
RS422/485 connection diagram 3) (For GT16)
SG 5 4 ER
Terminating resistor
4
DR (DSR) 6 6 DR 220Ω 1/2W
Junction box 4D side

CONNECTION TO
RS (RTS) 7 7 RS E-CON Connector (Plug)
GOT side Model name : -1473562-4

OMRON PLC
CS (CTS) 8 8 CS
SDA1 (TXD1+) 6 1
- 9 9 -
SDB1 (TXD1-) 8 2
RS232 connection diagram 8)
GOT side SIO converter side
SG 2 3
5
RDA1 (RXD1+) 10 4

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SD 1 -
RDB1 (RXD1-) 12

CONNECTION TO
RD 2 RD

CONTROLLER
SDA2 (TXD2+) 5
ER 3 SD
SDB2 (TXD2-) 7
DR 5 SG
RSA (RTS+) 14
SG 4 ER

RS 6 DR
RSB (RTS-) 16
6
CSA (CTS+) 18

CONNECTION TO
CS 7 RS
CSB (CTS-) 20

KEYENCE PLC
NC 8 CS
NC 1
NC 9 -
NC 3

NC 4
 Precautions when preparing a cable
RDA2 (RXD2+) 9 7
(1) Cable length
RDB2 (RXD2-) 11
The length of RS-232 cables except for the RS-232
CONNECTION TO

cable 3) must be 10m or less. NC 13

KOYO EI PLC

The length of the RS-232 cable 3) must be 30cm or NC 15

less.
NC 17
(2) GOT side connector
NC 19
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
8
(3) IAI Robot Controller side connector
CONNECTION TO

Use the connector compatible with the IAI Robot

Controller.
JTEKT PLC

For details, refer to the IAI Robot Controller user's

manual.

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 15

2.3 Connection Diagram
RS422/485 connection diagram 4) RS422/485 connection diagram 5)
Terminating resistor Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W Junction box 4D side 220Ω 1/2W Junction box 4D side
E-CON Connector (Plug) E-CON Connector (Plug)
GOT side Model name : -1473562-4 GOT side Model name : -1473562-4

SDA 1 1 SDA1 1 1

SDB 6 2 SDB1 2 2

RDA 2 3 SG 9 3

RDB 7 4 RDA1 3 4

SG 5 RDB1 4

RSA 3 SDA2 5
*1
CSA 4 SDB2 6

RSB 8 RDA2 7
*1
CSB 9 RDB2 8

FG 10
*1 Return line is not required for GT14/GT11.

RS422/485 connection diagram 6)

Terminating resistor RS422/485 connection diagram 7)
220Ω 1/2W Junction box 4D side
Junction box 4D side
E-CON Connector (Plug) SIO converter side (TB1) E-CON Connector (Plug)
GOT side Model name : -1473562-4 link connection terminal block Model name : -1473562-4

SGA 1
SDA 1

SGB 2
SDB 2

3
RDA 3
0V
4
RDB 4
FG
SG
SIO converter side (TB2)
RSA
power, Emergency stop
RSB terminal block

CSA

CSB

RS422/485 connection diagram 8)

Junction box 4D side
E-CON Connector (Plug) Terminal block (User preparing)
Model name : -1473562-4 Signal name

1 SGA(Orange : Red1)

2 SGB(Orange : Black1)
Terminating resistor
3 GND 220Ω 1/2W

RS422/485 connection diagram 9)

Terminal block Terminal block
(User preparing) (User preparing)
SIO converter side (TB1)
Link connection Terminal block Signal name Signal name

SGA SGA(Orange : Red1) SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB SGB(Orange : Black1) SGB(Orange : Black1)

Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W
GND GND
0V

SIO converter side (TB2)

power supply or
Emergency stop Terminal block

2 - 16 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.3 Connection Diagram
RS422/485 connection diagram 10) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Terminal block Terminal block*1
SIO converter side (TB1) (RC -Tu-PIO : IAI robot controller) (RC -Tu-PIO : IAI robot controller)

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Link connection Terminal block Signal name Signal name

SGA A A

SGB B B

SIO converter side (TB2) 2

power supply or
Emergency stop Terminal block

CONNECTION TO
*1 Turn the terminator switch of a terminal block which will be a terminal to "RTON".

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
RS422/485 connection diagram 11)
Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W Terminal block Terminal block
(User preparing) (User preparing)
GOT side Signal name Signal name 3
SDA1 (TXD1+) 6 SGA(Orange : Red1) SGA(Orange : Red1)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
SDB1 (TXD1-) 8 SGB(Orange : Black1) SGB(Orange : Black1)

EQUIPMENT
Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W
SG 2

RDA1 (RXD1+) 10

4
RDB1 (RXD1-) 12

SDA2 (TXD2+) 5

CONNECTION TO
SDB2 (TXD2-) 7

OMRON PLC
RSA (RTS+) 14

RSB (RTS-) 16

CSA (CTS+) 18

CSB (CTS-) 20
5
NC 1

OMRON TEMPERATURE
NC 3

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
NC 4

RDA2 (RXD2+) 9

RDB2 (RXD2-) 11

NC 13
6
NC 15

CONNECTION TO
NC 17

KEYENCE PLC
NC 19

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 17

2.3 Connection Diagram
RS422/485 connection diagram 12)
Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W Terminal block Terminal block
(User preparing) (User preparing)
GOT side Signal name Signal name

SDA 1 SGA(Orange : Red1) SGA(Orange : Red1)

SDB 6 SGB(Orange : Black1) SGB(Orange : Black1)

Terminating resistor
RDA 2 220Ω 1/2W

RDB 7

SG 5

RSA 3
*1
CSA 4

RSB 8
*1
CSB 9

*1 Return line is not required for GT14/GT11.

RS422/485 connection diagram 13)

Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W Terminal block Terminal block
(User preparing) (User preparing)
GOT side Signal name Signal name

SDA1 1 SGA(Orange : Red1) SGA(Orange : Red1)

SDB1 2 SGB(Orange : Black1) SGB(Orange : Black1)

Terminating resistor
SG 9 220Ω 1/2W

RDA1 3

RDB1 4

SDA2 5

SDB2 6

RDA2 7

RDB2 8

FG 10

RS422/485 connection diagram 14)

Terminating resistor
220Ω 1/2W
Terminal block Terminal block
(User preparing) (User preparing)
GOT side Signal name Signal name

SDA SGA(Orange : Red1) SGA(Orange : Red1)

SDB SGB(Orange : Black1) SGB(Orange : Black1)

Terminating resistor
RDA 220Ω 1/2W

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

2 - 18 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.3 Connection Diagram
RS422/485 connection diagram 15) 1
Junction box 4D side Terminal block

PROCEDURES FOR
E-CON Connector (Plug) (User preparing)

PREPARATORY
Model name : -1473562-4

MONITORING
Signal name

1 SGA(Orange : Red1)

2 SGB(Orange : Black1)

2
3 GND

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
 Precautions when preparing a cable

IAI ROBOT
(1) Cable length
The maximum length of the RS-422/485 cable must be
100m or less.
3
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

EQUIPMENT
(3) E-CON connector (plug) (Type name: -1473562-4)
Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details
of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.

 Connecting terminating resistors

4

CONNECTION TO
(1) GOT side
When connecting a IAI controller to the GOT, a

OMRON PLC
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
(b) For GT14, GT11
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

CONNECTION TO
to the following.

CONTROLLER
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 19

2.3 Connection Diagram
 2.4 GOT Side Settings
2.4.1 Setting communication
2.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.
2.

3.
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
4. transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the 38400bps,
connected equipment. 57600bps,
(Default: 38400bps) 115200bps
Set this item when change the
data length used for
Data Bit communication with the 7bit, 8bit
Click! connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit, 2bit
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 1bits)
menu. Specify whether or not to
perform a parity check, and None
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Parity how it is performed during Even
channel to be used from the list menu. communication. Odd
(Default: None)
3. Set the following items. Set the number of retries to be
• Manufacturer: IAI performed when a
Retry 0 to 5times
• Controller Type: Set either of followings. communication error occurs.
<Connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL> (Default: 3timse)
IAI X-SEL Controller Set the time period for a
<Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2> Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
IAI ROBO CYLINDER (Default: 3sec)
• I/F: Interface to be used <Connecting to
• Driver: Set either of followings. Make the settings according to X-SEL, SSEL>
the station number (station 0 to 255
<Connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL> Host Address
code) of the controller to be <Connecting to
IAI X-SEL monitored. (Default: 0) PCON, ACON,
<Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2> SCON> 0 to 15
IAI ROBO CYLINDER Set this item to adjust the

4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Delay Time

transmission timing of the
communication request from
0 to 300 (ms)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. the GOT. (Default: 0ms)
Make the settings according to the usage
environment.
2.4.2 Communication detail settings POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
POINT data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
The settings of connecting equipment can be manual.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. User's Manual of GOT used.
For details, refer to the following. (2) Precedence in communication settings
1.1.2 I/F communication setting When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

2 - 20 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.4 GOT Side Settings
 1
2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
POINT  Mode switch
IAI Robot Controller (1) X-SEL K type
For details of IAI Robot Controller, refer to the following (a) When setting the mode switch to "MANU" 2
manuals. Connect the GOT to the following teaching
connector.

CONNECTION TO
IAI Robot Controller user's Manual
(b) When setting the mode switch to "AUTO"

CONTROLLER
Connect the GOT to the following general RS232C

IAI ROBOT
port connector.

2.5.1 Connecting to X-SEL

Mode switch 3
 Parameter setting
PG1 PG3 CODE
CONTROLLER
RB

CONNECTION TO
Enter the following parameters using peripheral

AZBIL CONTROL
MODE

Teaching
BK1 BK3

software. When setting parameters, set the mode TP

EQUIPMENT
I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4
connector*1
switch of the controller to "MANU". PG4

POWER
General
RS232C
Parameter Parameter Name Set Value*4 FUSE
BK4 port
• When used in
"MANU" HOST
connector*1
4
Set either of the
following.

CONNECTION TO
Usage of SIO channel 1*1 0: SEL opened
I/O parameter 90

OMRON PLC
opened to user program *1 The teaching connector and general RS232C port connector
2: IAI protocol B cannot be used at the same time.
• When used in
"AUTO"
2: IAI protocol B
(2) Other than X-SEL K type
Station code of SIO channel 0 to 255
Set the mode switch to "MANU" or "AUTO" and connect 5
I/O parameter 91 *1 153*
the GOT to the following teaching connector.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1 opened to user
0: 9600bps*

CONNECTION TO
1: 19200bps
I/O parameter 92 Baud rate type of SIO

CONTROLLER
2: 38400bps
*2 channel 1*1 opened to user
3: 57600bps
5: 115200bps
Data length of SIO channel
I/O parameter 93 7bit, 8bit*
1*1 opened to user Mode switch 6
Stop bit length of SIO
I/O parameter 94 1bit*, 2bit
channel 1*1 opened to user Teaching

CONNECTION TO
0: None* connector

KEYENCE PLC
Parity type of SIO channel 1
I/O parameter 95 *1
1: Odd
opened to user
2: Even
IAI-protocol minimum
I/O parameter 97 response delay for SIO
0 to 999(ms)
*3 channel 1*1
opened to user
7
Other parameter bit0 to 3 = 1
Other setting bit pattern 1
CONNECTION TO

46 (fixed)
KOYO EI PLC

*1 For X-SEL(P/Q/PX/QX), the parameter becomes the SIO

channel 0 opened to user.
*2 Indicates only the transmission that can be specified on the
GOT side.
Specify the transmission speed to match the baud rate of the
GOT.
*3 Set it only when a wait time is required before the response
and transmission to the GOT request. Normally, the
8
communication is available using default values.
*4 When using the "MANU" mode, the set value is fixed to the
CONNECTION TO

value with *. Adjust the settings of the GOT side to the *

settings.
However, the communication setting of the PC software
JTEKT PLC

becomes the setting of X-SEL after the PC software for X-

SEL is connected. In this case, adjust the communication
setting of the GOT to the setting of the PC software.

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 21

2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting
 2.5.2 Connecting to SSEL, ASEL, 2.5.3 Connecting to PCON, ACON,
PSEL SCON

 Parameter setting  Axis number setting, Mode select

Enter the following parameters using peripheral For controllers without the following switches, set from
software. When setting parameters, set the mode the setting tool (PC software).
switch of the controller to "MANU".

Parameter Parameter Name Set Value

Usage of SIO channel 0 2: IAI protocol B
I/O parameter 90
opened to user (fixed) Axis number setting
Station code of SIO channel 0 rotary switch
I/O parameter 91 0 to 255
opened to user
0: 9600bps
1: 19200bps
I/O parameter 92 Baud rate type of SIO MANU AUTO
2: 38400bps
*1 channel 0 opened to user
3: 57600bps Mode
5: 115200bps selector switch
Data length of SIO channel 0
I/O parameter 93 7bit, 8bit
opened to user
Stop bit length of SIO
I/O parameter 94 1bit, 2bit
channel 0 opened to user
0: None Switch Setting details
Parity type of SIO channel 0
I/O parameter 95 1: Odd Axis number setting
opened to user 0 to 15
2: Even rotary switch
IAI-protocol minimum <Only the monitor>
I/O parameter 97 response delay for SIO AUTO
0 to 999(ms) Mode selector switch
*2 channel 0 <monitor, data change>
opened to user MANU
Other parameter bit0 to 3 = 1
Other setting bit pattern 1
46 (fixed)  Transmission speed setting
*1 Indicates only the transmission that can be specified on the Set the transmission speed from the setting tool (PC
GOT side.
Specify the transmission speed to match the baud rate of the software).
GOT. Item Range
*2 Set it only when a wait time is required before the response
and transmission to the GOT request. Normally, the SIO transmission 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps
communication is available using default values. speed*1 Default: 38400bps

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on

the GOT side.
 Mode switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

Set the mode switch to "AUTO" and connect the GOT

to the following teaching connector.

Mode switch

Teaching
connector

2 - 22 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting
 2.5.4 Connecting to ERC2 2.5.5 Station No.settings 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 Axis number setting, Mode select

PREPARATORY
Set each station number so that no station number

MONITORING
Set from the setting tool (PC software). overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
 Transmission speed setting connection order. There is no problem even if station
Set the transmission speed from the setting tool (PC numbers are not consecutive.
software). Station Station Station Station Station 2
No.3 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6
Item Range

CONNECTION TO
SIO transmission 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps GOT

CONTROLLER
speed*1 Default: 38400bps

IAI ROBOT
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
Examples of station number setting
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

(1) Direct specification

When setting the device, specify the station number of
3
the controller of which data is to be changed.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Specification

EQUIPMENT
Model name Refer to
range
PCON, ACON, SCON 0 to 15 2.5.3
ERC2 0 to 15 2.5.4

(2) Indirect specification 4

When setting the device, indirectly specify the station

CONNECTION TO
number of the controller of which data is to be changed
using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to

OMRON PLC
GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the controller. 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Specification Compatible
Setting range
station No. device

CONNECTION TO
100 GD10

CONTROLLER
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13
104
105
GD14
GD15
6
106 GD16

CONNECTION TO
0 to 15
107 GD17

KEYENCE PLC
(If setting a value out of the range
108 GD18
above, a timeout error occurs.)
109 GD19
110 GD20
111 GD21
112 GD22 7
113 GD23
CONNECTION TO

114 GD24
115 GD25
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 23

2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting
 2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
 Device
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. Device name Setting Range
Device No.
representation
The device specifications of controllers may differ
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Input Port (IP)*1 IP000 to IP299
same series. Output Port (OP) OP300 to OP599
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
FG000:600 to FG000899 Decimal

Bit device
the controller actually used. FG001:900 to FG001:999
Flag (FG)
When a non-existent device or a device number outside :
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings FG128:900 to FG128:999
may not be monitored. Point Data Clear
PCLR0001 to PCLR4E20 Hexadecimal
(PCLR)*2*6
2.6.1 IAI robot controller Point Data Total
(IAI X-SELController) Count PDT0
(PDT)*1

STR000:300 to STR000:998 Decimal

 Setting item String STR001:001 to STR001:299
(STR)*3 :
STR128:001 to STR128:299

Axis Status
AXST00 to AXST2F
(AXST)*1

Scara Axis Status 0

(Base coordinate sys-
SAXS000 to SAXS0FF
tem)
*1
(SAXS0)

Scara Axis Status 1 Hexadecimal

(Selected work coor-
SAXS100 to SAXS1FF
dinate system)
(SAXS1)*1
Item Description
Scara Axis Status 2
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
(Reserved for system
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of SAXS200 to SAXS2FF
use)
word device. *1
Device (SAXS2)
Word device

Device definition can be checked.

Scara Axis Status 3
Set the number of the program for which (Each axis system) SAXS300 to SAXS3FF
Device No.
the device is used.
(SAXS3)*1
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information Version 0 VR00:0 to VR00:F
selected in [Device].
(Main CPU applica- :
tion/) (VR0)*1 VR0F:0 to VR0F:F

POINT Version 1 VR10:0 to VR10:F

(Main CPU core) : Hexadecimal
Memory area for writing position data (VR1)*1 VR1F:0 to VR1F:F

Position data can be written to RAM or E2PROM of the Version 2 VR20:0 to VR20:F
controller. (Driver CPU) :
(1) When written to RAM (VR2)*1 VR2F:0 to VR2F:F
Remember that written position data are cleared Version 3 VR30:0 to VR30:F
when power supply to the controller is turned off. (Mount SIO) :
(2) When written to E2PROM (VR3)*1 VR3F:0 to VR3F:F
Written position data are not cleared even when Program Status
power supply to the controller is turned off. PGST000 to PGST511
(PGST)*1
However, there are limits in the number of writing
System Status
to E2PROM. If the data is frequently updated SYST0 to SYST6 Decimal
(more than once in an hour), write the parameters (SYST)*1

to the RAM. For details, refer to the manual of the Program Control
PRG000 to PRG128
controller used. (PRG)*2*4

Alarm Reset (AR)*2 AR0 Decimal

2 - 24 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 Device name Setting Range
Device No.
representation
*1 Write disabled 1
*2 Read disabled

PROCEDURES FOR
*3 The following restrictions are applied depending on the
Software Reset program number.
SR0

PREPARATORY
(SR)*2*5 • When the program number is 000, the variable number

MONITORING
can be only even numbers.
Drive-Source Recov- • When the program number is 001 to 128, the variable
DSR0
ery (DSR)*2 number can be only odd numbers.
*4 For the program control device, the command to be sent
Operation-Pause Decimal differs depending on the write data. Write data other than the
OPR0
Reset (OPR)*2 followings are processed as an internal error of GOT.
• Write data 0: Program Exit Command(0x254) 2
Servo (SV)*7 SV0 to SV2 • Write data 1: Program Execution Command(0x253)
• Write data 2: Program Pause Command(0x255)

CONNECTION TO
Write to Flash ROM
FRW0 to FRW1 • Write data 3: Program 1 Step Execution Command(0x256)

CONTROLLER
(FRW)*7 • Write data 4: Program Restart Command(0x257)

IAI ROBOT
CD000:0 to CD000:F *5 When performing software reset, a no response error is
Coordinate Affiliate displayed after a non-communicating period of ten and
: several seconds, and then the communication is resumed.
Data 0 (CD0)*1
CD0FF:0 to CD0FF:F *6 For the word address, the value is specified only when the
Hexadecimal last digit is 1.
Coordinate Affiliate
CD100:0 to CD100:F
:
*7 For the device whose obtained data No.0 is a command
trigger, a request is sent to the controller when the Write or
3
Data 1 (CD1)*1 Read is input to the command trigger. It is not sent when the
CD1FF:0 to CD1FF:F
Clear is input.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
INT000:0200 to INT000:1299
INT001:0001 to INT001:1099

EQUIPMENT
Integer (INT)
:
INT128:0001 to INT128:1099 POINT
Decimal
RL000:0300 to INT000:1399
Device representation
RL001:0100 to INT001:1199
Real (RL)
: (1) Flag device 4
INT128:0100 to INT128:1199 FG000 : 600

CONNECTION TO
Error Detail 0 ER000:000:00 to ER0FF:000:FF Flag number:
(System error) : Global area (600 to 899)

OMRON PLC
Local area (900 to 999)
(ER0)*1 ER000:FFF:00 to ER0FF:FFF:FF
Program number:
Word device

Error Detail 1 ER100:000:00 to ER1FF:000:FF Global area (000)

(Axis-specific error) : Hexadecimal Local area (001 to 128)
(ER1)*1 ER100:FFF:00 to ER1FF:FFF:FF

Error Detail 2 ER200:000:00 to ER2FF:000:FF

(2) String device 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
(Program-specific : STR000 : 300
error:) (ER2)*1 ER200:FFF:00 to ER2FF:FFF:FF Variable number:

CONNECTION TO
Global area (300 to 998 (only even))
Error Detail 3

CONTROLLER
ER300:000:00 to ER3FF:000:FF Local area (001 to 299 (only odd))
(Error in error list : Program number:
record)(ER3)*1 ER300:FFF:00 to ER3FF:FFF:FF Global area (000)
Local area (001 to 128)
Error Detail 4
(Reserved for system
use)
ER400:000:00 to ER4FF:000:FF
:
(3) Version device
6
ER400:FFF:00 to ER4FF:FFF:FF
(ER4)*1

CONNECTION TO
VR 0 0 : 0
Error Detail 5

KEYENCE PLC
ER500:000:00 to ER5FF:000:FF Obtained data:
(Reserved for system 0: Model code
:
use) 1: Unit code
ER500:FFF:00 to ER5FF:FFF:FF
(ER5)*1 2: Version number
3: Time (year)
Error Detail 6 4: Time (month)
(Reserved for system
use)
ER600:000:00 to ER6FF:000:FF
:
Hexadecimal 5: Time (day)
6: Time (hour)
7
ER600:FFF:00 to ER6FF:FFF:FF 7: Time (min)
(ER6)*1
CONNECTION TO

8: Time (sec)
Error Detail 7 9 to F: Reserved for system use
KOYO EI PLC

ER700:000:00 to ER7FF:000:FF
(Reserved for system Device number (0 to F)
:
use)
ER800:FFF:00 to ER8FF:FFF:FF
(ER7)*1 Unit type (0 to 3)
0= Main CPU application/1 = Main CPU core
Point Data Total / 2= Driver CPU / 3 = Mount SIO
Count (PD)*7
PD00 to PD9E
8
Simple Interference SD01:0 to SD01:F
CONNECTION TO

Check Zone Data :

(SD)*1 SDFF:0 to SDFF:F
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 25

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 (4) Axis Status device (5) Scara Axis Status device
SAXS 0 00
AXST00
Obtained data:
Obtained data:
00: Work coordinate system selection number
AXST00 to AXST05: Single-axis status
01: Tool coordinate system selection number
00: Axis status
02: Common axis status
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 6 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 6 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 5 (Push error detection): 0 = Not detected / 1 = Detected
Bit 5 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 4 (Operation command successful completion):
Bit 4 (Reserved for system use)
0 = Not yet complete / 1 = Completed successfully
Bit 2-3 (Scara axis current position coordinate system type):
* Can be used only for completion check after
0 = Base coordinate system
an operation command.
/ 1 = Selected work coordinate system
Bit 3 (Servo): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
/ 2 = Reserved for system use / 3 = Each axis system
Bit 1-2 (Origin return): 0 = Not yet performed
Bit 0-1: (Scara axis current arm system):
/ 1 = Returning to origin / 2 = Completed
0 = Right arm system / 1 = Left arm system
Bit 0 (Servo axis in use): 0 = Not in use
/ 2 = Indeterminable / 3 = Reserved for system use
/ 1 = In use (moving, etc.)
03: Axis pattern
* "Servo axis in use" indicates that a given task has
the right to use the applicable axis. Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Therefore, this bit will turn ON in the following conditions: 1st axis
- When an operation command involving 8th axis
axis movement is in progress Reserved for system use
(including when an axis is moving)
04 to 09: Single-axis status
- Servo is starting up from an OFF state
04: Axis status
- Servo is shutting down from an ON state
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
(excluding emergency stop)
Bit 6 (Reserved for system use)
- Operation axis is paused
Bit 5 (Push error detection): 0 = Not detected / 1 = Detected
01: Axis sensor input status
Bit 4 (Operation command successful completion):
Bit 3 (Reserved for system use)
0 = Not yet complete / 1 = Completed successfully
Bit 2 (Origin sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
* Can be used only for completion check after an
Bit 1 (Overrun sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
operation command.(For positioning that includes any
Bit 0 (Creep sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
of the X, Y and R axes, be sure to check completion
02: Axis error code
for all of the X, Y and R axes.)
03: Encoder status
Bit 3 (Servo): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
Bit 7 (Battery alarm (BA))
Bit 1-2 (Origin return): 0 = Not yet performed
Bit 6 (Battery error (BE))
/ 1 = Returning to origin / 2 = Completed
Bit 5 (Multi-rotation error (ME))
Bit 0 (Servo axis in use): 0 = Not in use
Bit 4 (Reserved for system use)
/ 1 = In use (moving, etc.)
Bit 3 (Counter overflow (OF))
* "Servo axis in use" indicates that a given task has the
Bit 2 (Count error (CE))
right to use the applicable axis.Therefore, this bit will
Bit 1 (Full absolute status (FS))
turn ON in the following conditions:
Bit 0 (Overspeed (OS))
- When an operation command involving axis
04: Current position (L) unit (0.001mm)
movement is in progress
Indicates the lower 16 bits of the current position in Hex.
(including when an axis is moving)
05: Current position (H) unit (0.001mm)
- Servo is starting up from an OFF state
Indicates the upper 16 bits of the current position in Hex.
- Servo is shutting down from an ON state
AXST06 to AXST11: Double axes status
(excluding emergency stop)
AXST42 to AXST47: Eight axes status
- Operation axis is paused
05: Axis sensor input status
Bit 3 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 2 (Origin sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
Bit 1 (Overrun sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
Bit 0 (Creep sensor): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON
06: Axis error code
07: Encoder status
Bit 7 (Battery alarm (BA))
Bit 6 (Battery error (BE))
Bit 5 (Multi-rotation error (ME))
Bit 4 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 3 (Counter overflow (OF))
Bit 2 (Count error (CE))
Bit 1 (Full absolute status (FS))
Bit 0 (Overspeed (OS))
08: Current position (L) unit (0.001mm or 0.001deg)
Indicates the lower 16 bits of the current position in Hex.
09: Current position (H) unit (0.001mm or 0.001deg)
Indicates the upper 16 bits of the current position in Hex.
0A to 0E: Double axes status

2E to 33: Eight axes status

34 to FF: Reserved for system use

Unit type (0 to F)
Bit 3 (Reserved for system use) Fixed to 0
Bit 2 (Reserved for system use) Fixed to 0
Bit 0-1 (Scara axis current position type):
0 = Base coordinate system
/ 1 = Selected work coordinate system
/ 2 = Reserved for system use / 3 = Each axis system

2 - 26 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 (6) Program Status device (8) Coordinate Affiliate Data device 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PGST 000 CD 0 00 : 0

PREPARATORY
Obtained data: Obtained data:

MONITORING
000 to 003: Program number 1 status 0: X axis coordinate offset
000: Status 1: Y axis coordinate offset
Bit 3 (Reserved for system use) 2: Z axis coordinate offset
Bit 2 (Reserved for system use) 3: R axis coordinate offset
Bit 1 (Reserved for system use) 4 to F: Reserved for system use
Bit 0 (Start): 0 = Not started / 1 = Started
001: Execution program step number Coordinate system definition data number (00 to FF)
Work/tool coordinate system definition data number (0 to)
2
002: Program-dependent error code
003: Error occurrence step number Type 1 (0 to 1)

CONNECTION TO
004 to 007: Program number 2 status 0 = Work coordinate system definition data

CONTROLLER
/ 1 = Tool coordinate system definition data
508 to 511: Program number 128 status

IAI ROBOT
(9) Servo device
(7) System Status device SV 0
Obtained data:
SYST 0
Obtained data:
0: Command trigger
1 =Write / 4 =Clear
3
0: System mode 1: Axis pattern

CONNECTION TO
0 = Indeterminable / 1 = AUTO mode / 2 = MANUAL mode

AZBIL CONTROL
/ 3 = Slave update mode / 4 = Core update mode Bit - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

EQUIPMENT
1 Critical level system error number 1st axis
2: Latest system error number 8th axis
3: System status byte 1 Reserved for system use
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 6 (Battery voltage error status) : 0 = No error / 1 = Error 2: Operation type

4
Bit 5 (Battery voltage low warning status): 0 = No low / 1 = Low Bit 3 (Reserved for system use) Fixed to 0
Bit 4 (Power error status): 0 = Normal / 1 = Error Bit 2 (Reserved for system use) Fixed to 0
Bit 3 (Emergency stop switch status): Bit 1 (Reserved for system use) Fixed to 0
0 = No emergency stop / 1 = Emergency stop Bit 0 (Servo ON/OFF): 0 = OFF / 1 = ON

CONNECTION TO
Bit 2 (Safety gate status): 0 = CLOSE / 1 = OPEN
* X-SEL (P/Q Series) (Multi axes/Scara)/SSEL/ASEL/PSEL: Enable switch (10) Write to Flash ROM device

OMRON PLC
(Deadman switch / Enable switch) status is indicated.
Bit 1 (TP enable switch status): 0 = ON / 1 = OFF FRW 0
* X-SEL (P/Q Series) (Multi axes/Scara)/SSEL/ASEL/PSEL:
Obtained data
This bit is disabled (fixed to 0).
0 : Command trigger
Bit 0 (Operation mode switch status): 0 = AUTO / 1 = MANUAL
1=Write/
4: System status byte 2
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
1 : Reserved for system use 5
Bit 6 (Reserved for system use)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Bit 5 (Program run status): 0 = Not run / 1 = Running
(11) Integer device
Bit 4 (Restart wait status): 0 = Not waiting / 1 = Waiting

CONNECTION TO
Bit 3 (I/O interlock status): 0 = No interlock / 1 = Interlock

CONTROLLER
Bit 2 (Servo interlock status): 0 = No interlock / 1 = Interlock INT000 : 0200
Bit 1 (Slave parameter writing status): Variable number:
0 = Not writing / 1 = Writing Global area (0200 to 0299,1200 to 1299)
Bit 0 (Application data flash ROM write status): Local area (0001 to 0099,1001 to 1099)
0 = Not writing/erasing / 1 = Writing/erasing
6
Program number:
* When the core program is in operation (Application update mode),
Global area (000)
only Bit 0 is enabled. Data for System mode, Critical level
Local area (001 to 128)
system error number, Latest system error number,
System status byte 1, System status byte 3 and System

CONNECTION TO
status byte 4 is disabled.
(12) Real device
KEYENCE PLC
5: System status byte 3
Bit 7 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 6 (Reserved for system use) RL000 : 0300
Bit 5 (Reserved for system use) Variable number:
Bit 4 (Operation mode): Global area (0300 to 0399,1300 to 1399)
0 = Program mode / 1 = Position mode Local area (0100 to 0199,1100 to 1199)
Bit 3 (Reserved for system use)
Bit 2 (System ready status): 0 = Not ready / 1 = Ready Program number: 7
Bit 1 (System operation status): Global area (000)
Local area (001 to 128)
CONNECTION TO

0 = Not operating in AUTO mode

/ 1 = Operating in AUTO mode
KOYO EI PLC

Bit 0 (Drive-source cutoff status): 0 = Not cut off / 1 = Cut off

6: System status byte 4
Reserved for system use

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 27

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 (13) Error Detaildevice(Detail 0 to Detail 7) (15) Simple Interference Check Zone Data device

ER0 00 : 000 : 00 SD 01 : 0
Obtained data: Obtained data:
00: Error number 0: Effective axis pattern
01: Detail information 1 1 to 4: Simple interference check zone definition coordinate
Other than system-down level error: Program number 1 unit (0.001 mm (R axis: 0.001 deg))
(Error source is indicated if the step number is not 0.) 1: X-axis definition coordinate
System-down level error: System down type 2: Y-axis definition coordinate
02: Detail information 2 3: Z-axis definition coordinate
Other than system-down level error: Step number 4: R-axis definition coordinate
(Error source) 5 to 8: Simple interference check zone definition coordinate
System-down level error: System down error code 2 unit (0.001 mm (R axis: 0.001 deg))
03: Detail information 3 9: Physical output port number or global flag number for
Other than system-down level error: Axis number output upon entry
System-down level error: System down information 1 A: Entry error type specification
04: Detail information 4 0 = No error handling / 1 = Message-level error
Other than system-down level error: Point number / 2 = Operation-cancellation level error
(Negative value at interpolation point) B to F: Reserved for system use
System-down level error: System down information 2
05: Detail information 5 Definition data number (1 to FF)
06: Detail information 6
07: Detail information 7
08: Detail information 8
09: Message bytes
0A: Message 1 (4 bytes)
10: Message 2 (4 bytes)

49: Message 64 (4 bytes)

50 to FF: Reserved for system use
Reserved for system use
Type 2 (0 to FF)
System error: 0 = Critical level error / 1 = Latest error
Axis-specific error: Axis number
Program-specific error: Program number
Error in error list record: Record number (1 to )

Type 1
0 = System error /1 = Axis-specific error
/ 2 = Program-specific error
/ 3 = Error in error list record
/ 4 or later = Reserved for system use

(14) Point Data Total Count device

PD 00
Obtained data:
00: Command trigger
1 =Write / 2 =Read / 4 =Clear
01: Starting point number
02: Number of point data
03 to 0F: Point data 1
03: Point number
04: Axis pattern
05: Acceleration unit (0.01G)
06: Deceleration unit (0.01G)
07: Speed unit (mm/sec)
08 to 0F: Position data unit (0.001 mm)
08: 1st axis position data

0F: 8th axis position data

10 to 1C: Point data 2

92 to 9E: Point data 12

2 - 28 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
2.6.2 IAI robot controller (IAI PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 controller) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 Setting item

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
Item Description

Set the device name, device number, and bit number.

Device
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device.
4
Device definition can be checked.

CONNECTION TO
Monitors the robo cylinder of the specified station No.

OMRON PLC
0 to 15: To monitor the robo cylinder of the specified station No.
Network Station No.
100 to 115: To set the station No. of the robo cylinder to be monitored by the value of
GOT data register (GD).*1

Infomation Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the robo cylinder and the GOT data register. 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range
100 GD10

CONNECTION TO
101 GD11 0 to 15

CONTROLLER
(If setting a value out of the
: :
range above, a timeout error
114 GD24 occurs.)
115 GD25

6
 Device
CONNECTION TO
(1) Device name

Device No. KEYENCE PLC

Device name Setting Range
representation

Bit device Status (S) S0000 to SFFFF Hexadecimal

Word / Double word device Register (R) R0000 to RFFFF Hexadecimal 7

CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 29

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 (2) Status (S) (Bit device)
The following shows device numbers which can be set for the status and the corresponding device contents.

Status Area name Description Abbreviation

0000 to 00FF - (Reserved for system)

0100 EMG status EMGS

0101 Safety speed enabled status SFTY

0102 Controller ready status PWR

0103 Servo ON status SV

0104 Missed work in push-motion operation PSFL

0105 Major failure status ALMH

0106 Minor failure status ALML

0107 Device status register 1 (DSS1) Absolute error status ABER

0108 Brake forced-release status BKRL

0109 Cannot be used

010A Pause status STP

010B HomingHome return status HEND

Positioning completion Position complete

010C PEND
status

010D to 010F Cannot be used

0110 Cannot be used

0111 Cannot be used

0112 Load output judgment status LOAD

0113 Torque level status TRQS

0114 Teaching mode status MODS

0115 Position-data load command status TEAC

0116 Jog+ status JOG+

0117 Jog- status JOG-

Device status register 2 (DSS2)
0118 Completed positionPosition complete 7 PE7

0119 Completed positionPosition complete 6 PE6

011A Completed positionPosition complete 5 PE5

011B Completed positionPosition complete 4 PE4

011C Completed positionPosition complete 3 PE3

011D Completed positionPosition complete 2 PE2

011E Completed positionPosition complete 1 PE1

011F Completed positionPosition complete 0 PE0

0120 Emergency stop status EMGP

0121 Motor voltage low status MPUV

0122 Operation mode status RMDS

0123 Cannot be used

0124 HomingHome return status GHMS

0125 Expansion device status register (DSSE) Push-motion operation in progress PUSH

0126 Excitation detection status PSNS

0127 PIO/Modbus switching status PMSS

0128 Cannot be used

0129 Cannot be used

012A Moving signal MOVE

(Continued to next page)

2 - 30 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 Status Area name Description Abbreviation 1
012B to 012F Expansion device status register (DSSE) Cannot be used

PROCEDURES FOR
0130 to 0136 Cannot be used

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Completed position numberPosition complete
0137 PM256
number status bit 256

Completed position numberPosition complete

0138 PM128
number status bit 128

Completed position numberPosition complete 2

0139 PM64
number status bit 64

CONNECTION TO
Completed position numberPosition complete

CONTROLLER
013A PM32
number status bit 32

IAI ROBOT
Position number status register (POSS) Completed position numberPosition complete
013B PM16
number status bit 16

Completed position numberPosition complete

013C
number status bit 8
PM8
3
Completed position numberPosition complete
013D PM4

CONNECTION TO
number status bit 4

AZBIL CONTROL
Completed position numberPosition complete

EQUIPMENT
013E PM2
number status bit 2

Completed position numberPosition complete

013F PM1
number status bit 1

0140 Cannot be used 4

0141 Limit sensor output monitor 2 LS2

CONNECTION TO
0142 Limit sensor output monitor 1 LS1

OMRON PLC
0143 Limit sensor output monitor 0 LS0

0144 to 0146 Zone status register (ZONS) Cannot be used

0147 Position zone output monitor ZP

0148 to 014D Cannot be used

5
014E Zone output monitor 2 Z2

OMRON TEMPERATURE
014F Zone output monitor 1 Z1

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PIO connector pin numbers 20A (IN15) to 5A
0150 to 015F Input port monitor register (DIPM)
(IN0)

PIO connector pin numbers 16B (OUT15) to

0160 to 016F Output port monitor register (DOPM)
1B (OUT0)

0170 Cannot be used 6

0171 Command pulse NP signal status NP

CONNECTION TO
0172 Cannot be used

KEYENCE PLC
0173 Command pulse PP signal status PP

0174 to 0175 Cannot be used

0176 Cannot be used

0177 Special input port monitor register (SIPM) Mode switch status MDSW 7
0178 Cannot be used
CONNECTION TO

0179 to 017B Cannot be used

KOYO EI PLC

017C Home-check sensor monitor HMCK

017D Overtravel sensor OT

017E Creep sensor CREP

017F Limit sensor LS 8

0180 to 03FF - (Reserved for system)
CONNECTION TO

(Continued to next page)

JTEKT PLC

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 31

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 Status Area name Description Abbreviation

0400 EMG operation specification EMG

0401 Safety speed command SFTY

0402 Cannot be used

0403 Servo ON command SON

0404 to 0406 Cannot be used

0407 Alarm reset command ALRS

Device control register 1 (DRG1)
0408 Brake forced-release command BKRL

0409 Cannot be used

040A Pause command STP

040B HomingHome return command HOME

040C Positioning start command CSTR

040D to 040F Cannot be used

0410 Cannot be used

0411 Jog/inch switching JISL

0412 to 0413 Cannot be used

0414 Teaching mode command MOD

0415 Position data load command TEAC

0416 Jog+ command JOG+

0417 Jog- command JOG-

0418 Device control register 2 (DRG2) Start position 7 ST7

0419 Start position 6 ST6

041A Start position 5 ST5

041B Start position 4 ST4

041C Start position 3 ST3

041D Start position 2 ST2

041E Start position 1 ST1

041F Start position 0 ST0

0420 to 0426 Cannot be used

0427 PIO/Modbus switching specification PMSL

0428 to 042B Expansion device control register (DRGE) Cannot be used

042C Deceleration stop STOP

042D to 042F Cannot be used

0430 to 0436 Cannot be used

0437 Position command bit 256 PC256

0438 Position command bit 128 PC128

0439 Position command bit 64 PC64

043A Position number specification register Position command bit 32 PC32

043B (POSR) Position command bit 16 PC16

043C Position command bit 8 PC8

043D Position command bit 4 PC4

043E Position command bit 2 PC2

043F Position command bit 1 PC1

0440 to FFFF - (Reserved for system)

2 - 32 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 1
 Register (R) (Word device/Double word device)

PROCEDURES FOR
The following shows device numbers which can be set for the register and the corresponding device contents.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Abbrevi
Register Data length Area name Description
ation

0000 to 0CFF - (Reserved for system)

0D00 Word Device control register 1 DRG1

2
0D01 Word I/O control information category Device control register 2 DRG2

CONNECTION TO
0D03 Word Position number specification register POSR

CONTROLLER
0D04 to 0FFF - (Reserved for system)

IAI ROBOT
Offset (Hex.)

Double word +0000H Target position PCMD

In-position bandPositioning
Double word +0002H
band
INP
3
Double word +0004H Speed command VCMD

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Double word +0006H Individual zone boundary + ZNMP
Position table information

EQUIPMENT
Double word (low-speed memory area) +0008H Individual zone boundary - ZNLP

Word +000AH Acceleration command ACMD

Word +000BH Deceleration command DCMD

1000 to 3FFF
Word +000CH Push-current limiting value PPOW 4
Word +000DH Load current threshold LPOW

CONNECTION TO
Word +000EH Control flag specification CTLF

OMRON PLC
(Calculation of detailed device number)
Device number (Hex) = 1000H + (16 Position number (0 to 767))*1 + (Offset value corresponding to the device content) H
Example)
Position number: 5

5
Device content: Speed command (Offset value = 0004H)
Device number (Hex) = 1000H + (16 5 = 80)*1*2 + 0004H = 1000H + 50H*2 + 0004H = 1054H

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*1 Calculated in decimal.
*2 Converting 16 5 = 80 to hexadecimal results 50H.

CONNECTION TO
4000 to 8FFF - (Reserved for system)

CONTROLLER
9000 Double word Current position monitor PNOW

9002 Word Present alarm code query ALMC

9003 Word Input port query DIPM

9004 Word Output port monitor query DOPM

6
9005 Word Device status 1 query DSS1

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
9006 Word Device status 2 query DSS2

9007 Word Expansionded device status query DSSE

9008 Double word Controller monitor information System status query STAT
category
900A Double word Current speed monitor VNOW

900C Double word Current ampere monitor CNOW 7

900E Double word Deviation monitor DEVI
CONNECTION TO

9010 Double word System timer query STIM

KOYO EI PLC

9012 Word Special input port query SIPM

9013 Word Zone status query ZONS

Completed position numberPosition complete number

9014 Word POSS
status query
8
9015 to 97FF - (Reserved for system)
CONNECTION TO

9800 Word Position command category Position movement command register POSR

9801 to 98FF - (Reserved for system)

JTEKT PLC

(Continued to next page)

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 33

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 Abbrevi
Register Data length Area name Description
ation

9900 Double word Target position coordinate specification register PCMD

9902 Double word In-position bandPositioning band specification register INP

9904 Double word Numerical value command Speed specification register VCMD

9906 Word category Acceleration/deceleration speed specification register ACMD

9907 Word Push-current limiting value PPOW

9908 Word Control flag specification register CTLF

9909 to FFFF - (Reserved for system)

2 - 34 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

2.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 1
2.7 Precautions

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
 Program control device  Station number setting of the IAI robot

MONITORING
• When Program Execution Command (0), Program controller system
Exit Command (2), or Program Restart Command (4) The robot controller with the station number set with the
is written to the program control device (PRG 0), it host address must be included.
will be a request for all programs running in the
controllers. 2.4.2 Communication detail settings 2
• When unsupported write data is input to the program
 Connection of the IAI X-SEL K type

CONNECTION TO
control device, the following error is displayed in the

CONTROLLER
system alarm. Note the following precaution when using the controller

IAI ROBOT
315: Device writing error. with the mode switch set to MANU.
Correct device. • After powering up the X-SEL, connecting the GOT
before the PC software causes the program startup
 Variable devices disabled (A1D alarm) on the X-SEL side.
3
The variable number 99 of Integer device and variable
number 199 of Real device are special devices used for

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
operations by the X-SEL controller system. Do not use

EQUIPMENT
these variables for general purpose.

 Command trigger compatible device

• For the device whose obtained data No.0 is a
command trigger, communication with the controller is 4
performed when the Write(1)/Read(2) is set to the
command trigger. When the command trigger and

CONNECTION TO
setting value are written in a batch, the

OMRON PLC
communication is performed based on the value set
with batch write.
• When Clear(4) is set to the command trigger, the
communication with the controller is not performed
and the set value is initialized.
• When an unsupported set value is input to the
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
command trigger, the following error is displayed in
the system alarm.

CONNECTION TO
315: Device writing error.

CONTROLLER
Correct device.

 Device reserved for system use

Devices of "Reserved for system use" are devices with
indefinite values. Do not write to these devices.
6

CONNECTION TO
 Write to the flash ROM
KEYENCE PLC
• The point data can be written to the flash ROM of the
X-SEL controller. When the point data is written to the
flash ROM, it is not cleared even when power supply
to the controller is turned off. However, there are limits
in the number of writing. For details, refer to the user's 7
manual of X-SEL controller used.
• Never turn off the main power supply during the flash
CONNECTION TO

ROM write. Doing so may cause the loss of data and

KOYO EI PLC

malfunction of controllers. For details, refer to the

user's manual of X-SEL controller used.

 Communication disconnection
• Writing to the flash ROM disconnects the
communication with controllers until the writing is
8
completed.
CONNECTION TO

• Resetting software restarts the controllers. During this

time, the communication with controllers is
JTEKT PLC

disconnected.

2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2 - 35

2.7 Precautions
2 - 36 2. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
2.7 Precautions
 3
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3.

AZBIL (former YAMATAKE) 3

CONTROL EQUIPMENT

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
3.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
5
3.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

OMRON TEMPERATURE
3.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48
3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54
3.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3-1
3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL
CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Model Communication
Series Clock Refer to
name Type

RS-232
DMC10 3.2.1
RS-485
DMC
DMC50 RS-485 3.2.2

SDC15

SDC25
RS-232
SDC26 3.2.3
RS-485
SDC35

SDC36

SDC20 RS-232
RS-485 3.2.4
SDC21
SDC
SDC30 RS-232
RS-485 3.2.5
SDC31

SDC40A
RS-232
SDC40B 3.2.6
RS-485
SDC40G

SDC45 RS-232
RS-485 3.2.7
SDC46

RS-232
CMS CMS 3.2.8
RS-485

CMF015 RS-232
CMF 3.2.9
CMF050 RS-485

RS-232
CML CML 3.2.10
RS-485

RS-232
MQV MQV 3.2.8
RS-485

RS-232
MPC MPC 3.2.8
RS-485

RS-232
MVF MVF 3.2.8
RS-485

PBC201- RS-232
PBZ 3.2.10
VN2 RS-485

AUR350C RS-232
AUR 3.2.11
AUR450C RS-485

RS-232
RX RX 3.2.8
RS-485

RS-232
CMC CMC10B 3.2.12
RS-485

(Continued to next page)

3-2 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.1 Connectable Model List
 Model Communication
1
Series Clock Refer to

PROCEDURES FOR
name Type

PREPARATORY
RS-232

MONITORING
AHC2001 AHC2001 3.2.13
RS-485

NX-D15

NX-D25

NX-D35
2
NX-DX1

CONNECTION TO
NX-DX2 RS-232

CONTROLLER
RS-485 3.2.14
NX-DY (MODBUS)

IAI ROBOT
NX-S01

NX-S11

NX-S12
3
NX-S21
NX
NX-D15

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
NX-D25

EQUIPMENT
NX-D35

NX-DX1

NX-DX2 Ethernet
(MODBUS) 3.2.14 4
NX-DY

CONNECTION TO
NX-S01

OMRON PLC
NX-S11

NX-S12

NX-S21

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3-3

3.1 Connectable Model List
 3.2 System Configuration
3.2.1 Connecting to DMC10

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
Interface
DMC10 DMC10 GOT
converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

Up to 15
RS485 RS232 - (Built into GOT)
temperature
DMC10 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
controllers
diagram 1) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly

DMC10 DMC10 GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 4) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 3) 500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
Up to 15
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2 temperature
DMC10 RS-485
controllers for 1
RS485 connection diagram 7) 500m GT15-RS4-TE
GOT

RS485 connection diagram 19) - (Built into GOT)

500m
RS485 connection diagram 20) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3-4 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.2 Connecting to DMC50 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When using the COM module

PREPARATORY
Communication driver

MONITORING
AZBIL SDC/DMC

Temperature COM Temperature COM

GOT
2
controller module controller module

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 3
Temperature *1
Connection cable COM module GOT Number of
controller
connectable

CONNECTION TO
Cable model Max. Communication

AZBIL CONTROL
Model name Model name Option device Model equipment
Connection diagram number distance Type

EQUIPMENT
RS485 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 10)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS485 connection
diagram 11)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 Up to 8 COM
4
module for 1
GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

CONNECTION TO
GOT.
GT15-RS4-9S
Up to 120

OMRON PLC
DMC50C X RS485 connection 500m DMC50M 20X RS-485 GT15-RS2T4-9P*3 temperature
diagram 12) controllers
- (Built into GOT) for 1 COM
module.
RS485 connection
diagram 13)
GT15-RS4-TE 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS485 connection
GT14-RS2T4-9P*4
diagram 17)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
 When connecting directly to one temperature controller 6

CONNECTION TO
Temperature
GOT

KEYENCE PLC
controller
Connection cable

7
Temperature
Connection cable GOT Number of
controller
connectable
CONNECTION TO

Cable model Max. Communication equipment

Model name Option device Model
Connection diagram number distance Type
KOYO EI PLC

RS485 connection diagram 14) - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*1
RS485 connection diagram 15) 10m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*1 Up to 1
temperature
DMC50C X RS-485 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*1
GT15-RS4-TE
controllers for 1 8
RS485 connection diagram 16) COM module.
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO

RS485 connection diagram 21)

500m
RS485 connection diagram 22) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
JTEKT PLC

*1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3-5

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.3 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
SDC15, SDC15,
Interface
SDC25/26, SDC25/26, GOT
converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
SDC35/36 SDC35/36
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Model name Connection Option device Model
distance Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
SDC15 RS485 RS232
GOT) temperature
SDC25/26 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
controllers
SDC35/36 diagram 1) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly

SDC15, SDC15,
SDC25/26, SDC25/26, GOT
SDC35/36 SDC35/36

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 4) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
*1
RS485 connection diagram 3) 500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
Up to 31
SDC15 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2 temperature
SDC25/26 RS-485
controllers for 1
SDC35/36 RS485 connection diagram 7) 500m GT15-RS4-TE
GOT

RS485 connection diagram 19) - (Built into GOT)

500m
RS485 connection diagram 20) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3-6 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.4 Connecting to SDC20/21 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When using the Interface converter

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Interface
SDC20/21 SDC20/21 GOT
converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2) 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1)

Temperature
controller
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of 3
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model

CONNECTION TO
distance name Type distance

AZBIL CONTROL
diagram number diagram number

EQUIPMENT
- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
GOT) temperature
SDC20/21 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
controllers
diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT 4
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.

OMRON PLC
 When connecting directly to one temperature controller

SDC20/21 GOT 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT

Communication Cable model Max.

Number of
connectable
6
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)
Up to 1 temperature KEYENCE PLC
RS232 connection diagram
SDC20/21 RS-232 15m
2) controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P
7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3-7

3.2 System Configuration
  When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

SDC20/21 SDC20/21 GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 6)

(4-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection diagram 23)
(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 5)

(4-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 24) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2
(2-wire type)

- (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 8)
500m
(4-wire type) Up to 31 temperature
SDC20/21 RS-485 GT15-RS4-9S controllers for 1 GOT

RS485 connection diagram 25)

500m - (Built into GOT)
(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 9)

(4-wire type)
500m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram 26)
(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 18)

(4-wire type)
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
RS485 connection diagram 27)
(2-wire type)
*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3-8 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.5 Connecting to SDC30/31 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When using the Interface converter

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Interface
SDC30/31 SDC30/31 GOT
converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller
Cable model Cable model
Number of
connectable
3
Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232 GOT) temperature
SDC30/31 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
controllers
diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P
4
*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting directly

OMRON PLC
SDC30/31 SDC30/31 GOT

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Model
name
Communication
Type
Cable model
Connection diagram number
Max.
distance
Option device Model
connectable
equipment
6

CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT)

KEYENCE PLC
RS485 connection diagram 23)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 5)(4-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2

500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 24)(2-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2

- (Built into GOT)

7
Up to 31
RS485 connection diagram 8)(4-wire type) 500m temperature
CONNECTION TO

SDC30/31 RS-485
controllers for 1
GT15-RS4-9S
GOT
KOYO EI PLC

RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire type) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 9)(4-wire type)

500m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram 26)(2-wire type)
8
RS485 connection diagram 18)(4-wire type)
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
CONNECTION TO

RS485 connection diagram 27)(2-wire type)

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.
JTEKT PLC

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3-9

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.6 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
SDC40A/ SDC40A/ Interface
GOT
40B/40G 40B/40G converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
SDC40A/ GOT) temperature
connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
40B/40G controllers
diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details of this product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly to one temperature controller

SDC40A/
GOT
40B/40G

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT

Number of connectable
Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance

- (Built into GOT)

SDC40A/ RS232 connection diagram Up to 1 temperature
RS-232 15m
40B/40G 2) controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

3 - 10 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 1
 When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
SDC40A/ SDC40A/ GOT
40B/40G 40B/40G

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable

IAI ROBOT
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of
Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance
3
RS485 connection diagram 6) (4-wire)
500m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS485 connection diagram 23) (2-wire)

EQUIPMENT
RS485 connection diagram 5) (4-wire) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)*2
*1
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 24) (2-wire) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)*2

4
- (Built into GOT)
Up to 31
RS485 connection diagram 8) (4-wire) 500m

CONNECTION TO
SDC40A/ temperature
RS-485
40B/40G controller for

OMRON PLC
GT15-RS4-9S
1 GOT

RS485 connection diagram 25) (2-wire) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 9) (4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE 5
RS485 connection diagram 26) (2-wire)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS485 connection diagram 18) (4-wire)

CONNECTION TO
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

CONTROLLER
RS485 connection diagram 27) (2-wire)

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

*3
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 11

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.7 Connecting to SDC45/46

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
Temperature Temperature Interface
GOT
controller controller converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
GOT) temperature
SDC45/46 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
controllers
diagram 28) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

Temperature Temperature
GOT
controller controller

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 29) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 30) 500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
Up to 1
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 temperature
SDC45/46 RS-485
controller for 1
RS485 connection diagram 31) GT15-RS4-TE
GOT

RS485 connection diagram 32) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 33) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3 - 12 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.8 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When using the Interface converter

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Control Control Interface
GOT
equipment equipment converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2) 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1)

Control
equipment
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of 3
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Connection Connection Option device Model

CONNECTION TO
name distance name Type distance

AZBIL CONTROL
diagram number diagram number

EQUIPMENT
CMS
- (Built into
MQV RS485 RS232 Up to 31 control
GOT)
MPC connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m equipment for 1
MVF
RX
diagram 28) diagram 1) GOT 4
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

OMRON PLC
 When connecting directly to multiple control equipments

Control Control
GOT
5
equipment equipment

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable
6
Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of

CONNECTION TO
Communication Cable model Max. connectable

KEYENCE PLC
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 29) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
CMS RS485 connection diagram 30) 500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2 7
MQV FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 Up to 1 control
MPC RS-485 equipment for 1
CONNECTION TO

MVF RS485 connection diagram 31) GT15-RS4-TE GOT

KOYO EI PLC

RX
RS485 connection diagram 32) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 33) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1
*2
Including the cable length of the option devices.
Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
8
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
CONNECTION TO

*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 13

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.9 Connecting to CMF015, CMF050

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
Control Control Interface
GOT
equipment equipment converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Control
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
equipment Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max.
Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
name distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
GOT) control
CMF015 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
equipment
diagram 28) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
GOT) control
CMF050 connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
equipment
diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly

(1) Connecting to CMF015

Control Control
GOT
equipment equipment

Connection cable

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance equipment

RS485 connection diagram 29) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
*1
RS485 connection diagram 30) 500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
Up to 1 control
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2
CMF015 RS-485 equipment for 1
RS485 connection diagram 31) GT15-RS4-TE GOT

RS485 connection diagram 32) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 33) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3 - 14 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
 (2) Connecting to CMF050
1

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY
Control Control

MONITORING
GOT
equipment equipment
AZBIL SDC/DMC

CONNECTION TO
Connection cable

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Control equipment Connection cable GOT
Number of connectable
Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 3

6)(4-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS485 connection diagram
23)(2-wire type)

EQUIPMENT
RS485 connection diagram
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
5)(4-wire type)
500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 4
24)(2-wire type)

CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

OMRON PLC
RS485 connection diagram
500m
8)(4-wire type) Up to 1 control
CMF050 RS-485 GT15-RS4-9S equipment for 1 GOT

RS485 connection diagram

25)(2-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT) 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS485 connection diagram

CONNECTION TO
9)(4-wire type)

CONTROLLER
500m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram
26)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

18)(4-wire type) 6
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
RS485 connection diagram

CONNECTION TO
27)(2-wire type)

KEYENCE PLC
*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 15

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.10 Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
Control Control Interface
GOT
equipment equipment converter
AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)
Control
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
equipment Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max.
Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
name distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
CML RS485 RS232
GOT) control
PBC201- connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
equipment
VN2 diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly

Control Control
GOT
equipment equipment

Connection cable
Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment

RS485 connection diagram 6) (4-wire type)

500m - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection diagram 23) (2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 5) (4-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

*1
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 24) (2-wire type)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2

- (Built into GOT) Up to 1

CML 500m
RS485 connection diagram 8) (4-wire type) control
PBC201 RS-485
equipment
-VN2 GT15-RS4-9S
for 1 GOT

RS485 connection diagram 25) (2-wire type) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 9) (4-wire type)

500m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram 26) (2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram 18) (4-wire type)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
RS485 connection diagram 27) (2-wire type)

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3 - 16 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
3.2.11 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When using the Interface converter

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Control Control Interface
GOT
equipment equipment converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1)

Control
Interface converter*1
equipment
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of 3
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Connection Connection Option device Model
name distance name Type distance

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
diagram number diagram number

EQUIPMENT
- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
AUR350C GOT) control
connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
AUR450C equipment
diagram 1) diagram 1) for 1 GOT 4
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

OMRON PLC
 When connecting directly

Control
equipment
Control
equipment
GOT 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable
6
Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of

CONNECTION TO
Communication Cable model Max. connectable

KEYENCE PLC
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 4) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 3) 500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 Up to 1 control
7
AUR350C
RS-485 equipment for 1
AUR450C
CONNECTION TO

RS485 connection diagram 7) GT15-RS4-TE GOT

KOYO EI PLC

RS485 connection diagram 19) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 20) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact 8
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 17

3.2 System Configuration
 3.2.12 Connecting to CMC10B

 When using the Interface converter

Communication driver
Control Control Interface
GOT
equipment equipment converter AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Control
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
equipment Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Connection Connection Option device Model
name distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

- (Built into Up to 31
RS485 RS232
GOT) control
CMC10B connection 500m CMC10L RS-232 connection 15m
equipment
diagram 2) diagram 1) for 1 GOT
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation.

 When connecting directly to multiple control equipments

Control Control
GOT
equipment equipment

Connection cable

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 6) 500m - (Built into GOT)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
RS485 connection diagram 5) 500m*1 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2 Up to 1 control
CMC10B RS-485
equipment for 1 GOT
RS485 connection diagram 8) GT15-RS4-TE

RS485 connection diagram 9) 500m - (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 18) GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.

*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3 - 18 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
3.2.13 Connecting to AHC2001 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting directly to one temperature controller

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
communication
AHC 2001 GOT
unit AZBIL SDC/DMC
Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of
Model Communication Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name module Type Connection diagram number distance
3
- (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram

AZBIL CONTROL
- RS-232 15m
2)

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

- (Built into GOT) 4
SCU module RS-232 15m
2)

CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2-9P

OMRON PLC
RS485 connection diagram
6)(4-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection diagram
23)(2-wire type)
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS485 connection diagram
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2 Up to 1

CONNECTION TO
5)(4-wire type)
AHC temperature

CONTROLLER
*1
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
2001 controller for
RS485 connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2
1 GOT
24)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

- (Built into GOT) 6
500m
8)(4-wire type)

CONNECTION TO
SCU module RS-485 GT15-RS4-9S

RS485 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT) KEYENCE PLC
25)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

9)(4-wire type)
500m GT15-RS4-TE
7
RS485 connection diagram
CONNECTION TO

26)(2-wire type)
KOYO EI PLC

RS485 connection diagram

18)(4-wire type)
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
RS485 connection diagram

*1
27)(2-wire type)
Including the cable length of the option devices.
8
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
CONNECTION TO

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.

*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 19

3.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple temperature controllers
Communication driver

AZBIL SDC/DMC

communication communication
AHC 2001 unit AHC 2001 unit GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Model Communication Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name module Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram

6)(4-wire type)
500m - (Built into GOT)
RS485 connection diagram
23)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

5)(4-wire type) FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)*2
*1
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)*2
RS485 connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)*2
24)(2-wire type)

- (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram 31
500m
AHC 8)(4-wire type) temperature
SCU module RS-485 GT15-RS4-9S
2001 controllers
for 1 GOT
RS485 connection diagram
500m - (Built into GOT)
25)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

9)(4-wire type)
500m GT15-RS4-TE
RS485 connection diagram
26)(2-wire type)

RS485 connection diagram

18)(4-wire type)
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
RS485 connection diagram
27)(2-wire type)
*1 Including the cable length of the option devices.
*2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

3 - 20 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.2 System Configuration
3.2.14 Connecting to NX series 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver

MODBUS/RTU
MODBUS/TCP

Use a MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP communication driver to connect the GOT to NX series. 2

For the MODBUS(R)/RTU or MODBUS(R)/TCP connection, refer to the following manual.

CONNECTION TO
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer/MODBUS/Peripheral Connection)

CONTROLLER
4. MODBUS(R)/RTU CONNECTION

IAI ROBOT
5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION

For the valid devices, refer to the following Technical News.

List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series with MODBUS Connection (GOT-D-0037) 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 21

3.2 System Configuration
 3.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the control equipment.
 Precautions when preparing a cable
3.3.1 RS-232 cable (1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

 Connection diagram (2) GOT side connector

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RS232 connection diagram 1) 1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
GOT side Interface converter(CMC10L)*1 (3) AZBIL control equipment side connector
Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control
- 1 8 CS
equipment side module.
RD(RXD) 2 3 SD For details, refer to the user's manual of the AZBIL
RD
control equipment
SD(TXD) 3 2

ER(DTR) 4 7 RS

SG 5 5 SG

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

NC 9

FG -

*1 For details on the setting method of the TERMINAL mode,

refer to the following.
3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L

RS232 connection diagram 2)

GOT side Temperature

controller side *1

- 1 SG

RD(RXD) 2 SD

SD(TXD) 3 RD

ER(DTR) 4

SG 5

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

NC 9

FG -

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model and optional function model.
Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Model of temperature controller

SDC20 SDC21 AHC2001
Signal name SDC40A, SDC40B, SDC40G
(03, 05) (10) (04, 07, 09) CPU module SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
SG 5 18 29 61 5 5
SD 17 16 27 60 3 3
RD 18 17 28 59 2 2

3 - 22 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
3.3.2 RS-485 cable 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 Connection diagram

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
RS485 connection diagram 1)
Interface
converter side*3 Control equipment Control equipment
(CMC10L) side side
*1
DA 11
DA
*1
DA 2
DB
DB 12 DB

CONNECTION TO
SG
SG 13 SG

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
*2 *2

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

Model of control equipment 3

SDC25/26 AUR350C
Signal name DMC10 SDC15
SDC35/36 AUR450C

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

EQUIPMENT
DA 4 16 22 DA
DB 5 17 23 DB
SG 6 18 24 SG

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. 4

*3 Set the terminal resistor to "Disable".
For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following.

CONNECTION TO
3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L

OMRON PLC
RS485 connection diagram 2)

Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

Interface
converter side*4 Control
Control
equipment 5
(CMC10L) equipment side side

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*1
RDA *1
DA 11 RDA

CONNECTION TO
SDA
DB SDA

CONTROLLER
12
RDB
SG 13 RDB
SDB
SDB

6
SG
SG
FG
FG
*3 *3

CONNECTION TO
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table.The numbers in

KEYENCE PLC
( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal SDC40A/ CMF050 PBC201-
name (02, 04) (09)
(03, 06,
08)
(040,
041)
(045)
(446,
546)
40B/40G CML VN2
CMC10B
7
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
CONNECTION TO

RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59 7 14 13
KOYO EI PLC

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60 8 15 14
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 9 12 11
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58 10 13 12
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61 12 16 15
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3 19 3 -
8
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
CONNECTION TO

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

*4 Since the Interface converter has a built-in terminating resistor, set the terminating resistor of GOT to "Enable".
JTEKT PLC

For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following.

3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 23

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 3)
Control equipment Control equipment
GOT side*2 side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 1 DA
DB
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 2 DB
SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 *3 *3
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
RSA(RTS+) 14
RSB(RTS-) 16
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
SG 2
NC 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

Model of control equipment

SDC25/26 AUR350C
Signal name DMC10 SDC15
SDC35/36 AUR450C
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
DA 4 16 22 DA
DB 5 17 23 DB
SG 6 18 24 SG
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 4)

Control equipment Control equipment

GOT side*2 side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 DA
DB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 DB
SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SG
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 *3 *3
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
NC 14
Shell

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

Model of control equipment

SDC25/26 AUR350C
Signal name DMC10 SDC15
SDC35/36 AUR450C
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
DA 4 16 22 DA
DB 5 17 23 DB
SG 6 18 24 SG
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 24 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 5) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Control equipment Control equipment
GOT side*3 side side

PREPARATORY
*1

MONITORING
RDA *1
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 RDA
RDB
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 RDB
SDA
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 SDA
SDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 12 SDB
SG
SG 2 SG
FG

2
RSA(RTS+) 14 FG
RSB(RTS-) 16
*4 *4
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20

CONNECTION TO
NC 1
NC 3

CONTROLLER
NC 4
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

IAI ROBOT
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC
NC
15
17
3
NC 19

CONNECTION TO
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model.

AZBIL CONTROL
Refer to the following table.The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

EQUIPMENT
Model of control equipmentr
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. 4
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

CONNECTION TO
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

OMRON PLC
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name
CMF050
Model of control equipment

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
AHC2001
5
CML SCU module

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

CONNECTION TO
RDA 7 14 13 3

CONTROLLER
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1

*2
FG 19 3 -
Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
-
6
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

CONNECTION TO
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".

KEYENCE PLC
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 25

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 6)

Control equipment Control equipment

GOT side*3 1
side side
*
*1
RDA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1
RDB
RDA
SDB1(TXD1-) 2
SDA
RDB
RDA1(RXD1+) 3
SDB
SDA
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SG
SDB
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
FG
SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 FG
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 *4 *4
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10 Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
NC 14
Shell

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model.
Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 26 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 7) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Control equipment Control equipment
GOT side*2 side side

PREPARATORY
*1 *1

MONITORING
DA
SDA1 1 DA
DB
SDB1 2 DB
SG
RDA1 3 SG
RDB1 4
SDA2 5 *3 *3 2
SDB2 6

CONNECTION TO
RDA2 7

CONTROLLER
RDB2 8

IAI ROBOT
SG 9
FG 10

*1 Pin No. of Model of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.
3
Model of control equipment

SDC25/26 AUR350C
Signal name DMC10 SDC15

CONNECTION TO
SDC35/36 AUR450C

AZBIL CONTROL
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

EQUIPMENT
DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

4
GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

CONNECTION TO
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 27

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 8)
Control
Control equipment equipment
GOT side*3 *1 side side
RDA *1
SDA 1 RDA
RDB
SDB 6 RDB
SDA
RDA 2 SDA
SDB
RDB 7 SDB
SG
SG 5 SG
FG
RSA 3 FG
CSA 4 *4 *4
RSB 8
CSB 9
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2
FG -
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model.
Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31

Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
GT14, GT11: Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 28 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 9) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Control
Control equipment equipment
GOT side*3

PREPARATORY
side side
*1

MONITORING
RDA *1
SDA 1 RDA
RDB
SDB 6 RDB
SDA
RDA 3 SDA
SDB
CSA
SG
4
5
SG
SDB
SG
2
FG
RDA 2 FG

CONNECTION TO
RDB 7 *4 *4

CONTROLLER
RSB 8 Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

IAI ROBOT
CSB 9
FG 10

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model.
Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models. 3
Model of control equipment

CONNECTION TO
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31

AZBIL CONTROL
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

EQUIPMENT
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 4
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

CONNECTION TO
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

OMRON PLC
Model of control equipment
CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3 5
RDB 8 15 14 2

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SDA 9 12 11 5

CONNECTION TO
SDB 10 13 12 4

CONTROLLER
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
6
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 29

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 10) (For GT16)
Temperature controller side Temperature controller side
GOT side*2 terminal for RS-485 port1 terminal for RS-485 port1
RDA1
SDA1 (TXD1+) 1 6 6 RDA1
RDB1
SDB1 (TXD1-) 2 7 7 RDB1
SDA1
RDA1 (RXD1+) 3 4 4 SDA1
SDB1
RDB1 (RXD1-) 4 5 5 SDB1
SG1
SG 13 8 8 SG1

SDA2 (TXD2+) 5
*3 *3
SDB2 (TXD2-) 6
Terminating resistor (150Ω 1/2W)*1
RDA2 (RXD2+) 7

RDB2 (RXD2-) 8

RSA (RTS+) 9

RSB (RTS-) 10

CSA (CTS+) 11

CSB (CTS-) 12

NC 14

Shell

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 30 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 11) (For GT16) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Temperature controller side Temperature controller side
GOT side*2 terminal for RS-485 port1 terminal for RS-485 port1

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
RDA1
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 6 6 RDA1
RDB1
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 7 7 RDB1
SDA1
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 4 4 SDA1
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
SDB1
5 5 SDB1
2
SG1
SG 2 8 8 SG1

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
*3 *3

IAI ROBOT
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
Terminating resistor (150Ω 1/2W)*1
RSA(RTS+) 14

RSB(RTS-)
3
16

CSA(CTS+) 18

CSB(CTS-) 20

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
NC 1

EQUIPMENT
NC 3

NC 4

RDA2(RXD2+) 9
4
RDB2(RXD2-) 11

CONNECTION TO
NC 13

OMRON PLC
NC 15

NC 17

NC 19

*1
*2
Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

CONTROLLER
RS485 connection diagram 12)
Temperature controller side
6
Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1
GOT side *2 terminal for RS-485 port1
RDA1
SDA 1 6 6 RDA1

CONNECTION TO
RDB1
SDB 6 7 7 RDB1
SDA1

KEYENCE PLC
RDA 2 4 4 SDA1
SDB1
RDB 7 5 5 SDB1
SG1
SG 5 8 8 SG1
RSA 3
CSA 4
*3 *3
RSB 8
CSB 9
Terminating resistor (150Ω 1/2W)*1
7
*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
CONNECTION TO

GT16, GT15, GT12: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
KOYO EI PLC

GT14, GT11: Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".

■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 31

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 13)

Temperature controller side Temperature controller side

terminal for RS-485 port1 terminal for RS-485 port1
GOT side *2
RDA1
SDA1 1 6 6 RDA1
RDB1
SDB1 2 7 7 RDB1
SDA1
RDA1 3 4 4 SDA1
SDB1
RDB1 4 5 5 SDB1
SG1
SDA2 5 8 8 SG1
SDB2 6
RDA2 7
*3 *3
RDB2 8
SG 9
Terminating resistor (150Ω 1/2W)*1
FG 10

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 14) (For GT16)

Temperature controller side
*1
GOT side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

SDA1 (TXD1+) 1 DA

SDB1 (TXD1-) 2 DB
SG 13 SG SG
DB
RDA1 (RXD1+) 3 DA
(Recognition pin)
Recognition pin
RDB1 (RXD1-) 4
Fixed side
SDA2 (TXD2+) 5 socket pin assign DMC50
*2
SDB2 (TXD2-) 6
RDA2 (RXD2+) 7
RDB2 (RXD2-) 8
RSA (RTS+) 9
RSB (RTS-) 10
CSA (CTS+) 11
CSB (CTS-) 12
NC 14
Shall

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 32 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 15) (For GT16) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Temperature controller side
*1
GOT side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
SDA1 (TXD1+) 6 DA

SDB1 (TXD1-) 8 DB
SG 2 SG SG
DB
RDA1 (RXD1+) 10 DA
(Recognition pin)
Recognition pin
RDB1 (RXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
12
5 *2
Fixed side
socket pin assign DMC50
2
SDB2 (TXD2-) 7

CONNECTION TO
RSA (RTS+) 14

CONTROLLER
RSB (RTS-) 16

IAI ROBOT
CSA (CTS+) 18
CSB (CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC
NC
3
4
3
RDA2 (RXD2+) 9
RDB2 (RXD2-) 11

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
NC 13

EQUIPMENT
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. 4

GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".

CONNECTION TO
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

OMRON PLC
RS485 connection diagram 16)
Temperature controller side
*1
GOT side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack
DA
5
SDA1 1

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SDB1 2 DB

CONNECTION TO
RDA1 3 SG SG
DB

CONTROLLER
RDB1 4
Recognition pin
DA
(Recognition pin)

SDA2 5
Fixed side
SDB2 6 socket pin assign DMC50

RDA2 7
RDB2
SG
8
9
6
FG 10 *2

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 33

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 17)
Temperature controller side Temperature controller side
GOT side*2 terminal for RS-485 port1 terminal for RS-485 port1

SDA RDA1 RDA1

SDB RDB1 RDB1
RDA SDA1 SDA1
RDB SDB1 SDB1
SG SG1 SG1

*3 *3

Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*1

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal.
*2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 4-wire type (2Pair)
Terminating resistor : 330
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 18)

Control
1 equipment
GOT side*3 Control equipment side* side 1
*
SDA RDA RDA
SDB RDB RDB
RDA SDA SDA
RDB SDB SDB
SG SG SG
FG FG
*4 *4

Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model.
Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.
Model of control equipment
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 4-wire type (2Pair)
Terminating resistor : 330
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 34 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 19) 1
Control equipment Control equipment

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side*2 side side
*1 *1

PREPARATORY
DA

MONITORING
SDA 1 DA
DB
SDB 6 DB
SG
RDA 2 SG
RDB 7
SG
RSA
5

3
*3 *3
2
CSA 4

CONNECTION TO
RSB 8

CONTROLLER
CSB 9

IAI ROBOT
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

Model of control equipment

Signal name DMC10 SDC15

SDC25/26 AUR350C 3
SDC35/36 AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
DA 4 16 22 DA

EQUIPMENT
DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

*2 Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "110Ω".

*3
■ Connecting terminating resistors
Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
4

CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection diagram 20)
Control equipment Control equipment

OMRON PLC
GOT side*2 side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA DA
DB
SDB DB
RDA
SG
SG 5
RDB

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SG *3 *3

CONNECTION TO
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

CONTROLLER
Model of control equipment

SDC25/26 AUR350C
Signal name DMC10 SDC15
SDC35/36 AUR450C
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. 6
DA 4 16 22 DA

CONNECTION TO
DB 5 17 23 DB

KEYENCE PLC
SG 6 18 24 SG

*2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 2-wire type (1Pair)
Terminating resistor : 110Ω
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. 7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 35

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 21)
Temperature controller side
*1
GOT side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

SDA 1 DA

SDB 6 DB
RDA 2 SG SG
DB
RDB 7 DA
Recognition pin (Recognition pin)

SG 5
Fixed side
RSA 3 socket pin assign DMC50

CSA 4
RSB 8
CSB 9

*2
*1 Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to "110Ω".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 22)

Temperature controller side
*1 plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack
GOT side

SDA DA

SDB DB
RDA SG SG
DB
DA
RDB
Recognition pin (Recognition pin)

SG
Fixed side
socket pin assign DMC50

*2
*1 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 2-wire type (1Pair)
Terminating resistor : 110Ω
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 36 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 23) 1
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W) *2 Control

PROCEDURES FOR
equipment
GOT side*3 Control equipment side

PREPARATORY
side

MONITORING
RDA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 59 59 RDA
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 SDA
57 57 SDA
SG 13
RDB
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 60 60 RDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
58
SDB
58 SDB
2
SDA2(TXD2+) 5
SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 61 61 SG

CONNECTION TO
6
FG
RSA(RTS+)

CONTROLLER
9 3 3 FG
RSB(RTS-) 10 *4 *4

IAI ROBOT
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 3
NC 14
Shell

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

EQUIPMENT
Model of control equipment
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA
RDB
17
18
18
19
27
28
18
19
18
19
27
28
59
60
4
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

CONNECTION TO
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

OMRON PLC
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
SCU module
Pin No.
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2

CONNECTION TO
SDA 9 12 11 5

CONTROLLER
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
6
■ Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 37

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 24)
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2
Control
equipment
GOT side*3 Control equipment side side
RDA
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 59 59 RDA
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 SDA
SG 2 57 57 SDA
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 RDB
60 60 RDB
SDB2(TXD2-) 7
SDB
RDA1(RXD1+) 10
58 58 SDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 12
SG
RSA(RTS+) 14 61 61 SG
RSB(RTS-) 16 FG
CSA(CTS+) 18 3 3 FG
*4 *4
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
NC 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-) 11
NC 13
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
Model of control equipment
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 38 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 25) 1
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

PROCEDURES FOR
Control
equipment
side*3

PREPARATORY
GOT Control equipment side side

MONITORING
RDA
SDA 1 59 59 RDA
SDA
RDA 2 57 57 SDA
RDB
SDB 6 60 60 RDB

RDB 7 58
SDB
58 SDB
2
SG
SG 5 61 61 SG

CONNECTION TO
FG

CONTROLLER
RSA 3 3 3 FG
*4 *4

IAI ROBOT
CSA 4

RSB 8

CSB
3
9

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
Model of control equipment

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

EQUIPMENT
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA
SDB
15
16
16
17
25
26
16
17
16
17
25
26
57
58 4
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

CONNECTION TO
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

OMRON PLC
Model of control equipment
CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2 5
SDA 9 12 11 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SDB 10 13 12 4

CONNECTION TO
SG 12 16 15 1

CONTROLLER
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor selector of the GT14 to "110Ω".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 39

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 26)
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2 Control
equipment
GOT side*3 Control equipment side side
RDA
SDA1 1 59 59 RDA
SDB1 2 SDA
57 57 SDA
RDA1 3 RDB
60 60 RDB
RDB1 4
SDB
SDA2 5 58 58 SDB
SG
SDB2 6 61 61 SG
RDA2 7 FG
3 3 FG
RDB2 8 *4 *4
SG 9

FG 10

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
Model of control equipment
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Model of control equipment

CMF050 AHC2001
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1
FG 19 3 - -

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

3 - 40 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 27) 1
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W) *2

PROCEDURES FOR
Control
equipment
GOT side*3 Control equipment side

PREPARATORY
side

MONITORING
RDA
SDA 59 59 RDA
SDA
SDB 57 57 SDA
RDB
RDA 60 60 RDB

RDB 58
SDB
58 SDB
2
SG
SG 61 61 SG

CONNECTION TO
FG

CONTROLLER
3 3 FG
*4 *4

IAI ROBOT
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
Model of control equipment
SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31
Signal name SDC40A/40B/40G
(02, 04)
Pin No.
(09)
Pin No.
(03, 06, 08)
Pin No.
(040, 041)
Pin No.
(045)
Pin No.
(446, 546)
Pin No. Pin No.
3
RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59
RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

EQUIPMENT
SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58
SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61
FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

CMF050
Model of control equipment
AHC2001
4
Signal name PBC201-VN2 CMC10B
CML SCU module

CONNECTION TO
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
RDA 7 14 13 3

OMRON PLC
RDB 8 15 14 2
SDA 9 12 11 5
SDB 10 13 12 4
SG 12 16 15 1

*2
FG 19 3 -

Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal.
-
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 2-wire type (1Pair)

CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor : 110Ω

CONTROLLER
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 41

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 28)

Interface Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

Control
converter side*4 equipment
(CMC10L) Control equipment side side
*1 *1
DA
DA 11 DA
DB
DB 12 DB
SG
SG 13 SG

*3 *3
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

Model of control equipment

CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Since the Interface converter has a built-in terminating resistor, set the terminating resistor of GOT to "Enable".
For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following.

3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L

RS485 connection diagram 29)

Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

Control
equipment
GOT side*4 Control equipment side
side
*1 *1
DA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 DA
DB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 DB
SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SG
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 *3 *3
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RSA(RTS+) 9
RSB(RTS-) 10
CSA(CTS+) 11
CSB(CTS-) 12
SG 13
NC 14
Shell

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

Model of control equipment

CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

3 - 42 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 30) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2
Control

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
equipment
GOT side*4 Control equipment side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 1 DA
DB
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 2 DB
SG
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 SG
SDB2(TXD2-) 7 2
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 *3 *3
RDB1(RXD1-) 12

CONNECTION TO
RSA(RTS+) 14

CONTROLLER
RSB(RTS-) 16

IAI ROBOT
CSA(CTS+) 18
CSB(CTS-) 20
NC 1
SG 2
NC 3 3
NC 4
RDA2(RXD2+) 9
RDB2(RXD2-)

CONNECTION TO
11

AZBIL CONTROL
NC 13

EQUIPMENT
NC 15
NC 17
NC 19

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table
4
Model of control equipment

CONNECTION TO
CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC

OMRON PLC
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

CONNECTION TO
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

CONTROLLER
■ Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 43

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 31)

Control
equipment
GOT side*4 Control equipment side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA1 1 DA
DB
SDB1 2 DB
SG
RDA1 3 SG
RDB1 4

SDA2 5 *3 *3

SDB2 6

RDA2 7

RDB2 8

SG 9

FG 10

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

Model of control equipment

CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".

■ Connecting terminating resistors

RS485 connection diagram 32)

Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2

Control
equipment
GOT side*4 Control equipment side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA 1 DA
DB
SDB 6 DB
SG
RDA 2 SG
RDB 7
SG 5 *3 *3

RSA 3

CSA 4

RSB 8

CSB 9

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

Model of control equipment

CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.
GT16, GT15: Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable".
GT14, GT11: Set the terminating resistor selector to "OPEN".
■ Connecting terminating resistors

3 - 44 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 33) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Terminating resistor(150Ω 1/2W)*2
Control

PREPARATORY
equipment

MONITORING
GOT side *4 Control equipment side side
*1 *1
DA
SDA DA
DB
SDB DB
SG
RDA
RDB
SG
2
SG *3 *3

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

IAI ROBOT
Model of control equipment

CMS MQV
Signal name SDC45/46 MVF RX
CMF015 MPC
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. 3
DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
SG C12 10 9 7 3

EQUIPMENT
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.
*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.
*4 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair)
Terminating resistor : OPEN 4
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less.
(2) GOT side connector 5
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
(3) AZBIL control equipment side connector
Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control
equipment side module.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the AZBIL
control equipment. 6
 Connecting terminating resistors
CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
(1) GOT side
When connecting a PLC to the GOT, a terminating
resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor by operating the 7
terminating resistor setting switch.
CONNECTION TO

(b) For GT14, GT11

Set the terminating resistor by operating the
KOYO EI PLC

terminating resistor selector switch.

For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT 8
(2) AZBIL control equipment side
CONNECTION TO

When connecting a AZBIL control equipment to the

GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected.
JTEKT PLC

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 45

3.3 Connection Diagram
 3.4 GOT Side Settings
3.4.1 Setting communication
3.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings)

Set the channel of the connected equipment.

2.

3.

4.
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with
Click! Data Bit
the connected equipment.
7bits/8bits
(Default: 8bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Stop Bit communications.
(Default: 1bit)
1bit/2bits

menu.
Specify whether or not to perform a
None
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Parity
parity check, and how it is performed
during communication.
Even
Odd
channel to be used from the list menu. (Default: Even)
Set the number of retries to be
3. Set the following items. Retry
performed when a communication
0 to 5times
error occurs.
• Manufacturer: Azbil
(Default: 0time)
• Controller Type: Set as follows.
Set the time period for a
<When connecting to DMC50 and AHC2001> Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
Azbil DMC50 (Default: 3sec)
<When connecting to a module other than above> Specify the host address (station No.
of the GOT to which the temperature
Azbil SDC/DMC
Host Address*3*4 controller is connected) in the 1 to 15
• I/F: Interface to be used connected network.
• Driver: Azbil SDC/DMC (Default: 1)
Set this item to adjust the
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, transmission timing of the
communication request from the
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
GOT.*1
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: 1ms)
environment. Select the communication format.
(Default: 1)
3.4.2 Communication detail settings
Format*2 format 1: only continuous access 1/2
format 2: continuous and random
access
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
*1 Do not specify "0".
*2 Format is ignored when connecting to DMC50.
POINT *3
*4
Host Address is ignored when connecting to DMC10 or SDC.
Host Address is valid when connecting to DMC50.
Devices to be the target of Host Address setting differ
The settings of connecting equipment can be depending on the system configuration.
<When connecting to the temperature controller via COM
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. module>
For details, refer to the following. Specify the station No. of the COM module.
<When connecting to the temperature controller directly>
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Specify the station No. of the temperature controller.

3 - 46 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.4 GOT Side Settings
 1
POINT

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Format setting
The compatible format of control equipment differs
depending on model.

Model name
Compatible
format 2
SDC20/21, SDC30/31, SDC40A/40B/40G, CMS,
Format 1 only

CONNECTION TO
CMF, CML, MQV, MPC, MVF, PBC201-VN2, RX

CONTROLLER
DMC10, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36, Format 1 or

IAI ROBOT
SDC45/46, AUR350C, AUR450C, CMC10B Format 2
The format
DMC50, AHC2001
setting is invalid.

For the continuous access and random access of the

control equipment, refer to the following manual. 3
User's Manual of the AZBIL control equipment

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be 4
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project

CONNECTION TO
data.

OMRON PLC
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
GT User's Manual
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the 5
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 47

3.4 GOT Side Settings
 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 Station address setting
POINT Set the station address using the rotary switch for the
station address.
AZBIL control equipment Rotary switch
For details of AZBIL control equipment, refer to the for the station address
following manual.
Front of the temperature
User's Manual of the AZBIL control equipment controller body

Model name Refer to

DMC10 3.5.1
SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 3.5.3
SDC20/21 3.5.4
SDC30/31 3.5.4
SDC40A/40B/40G 3.5.2 3.5.2 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/
DMC50 3.5.6
40G
SDC45/46 3.5.7
CMS, CMF015 3.5.8
 Communication settings
Control CML, CMF050 3.5.9
Make the communication settings by operating the key
equipment MQV 3.5.10
of the temperature controller.
MPC 3.5.11
PBC201-VN2 3.5.12 Item Set value
MVF 3.5.13 *1 9600bps
Transmission speed
AUR350C, AUR450C 3.5.14 Data Bit 8bits
RX 3.5.15 Parity bit*1 Even, none
CMC10B 3.5.16 Stop bit 1bit, 2bits
AHC2001 CPU module 3.5.17 *2*3 0 to 127
Station address
AHC2001 SCU module 3.5.18
*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
Interface of the GOT side.
CMC10L 3.5.5
converter *2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.

3.5.1 Connecting to DMC10 3.5.3 Connecting to SDC15,

SDC25/26 or SDC35/36
 Communication settings
Make the communication settings by operating the  Communication settings
Smart Loader Package (SLP-D10) of the temperature
Make the communication settings by operating the key
controller.
or Smart Loader Package (SLP-C35) of the
Item Set value temperature controller.
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
Item Set value
Communication mode*2 CPL *1
Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps
Data bit 8bits
Communication mode*2 CPL
Parity bit*1 Even, none
*1 7bits, 8bits
Data bit
Stop bit 2bits
Communication minimum Parity bit*1 Odd, even, none
1ms, 10ms, 100ms, 200ms
response time Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits
Station address*3*4 0 to F Communication minimum
1 to 250ms
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. response time
*2 Set to CPL. Station address*3*4 0 to 127
*3 Do not set to "0".
*4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of *1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
other units. of the GOT side.
*2 Set to CPL.
*3 Do not set to "0".
*4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.

3 - 48 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.5.4 Connecting to SDC20/21, (1) Setting DIP switches
1
SDC30/31

PROCEDURES FOR
(a) Transmission speed settings

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Transmission Switch No.
 Communication settings speed (bps) 1 2 3 Set these
Make the communication settings by operating the key switches
9600 ON OFF ON
of the temperature controller.

Item Set value

19200 OFF ON ON 2
Transmission speed*1 9600bps 38400 ON ON ON

CONNECTION TO
Data bit 8bits

CONTROLLER
Parity bit Disable (b) Frame length settings

IAI ROBOT
Stop bit 2bits
Switch No.
Frame length
Station address*2*3 0 to 127 4 5 6
*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
8bits OFF OFF OFF 3
*2 Do not set to "0". 9bits ON OFF OFF
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of 10bits OFF ON OFF Set these
other units.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
11bits ON ON OFF
switches

EQUIPMENT
12bits OFF OFF ON

3.5.5 Connecting to CMC10L 13bits ON OFF ON

14bits OFF ON ON

 Communication settings 15bits ON ON ON 4

Make the communication settings by operating the DIP (c) Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
switch of the Interface converter
Switch No.

OMRON PLC
Terminating
Item Set value resistor 8
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Enable ON
Frame length*2 9 to 15bits

*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that 5

of the GOT side. Disable OFF Set these

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*2 The sum of data length, parity bit and stop bit switches

CONNECTION TO
 Settings by switch (2) Mode selector switch settings

CONTROLLER
Set the switch to “TERMINAL”.
MODEM TERMINAL

6
(STRAIGHT) (CROSS)

CONNECTION TO
DIP switch

KEYENCE PLC
Mode selector
switch

7
CONNECTION TO

Front view of CMC10L body Rear view of CMC10L body

KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 49

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.5.6 Connecting to DMC50 3.5.8 Connecting to CMS, CMF015

 Communication settings  Communication settings

Make the communication settings by operating the Make the communication settings by operating the key
Smart Loader Package (SLP-D50/SLP-H21)of the of the control equipment.
temperature controller.
Item Set value
Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Communication condition 0: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1
Communication mode CPL selection 1: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2
Data bit 8bits (fixed) Station address*2*3 0 to 99
Parity bit Even (fixed)
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Stop bit 1bit (fixed) *2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
Module address*2*3*4 0 to F other units.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Set the module address using the rotary switch for module
address. 3.5.9 Connecting to CML, CMF050
*3 Do not set to "0".
*4 Select the module address without overlapping with that of
other units.  Communication settings
Make the communication settings by operating the key
 Module address setting of the control equipment.
Set the module address using the rotary switch for
module address. Item Set value
*1 9600bps
Transmission speed
Communication condition 00: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

Rotary switch for the module address

selection*1 01: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

BCDE Station address*2*3 0 to 7F

7 89A

F 012

3456 *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.

3.5.7 Connecting to SDC45/46 3.5.10 Connecting to MQV

 Communication settings  Communication settings

Make the communication settings by operating the key
Make the communication settings by operating the
of the control equipment.
Smart Loader Package (SLP-C45) of the temperature
controller. Item Set value
*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Item Set value Transmission speed
Communication condition 00: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
selection*1 01: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2
Communication mode*2 CPL
Station address*2*3 0 to 127
Data bit 7bits, 8bits
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Parity bit*1 Odd, even, none *2 Do not set to "0".
Stop bit 1bit, 2bits *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.
Communication minimum
1 to 250ms
response time*5

Station address*3*4 0 to 120

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Set to CPL.
*3 Do not set to "0".
*4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.
*5 When using the interface converter CMC10L, set the
communication minimum response time to 3ms or more.

3 - 50 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.5.11 Connecting to MPC 1
 Settings by switch

PROCEDURES FOR
 Communication settings Display section

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Make the communication settings by operating the key
of the control equipment.
Communication condition
Item Set value switch

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps 2

Communication condition 0: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

CONNECTION TO
selection*1 1: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

CONTROLLER
Station address*2*3 0 to 127

IAI ROBOT
Station No. setting switch
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.
3
3.5.12 Connecting to PBC201-VN2
(1) Transmission speed settings

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Set the communication condition switch.
 Communication settings

EQUIPMENT
Make the communication settings by operating the key Transmission Switch No.

of the control equipment. speed (bps) 1 2 3

Item Set value

9600
19200
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4
Communication protocol CPL

CONNECTION TO
*1
Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps (2) Communication condition selection

OMRON PLC
Communication condition 0:Even parity, Stop bit 1 Set the communication condition switch.
*1 1:Odd parity, Stop bit 1
selection
Switch No.
(Fixed 8-bit data length) 2:Non parity, Stop bit 2 Communication condition
4
Station address*2*3

*1
0 to 126

Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1 OFF 5
8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2 ON

OMRON TEMPERATURE
*2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.

CONNECTION TO
(3) Station address setting

CONTROLLER
Set the station address switch.
3.5.13 Connecting to MVF Station No. setting switch

 Communication settings 6
Make the communication settings by operating the
switch of the control equipment.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
Item Set value

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication condition 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

selection*1
*2*3
8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2
0 to F
7
Station address
CONNECTION TO

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Do not set to "0".
KOYO EI PLC

*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of

other units.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 51

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.5.14 Connecting to AUR350C, 3.5.15 Connecting to RX
AUR450C
 Communication settings
 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the
Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-RX) of the control
Smart Loader Package (SLP-A35, SLP-A45) of the equipment.
control equipment.
Item Set value
Item Set value Transmission speed *1 9600bps, 19200bps ,38400bps
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps Even parity stop 1
Communication condition 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1 (8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1)

selection*1 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2 Even parity stop 2
Communication condition (8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 2)
*2*3 0 to F
Station address
selection*1 Odd parity stop 1
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. (8-bit data length, Odd parity, Stop bit 1)
*2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of Odd parity stop 2
other units. (8-bit data length, Odd parity, Stop bit 2)

 Station address setting Station address*2*3 1 to 32

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Set the station address switch. *2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
(1) For AUR350C other units.

3.5.16 Connecting to CMC10B

Station No. setting switch  Communication settings

Make the communication settings by operating the
Smart Loader Package (SLP-CM1) of the control
equipment.

Item Set value

(2) For AUR450C Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
S

0:8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

Communication format*1
1:8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2
*2*3 0 to 99
Station address

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Station No. setting switch *2 Do not set to "0".
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of
other units.

 Station address setting

Set the station address switch.

Station No. setting switch

3 - 52 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.5.17 Connecting to AHC2001 CPU 3.5.19 Station number setting 1
module

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Set each station number so that no station number

MONITORING
overlaps.
 Communication settings The station number can be set without regard to the cable
Make the communication settings by operating the key connection order. There is no problem even if station
of the temperature controller or Smart Loader Package numbers are not consecutive.
(SLP-D50 or SLP-H21). Station
No.3
Station
No.10
Station
No.1
Station
No.15
Station
No.6
2
Item Set value

CONNECTION TO
*1 GOT
Transmission speed 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps

CONTROLLER
Mode*2 1: CPL

IAI ROBOT
Data length 8bits (fixed)
Examples of station number setting
Parity bit Even (fixed)
(1) Direct specification
Stop bit 1bit (fixed)
When setting the device, specify the station number of 3
Station address*3 1 to 15*4 the control equipment of which data is to be changed.
*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that Specification

CONNECTION TO
of the GOT side. Model name

AZBIL CONTROL
range
*2 Set to 1: CPL.

EQUIPMENT
*3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of SDC40A/40B/40G, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36,
other units. SDC20/21, SDC30/31 1 to 127
*4 Although the device address range of AHC2001 is 1 to 127,
CML, CMF050, MQV, MPC
use the device setting range of DMC50 of 1 to 15.
PBC201-VN2 1 to 126
SDC45/46 1 to 120 4
3.5.18 Connecting to AHC2001 SCU CMS, CMF015, CMC10B 1 to 99
module

CONNECTION TO
RX 1 to 32
DMC10, DMC50, MVF, AUR350C, AUR450C, AHC2001*1 1 to 15

OMRON PLC
 Communication settings *1 Although the station number range of AHC2001 is 1 to 127,
use the station number range of DMC50 of 1 to 15.
Make the communication settings by operating the key
of the temperature controller or Smart Loader Package (2) Indirect specification
(SLP-D50 or SLP-H21).
When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Item Set value using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
GD25).

CONNECTION TO
*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Transmission speed
When specifying the station No. from the following table

CONTROLLER
Protocol setting *2 2: CPL on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25
Data length*1 7bits, 8bits compatible to the station No. specification will be the
station No. of the control equipment.
Parity bit*1 0: None, 1: Even, 2: Odd

Stop bit *1 1bit, 2bits

Specification
station No.
6
Compatible
Other Setting range
Half-duplex/Duplex*3 0: Half-duplex DMC50 device

CONNECTION TO
than
Spacing transmission 0 (fixed) AHC2001

KEYENCE PLC
DMC50
*1 Adjust the settings of transmission speed, data length, parity 100 200 GD10
bit, and stop bit with that of the GOT.
*2 Set to 2: CPL. 101 201 GD11
*3 Set to 0: Half-duplex. 1 to 127: For SDC40A/40B/40G,
102 202 GD12
SDC15, SDC25/26,
103
104
203
204
GD13
GD14
SDC35/36, SDC20/21,
SDC30/31, CML,
7
105 205 GD15 CMF050, MQV, MPC
CONNECTION TO

106 206 GD16 1 to 126: PBC201-VN2

1 to 120: SDC45/46
KOYO EI PLC

107 207 GD17

1 to 99: CMS, CMF015, CMC10B
108 208 GD18 1 to 32: RX
109 209 GD19 1 to 15: DMC10, DMC50, MVF,
110 210 GD20 AUR350C, AUR450C,
111 211 GD21 AHC2001*1
For the setting other than the above,
8
112 212 GD22
error (dedicated device is out of
113 213 GD23
CONNECTION TO

range) will occur.

114 214 GD24
JTEKT PLC

115 215 GD25

*1 Although the station number range of AHC2001 is 1 to 127,
use the station number range of DMC50 of 1 to 15.

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 53

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting
 3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.

 Setting item

For Azbil SDC/DMC Series For Azbil DMC50

Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device.

Device definition can be checked.

Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].
Set the monitor target of the set device.
To monitor the control equipment of the specified station No.
• When Azbil SDC/DMC Series is used.
0 to 127 :To monitor the control equipment of the specified station No.
200 to 215 :To specify the station No. of the control equipment to be monitored by the value of
Station GOT data register (GD).*1
• When Azbil DMC50 is used.
Network
1 to 15: To specify the station No. of the COM module or control equipment to be monitored.
100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the COM module or control equipment to be monitored,
and the Sub Station of the control equipment by the value of GOT data register (GD).*2
Specify the sub station number of the control equipment connected to the COM module specified in
[Station] to monitor it. (0 to 15)If the specified [SubStation] is 0, the COM module/control equipment
Sub Station
specified in [Station] is monitored.
For AHC2001, the sub station number is ignored.
*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the control equipment and the GOT data register.

Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range

200 GD10
201 GD11 0 to 127
(If setting a value outside
: :
the range above, a device
214 GD24 range error occurs.)
215 GD25

3 - 54 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 *2 From the value of GD10 to 25, the upper 8bits are set for station No., and the lower 8bits for the Sub Station. 1
In this case, the setting of [Sub Station] is invalid.

PROCEDURES FOR
The following shows the relation between station numbers of the control equipment and the GOT data register.

PREPARATORY
Station No. GOT data register (GD) Setting range

MONITORING
100 GD10
101 GD11
: : 0x0000 to 0xFFFF
114 GD24
115 GD25 2
Example: When [Station No.] is set to 100

CONNECTION TO
When [Station No.] is set to 100, the monitoring target is set based on the GD10 value.

CONTROLLER
GD10 = 0x010A

IAI ROBOT
(Upper 8bits) 0x01 Station No.: 1
(Lower 8bits) 0x0A Sub Station: 10

POINT 3
Station No. and Sub Station of AZBIL DMC50

CONNECTION TO
The station No. and Sub Station set when using AZBIL DMC50 correspond to NW No. and Station number of

AZBIL CONTROL
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC, respectively.

EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 55

3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 3.6.1 AZBIL SDC/DMC Series

Device name Setting range Device No. representation

Bit device

Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices ―

Word device

Data (..)*1 ..273 to ..31243 Decimal

*1 Only 16-bit (1-word) designation is allowed.

3.6.2 AZBIL DMC50

Device name Setting range Device No. representation

Word device

Network Addresses (NA)*1 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal

Parameter Addresses (PA)*1 00000 to FFFFF Hexadecimal

*1 Only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed.

(a) Network Addresses (NA)

The following shows the network address settings and definitions.

Network Addresses Definition

0000 Network Addresses

(b) Parameter Address (PA)

The following shows the parameter address settings and definitions.

Parameter Address Definition

001 H/W Information

002 Date and Time Setup

021 AI Setup (High resolution type:standard inputs)

022 AI Setup (Special type)

023 AI Setup (High resolution type:option inputs)

041 AUX-IN Setup

045 AO Setup

061 DO Setup

071 TP Setup

0A1
MR20X Communication Setup
0A2

0A3 Front Port Communication Setup

0C1 System Status

0C5 AI Alarm Log

0C3 Date and Time Display

0C4 System Alarm Log

0C6 AUX-IN Alarm Log

(Continued to next page)

3 - 56 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 Parameter Address Definition
1

PROCEDURES FOR
0E1 AI Status

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
0E2 AUX-IN Status

0E3 AO Status

0E5 DI Status

0E6 DO Status

0E7 TP Status
2
0E8 Zener Barrier Adjustment Counts

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
0F1
Present MR20X Communication Setup

IAI ROBOT
0F2

0F3 Front Port Active Communication Setup

103 Memory Usage Monitor

201 PID_A Options Control Action

3
202 PID_A Constants Proportional Band

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
203 PID_A Monitor SP

EQUIPMENT
211 PID_CAS Options Control Action

212 PID_CAS Constants (master) Proportional Band

213 PID_CAS Constants (slave) Proportional Band

214 PID_CAS Monitor M_SP

4
234 Ra_PID Options Ra-PID Mode

CONNECTION TO
235 Ra_PID Constants Proportional Band

OMRON PLC
236 Ra_PID Monitor SP

241 UP_PID Options Control Action

242 UP_PID Constants Proportional Band

243 UP_PID Monitor U_SP(Use SP) 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
301 TBL/TBR Setup Contact Point X1

CONNECTION TO
C00 Pattern Setup

CONTROLLER
C01 to C63 Segment Setup

CF1 Pattern FB Monitor

801 to 9FF Type label defined by the user

6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3 - 57

3.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 3.7 Precautions
 Station number setting of the temperature controller system
• When connecting to DMC10 or SDC
Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.1 station.
• When connecting to DMC50/AHC2001
A COM module or temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included.
3.4.2 Communication detail settings

 GOT clock control

Since the control equipment does not have a clock function, the settings of "time adjusting" or "time broad cast" by
GOT clock control will be disabled.

 Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment

The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device. For example, the
faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

 When DMC50/AHC2001 and DMC10/SDC are mixed

GOT does not support connections with DMC50 and DMC10/SDC mixed.

 Station number range of AHC2001

Although the station number range of AHC2001 is 1 to 127, use the station number range of DMC50 of 1 to 15.

 Device range of AHC2001

The GOT does not support all the devices of AHC2001.
Use AHC2001 with the GOT within the device range equivalent to that of DMC50.

3 - 58 3. CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

3.7 Precautions
 4
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
4.

3
4.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
4.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4

EQUIPMENT
4
4.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5
4.4 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4-1
4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type

CPM1

CPM1A
SYSMAC CPM RS-232 4.2.1
CPM2A

CPM2C *3

SYSMAC CQM1 CQM1*1 *4 RS-232 4.2.1

*4*5
RS-232
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H 4.2.2
RS-422

CJ1H
RS-232
SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1G 4.2.3
RS-422
CJ1M

CJ2H RS-232
SYSMAC CJ2 4.2.3
CJ2M*9 RS-422

CP1H

CP1L RS-232
SYSMAC CP1 4.2.4
CP1E RS-422

(N type)*8

SYSMAC C200HS C200HS RS-232

RS-422 4.2.5
SYSMAC C200H C200H *6

C200HX
RS-232
SYSMAC C200HG 4.2.5
RS-422
C200HE*2 *7

CS1H
RS-232
SYSMAC CS1G 4.2.6
RS-422
CS1D

SYSMAC C1000H C1000H RS-232

RS-422 4.2.7
SYSMAC C2000H C2000H

CV500*10

CV1000*10 RS-232
SYSMAC CVM1/CV 4.2.8
RS-422
CV2000*10

CVM1*10 *3

(Continued to next page)

*1 The CQM1-CPU11 is unable to communicate with GOT since the CQM1-CPU11 has no RS-232C interface.
*2 The C200HE-CPU11 does not support communication board.
Use a host Link unit.
*3 Some models do not have a clock function.
*4 The memory cassette equipped with a clock is required.
*5 The EM device of the CQM-CPU61 cannot be monitored.
*6 To use the C200H-CPU21/CPU22/CPU23, the memory cassette equipped with a clock is required.
The C200H-CPU01/CPU02/CPU03 does not support the clock function.
*7 The C200HE-CPU11 does not support the clock function.
*8 For CP1E (N type) CPU modules with 20 or less I/O points, only the direct CPU connection is available.
*9 The direct CPU connection is available for CJ2M-CPU1 only.
*10 Use the CPU moduleV1 Version1.12N or later.

4-2 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.1 Connectable Model List
 1
Communication *2

PROCEDURES FOR
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
CJ1H

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1G

CJ1M

CJ2H
SYSMAC CJ2
CJ2M
Ethernet *1 *1 *1 *1
4.3.1 2
CS1H

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
SYSMAC CS1 CS1G

IAI ROBOT
CS1D

*1 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet.

*2 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4-3

4.1 Connectable Model List
 4.2 Serial Connection
4.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C or
CQM1

 When connecting to PLC or RS-232C

Communication driver
CPM1,CPM1A
CPM2A,CPM2C RS232C
GOT
CQM1 adapter OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of connectable
Model RS-232C Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Option device Model
name adapter*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) -
or (Built into GOT)
15m
CPM2A RS232 connection
- RS-232 diagram 1) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
CQM1 GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection -
15m
diagram 4) (Built into GOT)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) -
or (Built into GOT)
CPM1 15m
CPM1A RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C
CPM1-CIF01 RS-232 diagram 1)
CPM2A adapter
GT15-RS2-9P
CPM2C

RS232 connection -
15m
diagram 4) (Built into GOT)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) -
or (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C
CPM2C CPM2C-CIF01-V1 RS-232 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P adapter

RS232 connection -
15m
diagram 4) (Built into GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.

4-4 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to OMRON connection cable

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Communication driver

MONITORING
OMRON
CPM1A GOT
connection cable OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

IAI ROBOT
Model OMRON Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name connection cable*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20102-25S(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
3
or
15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram

AZBIL CONTROL
CPM1A CQM1-CIF01 RS-232 2) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
5)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
4
or - (Built into GOT)
15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram
CPM2C CPM2C-CN111 RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC

OMRON PLC
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
4)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4-5

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to CQM1H
 When connecting to PLC or serial communication board
Communication driver
Serial
CQM1H communication GOT
board OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Serial
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
communication Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
board*1

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) - (Built into GOT)

or 15m
1 GOT for 1
- RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P PLC

RS232 connection diagram 4) 15m - (Built into GOT)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) - (Built into GOT)

or 15m
RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

CQM 1H RS232 connection diagram 4) 15m - (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection diagram 3) 200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1

serial
CQM1-SCB41 GT16-C02R4-
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) communicat
9S(0.2m)
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) ion board
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS-422 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) 200m GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 7) - (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection diagram 11) 200m - (Built into GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

 When connecting to OMRON connection cable

Communication driver

OMRON
CQM1H GOT
connection cable OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
OMRON
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
connection Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
cable*1

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
CQM 1H CQM1-CIF02 RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1) PLC

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.

4-6 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
4.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2M 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Communication driver

MONITORING
CJ1H, CJ1G Serial
communication
CJ1M, CJ2H module GOT
CJ2M OMRON SYSMAC
/RS-422 converter
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT

IAI ROBOT
Number of
Serial communication
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
module/RS-422A Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
converter*1
3
GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1

EQUIPMENT
- RS-232 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P PLC

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
4
GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
15m
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 RS232 connection

OMRON PLC
RS-232 diagram 1)
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection
1 GOT for 5
200m - (Built into GOT) each port of a

OMRON TEMPERATURE
diagram 3)
serial
CJ1H GT16-C02R4-9S communicatio

CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m)
(0.2m)

CONTROLLER
CJ1G n module
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m)
CJ1M GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
CJ2H CJ1W-SCU31-V1 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m)
RS-422 200m GT15-RS4-9S
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT) 6
diagram 7)

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection

KEYENCE PLC
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 11)

RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m)
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m)
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m) 7
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P *2
1 GOT for 1
CONNECTION TO

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) 50m RS-422A

GT15-RS4-9S
or
KOYO EI PLC

converter
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

RS422 connection
diagram 12)
50m - (Built into GOT)
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4-7

4.2 Serial Connection
 PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Serial communication
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
module/RS-422A Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment
converter*1

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
CJ1W-SCU21 RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
CJ1W-SCU41

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection 1 GOT for

200m - (Built into GOT)
CJ1H diagram 3) each port of a
CJ1G GT16-C02R4-9S serial
CJ1M GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) communicatio
(0.2m)
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) n module
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
CJ1W-SCU41 RS-422 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) 200m
GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 11)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
- RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P PLC

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)
CJ2M-
CPU1 GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m)
(0.2m)
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m)
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1 GOT for 1
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) 50m RS-422A
GT15-RS4-9S
or converter
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection 1 GOT for

CJ2M- 200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3) each port of a
CPU1
serial
CJ2M- GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) communicatio
CPU3 (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) n module
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m)
RS-422 200m GT15-RS4-9S
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 11)

4-8 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
1
Serial communication

PROCEDURES FOR
Model Communication Cable model Max. connectable
module/RS-422A Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance equipment

PREPARATORY
*1
converter

MONITORING
GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
RS-232C
option board
2

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)

CONTROLLER
diagram 4)

IAI ROBOT
RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m)
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m)
(0.2m)
3
GT15-RS2T4- 1 GOT for 1
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m)
9P*2 RS-422A/

CONNECTION TO
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m)

AZBIL CONTROL
50m
or GT15-RS4-9S 485 option

EQUIPMENT
board
CJ2M- RS422 connection
diagram 8) - (Built into GOT)
CPU3

RS422 connection
diagram 12)
50m - (Built into GOT)
4
RS422 connection

CONNECTION TO
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

OMRON PLC
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m)
GT15-RS2T4- 1 GOT for 1
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m)
9P*2 RS-422A/
CP1W-CIF12 RS-422 GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m)
or
200m
GT15-RS4-9S 485 option 5
board

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS422 connection
diagram 8) - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4-9

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.4 System Configuration for connecting to CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E

 When connecting a PLC or option board

Communication driver
CP1H
CP1L Option board GOT
CP1E OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of connectable
Model Option Communication Cable model Max.
Option device Model equipment
name board*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection
CP1E - RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232
diagram 1) option board
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) (0.2m)
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422A/
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422 50m GT15-RS4-9S
or 485 option board
CP1H
CP1L RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
CP1E diagram 8)

RS422 connection
50m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) (0.2m)
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-422A/
CP1W-CIF12 RS-422 200m GT15-RS4-9S
or 485 option board

RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 12)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

4 - 10 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to serial communication module

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Communication driver

MONITORING
Serial
CJ Unit
CP1H communication GOT
Adapter OMRON SYSMAC
module
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of

IAI ROBOT
Serial Cable model connectable
Model CJ unit Communication Max.
communication Connection diagram Option device Model
equipment
name adapter*1 Type distance
module*1 number

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) 3
or - (Built into GOT)
CJ1W-SCU21 15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection

AZBIL CONTROL
CJ1W-SCU41
RS-232
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 diagram 1)

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection
diagram 3)
200m - (Built into GOT)
1 GOT for each
4
CP1W- GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT16-C02R4-9S port of a serial
CP1H

CONNECTION TO
EXT01 GT09-C100R40101- (0.2m) communication
module

OMRON PLC
9P(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R40101-
CJ1W-SCU41 9P(20m) GT15-RS4-9S
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 RS-422 GT09-C300R40101- 200m
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 9P(30m)
or - (Built into GOT) 5
RS422 connection

OMRON TEMPERATURE
diagram 7)

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection

CONTROLLER
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 11)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 11

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.5 System Configuration for connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG,
or C200HE

 When connecting to PLC or rack type host link unit

Communication driver
C200HS,C200H, Rack type
C200HX,C200HG, host link unit GOT
C200HE OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Model Rack type Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name host link unit*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
C200HX RS232 connection diagram
C200HG - RS-232 1) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
C200HE GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
4)

GT09-C30R20103-25P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection diagram
C200H-LK201-V1 RS-232 3)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
6)

C200HS RS422 connection diagram

C200H 200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for
2)
C200HX 1 rack type host
C200HG GT16-C02R4-9S link unit
C200HE GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40102-9P(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C200R40102-9P(20m)
C200H-LK202-V1 RS-422 GT09-C300R40102-9P(30m) or GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection diagram 200m
6) - (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection diagram

- (Built into GOT)
10)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

4 - 12 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to a communication board

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
Communication driver

MONITORING
C200HX
Communication
C200HG GOT
board OMRON SYSMAC
C200HE
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

IAI ROBOT
Model Communication Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name board*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
3
or
15m
C200HW-COM02 RS232 connection

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
C200HW-COM05 RS-232 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

EQUIPMENT
C200HW-COM06

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

C200HX
RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each 4
diagram 3) port of a
C200HG
communication

CONNECTION TO
C200HE*2 GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) 200m board
(0.2m)

OMRON PLC
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m)
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
C200HW-COM03 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m)
RS-422
C200HW-COM06 GT15-RS4-9S
or
200m
RS422 connection
diagram 7)
- (Built into GOT) 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
diagram 11)

CONTROLLER
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 The communication board cannot be mounted to the C2000HE-CPU11.
Use a host Link unit.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 13

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.6 System Configuration for connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D
 When connecting to a PLC or a serial communication module
Communication driver
CS1H Serial
communication
CS1G module GOT
CS1D OMRON SYSMAC
/RS-422 converter
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Serial Number of
Model communication Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name module*1 Type Connection diagram number distance
/RS-422A converter

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) -
or (Built into GOT)
15m
- RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 1) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT15-RS2-9P

-
RS232 connection diagram 4) 15m
(Built into GOT)

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) -
or (Built into GOT)
15m 1 GOT for 1
CS1W-SCU21 RS232 connection diagram 1) serial
RS-232
CS1W-SCU21-V1 communication
GT15-RS2-9P module
CS1H -
CS1G RS232 connection diagram 4) 15m
(Built into GOT)
CS1D
-
RS422 connection diagram 4) 50m
(Built into GOT)

GT16-C02R4-
9S
GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-
GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) 50m 9P*2
422A converter
or GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection diagram 8)
-
(Built into GOT)

-
RS422 connection diagram 12) 50m
(Built into GOT)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

4 - 14 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to a serial communication board

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
CS1H Serial
CS1G communication GOT
board OMRON SYSMAC
CS1D
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of

IAI ROBOT
Serial connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max.
communication Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number distance
board*1

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
3
or - (Built into GOT)
CS1W-SCB21 15m

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
CS1W-SCB41 RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 1)

EQUIPMENT
CS1W-SCB21-V1 GT15-RS2-9P
CS1W-SCB41-V1
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each
4
CS1H
diagram 3) port of a serial
CS1G

CONNECTION TO
communication
CS1D GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) board
(0.2m)

OMRON PLC
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m)
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
CS1W-SCB41 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m)
RS-422 200m
CS1W-SCB41-V1 GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection
diagram 7)
- (Built into GOT) 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS422 connection

CONNECTION TO
200m - (Built into GOT)

CONTROLLER
diagram 11)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 15

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.7 System Configuration for connecting to C1000H or C2000H

Communication driver

C1000H Rack type

GOT
C2000H host link unit OMRON SYSMAC
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Model Rack type Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name host link unit*1 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20103-25P(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2) 1 GOT for
C1000H
C500-LK201-V1 1 rack type
C2000H GT16-C02R4-9S
host link unit
(0.2m)

GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
RS-422 200m
diagram 6) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection
200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 10)
*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

4 - 16 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
4.2.8 System Configuration for connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
CV500
CV1000
GOT
CV2000 OMRON SYSMAC
CVM1
Connection cable
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m)
3
or - (Built into GOT)
15m

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS232 connection diagram
RS-232 1)

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
4)

CV500 RS422 connection diagram

4
200m - (Built into GOT)
CV1000 1)
1 GOT for 1 PLC

CONNECTION TO
CV2000
CVM1 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m)

OMRON PLC
GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m)
GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m)
RS-422 GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) 200m GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram
- (Built into GOT)
5
5)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram
200m - (Built into GOT)

CONTROLLER
9)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 17

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.9 Connection Diagram RS232 connection diagram 3)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT side OMRON PLC side
GOT and the PLC.
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG

RD(RXD) 2 2 SD

SD(TXD) RD
 RS-232 cable
3 3

ER(DTR) 4 4 RS
(1) Connection diagram
SG 5 7 SG

RS232 connection diagram 1) DR(DSR) 6 5 CS

(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) RS(RTS) 7 6 -

GOT side OMRON PLC side CS(CTS) 8 8 -

- 9 20 ER
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,
RD(RXD) 2 2 SD
GT104 : NC, GT105 : NC
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
RS232 connection diagram 4)
ER(DTR) 4 4 RS
(For GT1020, GT1030)
SG 5 9 SG
GOT side
DR(DSR) 6 5 CS (terminal block) OMRON PLC side
RS(RTS) 7 6 -
SD 3 RD
CS(CTS) 8 7 FR
RD 2 SD
- 9 8 ER
ER 1 FG
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC, DR 4 RS
GT104 : NC, GT105 : NC
SG 9 SG
RS232 connection diagram 2)
RS 5 CS
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
CS 6 -
GOT side OMRON PLC side
NC 7 FR

CD/NC*1 1 8 - NC 8 ER

RD(RXD) 2 3 RD

SD(TXD) 3 2 SD

ER(DTR) 4 20 ER

SG 5 7 SG

DR(DSR) 6 6 DR

RS(RTS) 7 4 RS

CS(CTS) 8 5 CS

- 9 22 -

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,

GT104 : NC, GT105 : NC

4 - 18 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
RS232 connection diagram 5) 1
(For GT1020, GT1030)  RS-422 cable

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
(terminal block) OMRON PLC side
POINT
SD 2 SD
Differences in polarity between GOT and OMRON
RD 3 RD PLCs
ER 1 - The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is 2
reversed between GOT and OMRON PLCs.
DR 4 RS
Connect a cable according to the following

CONNECTION TO
SG 7 SG connection diagrams.

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
RS 5 CS

CS 6 DR (1) Connection diagram

NC 20 ER

NC
RS422 connection diagram 1)
(For GT16)
3

CONNECTION TO
GOT side OMRON PLC side

AZBIL CONTROL
RS232 connection diagram 6)

EQUIPMENT
(For GT1020, GT1030) SDA1(TXD1+) 1 8 RDB
GOT side SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 RDA
(terminal block) OMRON PLC side
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 2 SDB
SD 3 RD RDB1(RXD1-) 4 1 SDA 4
RD 2 SD SDA2(TXD2+) 5 4 RS

CONNECTION TO
ER 1 FG SDB2(TXD2-) 6 5 CS

OMRON PLC
DR 4 RS RDA2(RXD2+) 7

SG 7 SG RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RS 5 CS RSA(RTS+) 9

CS 6 - RSB(RTS-) 10 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
NC 8 - CSA(CTS+) 11

NC ER

CONNECTION TO
20 CSB(CTS-) 12

CONTROLLER
SG 13

NC 14

 Precautions when preparing a cable Shell

6
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) OMRON PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC. 7
For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual.
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 19

4.2 Serial Connection
RS422 connection diagram 2) RS422 connection diagram 4)
(For GT16) (For GT16)
GOT side OMRON PLC side GOT side OMRON PLC side

SDA1(TXD1+) 1 1 RDB SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RDB+

SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 RDA SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RDA-

RDA1(RXD1+) 3 5 SDB RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SDB+

RDB1(RXD1-) 4 9 SDA RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SDA-

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 SG SDA2(TXD2+) 5 FG

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 - FG SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7 RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RSA(RTS+) 9 RSA(RTS+) 9

RSB(RTS-) 10 RSB(RTS-) 10

CSA(CTS+) 11 CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12 CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13 SG 13

NC 14 NC 14

Shell Shell

RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 5)

(For GT16) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
GOT side OMRON PLC side GOT side OMRON PLC side

SDA1(TXD1+) 1 8 RDB SDA 1 8 RDB

SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 RDA SDB 6 6 RDA
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 2 SDB RDA 2 2 SDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 1 SDA RDB 7 1 SDA
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 - FG RSA 3 4 RS
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 CSA 4 5 CS
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 SG 5

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 RSB 8

RSA(RTS+) 9 CSB 9

RSB(RTS-) 10 FG -

CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13

NC 14

Shell

4 - 20 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
RS422 connection diagram 6) RS422 connection diagram 9) 1
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) (For GT1030, GT1020)

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side

PREPARATORY
GOT side OMRON PLC side

MONITORING
(terminal block) OMRON PLC side
FG - - FG
SDA 8 RDB
SDA 1 1 RDB
SDB 6 RDA
SDB
2
6 6 RDA
RDA 2 SDB
RDA 2 5 SDB
RDB 1 SDA

CONNECTION TO
RDB 7 9 SDA
SG 4 RS

CONTROLLER
SG 5 3 SG
RSA CS

IAI ROBOT
5
RSA 3
RSB
CSA 4
CSA
RSB 8
CSB 3
CSB 9

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS422 connection diagram 10)
RS422 connection diagram 7)

EQUIPMENT
(For GT1030, GT1020)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
GOT side
GOT side OMRON PLC side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

SDA 1 8 RDB SDA 1 RDB 4

SDB 6 6 RDA SDB 6 RDA

CONNECTION TO
RDA 2 2 SDB RDA 5 SDB

OMRON PLC
RDB 7 1 SDA RDB 9 SDA
RSA 3 4 RS SG 3 SG
CSA 4 5 CS RSA - FG
SG 5 RSB 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RSB 8 CSA

CONNECTION TO
CSB 9 CSB

CONTROLLER
FG -

RS422 connection diagram 11)

RS422 connection diagram 8) (For GT1030, GT1020)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) GOT side 6
(terminal block) OMRON PLC side
GOT side OMRON PLC side

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
SDA 8 RDB
SDA 1 RDB+
SDB 6 RDA
SDB 6 RDA-
RDA 2 SDB
RDB 7 SDA-
RDB 1 SDA
RDA 2 SDB+
SG 4 RS 7
RSA 3 FG
RSA 5 CS
CONNECTION TO

CSA 4
RSB
KOYO EI PLC

SG 5
CSA
RSB 8
CSB
CSB 9
FG
FG -
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 21

4.2 Serial Connection
RS422 connection diagram 12)
(For GT1030, GT1020)
GOT side
(terminal block) OMRON PLC side

SDA RDB+

SDB RDA-

RDA SDB+

RDB SDA-

SG FG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

 Precautions when preparing a cable

(1) Cable length
The distance between the GOT and the PLC of
connection diagram 1), 2) and 3) must be 200 m or
less.
The length of the RS-422 connection diagram 4) must
be 50m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) OMRON PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC.
For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual.

 Setting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side
• For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT
main unit to "Disable".
• For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".

For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the

following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) OMRON PLC side
When connecting an OMRON PLC to a GOT, a
terminating resistor must be set to the OMRON PLC.
OMRON PLC user's Manual

4 - 22 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.10 GOT Side Settings 1
 Communication detail settings

PROCEDURES FOR
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 Setting communication interface

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
(Communication settings)
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to
the GOT.

2
2.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
3.
3
Item Description Range
4. 4800bps,

CONNECTION TO
Set this item when change the

AZBIL CONTROL
9600bps,
transmission speed used for
19200bps,

EQUIPMENT
Transmission Speed communication with the
38400bps,
connected equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 19200bps)
115200bps
Set this item when change the
data length used for
Click!
Data Bit communication with the
connected equipment.
7bit (fixed) 4
(Default: 7bits)

CONNECTION TO
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 2bit (fixed)

OMRON PLC
(Default: 2bits)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Specify whether or not to
perform a parity check, and
menu. Parity how it is performed during Even (fixed)
communication.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: Even)
5
channel to be used from the list menu. Set the number of retries to be
performed when a

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Retry 0 to 5times
communication error occurs.
3. Set the following items. (Default: 0time)

CONNECTION TO
• Manufacturer: OMRON Set the time period for a

CONTROLLER
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
• Controller Type: Set the option according to the (Default: 3sec)
Controller Type to be connected. Specify the host address
• OMRON SYSMAC (station No. of the PLC to
Host Address which the GOT is connected) 0 to 31
• OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ
• I/F: Interface to be used
in the network of the GOT.
(Default: 0)
6
• Driver: OMRON SYSMAC Set this item to adjust the

CONNECTION TO
transmission timing of the

KEYENCE PLC
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Delay Time communication request from
the GOT.
0 to 300 (ms)

Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0ms)

Make the settings according to the usage
environment. POINT
4.2.10 Communication detail settings
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
7
The communication interface setting can be
CONNECTION TO

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
KOYO EI PLC

data.
POINT For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
The settings of connecting equipment can be User's Manual of GOT used.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. (2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
8
For details, refer to the following.
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 23

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.11 PLC Side Setting 4.2.12 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1,
CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C
adapter
POINT
OMRON PLC
 Device settings
Write the following set values to devices of each PLC
For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following
manuals. CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or
DM monitor.
OMRON PLC user's Manual
Device name Set value

DM6645 0001H(fixed)
Model name Refer to

CPM2A
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
4.2.12 2) 1)
CQM1, CQM1H
1) RS-232C port transmission speed setting *1*2
CS1, CJ1, CJ2 4.2.13 02H: 4800bps
PLC CPU CP1H, CP1L, CP1E 4.2.13
03H: 9600bps
DM6646
04H: 19200bps
C200H 4.2.12 2) RS-232C port communication frame format
CV500, CV1000, 03H (fixed): The settings are:
4.2.14 Start bit : 1 bit
CV2000, CVM1
Data length: 7 bits
CPM1-CIF01, CPM2C- Stop bit : 2 bits
RS-232C adapter 4.2.12
CIF01-V1 Parity : Even bits
CQM1-CIF01
DM6647 0000 (fixed)
Connection cable CQM1-CIF02 4.2.15
DM6648*3 0000 to 0031
CPM2C-CN111
DM6649 0000 (fixed)
C200H-LK201-V1 4.2.16
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
Rack type host link unit C200H-LK202-V1 4.2.16 shown.
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the RS-232C port as
C500-LK201-V1 4.2.16 that of the GOT side.
*3 Set the RS-232C port host link station No. according to the
CJ1W-SCU21 Host Address on the GOT side.

CJ1W-SCU41

CJ1W-SCU21-V1
HINT
Serial communication module CJ1W-SCU31-V1 4.2.17
Precautions for changing device values
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Before changing the device values, make sure that the
CS1W-SCU21 switch settings have been changed as follows:
CS1W-SCU21-V1 CPM2A:
The communication condition switch to "individual"
C200HW-COM02
Other PLC CPU:
C200HW-COM03 Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"
Communication board 4.2.18
C200HW-COM05

C200HW-COM06

CQM1-SCB41 4.2.18

CS1W-SCB21
Serial communication board CS1W-SCB21-V1
4.2.19
CS1W-SCB41
CS1W-SCB41-V1

CP1W-CIF11
RS-422A/485 Option board 4.2.20
CP1W-CIF12

RS-422A converter CJ1W-CIF11 4.2.21

4 - 24 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.13 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, (2) Setting on the CS1
1
CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
RUN

MONITORING
ERR/ALM

INH

 Setting DIP switches PRPHL/COMM

Set the DIP switches.

DIP switch
(1) Setting on the CJ1, CJ2
OPEN
(inside battery compartment)
MCPWR

OPEN
BUSY

2
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL

CONNECTION TO
COMM

DIP switch

CONTROLLER
PERIPHERAL
OPEN
(inside battery compartment)

IAI ROBOT
MCPWR
BUSY

PORT

PERIPHERAL

3
Switch Description Settings

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Enable/disable write

EQUIPMENT
SW1 OFF
PORT
to user memory (UM)

Enable/disable
automatic transfer of
SW2 OFF
user program at
Switch Description Settings ON
power ON 4
1

Enable/disable write
SW1 OFF Programming
to user memory (UM)
2

CONNECTION TO
console message
SW3 OFF
Enable/disable display language
3

OMRON PLC
automatic transfer of (Japanese/English)
SW2 OFF
4

user program at
Peripheral port
ON power ON
5

SW4 communication OFF

1

SW3 Free OFF condition

6

5
2

CJ1:
7

RS-232C
Peripheral port
3

OMRON TEMPERATURE
SW5 communication OFF
8

communication condition
4

SW4 OFF

CONNECTION TO
condition
User customized DIP

CONTROLLER
5

CJ2: SW6 OFF

switch
Free
6

Type specification for

RS-232C SW7 OFF
7

simplified backup
SW5 communication OFF
6
8

condition SW8 - OFF

User customized DIP
SW6 OFF
switch

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
Type specification for
SW7 OFF
simplified backup

SW8 - OFF

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 25

4.2 Serial Connection
(3) Setting on the CP1H, CP1L  Setting PLC system settings
Dip switch (1) CJ1, CJ2, CS1
Make the PLC system settings.

Channel Bit Item Set value

Arbitrary
ON
1

1H: Arbitrary settings

2
3

15 settings ON/
4 5

(fixed)
6

OFF

Serial
8 to 11 communication 0H: Upper link (fixed)
160
mode

3 Data bit 0H: 7bits (fixed)

Switch Description Settings 2 Stop bit 0H: 2bits (fixed)

0 to 1 Parity 0H: Even (fixed)

Option
SW4 Board OFF 00H: 9600bps
Slot1 05H: 4800bps
According Port 06H: 9600bps
to PLC 161 0 to 7 transmission 07H: 19200bps
Setup. speed*1*2 08H: 38400bps
Option 09H: 57600bps
SW5 Board OFF 0AH: 115200bps
Slot2
Host link station 0H to 1FH
163 0 to 7
No.*3 : No.00 to 31

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

(4) Setting on the CP1E shown.
Settings by DIP switch are not required. *2 Set the same port transmission speed as that of the GOT
side.
*3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address
on the GOT side.

HINT
Precautions for changing the PLC system settings
Before changing the PLC system settings, make sure
that the switch settings have been changed as follows:
CJ1, CJ2, CS1: Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"

4 - 26 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
(2) CP1H, CP1L, CP1E 4.2.14 Connecting to CV500/CV1000/ 1
CV2000 or CVM1

PROCEDURES FOR
Set the PLC system settings of the option slot
connected to the GOT.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Item Set value  Setting DIP switches
Mode Host link Set the DIP switches.

Parameter 7, 2, E

4800bps,9600bps,19200bps,
2
Baud rate*1*2
38400bps,57600bps,115200bps

CONNECTION TO
Unit number*3 00 to 31

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
PERIPHERAL

shown.
*2 Set the same port transmission speed as that of the GOT
side. HOST LINK

M/C
RS-232

*3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address
ON
RS-422

on the GOT side. DIP switch 3

(inside battery compartment)

CONNECTION TO
HINT

AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
Precautions for changing the PLC system settings
Before changing the PLC system settings, check the (1) Host link RS-422/232 switch
setting of the front DIP switch corresponding to the
option slot used at the time of communication with Settings
GOT.
RS-232
For RS-232 For RS-422
4
(3)Setting on the CP1H, CP1L communication communication
RS-422

CONNECTION TO
RS-232 (up) RS-422 (down)

OMRON PLC
(2) DIP switches

Settings
Switch
No. For RS-232 For RS-422
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
communication communication

ON
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6

CONNECTION TO
OFF (no
(terminating

CONTROLLER
6 terminating
resistor
resistor)
attached)

5 OFF

4 OFF 6
3 OFF

CONNECTION TO
2 OFF

KEYENCE PLC
1 OFF

 Setting PLC system settings

Make the PLC system settings. 7
Item Set value
CONNECTION TO

*1*2
KOYO EI PLC

Transmission speed 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps

Stop bit 2 stop bits (fixed)

Parity Even (fixed)

Data bit 7bits (Fixed)

8
Unit number*3 00 to 31
CONNECTION TO

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

shown.
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
JTEKT PLC

*3 Set the station No. according to the Host Address on the

GOT side.

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 27

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.15 Connecting to connection 4.2.16 Connecting to rack type host
cable link unit

 Device settings  Switch setting on C200H-LK201-V1

Write the following set values to devices of each PLC Set the switches accordingly.
CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or
DM monitor. Front Rear

LK201-V1
Device name Set value

ON 1 2 3 4
RUN XM
DM6650 0001H(fixed) (4)
RCV

b15 to b8 b7 to b0 ERROR

1) (5)
2)
1) RS-232C port transmission speed setting*1*2 (1) SW1 SW2 (1)
02H: 4800bps
03H: 9600bps (2) SW3 SW4 (3)
DM6651 04H: 19200bps
2) RS-232C port communication frame format
03H (fixed): The settings are:
Start bit : 1 bit (1) Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2)
Data length: 7 bits Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31.
Stop bit : 2 bits Set the station No. according to the Host Address on
Parity : Even bits the GOT side.
DM6652 0000 (fixed)
Rotary
Description Settings
DM6653 *3 0000 to 0031 switch

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are Machine No.
shown. SW1 upper digit 0 to 3
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the peripheral port as SW1 SW2 ( 101)
that of the GOT side.
*3 Set the peripheral port host link station No. according to the Machine No.
Host Address on the GOT side.
SW2 lower digit 0 to 9
( 100)

HINT
(2) Setting transmission speed (SW3)
Precautions for changing device values Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
Before changing the device values, make sure that the
switch settings have been changed as follows: Setting*1 Settings
CPM2A: The communication condition switch to 4 4800bps
"individual" SW3
CPM2C: The communication port function switch to 5 9600bps

"OFF" 6 19200bps

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

shown.

4 - 28 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
(3) Setting command level/parity/transmission code (2) Setting transmission speed (SW3)
1

PROCEDURES FOR
(SW4) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Setting details Setting*1 Settings
Settings Comman Transmissi 4 4800bps
Parity
d level on code SW3
SW4 5 9600bps
Levels 1, ASCII 7
2
(fixed)
2 and 3 Even bits
6 19200bps
2
enabled 2 stop bits *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
shown.

CONNECTION TO
(4) Setting DIP switches

CONTROLLER
(3) Setting command level/parity/transmission code

IAI ROBOT
(SW4)
Switch No. Set value
ON 1 2 3 4

1 OFF Setting details

Settings
2 OFF Command
level
Parity
Transmissi
on code
3
3 ON (1:N procedure) SW4
Levels 1, ASCII 7

CONNECTION TO
4 OFF (no 5V power supply) 2

AZBIL CONTROL
2 and 3 Even bits
(fixed)
enabled 2 stop bits

EQUIPMENT
(5) Setting the CTS switch
(4) Setting the 1:1/1:N procedure switch
Settings

0V
Settings
4
OFF (1:N procedure)

CONNECTION TO
 Switch setting on C200H-LK202-V1

OMRON PLC
Set the switches accordingly. (5) Setting the terminating resistor connection switch

Front Rear Settings

LK201-V1

RUN XM
ON (terminating resistor attached)
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RCV
(5) (4)

CONNECTION TO
ERROR

CONTROLLER
(1) SW1 SW2 (1)

(2) (3)
6
SW3 SW4

CONNECTION TO
(1) Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2)

KEYENCE PLC
Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31.
Set the station No. according to the Host Address on
the GOT side.

Rotary
switch
Description Settings 7
Machine No.
CONNECTION TO

SW1 upper digit 0 to 3

KOYO EI PLC

SW1 SW2 ( 101)

Machine No.
SW2 lower digit 0 to 9
( 100)
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 29

4.2 Serial Connection
 Switch setting on C500-LK201-V1 (6) Setting SW1 (Station No., Run/Stop)
Set the switches accordingly. Switch No. Settings Description

Front Rear 8 ON Run

8
7 OFF -
8
7
7
In operation (2) 6 6 6 OFF -
5
Receiving
4
(6) 5
Transmitting 5 Set the station No. within the
(3) 3
4
Transmission error 2
1 3 4 range of 00 to 31.
Mode selection 2 For details, refer to the
Host link 3 following manual.
Local 8 1
7
2 OMRON PLC user's
(4) 6
(1) 5
(7) Manual
4 1
3
(5) 2
1
(7) Setting SW2 (Transmission speed, Procedure,
Level)
(1) Setting host link/local
Switch No. Settings Description
Settings 8 ON Levels 1, 2
and 3
Host link 8 7 ON enabled
7
6 1:N
6 OFF
procedure
(2) RS-232C/RS-422 switch 5
4 5 OFF -
Settings 3
2 4
For RS-232 For RS-422 1 3 Transmission
communication communication *1
2 speed
RS-232 (down) RS-422 (up)
1

(3) Internal/external clock switch *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
shown.

Settings
Transmission Switch No.

Internal (up) speed SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

4800bps OFF ON ON OFF

(4) Terminating resistor connection switch 9600bps ON OFF ON OFF

19200bps OFF OFF ON OFF

Settings

Attached (down)

(5) CTS switch

Settings

0V (up)

4 - 30 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.17 Connecting to serial 4.2.18 Connecting to communication 1
communication unit board, serial communication

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
board (CQM1-SCB41)

MONITORING
 Device settings
Write the following set values to devices of each PLC  Device settings
CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or Write the following set values to devices of each PLC
DM monitor. CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or 2
DM monitor.
Device name

CONNECTION TO
Set value
Port 1 Port 2

CONTROLLER
Device name
Set value

IAI ROBOT
8000H(fixed): The settings are: Port B Port A
Port setting: Arbitrary setting
DM6550 DM6555 0001H(fixed)
Serial communication mode: Host link
DM
DM (m) Start bit: 1bit b15 to b8 b7 to b0
(m+10)
Data bit: 7bits
Stop bit: 2bits
2) 1) 3
*1*2
Parity: Even 1) Transmission speed

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
02H:4800bps
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 03H:9600bps

EQUIPMENT
DM6551 DM6556 04H:19200bps
0H 1)
2) Frame format setting
DM DM 1) Transmission speed*1*2 03H (fixed): The settings are:
(m+1) (m+11) 00H: 9600bps 08H: 38400bps Start bit :1 bit
05H: 4800bps
06H: 9600bps
09H: 57600bps
0AH: 115200bps
Data length:7 bits
Stop bit :2 bits 4
07H: 19200bps Parity :Even bits

CONNECTION TO
DM6552 DM6557 0000 (fixed)
DM DM
8000H(fixed)

OMRON PLC
(m+2) (m+12) DM6553 DM6558
0000 to 0031
*3 *3
DM DM
(m+3) (m+13) 8000H to 801FH *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
*3 *3 shown.

m = 30000 + (100 unit No.)

*2
*3
Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side.
Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address 5
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are on the GOT side.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
shown.
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

CONNECTION TO
*3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address

CONTROLLER
on the GOT side.

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 31

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.19 Connecting to serial
 Setting DIP switches (C200HW-COM3 and
C200HW-COM6 only) communication board (CS1W-
Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422 SCB21(-V1), CS1W-SCB41(-
communications on the C200HW-COM3 and C200HW- V1))
COM6.
C200HW-COM3 C200HW-COM6  Device settings
Write the following set values to devices of each PLC
RDY A RDY
COMB
A CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or
COMA COMA

DM monitor.

Device name
Set value
Port 1 Port 2

8000H(fixed):
The settings are:
B RS232

Port setting: Arbitrary setting

Serial communication mode: Host link
D32000 D32010
Start bit: 1bit
Data bit: 7bits
COMO3 A RS422/485 COMO6 A RS422/485
Stop bit: 2bits
Parity: Even

Side view indicated by A b15 to b8 b7 to b0

0H 1)
1) Transmission speed*1*2
D32001 D32011 00H: 9600bps 08H: 38400bps
05H: 4800bps 09H: 57600bps
06H: 9600bps 0AH: 115200bps
07H: 19200bps
ON

SW2
1

D32002 D32012 8000H(fixed)

SW1 D32003 D32013

0000H to 0001FH
*3 *3
4

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are

shown.
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
*3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address
DIP switch on the GOT side.
Set value
No. Item

RS-422/485 cable
SW1 4 (4-wire type)
(2-wire/4-wire type) switching

1 (no terminating resistor

SW2 Terminator ON/OFF
attached)

4 - 32 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.20 Connecting to RS-422A/485 1
 Setting the DIP switches (CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
Option board

PROCEDURES FOR
only)

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422
communications on the CS1W-SCB41(-V1).  Setting DIP switches
Set the DIP switches.
RDY
DIP Switches for Operation Settings
COMM1
COMM2 2

CONNECTION TO
COMM

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG

OFF ON TERM TERM

3
2 4 WIRE WIRE

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Switch

EQUIPMENT
Settings Description
No.
PORT2
(RS422/
RS485) Terminating
SCB41-V1
1 ON Enable resistance
selection
DIP switch
4-wire 2-wire or 4-
4
Set value 2 OFF
Name Description type wire selection

CONNECTION TO
O
N

Setting(2-wire/4-wire) 4-wire 2-wire or 4-

WIRE 4 (4-wire type) 3 OFF

OMRON PLC
1
2
3
4
5
6

Switch type wire selection

OFF (no terminating RS RS control

TERM Terminator ON/OFF switch
resistor) 5 ON control selection for
enabled RD

RS RS control 5
6 ON control selection for
HINT

OMRON TEMPERATURE
enabled SD

CONNECTION TO
Precautions for changing the DM area

CONTROLLER
Before changing the DM area, make sure that the
switch setting has been changed as follows.
CS1: Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 33

4.2 Serial Connection
 4.2.21 Connecting to RS-422A
converter

 Setting DIP switches

Set the DIP switches.

DIP switch

Switch
Settings Description
No.

Terminating
1 ON Enable resistance
selection

4-wire 2-wire or 4-
O 2 OFF
1
N
type wire selection
2
3
4 4-wire 2-wire or 4-
5 3 OFF
type wire selection
6
RS RS control
5 ON control selection for
enabled RD

RS RS control
6 ON control selection for
enabled SD

4 - 34 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.2 Serial Connection
 1
4.3 Ethernet Connection

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
4.3.1 System configuration

Communication driver

2
CS1H, CS1G, CS1D, Ethernet
CJ1H, CJ1M, CJ1G, module GOT
CJ2H Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of connectable
3
Maximum
Ethernet equipment
Series Cable model segment Option device Model*3

CONNECTION TO
module*4

AZBIL CONTROL
length*2

EQUIPMENT
- (Built into GOT) *7
CS1H CS1W-
CS1G ETN21 100m
CS1D CS1W-EIP21 GT15-J71E71-100

- (Built into GOT) *7 4

CS1D- When PLC:GOT is N:1
CS1D 100m
ETN21D The following shows the

CONNECTION TO
GT15-J71E71-100
number of PLCs for 1 GOT

OMRON PLC
Twisted pair cable*1 <For GT16, GT14>
- (Built into GOT) *7
CJ1H CJ1W- TCP: 128 or less
• 10BASE-T
CJ1M ETN21 100m UDP: 128 or less
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP)
CJ1G CS1W-EIP21 GT15-J71E71-100 <For GT15, GT12>
or unshielded twisted pair cable
TCP: 10 or less
(UTP):
Category 3, 4, and 5 - (Built into GOT) *7 UDP: 128 or less 5
• 100BASE-TX

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CJ2H- - 100m
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): When PLC:GOT is 1:N
CPU6 - GT15-J71E71-100
The following shows the

CONNECTION TO
Category 5 and 5e
EIP number of GOTs for 1 PLC

CONTROLLER
CJ2M- CJ1W- - (Built into GOT) *7
TCP: 16 or less*5
CPU3 ETN21 100m
UDP: No limit number*6
CS1W-EIP21 GT15-J71E71-100

CJ2H-
CJ1W- - (Built into GOT) *7 6
CPU6 -
ETN21 100m
CJ2M-

CONNECTION TO
CS1W-EIP21 GT15-J71E71-100
CPU1

KEYENCE PLC
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
*2 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 7
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
CONNECTION TO

When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
KOYO EI PLC

For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.

*4
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware)
Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation.
8
*5 If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection, the number of connectable GOTs decreases.
CONNECTION TO

For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual.

*6 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-
JTEKT PLC

loaded, and it may affect the communication performance.

*7 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 35

4.3 Ethernet Connection
 4.3.2 GOT side settings
 Communication detail settings
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) (1) GT16, GT14
Set the channel of the connected equipment.

2.

3.

4.

Item Description Range

Set the network No. of the
GOT NET No. GOT. 1 to 127
(Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No.*3 (Default: 1)
1 to 254

0.0.0.0 to
Set the IP address of the GOT.
GOT IP Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18)
255.255.255.
255

Click! Set the subnet mask for the

sub network. (Only for
0.0.0.0 to
connection via router) If the
Subnet Mask*1 sub network is not used, the
255.255.255.
255
default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Set the router address of the
default gateway where the 0.0.0.0 to
menu. Default Gateway *1 GOT is connected. (Only for 255.255.255.
connection via router) 255
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
channel to be used from the list menu. 5014 to
Ethernet Download Set the GOT port No. for 65534
3. Set the following items. Port No.*1
Ethernet download.
(Default: 5014)
(Except for
5011, 5012,
• Manufacturer: OMRON 5013 and
• Controller Type: OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ 49153)
• I/F: Interface to be used 1024 to 5010,
5014 to
• Driver: Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT Communication 65534
connection with the Ethernet
(Except for
Port No.*2 module.
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 5018)
5011, 5012,
5013 and
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. 49153)
Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
performed when a
environment. communication timeout
Retry occurs. When receiving no 0 to 5times
4.3.2 Communication detail settings response after retries, the
communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Specify the time period from
the GOT startup until GOT
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
starts the communication with
POINT the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
The settings of connecting equipment can be (Default: 3sec)
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. Set the delay time for reducing
For details, refer to the following. the load of the network/ 0 to 10000
Delay Time
destination PLC. (Default: ( 10ms)
1.1.2 I/F communication setting 0ms)

4 - 36 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.3 Ethernet Connection
*1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
(2) GT15, GT12
1
IP Address Setting] screen.

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Item Description Range
Set the network No. of the
*2 By setting of the OMRON PLC, set the same [GOT
Communication Port No.] setting as that of [FINS UDP Port ]
GOT NET No. GOT.
(Default: 1)
1 to 127
3
of CX-Programmer. Set the station No. of the GOT.
*3 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail GOT PLC No.*2 1 to 254

CONNECTION TO
(Default: 1)

AZBIL CONTROL
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
to different station numbers. 0.0.0.0 to
Set the IP address of the GOT.

EQUIPMENT
GOT IP Address 255.255.255.
 Ethernet setting (Default: 192.168.0.18)
255
Set the subnet mask for the
sub network. (Only for
0.0.0.0 to
connection via router) If the
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.
sub network is not used, the
default value is set.
255 4
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
Set the router address of the

CONNECTION TO
default gateway where the 0.0.0.0 to
Default Gateway GOT is connected. (Only for 255.255.255.

OMRON PLC
connection via router) 255
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
1024 to 5010,
5014 to
Set the GOT port No. for 65534
Ethernet Download
Port No.
Ethernet download.
(Default: 5014)
(Except for
5011, 5012,
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
5013 and
49153)

CONNECTION TO
1024 to 5010,
5014 to

CONTROLLER
Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT Communication 65534
connection with the Ethernet
(Except for
Port No.*1 module.
5011, 5012,
(Default: 5018)
5013 and
49153)
Set the number of retries to be 6
performed when a
communication timeout

CONNECTION TO
Retry occurs.When receiving no 0 to 5times

KEYENCE PLC
response after retries, the
communication times out.
(Default: 3times)
Specify the time period from
the GOT startup until GOT
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
starts the communication with
the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
7
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
CONNECTION TO

Set the delay time for reducing

KOYO EI PLC

the load of the network/ 0 to 10000

Delay Time
destination PLC. (Default: ( 10ms)
0ms)
*1 By setting of the OMRON PLC, set the same [GOT
Communication Port No.] setting as that of [FINS UDP Port ]

*2
of CX-Programmer.
Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail 8
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
to different station numbers.
CONNECTION TO

 Ethernet setting
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 37

4.3 Ethernet Connection
 Ethernet setting

Item Description Set value

The host is displayed. (The
Host host is indicated with an -
asterisk (*).)
Set the network No. of the
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 127
(Default: blank)
Set the station No. of the
PLC No.*1 connected Ethernet module. 1 to 254
(Default: blank)
OMRON
Type OMRON (fixed)
(fixed)
Set the IP address of the
PLC side IP
IP Address connected Ethernet module.
address
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the
Port No. connected Ethernet module. 256 to 65534
(Default: 9600)
Select a communication
Communication format UDP, TCP
protocol. (Default: UDP)
*1 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
to different station numbers.
 Communication detail settings

POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

4 - 38 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.3 Ethernet Connection
 4.3.3 PLC side setting 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
POINT
OMRON PLC
For the communication between OMRON PLC and GOT, use the FINS communication. 2
For the FINS communication, the node must be specified according to the realm of FINS. However, for the
Ethernet network, the data transfer according to the IP address is required.

CONNECTION TO
• Automatic conversion method (dynamic)

CONTROLLER
• Automatic conversion method (static)

IAI ROBOT
• IP address table conversion method
• Combined method
The following four methods are available for converting the FINS node address to the IP address.
For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manual. 3
OMRON PLC user's Manual

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
 Communication settings
For the PLC communication setting, set with a software for programming apparatus (CX-Programmer Ver.3.20 or
later).
(1) CX-Programmer setting
4
Setting range

CONNECTION TO
Item Automatic conversion method Automatic conversion
IP address table method*4*6 Combined method*4*6

OMRON PLC
(dynamic)*4 method (static)*4*5
Global All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default)
*1 *3 *3 [192]. [168]. [0]. [1] [192]. [168]. [0]. [1]
IP address [192]. [168]. [0]. [1] [192]. [168]. [0]. [1]
Subnet Mask [255]. [255]. [255]. [0] [255]. [255]. [255]. [0] [255]. [255]. [255]. [0] [255]. [255]. [255]. [0]
5
Ethernet FINS UDP port*1 9600 9600 9600 9600

OMRON TEMPERATURE
module IP address Automatic conversion Automatic conversion
IP address table method Combined method

CONNECTION TO
conversion method (dynamic) method (static)
CPU

CONTROLLER
10 [192]. [168]. [0]. [1]
highly- IP address table - - 10 [192]. [168]. [0]. [1]
11 [192]. [168]. [0]. [18]
functional
module Transmission
Automatic detection (Default) Automatic detection (Default) Automatic detection (Default) Automatic detection (Default)
speed
Node IP Address
Change dynamically Change dynamically Change dynamically Change dynamically
6
dynamically
(Default) (Default) (Default) (Default)
change*2

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
*1 Set the same [IP address] and [FINS UDP Port] settings as that of [IP address] and [Port No.] of the GT Designer3 Ethernet
setting.
*2 The Node IP Address dynamically change function is available only when the Ethernet module to be used is Ver.1.3 or later.
For the setting, set in the module setting of CX-ProgrammerVer.5.0 or later or in the WEB function.
For details of Node IP Address dynamically change, refer to the following manual.
OMRON PLC user's Manual 7
*3 Set the same lowermost bit of the [IP address] setting as that of the node setting switch of the module.
*4 Set the same [GOT Port No. (Communication)] In Communication detail settings as that of [Port No.] of the Ethernet setting.
CONNECTION TO

*5 Set the same lowermost bit of the [GOT IP address] in Communication detail settings as that of [GOT PLC No.].
KOYO EI PLC

*6 Set the same lowermost bit of the [GOT IP address] and [GOT PLC No.] in Communication detail settings of GT Designer3 as
that of [IP address table].

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 39

4.3 Ethernet Connection
 4.3.4 Precautions

 When connecting to multiple GOTs

(1) Setting PLC No.
When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet
network, set each [PLC No.] to the GOT.
4.3.2 Ethernet setting
(2) Setting IP address
Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using
multiple GOTs.
A communication error may occur on the GOT with the
IP address.

 When setting IP address

Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address.
(Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the
system.)
The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with
the above numbers.
Consult with the administrator of the network before
setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

 When connecting to the multiple network

equipment (including GOT) in a segment
By increasing the network load, the transmission speed
between the GOT and PLC may be reduced.
The following actions may improve the communication
performance.
• Using a switching hub
• More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps)
• Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

4 - 40 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.3 Ethernet Connection
 1
4.4 Device Range that Can Be Set

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. 4.4.1 OMRON PLC (OMRON
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the SYSMAC)
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ 2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device No.
Device name Setting range
same series. representation

CONNECTION TO
Please make the setting according to the specifications of I/O relay/internal

CONTROLLER
..000000 to ..614315
auxiliary relay (...)
the controller actually used.

IAI ROBOT
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
Auxiliary memory
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings AR00000 to AR95915 Decimal +
relay (AR)
may not be monitored. Hexadecimal
Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115 3
 Setting item Internal auxiliary
relay/Work relay WR00000 to WR51115

Bit device

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
(WR)

EQUIPMENT
Timer contact (TIM) TIM0000 to TIM4095
Counter contact Decimal
CNT0000 to CNT4095
(CNT)
Specified bit of the following
word devices
(except data link relay,
4
Word device bit*1*4 -
auxiliary memory relay,

CONNECTION TO
holding relay
and internal auxiliary relay.)

OMRON PLC
I/O relay/internal
Item Description ..0000 to ..6143
auxiliary relay (...)
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
Data link relay (LR) LR000 to LR199
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit
Auxiliary memory
of word device.
Displays the device type and setting range which are
relay (AR)
AR000 to AR959
5
Information Holding relay (HR) HR000 to HR511

OMRON TEMPERATURE
selected in [Device].
Internal auxiliary

CONNECTION TO
relay/Work relay WR000 to WR511

CONTROLLER
(WR)
Word device

Data memory (DM) DM00000 to DM32767

Decimal
Timer (current value)
*3*5
TIM0000 to TIM4095
(TIM)
Counter (current
CNT0000 to CNT4095
6
value) (CNT)*3*5

CONNECTION TO
Extension data

KEYENCE PLC
memory (EM current EM00000 to EM32767
bank)*2
Extension data E000000 to E032767
memory (E0 to EC: :
13banks)*2 EC00000 to EC32767

*1 When executing the touch switch function set during the bit 7
specification of the word device, do not write any data to the
word device through the sequence program.
CONNECTION TO

*2 Writing or reading the extension data memory using multiple

banks is not allowed.
KOYO EI PLC

*3 Timer (current value) and counter (current value) are valid

within the range of 0 to 9999.
(This applies to the 16 bit/32 bit device data.)
*4 This is not supported by GT10.
*5 “Timer (current value)” and “Counter (current value)” are
handled as BCD values by the PLC.
If the connection form between the PLC and the GOT is 8
serial, however, they are handled as unsigned binary 16-bit
data by the GOT. Set the data type of “Monitor object” in the
CONNECTION TO

GOT to “Unsigned BIN16”.

JTEKT PLC

4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4 - 41

4.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 4.4.2 OMRON PLC (OMRON
SYSMAC CS/CJ)

Device No.
Device name Setting range
representation
I/O relay/internal
..000000 to ..614315
auxiliary relay (...)
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
Auxiliary memory AR000000 to AR147115
Decimal +
relay (AR) AR1000000 to AR1153515
Hexadecimal
Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115
Internal auxiliary
relay/Work relay WR00000 to WR51115
Bit device

(WR)
Timer contact (TIM) TIM0000 to TIM4095
Counter contact Decimal
CNT0000 to CNT4095
(CNT)
Specified bit of the following
word devices
(except data link relay,
Word device bit*1*4 -
auxiliary memory relay,
holding relay
and internal auxiliary relay.)
I/O relay/internal
..0000 to ..6143
auxiliary relay (...)
Data link relay (LR) LR000 to LR199
Auxiliary memory AR0000 to AR1471
relay (AR) AR10000 to AR11535
Holding relay (HR) HR000 to HR511
Internal auxiliary
relay/Work relay WR000 to WR511
(WR)
Word device

Data memory (DM) DM00000 to DM32767

Decimal
Timer (current value)
*3*5
TIM0000 to TIM4095
(TIM)
Counter (current
CNT0000 to CNT4095
value) (CNT)*3*5
Extension data
memory (EM current EM00000 to EM32767
bank)*2
Extension data E000000 to E032767
memory (E0 to EC: :
13banks)*2 E1800000 to E1832767

*1 When executing the touch switch function set during the bit
specification of the word device, do not write any data to the
word device through the sequence program.
*2 Writing or reading the extension data memory using multiple
banks is not allowed.
*3 Timer (current value) and counter (current value) are valid
within the range of 0 to 9999.
(This applies to the 16 bit/32 bit device data.)
*4 This is not supported by GT10.
*5 “Timer (current value)” and “Counter (current value)” are
handled as BCD values by the PLC.
If the connection form between the PLC and the GOT is
serial, however, they are handled as unsigned binary 16-bit
data by the GOT. Set the data type of “Monitor object” in the
GOT to “Unsigned BIN16”.

4 - 42 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC

4.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 5
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO OMRON

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
5.

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
4
5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
5.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14

CONNECTION TO
5.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16

CONTROLLER
5.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

5-1
5. CONNECTION TO OMRON
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Refer to
Type

E5AN
E5EN RS-232
THERMAC NEO 5.2.1
E5CN RS-422
E5GN

RS-232
INPANEL NEO E5ZN 5.2.2
RS-422

5-2 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.1 Connectable Model List
 1
5.2 System Configuration

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
5.2.1 Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series

 When connecting to one temperature controller

Communication driver 2
E5AN
GOT OMRON
E5EN

CONNECTION TO
THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable

IAI ROBOT
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT
3
Cable model Number of connectable

CONNECTION TO
Communication Max.

AZBIL CONTROL
Model name Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Type distance

EQUIPMENT
number

- (Built into GOT)

E5AN RS232 connection 1 temperature controller for 1
RS-232 15m
E5EN diagram 1) GOT
4
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via an interface converter)
Communication driver
E5AN,E5EN,
E5CN,E5GN
E5AN,E5EN,
E5CN,E5GN
Interface
converter
GOT OMRON 5
THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Connection cable 2)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6
Connection cable 1)

Temperature
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT

CONNECTION TO
controller Number of

KEYENCE PLC
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max. Option equipment
Model name Connection Connection Model
distance name Type distance device
diagram number diagram number

E5AN
E5EN
RS485 RS232
- (Built into
GOT)
32 temperature 7
connection 500m K3SC-10 RS-232 connection 15m controllers for 1
E5CN
GOT
CONNECTION TO

E5GN diagram 1) diagram 2)

GT15-RS2-9P
KOYO EI PLC

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON
Corporation.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5-3

5.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple temperature controllers
Communication driver
E5AN,E5EN, E5AN,E5EN,
GOT OMRON
E5CN,E5GN E5CN,E5GN
THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

Connection cable

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT

Cable model Number of connectable

Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection diagram Option device Model
Type distance
number

RS485 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05(0.5m)
RS485 connection
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10(1m)
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20(2m)
E5AN
E5EN 31 temperature controllers for
RS-422 RS485 connection
E5CN 500m GT15-RS4-TE 1 GOT
diagram 4)
E5GN
RS485 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

RS485 connection
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*1
diagram 5)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

5-4 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.2 System Configuration
 5.2.2 Connecting to the INPANEL NEO 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via interface converter)

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Interface
E5ZN E5ZN GOT
converter OMRON
THERMAC/INPANEL NEO
Connection cable 2) 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1)

Temperature
controller
Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of
3
Cable model Cable model connectable
Max. Model Communication Max.

CONNECTION TO
equipment

AZBIL CONTROL
Model name Connection Connection Option device Model
distance name Type distance
diagram number diagram number

EQUIPMENT
- (Built into 16
RS485 RS232
GOT) temperature
E5ZN connection 500m K3SC-10 RS-232 connection 15m
diagram 1) diagram 2)
controllers for
1 GOT 4
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation.For details of the product, contact OMRON
Corporation.

OMRON PLC
 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers
Communication driver 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
E5ZN E5ZN GOT OMRON
THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
Temperature controller Connection cable GOT

Communication Cable model Max. Number of connectable equipment

Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)
7
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485 connection
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
CONNECTION TO

diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)

KOYO EI PLC

15 temperature controllers for 1

E5ZN RS-422 RS485 connection
500m GT15-RS4-TE GOT
diagram 4)

RS485 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 6) 8
RS485 connection
500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*1
CONNECTION TO

diagram 5)
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).
JTEKT PLC

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5-5

5.2 System Configuration
 5.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC.
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less
5.3.1 RS-232 cable
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
 Connection diagram
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RS232 connection diagram 1)
OMRON temperature
(3) OMRON temperature controller side connector
GOT side controller side Use the connector compatible with the OMRON
temperature controller.
- 1 13 SG For details, refer to the user's manual of the OMRON
RD(RXD) 2 11 SD temperature controller.
SD(TXD) 3 12 RD

ER(DTR) 4

SG 5

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

NC 9

FG -

RS232 connection diagram 2)

GOT side Interface converter (K3SC-10)

- 1 3 SG

RD(RXD) 2 6 RD

SD(TXD) 3 5 SD

ER(DTR) 4

SG 5

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

NC 9

FG -

5-6 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.3 Connection Diagram
5.3.2 RS-485 cable 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 Connection diagram

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
RS485 connection diagram 1)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

1
Interface converter Temperature Temperature *
(K3SC-10) controller side
*1
controller side 2
A(-) A(-)
A(-)

CONNECTION TO
B(+) B(+)
B(+)

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following. 3
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.

CONNECTION TO
Model of temperature controller

AZBIL CONTROL
Interface
E5AN converter

EQUIPMENT
Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN (K3SC-10)
E5CN
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
A(-) 12 6 24 8
B(+) 11 5 23 11
4
RS485 connection diagram 2)

CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

OMRON PLC
Temperature Temperature Temperature
GOT side*3 controller side controller side controller side
B(+) B(+) B(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1

SDB1(TXD1-) 2
A(-) A(-) A(-)
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RDA1(RXD1+) 3

RDB1(RXD1-) 4

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 6
RSA(RTS+) 9

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
RSB(RTS-) 10

CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13

NC 14
7
Shell
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to ”Enable”.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

Model of temperature controller

8
E5AN
CONNECTION TO

Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN

E5CN
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
JTEKT PLC

A(-) 12 6 24
B(+) 11 5 23

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5-7

5.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 3)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

Temperature Temperature Temperature

GOT side*3 controller side*1 controller side*1 controller side*1
B(+) B(+) B(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 6
A(-) A(-) A(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8

NC 1

SG 2

SDA2(TXD2+) 5

NC 3

SDB2(TXD2-) 7

NC 4

RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDA1(RXD1+) 10

RDB2(RXD2-) 11

RDB1(RXD1-) 12

NC 13

RSA(RTS+) 14

NC 15

RSB(RTS-) 16

NC 17

CSA(CTS+) 18

NC 19

CSB(CTS-) 20

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to ”Enable”.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

Model of temperature controller

E5AN
Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN
E5CN

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

A(-) 12 6 24

B(+) 11 5 23

5-8 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 4) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

PREPARATORY
Temperature Temperature Temperature

MONITORING
GOT side*3 controller side*1 controller side*1 controller side*1
B(+) B(+) B(+)
SDA1 1
A(-) A(-) A(-)
SDB1 2

RDA1 3 2
RDB1 4

CONNECTION TO
SDA2

CONTROLLER
5

IAI ROBOT
SDB2 6

RDA2 7

RDB2 8

SG 9
3
FG 10

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to ”Enable”.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

4
Model of temperature controller

CONNECTION TO
E5AN
Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN

OMRON PLC
E5CN

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

A(-) 12 6 24

B(+) 11 5 23 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS485 connection diagram 5)

CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

CONTROLLER
GOT Temperature Temperature Temperature
side*3 controller side*1 controller side*1 controller side*1
B(+) B(+) B(+)
SDA

SDB
A(-) A(-) A(-) 6
RDA

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
RDB

SG

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following.
*2
*3
Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and GOT which will be terminating resistors.
Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
7
2-wire type/4-wire type : 2-wire type (1Pair)
CONNECTION TO

Terminating resistor : OPEN

1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
KOYO EI PLC

Model of temperature controller

E5AN
Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN
E5CN 8
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.
CONNECTION TO

A(-) 12 6 24
JTEKT PLC

B(+) 11 5 23

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5-9

5.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 6)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

Temperature Temperature Temperature
GOT side*3 controller side*1 controller side*1 controller side*1
B(+) B(+) B(+)
SDA 1
A(-) A(-) A(-)
SDB 6

RDA 2

RDB 7

SG 5

RSA 3

CSA 4

RSB 8

CSB 9

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to ”110Ω”.

1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

Model of temperature controller

E5AN
Signal name E5EN E5GN E5ZN
E5CN

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

A(-) 12 6 24

B(+) 11 5 23

5 - 10 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.3 Connection Diagram
 1
 Precautions when preparing a cable

PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Cable length

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
2
(3) OMRON temperature controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the OMRON

CONNECTION TO
temperature controller.

CONTROLLER
For details, refer to the user's manual of the OMRON

IAI ROBOT
temperature controller.

 Setting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side 3
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT

CONNECTION TO
main unit to "100 OHM".

AZBIL CONTROL
For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the

EQUIPMENT
following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) OMRON temperature controller side
When connecting a OMRON temperature controller to 4
the GOT, the terminating resistor must be connected to
the OMRON temperature controller.

CONNECTION TO
User's Manual of the OMRON temperature

OMRON PLC
controller

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 - 11

5.3 Connection Diagram
 5.4 GOT Side Settings
5.4.1 Setting communication
5.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.

4.
Item Description Range

Set this item when change the 9600bps,

transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission Speed communication with the 38400bps,
connected equipment. 57600bps,
Click! (Default: 9600bps) 115200bps

Set this item when change the

data length used for
Data Bit communication with the 7bits/8bits
connected equipment.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 7bits)
menu.
Specify the stop bit length for

2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the

Stop Bit communications.
(Default: 2bits)
1bit/2bits

channel to be used from the list menu.

Specify whether or not to
3. Set the following items.
Parity
perform a parity check, and
how it is performed during
None
Even
• Manufacturer: OMRON communication. Odd
• Controller Type: OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL (Default: Even)
NEO
Set the number of retries to be
• I/F: Interface to be used performed when a
Retry 0 to 5times
• Driver: OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO communication error occurs.
(Default: 0time)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Set the time period for a
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: 3sec)
environment. Set this item to adjust the
5.4.2 Communication detail settings transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from 0 to 300 (ms)
the GOT.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (Default: 2ms)

Select the communication

POINT format.
(Default: 1)
Format format 1: only continuous 1/2
The settings of connecting equipment can be
access
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
format 2: continuous and
For details, refer to the following. random access
1.1.2 I/F communication setting

5 - 12 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.4 GOT Side Settings
 1
POINT

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
(1) Delay Time
When connecting to the temperature controller
E5ZN, set the delay time to 5ms or more.
(2) Format setting
The compatible format of temperature controller
differs depending on models.
2

CONNECTION TO
Model Compatible format

CONTROLLER
E5AN, E5CN, E5EN, E5GN Format 1 only

IAI ROBOT
E5ZN Format 1 or Format 2

For the continuous access and random access of

the temperature controller, refer to the following
manual.
3
User's Manual of the OMRON temperature

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
controller

EQUIPMENT
(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
4
manual.

CONNECTION TO
User's Manual of GOT used.

OMRON PLC
(4) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 - 13

5.4 GOT Side Settings
 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting

5.5.3 Connection to interface

POINT
converter (K3SC-10)
OMRON temperature controller
For details of OMRON temperature controller, refer to  Communication settings
the following manual.
Make the communication settings by operating the DIP
User's Manual of the OMRON temperature switch of the temperature controller.
controller
Item Set value

*1 19200bps, 38400bps
Model name Refer to Transmission speed

*1 7 bits, 8 bits
E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN 5.5.1 Data bit
Temperature controller
E5ZN 5.5.2 Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None
Interface converter K3SC-10 5.5.3
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication Type RS-232 RS485

5.5.1 Connecting E5AN, E5EN,
*2 With, Without
E5CN, E5GN Echo back

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Set to “Without”.
Set the communication data by operating the key of the
temperature controller.  Settings by DIP switch
Item Set value
Terminal block
Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)
for RS-422/485
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps communication

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

DIP switch
Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

*3 ON
CMWT (Communications writing)

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. Terminal block

*2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with for RS-232
that of other units. communication
*3 When changing the device values of the temperature
controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications Front of K3SC-10 body Inside of K3SC-10 body
writing) in advance. (When removing the front cover)

5.5.2 Connecting E5ZN

(1) Transmission speed settings
Set the communication data by operating the key of the
temperature controller. Switch No.
Transmission
speed (bps) 1 2 3
Item Set value Set these
1200 ON OFF OFF switches.
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 38400bps
2400 OFF ON OFF
Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits
4800 ON ON OFF
Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None
9600 OFF OFF OFF
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits
19200 ON OFF ON SW
Communication unit No.*2 0 to 15
ON
38400 OFF ON ON
CMWT (Communications writing) *3 ON

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with
that of other units.
*3 When changing the device values of the temperature
controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications
writing) in advance.

5 - 14 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting
(2) Settings of data length, parity bit, stop bit, master/ 5.5.4 Station No. settings 1

PROCEDURES FOR
slave device and echoback

PREPARATORY
Set each station number so that no station number

MONITORING
overlaps.
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
Station
No.3
Station
No.7
Station
No.1
Station
No.15
Station
No.6
2

CONNECTION TO
GOT
SW

CONTROLLER
ON

IAI ROBOT
Set these switches. Examples of station number setting

(1) Direct specification

Setting
Set value
Switch No.
When setting the device, specify the station number of 3
item 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 the temperature controller of which data is to be
changed.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
7bits OFF
Data bit

EQUIPMENT
8bits ON Specification
Model name
range
2bits OFF
Stop bit E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN 0 to 99
1bit ON
E5ZN 0 to 15
Even OFF OFF
4
Parity Odd ON OFF (2) Indirect specification

CONNECTION TO
None OFF ON When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
number of the temperature controller of which data is to

OMRON PLC
Commun RS232 RS422 OFF ON
ication
be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register
Type RS-232 RS485 OFF OFF (GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Without OFF
Echo Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
back With ON the station No. specification will be the station No. of 5
the temperature controller.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Specification Compatible

CONNECTION TO
Setting range
station NO. device

CONTROLLER
100 GD10
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13 6
104 GD14

CONNECTION TO
105 GD15

KEYENCE PLC
106 GD16 0 to 99: For E5AN, E5EN, E5CN or E5GN
0 to 15: For E5ZN
107 GD17
For the setting other than the above, error
108 GD18 (dedicated device is out of range) will
109 GD19 occur.
110 GD20 7
111 GD21
CONNECTION TO

112 GD22
KOYO EI PLC

113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

(3) All station specification 8

Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
read-out operation.
CONNECTION TO

• For write-in operation, all station will be a target.

• For read-out operation, only one station will be a
JTEKT PLC

target.

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 - 15

5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting
 5.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the POINT
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of OMRON temperature controller
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
same series. (1) When setting the (S)
Make settings for status by a channel number and
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
the controller actually used. a bit position.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.
Bit position
 Setting item Channel No.
(2) When setting variable area (0), variable area (1)
and variable area (2)
Make setting for variable areas by a channel
number and address.

Address
Channel No.

Item Description 5.6.1 OMRON temperature

Set the device name, device number, and bit number. controller (OMRON
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
word device. THERMAC/INPANEL NEO)
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information
selected in [Device]. Device No.
Set the monitor target of the set device. Device name Setting range
representation
Select this item when writing data to all
temperature connected.
Bit device

During monitoring, the temperature controller of S0000 to S0031

Status (S)*1 Decimal
station No.0 is monitored. S0100 to S0131
All (When writing the data in numerical input, the
data is written to all connected temperature
controllers during input, and the temperature Operation command
A0000 to A000C Hexadecimal
controller of station No. 0 is monitored during (A)*2
other than input (displaying).) Variable area 0 C00000 to C00006
Word device

Network Select this item when monitoring the temperature

(C0)*1*3 C00100 to C00106
controller of the specified station No.
Variable area 1 C10000 to C1001C Decimal +
After selecting, set the station No. in the following
range. (C1)*3 C10100 to C1011C Hexadecimal
0 to 99: To monitor the temperature Variable area 3 C30000 to C3003E
Station
controller of the specified station (C3)*3 C30100 to C3013E
No.
No.
100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the
temperature controller to be *1 Only reading is possible.
*2 Only writing is possible.
monitored by the value of GOT Numerical input cannot be used.
data register (GD).*1 When writing, use [Word Set] of a data set switch.
*3 Only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed.
*1 The following table shows the relation between station
numbers of the PLC and the GOT data register.

Station GOT data register

Setting range
No. (GD)
100 GD10 0 to 99
101 GD11 (If setting a value outside
: : the range above, a
114 GD24 device range error
115 GD25 occurs.)

5 - 16 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

5.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 1
5.7 Precautions

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
 Station number setting of the temperature

MONITORING
controller system
Make sure to establish temperature controller system
with No.1 station.
2
 GOT clock control

CONNECTION TO
Since the temperature controller does not have a clock

CONTROLLER
function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [Broadcast]

IAI ROBOT
by GOT clock control will be disabled.

 Disconnecting some of multiple connected

equipment
The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected
3
equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example,

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
the faulty station where a communication timeout error

EQUIPMENT
occurs can be disconnected from connected
equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the
following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 4

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 - 17

5.7 Precautions
5 - 18 5. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
5.7 Precautions
 6
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
6.

3
6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
6.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3

EQUIPMENT
4

CONNECTION TO
6.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17

OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6-1
6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.

Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to

RS-232

RS-422 6.2.1
KV-5500
KV-5000 RS-485

Ethernet 6.3.1

RS-232

RS-422 6.2.2
KV-3000
RS-485

Ethernet 6.3.1

RS-232

RS-422 6.2.3
KV-1000
RS-485

Ethernet 6.3.1

RS-232

RS-422 6.2.4
KV-700
RS-485

Ethernet 6.3.1

6-2 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.1 Connectable Model List
 1
6.2 Serial Connection

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
6.2.1 Connecting to KV-5500, KV-5000

Communication driver
Multi-
KV-5000 communication GOT
KEYENCE KV-700/1000
2
unit
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT

Model Multi-communication Communication Cable model Max.

Number of
connectable 3
*2
Option device Model equipment
name unit Type Connection diagram number distance

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
KV-L20V RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 2)
(port 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
4
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 5)

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
15m
RS232 connection
RS-232 diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
1 GOT for 1
GT16-C02R4-9S
KV-5500 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) multi-
(0.2m)
KV-5000 communication
GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m)
GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 unit 6
RS-422 GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) 500m
GT15-RS4-9S

CONNECTION TO
or
KV-L20V

KEYENCE PLC
RS422 connection
(port 2) - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)

RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3)

RS485 connection
7
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
CONNECTION TO

GT16-C02R4-9S
KOYO EI PLC

(0.2m)

RS485 connection GT15-RS4-9S

RS-485 500m
diagram 2)

- (Built into GOT)

8
RS485 connection
CONNECTION TO

500m - (Built into GOT)

diagram 3)
JTEKT PLC

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6-3

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.2 Connecting to KV-3000

 When connecting to a PLC

Communication driver

KV-3000 GOT
KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Model Communication Cable model Conversion Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number connector*1 distance

GT09-C30R21101-6P
or - (Built into GOT)
- 15m
RS232 connection diagram
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

KV-3000 RS-232 - 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
4)

- (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m

GT15-RS2-9P

*1 The cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

6-4 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to multi-communication unit

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Multi-
KV-3000 communication GOT
unit KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

IAI ROBOT
Model Multi-communication Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name unit*2 Type Connection diagram number distance

GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m)
or - (Built into GOT) 3
15m
KV-L20V RS232 connection diagram

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS-232 2)
(port 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

EQUIPMENT
RS232 connection diagram
15m - (Built into GOT)
5)

GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m)
- (Built into GOT)
4
or
15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram
RS-232 3)

OMRON PLC
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
6)

RS422 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT)
5
1)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1 GOT for 1
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) multi-

CONNECTION TO
KV-3000 (0.2m)

CONTROLLER
GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) communication
GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 unit
RS-422 GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) 500m
GT15-RS4-9S
or
KV-L20V
(port 2)
RS422 connection diagram
2)
- (Built into GOT) 6

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram

KEYENCE PLC
500m - (Built into GOT)
3)

RS485 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT)
1)

GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
7
RS485 connection diagram GT15-RS4-9S
CONNECTION TO

RS-485 500m
2)
KOYO EI PLC

- (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT)
3)
8
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*2 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
CONNECTION TO

For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6-5

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.3 Connecting to KV-1000

 When connecting to PLC

Communication driver

KV-1000 GOT
KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Model Communication Cable model Conversion Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number connector*1 distance

GT09-C30R21101-6P
or - (Built into GOT)
- 15m
RS232 connection diagram
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

KV-1000 RS-232 - 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
4)

- (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m

GT15-RS2-9P

*1 The cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

6-6 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to multi-communication unit

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Multi-
KV-1000 communication GOT
unit KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of

IAI ROBOT
Multi- connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max.
communication Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number distance
unit*2

GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m)
3
or - (Built into GOT)
15m

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
KV-L20R, RS232 connection diagram
KV-L20V RS-232 2)

EQUIPMENT
(port 1) GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
5)

4
GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
15m
RS232 connection diagram

OMRON PLC
RS-232 3)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
6)

RS422 connection diagram

5
500m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1)
1 GOT for 1

CONNECTION TO
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m)

CONTROLLER
(0.2m) multi-
KV-1000 GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) communication
GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1 unit
RS-422 GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) 500m
GT15-RS4-9S
or
KV-L20R,
KV-L20V RS422 connection diagram 6
- (Built into GOT)
(port 2) 2)

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
RS422 connection diagram
500m - (Built into GOT)
3)

RS485 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT)
1)

GT16-C02R4-9S 7
(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO

RS485 connection diagram GT15-RS4-9S

RS-485 500m
KOYO EI PLC

2)

- (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram

3)
500m - (Built into GOT) 8
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CONNECTION TO

*2 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.

For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6-7

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.4 Connecting to KV-700

 When connecting to PLC

Communication driver

KV-700 GOT
KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Model Communication Cable model Conversion Max. connectable
Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number connector*1 distance

GT09-C30R21101-6P
or - (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection diagram

1) - 15m
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

KV-700 RS-232 - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC
4)

- (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m

GT15-RS2-9P

*1 The cable, conversion connector, and multi-communication unit are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

6-8 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
 1
 When connecting to multi-communication unit

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Multi-
KV-700 communication GOT
unit KEYENCE KV-700/1000
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of

IAI ROBOT
Multi- connectable
Model Communication Cable model Max.
communication Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number distance
unit*2

GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m)
3
or - (Built into GOT)
KV-L20R, 15m

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
KV-L20, RS232 connection diagram
RS-232 2)

EQUIPMENT
KV-L20V
GT15-RS2-9P
(port 1)

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
5)
4
GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
15m
RS232 connection diagram

OMRON PLC
RS-232 3)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram

15m - (Built into GOT)
6)
5
RS422 connection diagram

OMRON TEMPERATURE
500m - (Built into GOT)
1)

CONNECTION TO
GT16-C02R4-9S

CONTROLLER
GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) 1 GOT for 1 multi-
KV-700 (0.2m)
GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) communication unit
GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS-422 GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) 500m
KV-L20R, GT15-RS4-9S
or
KV-L20,
RS422 connection diagram
6
KV-L20V - (Built into GOT)
2)
(port 2)

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
RS422 connection diagram
500m - (Built into GOT)
3)

RS485 connection diagram

500m - (Built into GOT)
1)

GT16-C02R4-9S
7
(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO

RS485 connection diagram GT15-RS4-9S

RS-485 500m
KOYO EI PLC

2)

- (Built into GOT)

RS485 connection diagram

3)
500m - (Built into GOT) 8
*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CONNECTION TO

*2 The conversion connector and multi-communication unit are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION.
For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6-9

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.5 Connection Diagram

The following diagram shows the connection between the

RS232 connection diagram 3)
GOT and the PLC.
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

KEYENCE PLC side

 RS-232 cable GOT side (terminal block)

(1) Connection diagram - 1 2 -

RS232 connection diagram 1) RD(RXD) 2 3 SD
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
SD(TXD) 3 5 RD
KEYENCE PLC side
ER(DTR) 4 4 -
GOT side (Modular 6-pin)
SG 5 1 SG
- 1 1 +5V
DR(DSR) 6
RD(RXD) 2 5 SD
RS(RTS) 7
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
CS(CTS) 8
ER(DTR) 4 2 +5V
- 9
SG 5 4 SG

DR(DSR) 6 6 SG RS232 connection diagram 4)

RS(RTS) 7 (For GT1030, GT1020)

CS(CTS) 8 GOT side KEYENCE PLC side

(terminal block) (Modular 6-pin)
- 9

SD 3 RD
RS232 connection diagram 2) RD 5 SD
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) ER 1 +5V
KEYENCE PLC side DR 2 +5V
GOT side (D-sub 9-pin)
SG 4 SG
- 1 1 CD SG
RS 6

RD(RXD) 2 3 SD
CS
SD(TXD) 3 2 RD
NC
ER(DTR) 4 6 DR
NC
SG 5 5 SG

DR(DSR) 6 4 ER

RS(RTS) 7 8 CS

CS(CTS) 8 7 RS

- 9 9 -

6 - 10 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
RS232 connection diagram 5) 1
(For GT1030, GT1020)  RS-422 cable

PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Connection diagram

PREPARATORY
GOT side KEYENCE PLC side

MONITORING
(terminal block) (D-sub 9-pin)
RS422 connection diagram 1)
SD 2 RD (For GT16)

RD 3 SD KEYENCE PLC side

GOT side (terminal block)
ER 6 DR
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 4 RDB(+)
2
DR 4 ER

CONNECTION TO
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 2 RDA(-)
SG 5 SG

CONTROLLER
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 5 SDB(+)

IAI ROBOT
RS 8 CS
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 3 SDA(-)
CS 7 RS
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 SG
NC 1 CD

NC 9 -
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
3
RDA2(RXD2+) 7

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RS232 connection diagram 6)

EQUIPMENT
(For GT1030, GT1020) RSA(RTS+) 9

GOT side KEYENCE PLC side RSB(RTS-) 10

(terminal block) (terminal block)
CSA(CTS+) 11

SD 5 RD CSB(CTS-) 12
4
RD 3 SD SG 13

CONNECTION TO
ER 2 - NC 14

OMRON PLC
DR 4 - Shell

SG 1 SG
RS422 connection diagram 2)
RS
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
CS 5
KEYENCE PLC side

OMRON TEMPERATURE
NC
GOT side (terminal block)
NC

CONNECTION TO
SDA 1 4 RDB(+)

CONTROLLER
RDA 2 5 SDB(+)
(2) Precaution when preparing a cable
RSA 3 1 SG
(a) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be within CSA 4 2 RDA(-)
6
15m. SG 5 3 SDA(-)
(b) GOT side connector

CONNECTION TO
SDB 6
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
KEYENCE PLC
RDB 7
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(c) KEYENCE PLC side connector RSB 8

Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE CSB 9

PLC side module.
For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's FG -
7
manual.
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 11

6.2 Serial Connection
RS422 connection diagram 3)
(For GT1030, GT1020)  RS-485 cable
GOT side KEYENCE PLC side (1) Connection diagram
(terminal block) (terminal block)
RS485 connection diagram 1)
SDA 4 RDB(+) (For GT16)

SDB 2 RDA(-) KEYENCE PLC side

GOT side (terminal block)
RDA 5 SDB(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 4 RDB(+)
RDB 3 SDA(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 2 RDA(-)
SG 1 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 5 SDB(+)
RSA
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 3 SDA(-)
RSB
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 SG
CSA
SDB2(TXD2-) 6
CSB
RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RSA(RTS+) 9

(2) Precautions when preparing a cable RSB(RTS-) 10

(a) Cable length
CSA(CTS+) 11
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or
less CSB(CTS-) 12

(b) GOT side connector SG 13

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
NC 14
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Shell
(c) KEYENCE PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE
PLC side module. RS485 connection diagram 2)
For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
manual.
KEYENCE PLC side
(3) Connecting terminating resistors GOT side (terminal block)
(a) GOT side
SDA 1 4 RDB(+)
When connecting a KEYENCE PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. RDA 2 5 SDB(+)
• For GT16, GT15, GT12
RSA 3 1 SG
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable". CSA 4 2 RDA(-)
• For GT14, GT11, GT10 SG 5 3 SDA(-)
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
SDB 6

For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, RDB 7

refer to the following. RSB 8
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
CSB 9

FG

6 - 12 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
RS485 connection diagram 3) 1
(For GT1030, GT1020)

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT side KEYENCE PLC side

MONITORING
(terminal block) (terminal block)

SDA 4 RDB(+)

SDB 2 RDA(-)

RDA 5 SDB(+) 2
RDB 3 SDA(-)

CONNECTION TO
SG 1 SG

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
(2) Precautions when preparing a cable

EQUIPMENT
(a) Cable length
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or
less
(b) GOT side connector 4
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

CONNECTION TO
(c) KEYENCE PLC side connector

OMRON PLC
Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE
PLC side module.
For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's
manual.
5
(3) Connecting terminating resistors

OMRON TEMPERATURE
(a) GOT
• For GT16, GT15, GT12

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
• For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
6
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor,
refer to the following.

CONNECTION TO
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(b) KEYENCE PLC KEYENCE PLC
Connect the terminating resistor on the KEYENCE
PLC side when connecting a GOT to a KEYENCE
PLC.
6.2.7 PLC Side Setting 7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 13

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.6 GOT Side Settings

 Setting communication interface

(Communication settings)  Communication detail settings
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to Make the settings according to the usage environment.
the GOT.

2.

3.

4.

Item Contents Range

9600bps,
Set this item when change the
19200bps,
Transmission transmission speed used for
38400bps,
Click! Speed communication with the connected
57600bps,
equipment. (Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
with the connected equipment.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 8bits)
menu. Stop Bit
Specify the stop bit length for
1bit/2bits
communications. (Default: 1bit)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Specify whether or not to perform a
None
parity check, and how it is
channel to be used from the list menu. Parity Even
performed during communication.
Odd
(Default: Even)
3. Set the following items. Set the number of retries to be
• Manufacturer: KEYENCE Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times
• Controller Type: KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/ error occurs. (Default: 0time)

5000 Set the time period for a

Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
• I/F: Interface to be used (Default: 3sec)
• Driver: KEYENCE KV-700/1000 Specify the host address (station
No. of the PLC to which the GOT is
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Host Address
connected) in the network of the
0 to 9
GOT. (Default: 0)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
Set this item to adjust the
Make the settings according to the usage transmission timing of the
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
environment. communication request from the
GOT. (Default: 0ms)
 Communication detail settings
Station No. Specify whether to use the station
Yes or No
Selection No. during communication.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.

POINT
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The settings of connecting equipment can be The communication interface setting can be
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
For details, refer to the following. after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

6 - 14 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
 6.2.7 PLC Side Setting 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are
POINT *2
shown.
The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
KEYENCE PLC For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following
manual.
 Setting communication interface (Communication
settings)
2
KEYENCE PLC user's Manual *3 Set the station No. according to the host address on the

CONNECTION TO
GOT side.

CONTROLLER
For the Host Address setting on the GOT side, refer to the
following.

IAI ROBOT
Model name Reference  Setting communication interface (Communication
KV-3000 6 - 15 settings)

PLC CPU KV-1000 6 - 15

(2) Setting DIP switches
KV-700 6 - 15
Set the DIP switches. 3
KV-L20R
(a) When using KV-L20R or KV-L20

CONNECTION TO
Multi-communication unit KV-L20 6 - 15

AZBIL CONTROL
KV-L20V

EQUIPMENT
Terminator
setting switch
 Connecting KV-3000,KV-1000
Setting items Set value
Port 1 (RS232)
4
Transmission Speed 9600 to 115200 bps*1

CONNECTION TO
Data bit 8bits

OMRON PLC
Parity bit Even
Stop bit 1bit Port 2
(RS232/RS422/RS485) RS232/RS422/RS485 switch
*1 There is no transmission speed setting on the PLC side.The
transmission speed of the PLC side is automatically adjusted (For port 2)
to that of the GOT side.
• RS232/RS422/RS485 switch (For port 2) 5
(For KV-L20R)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
 Connecting to KV-700 Settings

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
232C 422A 485(2) For RS-232 For RS-422
Setting items Set value
485(4) communication communication
Transmission Speed 9600bps
Data bit 8bits RS-422A
RS-232C
485(4)
Parity bit Even
Stop bit 1bit
6
(For KV-L20)

CONNECTION TO
Settings

KEYENCE PLC
 Connecting to KV-L20R, KV-L20,.KV-L20V 232C 422A VT For RS-232 For RS-422
communication communication
(1) Communication settings
RS-232C RS-422A
Setting items Set value
Communication mode KV mode (Upper link) 7
4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, • Terminator setting switch
Transmission speed*1*2 Set when carrying out RS-422 communication.
57600bps, 115200bps
CONNECTION TO

Data bit 8bits

KOYO EI PLC

Settings
Parity bit Even
ON When multi- When multi-
Stop bit 1bit communication unit communication unit
Station No.*3 0 to 9 is a terminal is not a terminal
OFF
ON OFF
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 15

6.2 Serial Connection
 (b) When using KV-L20

Terminator
setting switch

Port 1 (RS232)

Port 2
(RS232/RS422/RS485)

• Terminator setting switch

Set when carrying out RS-422 communication.

Settings
ON When multi- When multi-
communication unit communication unit
is a terminal is not a terminal
OFF
ON OFF

6 - 16 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.2 Serial Connection
 1
6.3 Ethernet Connection

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
6.3.1 Connecting to KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500

Communication driver

CPU
Ethernet
module GOT 2
Ethernet (KEYENCE), Gateway
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT

Ethernet Maximum
Number of connectable
equipment
3
Series *4
Cable model *2
Option device Model*3
module segment length

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
When PLC:GOT is N:1

EQUIPMENT
*5
The following shows the
- (Built into GOT) number of PLCs for 1 GOT
KV-5000 - 100m <For GT16, GT14>
Twisted pair cable
TCP: 128 or less
• 10BASE-T
UDP: 128 or less
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
GT15-J71E71-100
<For GT15, GT12> 4
TCP: 10 or less
Category 3, 4, and 5
UDP: 128 or less

CONNECTION TO
KV-700 • 100BASE-TX - (Built into GOT) *5
KV-1000 Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):

OMRON PLC
KV-LE20V When PLC:GOT is 1:N
KV-3000 Category 5 and 5e 100m
KV-LE21V The following shows the
KV-5000
number of GOTs for 1 PLC
KV-5500
GT15-J71E71-100 TCP: 15 or less
UDP: 1 or less
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. 5
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network

OMRON TEMPERATURE
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards.

CONNECTION TO
*2 A length between a hub and a node.

CONTROLLER
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
6
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching

CONNECTION TO
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.

KEYENCE PLC
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
GT16 User's Manual
*4 Product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.
*5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 17

6.3 Ethernet Connection
 6.3.2 GOT side settings
 Communication detail settings
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
Set the channel of the connected equipment.

2.

3.

4.

Item Description Range

Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No.*1 1 to 254
(Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address (Default: 192.168.0.18) 255.255.255.255
Click!
Set the subnet mask for the sub
network. (Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask router) If the sub network is not
255.255.255.255
used, the default value is set.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 255.255.255.0)
menu. Set the router address of the
default gateway where the GOT is
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
Default
Gateway
connected. (Only for connection
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
channel to be used from the list menu. via router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
3. Set the following items. Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
1024 to 5010,
• Manufacturer: KEYENCE 5014 to 65534
Download Port download.
(Except for 5011,
• Controller Type: KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/ No. (Default: 5014)
5012 and 5013)
5000 1024 to 5010,
• I/F: Interface to be used Set the GOT port No. for the
GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the Ethernet
• Driver: Ethernet(KEYENCE), Gateway Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
Port No. 5012, 5013, and
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
(Default: 5025)
49153)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set the number of retries to be
Make the settings according to the usage performed when a communication
timeout occurs.
environment.
Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times
6.3.2 ■ Communication detail settings retries, the communication times
out.
(Default: 3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
communication with the PLC CPU.
POINT (Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
The settings of connecting equipment can be Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. (Default: 3sec)
For details, refer to the following. Set the delay time for reducing the
1.1.2 I/F communication setting load of the network/destination 0 to 10000
Delay Time
PLC. ( 10ms)
(Default: 0ms)
*1 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
to different station numbers.
 Ethernet setting

6 - 18 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.3 Ethernet Connection
 6.3.3 PLC side setting 1
 Ethernet setting

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
POINT
KEYENCE PLC
For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following
manual. 2
KEYENCE PLC user's Manual

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
 KV-LE21V/KV-LE21V setting

IAI ROBOT
Item Description Set value Set the IP address and port No. by the unit editor of KV
The host is displayed. (The host is STUDIO.
Host -
indicated with an asterisk (*).) Item Description Range
Set the network No. of the Communication
Ethernet -
3
N/W No. connected Ethernet module. 1 to 239 mode
(Default: blank)

CONNECTION TO
0.0.0.0 to

AZBIL CONTROL
IP address*1 Set the IP address.
Set the station No. of the 255.255.255.255

EQUIPMENT
PLC No.*1 connected Ethernet module. 1 to 254
Port No.*1
(Default: blank) Set the port No. 256 to 65534
(Host link)
KEYENCE
Type KEYENCE (fixed) *1 Adjust the settings with the Ethernet settings of the GOT
(fixed)
side.

IP Address
Set the IP address of the
connected Ethernet module.
PLC side IP ■ Ethernet setting 4
address
(Default: 192.168.0.10)

CONNECTION TO
Set the port No. of the connected
PLC side port

OMRON PLC
Port No. Ethernet module.
No.
(Default: 8501)
Adjust the
UDP, TCP
Communication settings with the
(Default: UDP)
PLC settings.
*1 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail
5
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set

OMRON TEMPERATURE
to different station numbers.
 Communication detail settings

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
POINT
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
6
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]

CONNECTION TO
after writing [Communication Settings] of project

KEYENCE PLC
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of GOT used
(2) Precedence in communication settings 7
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 19

6.3 Ethernet Connection
 6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the POINT
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of KEYENCE PLC
depending on the models, even though belonging to the (1) Setting setting procedure for relays (...), internal
same series. auxiliary relays (MR), latch relays (LR) and control
relays(CR).
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
the controller actually used. Make settings for status by a channel number and
a bit position.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.

 Setting item Bit position

Channel No.
(1) Communication driver: KEYENCE KV-700/1000

Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit
of word device.
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information
selected in [Device].

(2) Communication driver: Ethernet (KEYENCE),

Gateway

Item Description
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
word device.
Displays the device type and its setting range selected in
Information
[Device].
Set the station number of the controller to be monitored.
Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller.
Select this item for monitoring other controllers.
Network After selecting, set the station number of the
Other controller to be monitored.
NWNo.: Set the network No.
Station No.: Set the station No.

6 - 20 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC

6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 6.4.1 KV-700/1000/3000/5000 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Device

PREPARATORY
No.

MONITORING
Device name Setting range
represen
tation
Relay (...) ..00000 to ..99915
Internal auxiliary relay (MR) MR00000 to MR99915
Decimal

2
Latch relay (LR) LR00000 to LR99915
Control relay (CR) CR0000 to CR3915

Link relay (B)*2 B0000 to B3FFF Hexadec

CONNECTION TO
imal
Work relay (VB)*2 VB0000 to VB3FFF

CONTROLLER
Timer (Contact) (T)*1*2 T0000 to T3999

IAI ROBOT
Bit device

Counter (Contact) (C)*1*2 C0000 to C3999

Decimal
High-speed counter
comparator CTC0 to CTC3
(Contact) (CTC)*2*3*6
Specified bit of the following word 3
devices
data memory

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Word device bit*7 extension data memory -
extension data memory 2

EQUIPMENT
file register
link register

Timer (Current value) (TC)*2*4 TC0000 to TC3999

Timer (Set value) (TS)*2*4 TS0000 to TS3999

Counter (Current value)
(CC)*2*4
CC0000 to CC3999 4
Counter (Set value) (CS)*2*4 CS0000 to CS3999

CONNECTION TO
High-speed counter
CTH0 to CTH1
(Current value) (CTH)*2*4

OMRON PLC
High-speed counter
Decimal
comparator CTC0 to CTC3
(Set value) (CTC)*2*4
Data memory (DM) DM00000 to DM65534
Extension data memory (EM) EM00000 to EM65534 5
Extension data memory 2 (FM) FM00000 to FM32767

OMRON TEMPERATURE
ZF000000 to ZF032767
Word device

ZF032768 to ZF065535

CONNECTION TO
File register (ZF)
ZF065536 to ZF098303

CONTROLLER
ZF098304 to ZF131071
Hexadec
Link register (W) W0000 to W3FFF
imal
Control memory (CM) CM00000 to CM11998
Temporary data memory (TM)
Work memory (VM)
TM000 to TM511
VM00000 to VM59999
6
Decimal
Index register (Z)*8 Z1 to Z12

CONNECTION TO
Index register (DZ) DZ01 to DZ12

KEYENCE PLC
Digital trimmer (TRM)*4*5 TRM0 to TRM7
Converting the following bit
devices to words
relay
internal auxiliary relay
Bit device word*7 -
latch relay
control relay 7
link relay
work relay
CONNECTION TO

*1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device

KOYO EI PLC

designation mode.
*2 Monitoring by GOT is possible only when a device is used in
the sequence program.
*3 When writing, only the reset of the contact is possible.
*4 Only 32-bit (2-word) designation is allowed.
*5 Only reading is possible.
*6
*7
*8
Monitoring or writing to continuous devices is not possible.
This is not supported by GT10.
With KV-3000 and KV-5000, Z devices cannot be specified
8
as 32-bit (2 words) data.
CONNECTION TO

Use DZ devices.
JTEKT PLC

6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 6 - 21

6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
6 - 22 6. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC
6.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 7
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
7.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
4
7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3

CONNECTION TO
7.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14

OMRON PLC
7.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22
7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
7.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
7.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7-1
7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Clock Communication
Series Model name Refer to
*1 Type

SU-5E RS232
RS422 7.2.1
KOSTAC SU SU-6B
Series SU-5M RS232
RS422 7.2.2
SU-6M

D0-05AA

D0-05AD

D0-05AR

DirectLOGIC 05 D0-05DA RS232

Series RS422 7.2.3
D0-05DD

D0-05DD-D

D0-05DR

D0-05DR-D

D0-06DD1

D0-06DD2

D0-06DR

D0-06DA
DirectLOGIC 06 RS232
D0-06AR 7.2.4
Series RS422
D0-06AA

D0-06DD1-D

D0-06DD2-D

D0-06DR-D

D2-240
DirectLOGIC RS232
D2-250-1 7.2.5
205 Series RS422
D2-260

RS232
PZ series PZ3 7.2.6
RS422

*1 The GOT can only read the clock data.In the clock setting, though the adjust is available, the broadcast is not available.

7-2 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.1 Connectable Model List
 1
7.2 System Configuration

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
7.2.1 Connecting to SU-5E or SU-6B

 When connecting to one PLC

Data
Communication driver
2
SU-5E/6B Communications GOT

CONNECTION TO
Module KOYO KOSTAC/DL

CONTROLLER
Connection cable

IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
3
Number of
Data Cable model

CONNECTION TO
connectable

AZBIL CONTROL
Communication Max.
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Type distance

EQUIPMENT
*1 number
module

- (Built into GOT)

RS232
RS-232 15m
connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P 4
SU-5E/6B RS422

CONNECTION TO
1000m - (Built into GOT)
(general connection diagram 1)
- 1 PLC for 1 GOT

OMRON PLC
communication
port) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422
1000m
connection diagram 9) GT15-RS4-9S
5
- (Built into GOT)

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

CONTROLLER
RS232
RS-232 15m
connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

RS422
connection diagram 3)
1200m - (Built into GOT) 1 data 6
SU-5E/6B U-01DM communication
module for 1 GOT

CONNECTION TO
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)

KEYENCE PLC
RS-422
RS422 GT15-RS2T-9P*2
connection diagram 1200m
GT15-RS4-9S
11)
- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.For details of the product, 7
contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
CONNECTION TO

*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7-3

7.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple PLCs
Communication driver
Data Data
SU-5E/6B Communications SU-5E/6B Communications GOT
Module Module KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Data Cable model connectable
Model Communication Max.
communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name Type distance
module*1 number

RS422
1000m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 5)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
SU-5E/6B - RS-422
RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
connection diagram 1000m
GT15-RS4-9S
13)
- (Built into GOT)
90 PLCs for 1 GOT*3
RS422
1200m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 7)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
SU-5E/6B U-01DM RS-422
RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
connection diagram 1200m
GT15-RS4-9S
15)
- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.For details of the product,
contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7-4 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.2 System Configuration
 7.2.2 Connecting to SU-5M or SU-6M 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to one PLC

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
Data
SU-5M/6M Communications GOT
Module KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Data Cable model
Communication Max. connectable
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
module*1
Type
number
distance
3

CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

AZBIL CONTROL
RS232 connection
RS-232 15m
diagram 1)

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P

SU-5M/6M RS422 connection

1000m - (Built into GOT)
(general diagram 1)
communication
port 1)
-
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
4
RS-422

CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
1000m

OMRON PLC
diagram 9) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

1 PLC for
Z20P
1 GOT
SU-5M/6M
(general
(Programmable
connecting cable)
- (Built into GOT)
5
- RS-232 3m

OMRON TEMPERATURE
communication +
port 2) S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
connector)*1

CONTROLLER
RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)

SU-5M/6M
(general
- RS-422
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
6
communication GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
port 3) 1000m

CONNECTION TO
diagram 10) GT15-RS4-9S

KEYENCE PLC
- (Built into GOT)

- (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection
RS-232
diagram 1)
15m
7
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO

RS422 connection 1 data

1200m - (Built into GOT)
KOYO EI PLC

diagram 3) communicat
SU-5M/6M U-01DM
ion module
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) for 1 GOT
RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
diagram 11)
1200m
GT15-RS4-9S 8
- (Built into GOT)
CONNECTION TO

*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS
JTEKT PLC

INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7-5

7.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple PLCs
Communication driver
Data Data
SU-5M/6M Communications SU-5M/6M Communications GOT
Module Module KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Data Cable model
Communication Max. connectable
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Type distance
module*1 number

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 5)

SU-5M/6M GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
(general
- RS-422
communication GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
port 1) 1000m
diagram 13) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 6)

SU-5M/6M GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
(general 90 PLCs for 1
- RS-422
communication GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 GOT*3
RS422 connection
port 3) 1000m
diagram 14) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 7)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
SU-5M/6M U-01DM RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
1200m
diagram 15) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7-6 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.2 System Configuration
 7.2.3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to one PLC

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver

DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM GOT

KOYO KOSTAC/DL
Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Data Cable model connectable
Communication Max.
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model
module*2
Type
number
distance equipment
3
Direct Z20P

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
LOGIC 05 (Programmable connecting - (Built into GOT)
(communication cable) 1 PLC for

EQUIPMENT
- RS-232 3m
port 1) + 1 GOT
(communication S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P
port 2) connector)*1

Z20P
(Programmable connecting - (Built into GOT) 4
Direct D0-DCM cable)
RS-232 3m

CONNECTION TO
LOGIC 05 (port 1) +
S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P

OMRON PLC
connector)*1

- (Built into GOT)

RS232 connection
RS-232 15m
diagram 3)
GT15-RS2-9P
1 data
communication
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
module
RS422 connection for 1 GOT
1000m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
Direct D0-DCM diagram 4)

CONTROLLER
LOGIC 05 (port 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
RS-422
RS422 connection GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
diagram 12)
1000m
GT15-RS4-9S
6

CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

KEYENCE PLC
*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS
INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7-7

7.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple PLCs
Communication driver

DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM GOT

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Data Cable model
Communication Max. connectable
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
Type distance
module*1 number

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
Direct D0-DCM 90 PLCs for 1
RS-422
LOGIC 05 (port 2) GT15-RS2T4-9P *2 GOT*3
RS422 connection
1000m
diagram 16) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7-8 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.2 System Configuration
 7.2.4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 06 series 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to one PLC

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver

DirectLOGIC 06 D0-DCM GOT

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Data Cable model
Communication Max. connectable
communications
Model name
module*1
Type
Connection diagram
number
distance
Option device Model equipment
3
Z20P

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Direct (Programmable - (Built into GOT)
connecting cable)

EQUIPMENT
LOGIC 06
- RS-232 3m
(communication +
port 1) S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P
connector)*2

- (Built into GOT)

4
RS232 connection
- RS-232 15m
diagram 3)

CONNECTION TO
1 PLC for
GT15-RS2-9P
1 GOT

OMRON PLC
Direct RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
LOGIC 06 diagram 4)
(communication
port 2) GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
- RS-422 5
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
RS422 connection

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1000m
diagram 12) GT15-RS4-9S

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
- (Built into GOT)

Z20P
(Programmable - (Built into GOT)
Direct D0-DCM connecting cable)
LOGIC 06 (port 1)
RS-232
+
3m
6
S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P
connector)*2

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection
- (Built into GOT) KEYENCE PLC
RS-232 15m 1 data
diagram 3)
communication
GT15-RS2-9P
module

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
for 1 GOT 7
Direct D0-DCM diagram 4)
CONNECTION TO

LOGIC 06 (port 2)
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
KOYO EI PLC

RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*3
RS422 connection
1000m
diagram 12) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

8
*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
CONNECTION TO

*2 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS
INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
JTEKT PLC

For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7-9

7.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple PLCs
Communication driver

DirectLOGIC 06 D0-DCM DirectLOGIC 06 D0-DCM GOT

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Data Cable model connectable
Communication Max.
Model name communication Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
*1
Type distance
module number

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

Direct GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
LOGIC 06
- RS-422
(communication GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
port 2) 1000m
diagram 16) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

90 PLCs for
1 GOT*3
RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
Direct D0-DCM
RS-422
LOGIC 06 (port 2) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
1000m
diagram 16) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7 - 10 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.2 System Configuration
 7.2.5 Connecting to D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to one PLC

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver
D2-240
D2-250-1 D2-DCM GOT
D2-260 KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT
Number of
Data Cable model
Communication Max. connectable
communications
Model name
module*1
Type
Connection diagram
number
distance
Option device Model equipment
3
Z20P

CONNECTION TO
D2-240

AZBIL CONTROL
(Programmable - (Built into GOT)
D2-250-1
connecting cable)

EQUIPMENT
D2-260 - RS-232 3m
+
(communication
S-9CNS1(Conversion GT15-RS2-9P
port 2)
connector)*1

RS422 connection
1000m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 4
diagram 4) GOT

CONNECTION TO
D2-250-1 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
D2-260

OMRON PLC
- RS-422
(communication GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
RS422 connection
port 2) 1000m
diagram 12) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
- (Built into GOT)
RS232 connection
RS-232 15m

CONNECTION TO
diagram 1)

CONTROLLER
GT15-RS2-9P

RS422 connection 1 data

D2-240 1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 3) communication
D2-250-1 D2-DCM
D2-260
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
module for 1
GOT 6
RS-422
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection
1200m

KEYENCE PLC
diagram 11) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS
INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. 7
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 11

7.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to multiple PLCs
Communication driver
D2-240 D2-240
D2-250-1 D2-DCM D2-250-1 D2-DCM GOT
D2-260 D2-260 KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Data Cable model connectable
Communication Max.
Model name communications Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
*1
Type distance
module number

RS422
1000m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 8)
D2-250-1 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
D2-260
- RS-422
(communication RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P
port 2) connection diagram 1000m
GT15-RS4-9S
16)
- (Built into GOT)
90 PLCs for
1 GOT*3
RS422
1200m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 7)

D2-240 GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
D2-250-1 D2-DCM RS-422
RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P
D2-260
connection diagram 1200m
GT15-RS4-9S
15)
- (Built into GOT)

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7 - 12 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.2 System Configuration
 7.2.6 Connecting to PZ 1

PROCEDURES FOR
 When connecting to one PLC

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
Communication driver

PZ GOT
KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Connection cable 2

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance
3
- (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
RS-232 15m

AZBIL CONTROL
RS232 connection diagram 3)

EQUIPMENT
GT15-RS2-9P

PZ
RS422 connection diagram 4) 1000m - (Built into GOT)
(general
1 PLC for 1 GOT
communication port
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
2)
4
RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS422 connection diagram 12) 1000m

CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S

OMRON PLC
- (Built into GOT)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

 When connecting to multiple PLCs 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Communication driver

CONNECTION TO
PZ PZ GOT

CONTROLLER
KOYO KOSTAC/DL

CONNECTION TO
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of KEYENCE PLC

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS422 connection diagram 8) 1000m - (Built into GOT) 7

PZ GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO

(general 90 PLCs for

RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
KOYO EI PLC

communication port 1 GOT*2

RS422 connection diagram 16) 1000m
2) GT15-RS4-9S

- (Built into GOT)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 . 8
*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
CONNECTION TO

KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 13

7.2 System Configuration
 7.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC. 7.3.2 RS-422 cable
 Connection diagram
RS422 connection diagram 1)
7.3.1 RS-232 cable GOT side KOYO EI PLC side

RDA1(RXD1+) 3 14 +TXD
 Connection diagram RDB1(RXD1-) 4 16 -TXD
RS232 connection diagram 1)
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 9 +RXD
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 -RXD
CD/NC*1 1 1 -
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 to 6 -
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD *2
RSB(RTS-) 10 8 -
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
CSA(CTS+) 11 12 -
ER(DTR) 4 4 RTS
CSB(CTS-) 12 13 -
SG 5 7 0V
SG 13 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6 5 CTS
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 15 -
RS(RTS) 7 6 -*3
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 17 -
CS(CTS) 8 8 to 25 -
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 18 -RTS
- 9 *2
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 19 +RTS
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC NC 14 20 to 22 -
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line. Shell 23 -CTS
*3 For U-01DM and D2-DCM, the signal name will be +5V.
11 +CTS
RS232 connection diagram 3) *1
24, 25 -
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
CD/NC*1 1 1 5V
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD PLC at a terminal station.
RS422 connection diagram 2)
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side
ER(DTR) 4 4 RTS
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 12 +TXD3
SG 5 7 0V
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 13 -TXD3
DR(DSR) 6 5 CTS
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 24 +RXD3
RS(RTS) 7 6 -
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 25 -RXD3
CS(CTS) 8 8 0V
*2
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 to 6 -
- 9 9 to 15 - *2
RSB(RTS-) 10 8 to 11 -
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable CSA(CTS+) 11 14 to 23 -
shield line.
CSB(CTS-) 12 - -
 Precautions when preparing a cable SG 13 7 SG
*1
(1) Cable length SDA2(TXD2+) 5
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. SDB2(TXD2-) 6

(2) GOT side connector RDA2(RXD2+) 7

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
RDB2(RXD2-) 8
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
NC 14
(3) KOYO EI PLC side connector
Shell
Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC
side. *1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
For details, refer to the KOYO EI PLC user's manual.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the
PLC at a terminal station.

7 - 14 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 3) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 14 +TXD

RDB1(RXD1-) 4 15 -TXD

SDA1(TXD1+) 1 17 +RXD

SDB1(TXD1-) 2 16 -RXD 2
RSA(RTS+) 9 1 to 6 -

CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10 8 +RTS

CONTROLLER
CSA(CTS+) 11 9 -RTS

IAI ROBOT
CSB(CTS-) 12 18 to 21 -

SG 13 7 LG

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 10 +RTS 3
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 11 -RTS

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 12 +CTS

EQUIPMENT
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 13 -CTS

NC 14 22 +TXD

Shell 23 -TXD

24 -RXD 4
*1 *2
25 +RXD

CONNECTION TO
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable

OMRON PLC
shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the
PLC at a terminal station.

RS422 connection diagram 4)

5
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 9 +TXD

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 10 -TXD

SDA1(TXD1+) 1 11 +RTS

SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 -RXD

RSA(RTS+) 9 1 5V 6
RSB(RTS-) 10 2 to 5 -

CONNECTION TO
*2

KEYENCE PLC
CSA(CTS+) 11 7 0V

CSB(CTS-) 12 13 +RXD

SG 13 8 0V

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 12 -RTS

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 14 +CTS 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 15 -CTS
CONNECTION TO

RDB2(RXD2-) 8
KOYO EI PLC

NC 14

Shell

*1
*1
Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable 8
shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500 )
CONNECTION TO

to the PLC to be a terminal.

JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 15

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 5)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD +TXD
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 14 14
-TXD -TXD
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 16 16
+RXD +RXD
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 9 9
-RXD -RXD
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 10

RSA(RTS+) 9 - 1 to 6 - 1 to 6

RSB(RTS-) 10 - 8 - 8
*2
CSA(CTS+) 11 - 12 - 12

CSB(CTS-) 12 - 13 - 13
SG SG
SG 13 7 7

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 - 15 - 15

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 - 17 - 17
-RTS -RTS
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 18 18
+RTS +RTS
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 19 19

NC 14 - 20 to 22 - 20 to 22
-CTS -CTS
Shell 23 23
+CTS +CTS
11 11

*1 - 24, 25 *1 - 24, 25

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500 ) to the PLC to be a terminal.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

RS422 connection diagram 6)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD3 +TXD3
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 12 12
-TXD3 -TXD3
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 13 13
+RXD3 +RXD3
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 24 24
-RXD3 -RXD3
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 25 25

RSA(RTS+) 9 - 1 to 6 - 1 to 6

RSB(RTS-) 10 - 8 to 11 *2 - 8 to 11

CSA(CTS+) 11 - 14 to 23 - 14 to 23

CSB(CTS-) 12 - - - -
SG SG
SG 13 7 7
*1 *1
SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

NC 14

Shell

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the PLC at a terminal station.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7 - 16 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 7) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

PREPARATORY
+TXD +TXD

MONITORING
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 14 14
-TXD -TXD
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 15 15
+RXD +RXD
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 17 17
-RXD -RXD
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 16 16
2
RSA(RTS+) 9 - 1 to 6 - 1 to 6

CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10 +RTS 8 +RTS 8

CONTROLLER
CSA(CTS+) 11 -RTS 9 -RTS 9

IAI ROBOT
CSB(CTS-) 12 - 18 to 21 - 18 to 21

LG LG
SG 13 7 7

3
+RTS +RTS
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 10 10
-RTS -RTS
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 11 11

CONNECTION TO
+CTS +CTS

AZBIL CONTROL
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 12 12

EQUIPMENT
-CTS -CTS
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 13 13

NC 14 +TXD 22 +TXD 22

Shell -TXD 23 -TXD 23

*1
-RXD 24
*1
-RXD
24 4
*2 +RXD
+RXD 25 25

CONNECTION TO
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

OMRON PLC
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the PLC at a terminal station.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

RS422 connection diagram 8)

5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

CONNECTION TO
+TXD +TXD

CONTROLLER
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 9 9
-TXD -TXD
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 10 10
+RTS +RTS
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 11 11

6
-RXD -RXD
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 6 6

RSA(RTS+) 9 5V 1 5V 1

CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-) 10 - 2 to 5 - 2 to 5

KEYENCE PLC
*2
CSA(CTS+) 11 0V 7 0V 7
+RXD
CSB(CTS-) 12 +RXD 13 13
0V 0V
SG 13 8 8

SDA2(TXD2+) 5
-RTS
12
-RTS
12 7
+CTS +CTS
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 14 14
CONNECTION TO

-CTS -CTS
RDA2(RXD2+) 7 15 15
KOYO EI PLC

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

NC 14

Shell

*1 *1 8
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500 ) to the PLC to be a terminal.
CONNECTION TO

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
JTEKT PLC

KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 17

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 11)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side GOT side KOYO EI PLC side

RDA 2 14 +TXD RDA 2 14 +TXD

RDB 7 16 -TXD RDB 7 15 -TXD
SDA 1 9 +RXD SDA 1 17 +RXD
SDB 6 10 -RXD SDB 6 16 -RXD
RSA 3 1 to 6 - RSA 3 1to 6 -
*2
RSB 8 8 - RSB 8 8 +RTS
CSA 4 12 - CSA 4 9 -RTS
CSB 9 13 - CSB 9 18 to 21 -
SG 5 7 SG SG 5 7 LG
FG - 15 - FG - 10 +RTS
17 - 11 -RTS
18 -RTS 12 +CTS
19 +RTS 13 -CTS
20 to 22 - 22 +TXD
23 -CTS 23 -TXD
11 +CTS 24 -RXD
*1 *1
*2
24, 25 - 25 +RXD

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable *1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line. shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the
PLC at a terminal station. PLC at a terminal station.

RS422 connection diagram 10) RS422 connection diagram 12)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side GOT side KOYO EI PLC side

RDA 2 12 +TXD3 RDA 2 9 +TXD

RDB 7 13 -TXD3 RDB 7 10 -TXD
SDA 1 24 +RXD3 SDA 1 13 +RXD
SDB 6 25 -RXD3 SDB 6 6 -RXD
RSA 3 1 to 6 - RSA 3 1 5V
*2 *2
RSB 8 8 to 11 - RSB 8 2 to 5 -
CSA 4 14 to 23 - CSA 4

CSB 9 - - CSB 9 8 0V
SG 5 7 SG SG 5 7 0V
FG - *1
FG - 11 +RTS

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable 12 -RTS

shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the 14 +CTS
PLC at a terminal station. *1 15 -CTS

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable

shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500 )
to the PLC to be a terminal.

7 - 18 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 13) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

PREPARATORY
+TXD +TXD

MONITORING
RDA 2 14 14
-TXD -TXD
RDB 7 16 16
+RXD +RXD
SDA 1 9 9
-RXD -RXD
SDB 6
-
10
-
10
2
RSA 3 1 to 6 1 to 6
- *2 -

CONNECTION TO
RSB 8 8 8

CONTROLLER
- -
CSA 4 12 12

IAI ROBOT
- -
CSB 9 13 13
SG SG
SG 5 7 7

3
- -
FG - 15 15
- -
17 17

CONNECTION TO
-RTS -RTS

AZBIL CONTROL
18 18

EQUIPMENT
+RTS +RTS
19 19
- -
20 to 22 20 to 22
-CTS -CTS
23 23
+CTS
11
+CTS
11 4
*1 - *1 -
24, 25 24, 25

CONNECTION TO
OMRON PLC
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the PLC at a terminal station.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
RS422 connection diagram 14)

CONNECTION TO
GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

CONTROLLER
+TXD3 +TXD3
RDA 2 12 12
-TXD3 -TXD3
RDB 7 13 13
+RXD3 +RXD3

6
SDA 1 24 24
-RXD3 -RXD3
SDB 6 25 25

CONNECTION TO
RSA 3 - 1 to 6 - 1 to 6

KEYENCE PLC
RSB 8 - 8 to 11 - 8 to 11
*2
CSA 4 - 14 to 23 - 14 to 23

CSB 9 - - - -

7
SG SG
SG 5 7 7

FG - *1 *1
CONNECTION TO

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

KOYO EI PLC

*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the PLC at a terminal station.

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 19

7.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 15)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD +TXD
RDA 2 14 14
-TXD -TXD
RDB 7 15 15
+RXD +RXD
SDA 1 17 17
-RXD -RXD
SDB 6 16 16

RSA 3 - 1 to 6 - 1 to 6

RSB 8 +RTS 8 +RTS 8

CSA 4 -RTS 9 -RTS 9

CSB 9 - 18 to 21 - 18 to 21

LG LG
SG 5 7 7
+RTS +RTS
FG - 10 10
-RTS -RTS
11 11
+CTS +CTS
12 12
-CTS -CTS
13 13

+TXD 22 +TXD 22

-TXD 23 -TXD 23
*1 *1 -RXD
-RXD 24 24
*2 +RXD
+RXD 25 25

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150 ) to the PLC at a terminal station.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

RS422 connection diagram 16)

GOT side KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD +TXD
RDA 2 9 9
-TXD -TXD
RDB 7 10 10
+RXD +RXD
SDA 1 13 13
-RXD -RXD
SDB 6 6 6

RSA 3 5V 1 5V 1

RSB 8 - 2 to 5 - 2 to 5
*2
CSA 4 - -

0V 0V
CSB 9 8 8
0V 0V
SG 5 7 7
+RTS +RTS
FG - 11 11
-RTS -RTS
12 12
+CTS +CTS
14 14
*1 -CTS *1 -CTS
15 15

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

*2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500 ) to the PLC to be a terminal.
When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7 - 20 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.3 Connection Diagram
 1
 Precautions when preparing a cable

PROCEDURES FOR
(1) Cable length

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
The maximum length of the RS-422 cable differs
according to the specifications of the KOYO EI PLC
side module.
For details, refer to the following manual.
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual 2
(2) GOT side connector

CONNECTION TO
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.

CONTROLLER
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

IAI ROBOT
(3) KOYO EI PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC
side.
For details, refer to the KOYO EI PLC user's manual. 3
 Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
(1) GOT side

EQUIPMENT
When connecting a KOYO EI PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
4
(b) For GT14, GT11

CONNECTION TO
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".

OMRON PLC
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) KOYO EI PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
To connect a KOYO EI PLC to a GOT, a terminating
resistor must be set to the KOYO EI PLC.

CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 21

7.3 Connection Diagram
 7.4 GOT Side Settings
7.4.1 Setting communication
7.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
settings)

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.

4. Item Description Range

9600bps,
Set this item when change the
19200bps,
Transmission transmission speed used for
38400bps,
Speed communication with the connected
57600bps,
equipment. (Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
Set this item when change the data
Click! length used for communication
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
with the connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit 1bit/2bits
communications. (Default: 1bit)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
Specify whether or not to perform a
menu. None
parity check, and how it is
Parity Even
performed during communication.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: Odd)
Odd

channel to be used from the list menu. Set the number of retries to be
Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times
3. Set the following items. error occurs. (Default: 3times)
• Manufacturer: KOYO Set the time period for a
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 50sec
• Controller Type: KOYO KOSTAC/DL
(Default: 3sec)
• I/F: Interface to be used
Set this item to adjust the
• Driver: KOYO KOSTAC/DL transmission timing of the
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
communication request from the
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, GOT. (Default: 0ms)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Specify the host address (station
Make the settings according to the usage Host Address
No. of the GOT to which the PLC is
1 to 90
connected) in the connected
environment.
network. (Default: 1)
7.4.2 Communication detail settings

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT

(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
POINT The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
The settings of connecting equipment can be after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
For details, refer to the following. manual.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

7 - 22 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.4 GOT Side Settings
 1
7.5 PLC Side Setting

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
7.5.1 Connecting to SU-5E/6B
POINT
KOYO EI PLC  Communication settings
For details of KOYO EI PLCs, refer to the following Make the following settings using the programmer 2
manuals. system parameter setting.

CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual
Item Set value

CONTROLLER
Station No. 1 to 90

IAI ROBOT
 PLC CPU Transmission mode HEX
Parity NONE, ODD
Model name Refer to Data bit 8 bit (Fixation)
KOSTAC SU SU-5E/6B 7.5.1 Stop bit 1 bit (Fixation) 3
Series SU-5M/6M 7.5.2

CONNECTION TO
DirectLOGIC 05 Series

AZBIL CONTROL
DirectLOGIC 06 Series
7.5.3
 Setting DIP switches

EQUIPMENT
DirectLOGIC 205 Series 7.5.4 Set the transmission speed using the CPU DIP switch.
PZ series 7.5.5

 Data Communications Module 4

Model name Refer to

CONNECTION TO
U-01DM 7.5.6
Data Communications

OMRON PLC
D0-DCM 7.5.7
Module
D2-DCM 7.5.8

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CPU DIP switch
6

CONNECTION TO
Switch No.
ON 1 2 3 4

Item Set value

KEYENCE PLC
3 4

Transmission 9600bps ON OFF

*1
speed 19200bps ON ON

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on 7

the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
CONNECTION TO

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

the following.
KOYO EI PLC

7.4.1 Setting communication interface

(Communication settings)

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 23

7.5 PLC Side Setting
 7.5.2 Connecting to SU-5M/6M 7.5.4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC
205 series
 Communication settings
Make the following settings using the programmer  Communication settings
system parameter setting. Make the following settings using the programmer
Item Set value
system parameter setting.
Protocol CCM
Item Set value
Response delay time 0ms
Protocol CCM NET (DirectNET)
800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/
Timeout Time Station No. 1 to 90
8000ms/16000ms/40000ms
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Station No. 1 to 90
Data bit 8bits (Fixed)
Transmission mode HEX
Stop bit 1bit (Fixed)
Stop bit 1bit, 2bits
Parity NONE, ODD
Data bit 8bits (Fixed)
Self-diagnostic mode OFF
Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN
Response delay time 0ms
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Peer to Peer OFF
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
Master/Slave Slave
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. Timeout Enable
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
Transmission mode HEX
the following.
MODBUS OFF
7.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) *1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
7.5.3 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 the following.
7.4.1 Setting communication interface
series or DirectLOGIC 06 (Communication settings)

series
7.5.5 Connecting to PZ Series
 Communication settings
Make the following settings using the programmer
system parameter setting.  Communication settings
Make the following settings using the programmer
Item Set value system parameter setting.
Protocol CCM NET (DirectNET)
Timeout 780ms or more Item Set value
Protocol CCM NET
RTS On Delay Time 0ms*1
800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/
RTS Off Delay Time 0ms*1 Timeout
8000ms/16000ms/40000ms
Station No. 1 to 90
Response delay time 0ms
Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Station No. 1 to 90
Stop bit 1bit, 2bits Communication format HEX
Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Communication format HEX
Stop bit 1bit
*1 To use a PLC with multidrop, set the "RTS on delay time" to Parity NONE, ODD
5ms or more and the "RTS off delay time" to 2ms or more.
*2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on *1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side. the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following. the following.
7.4.1 Setting communication interface 7.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) (Communication settings)

7 - 24 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.5 PLC Side Setting
 7.5.6 Connecting to U-01DM *1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on 1
the GOT side.

PROCEDURES FOR
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
 Setting switches For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

PREPARATORY
the following.

MONITORING
Make the communication settings using each setting
7.4.1 Setting communication interface
switch.
(Communication settings)
Front Back
(3) Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a
protocol(SW5)
2
SW5

CONNECTION TO
ON

CONTROLLER
2

IAI ROBOT
3
4
Address selection switch
Switch No.
3
Item Set value
1 2 3 4

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Peer to Peer OFF OFF

EQUIPMENT
M/S Slave OFF
Communication and the TOUT existence Enable OFF
DIP switch for a setup of
a protocol ASCII/HEX HEX OFF

(1) Address selection switch(SW2, SW3) 4

(H)

CONNECTION TO
BCD
SW2
E
7 89A

OMRON PLC
F 012

×10
6

UNIT
34 5

ASR
(HEX) BCD
E
7 89A

×1
F 012

5
6

34 5
SW3

Switch No. Settings Setting details

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Code higher rank
SW2

CONNECTION TO
(101figures)
01 to 5A

CONTROLLER
Code low rank
SW3
(100figures)

(2) Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a

protocol(SW4) 6
SW4

CONNECTION TO
ON

KEYENCE PLC
1
2
3
4

7
5
6
7

CONNECTION TO
8

KOYO EI PLC

Setting Switch No.

Set value
item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9600bps OFF ON ON

8
Transmissio
19200bps ON ON ON
n speed*1
38400bps OFF OFF OFF
ODD ON
CONNECTION TO

Parity
NONE OFF
Self-
OFF OFF
JTEKT PLC

diagnostic
Response
0ms OFF OFF OFF
delay time

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 25

7.5 PLC Side Setting
 7.5.7 Connecting to D0-DCM 7.5.8 Connecting to D2-DCM

 Communication settings  Communication settings

Write the following communication settings to the Make the following settings using the programmer.
specified register using the programmer.For details of
Item Set value
the register, refer to the following manual.
Station No. 1 to 90
KOYO EI PLC user's Manual
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Item Set value Data bit 8bits (Fixed)

Transmission mode HEX Stop bit 1bit (Fixed)
Protocol DirectNet Parity NONE, ODD
Station No. 1 to 90 Self-diagnostic mode OFF
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, Response delay time 0ms
Transmission speed*1
115200bps Peer to Peer OFF
NONE, ODD, Master/Slave Slave
Parity
EVEN (Only communication port 2) Timeout Enable
RTS On Delay Time Transmission mode HEX
0ms
(Only communication port 2)
MODBUS OFF
RTS Off Delay Time
0ms *1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
(Only communication port 2)
the GOT side.
Timeout 800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/ Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
(Only communication port 2) 8000ms/16000ms/40000ms For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
485 mode selection
RS232, RS422/485 4 line type 7.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Only communication port 2)
(Communication settings)
Data bit
8bits, 7bits
(Only communication port 2)
Stop bit
(Only communication port 2)
1bit, 2bits 7.5.9 Station No. settings
The timeout between
characters 0 to 9999ms Set each station number so that no station number
(Only communication port 2)
overlaps.
The completion of a
Default use,A preset value is effective The station number can be set without regard to the cable
setting
connection order. There is no problem even if station
Reset timeout Invalid,Effective
numbers are not consecutive.
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. Station No.3 Station No.1 Station No.15
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to GOT
the following.
7.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
The example of a Station No. setting

(1) Direct specification

Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when
setting device.

Specification range
1 to 90

7 - 26 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.5 PLC Side Setting
 7.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. 7.6.1 KOYO EI PLC
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the (KOYO KOSTAC/DL)
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device 2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the No.
Device name Setting range
same series. represent

CONNECTION TO
Please make the setting according to the specifications of ation

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used. Input (I)*5 I0 to I1777

IAI ROBOT
When a non-existent device or a device number outside Output (Q) *5 Q0 to Q1777
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Link relay (GI) GI0 to GI3777
may not be monitored.
Link output (GQ) GQ0 to GQ3777
3

Bit device
 Setting item Internal relay (M) M0 to M3777
Stage (S) S0 to S1777

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Timer (T) T0 to T377

EQUIPMENT
Counter (C) C0 to C377

Special relay (SP)*1 SP0 to SP777

Timer (current value) (R) R0 to R377

Preparatory register (R)*5 R400 to R677 4

Special register 1 (R)*1*5 R700 to R777

CONNECTION TO
*3 R1000 to R1377
Timer (current value) (R)
Octal

OMRON PLC
Data register 1 (R)*2*5 R1400 to R7377

Special register 2 (R)*1*4*5 R7400 to R7777

Data register 2 (R)*5 R10000 to R36777

Item Description
Word device

Set the device name, device number, and bit number. Special register 3 (R) *1*5 R37000 to R37777 5
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Link relay (R) R40000 to R40177

OMRON TEMPERATURE
word device.
Link output (R) R40200 to R40377
Displays the device type and setting range which are

CONNECTION TO
Information Input (R) R40400 to R40477

CONTROLLER
selected in [Device].
Output (R) R40500 to R40577
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of the Internal relay (R) R40600 to R40777
No. specified station No. Stage (R) R41000 to R41077
Timer (R) R41100 to R41117 6
Counter (R) R41140 to R41157

CONNECTION TO
Special relay (R) R41200 to R41237

KEYENCE PLC
*1 Read-only device for KOSTAC SU series
*2 The GOT cannot write data to R7377 for the SU-5M and SU-
6M.
*3 For Direct Logic 05 series and Direct Logic 06 series,
devices from R1200 to R1377 are used as V-memory 2.
*4 The GOT cannot write data to devices from R7766 to R7774

*5
(calendar area).
The device names differ according to the series.
7
The following shows the device names for each series.
CONNECTION TO

KOSTAC SU Direct Logic 05

Direct Logic 205
PZ Direct Logic 06
KOYO EI PLC

Input Input relay Input

Output Output relay Output
Preparatory
V-memory 1 Data register 1
register
Special register 1 System parameter 1 System parameter 1
8
Data register 1 V-memory 2 Data register 2
CONNECTION TO

Special register 2 System parameter 2 System parameter 2

JTEKT PLC

Data register 2 V-memory 3 Data register 3

Special register 3 System parameter 4 System parameter 4

7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 7 - 27

7.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 7.7 Precautions
 GOT clock control
The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC
with a calendar function. Note: Although the "time
adjusting" and "time broadcast" functions can be
selected on the GOT, the "time broadcast" function is
not available. Do not select the "time broadcast"
function. If both of the functions are selected, not only
the "time broadcast" function but also the "time
adjusting" function will be disabled.

7 - 28 7. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC

7.7 Precautions
 8
1

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
2

CONNECTION TO
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
8.

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
4
8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2

CONNECTION TO
8.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10

OMRON PLC
8.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
8.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
8.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
8.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8-1
8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Model name Model type Clock Refer to
Type
PC3JG-P TIC-6088
PC3JG TIC-6125 RS-232
RS-422 8.2.1
PC3JD TIC-5642
PC3JD-C TIC-6029

PC3J*1 TIC-5339 RS-232

RS-422 8.2.2
PC3JL TIC-5783
PC2J THC-2764
RS-232
PC2JS THC-2994 8.2.3
RS-422
PC2JR THC-5053
PC2JC THC-5070
RS-232
PC2J16P THC-5169 8.2.4
RS-422
PC2J16PR THC-5173

*1 Use PC3J of the version 2.1 or later.

8.2 System Configuration

8.2.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD or PC3JD-C

 For the RS-422 connection

Communication driver
PC3JG PC3JG
PC3JG-P PC3JG-P
Link unit Link unit GOT
PC3JD PC3JD JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC
PC3JD-C PC3JD-C
2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB
2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB
Connection cable 2)
RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB
ERRA ERRB ERRA ERRB
B C DE B C DE
78 9A

78 9A
F0 12

F0 12
6

5 3 5 3
4 4

+ +

- -
A A
0V 0V

FG FG

+ +

- -
B B
0V 0V

FG FG

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable
PLC Connection cable 2) GOT
1) Number of
Max.
Cable model connectable
Model Communication Cable model distance
Link unit*1 Connection Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number
diagram number

RS422 connection - (Built into

500m
diagram 1) GOT)

GT16-C02R4-
GT09-C30R41201-6C(3m)
PC3JG 9S(0.2m)
PC/CMP2- RS422 GT09-C100R41201-6C(10m)
PC3JG-P 32 PLCs for
LINK RS-422 connection GT09-C200R41201-6C(20m) GT15-RS2T4-
PC3JD *2
1 GOT
(THU-5139) diagram 5) GT09-C300R41201-6C(30m) 9P
PC3JD-C 500m
or GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection
- (Built into
diagram 8) GOT)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

8-2 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.1 Connectable Model List
 1
 For the RS-232 connection (via an interface converter)

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC3JG
PC3JG-P
PC3JG
PC3JG-P
RS-232/ 2
Link unit Link unit RS-422
Interface GOT
PC3JD PC3JD

CONNECTION TO
PC3JD-C PC3JD-C converter
Connection cable 2)

CONTROLLER
2PORT-LINK 2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB

RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB
ERRA ERRB ERRA ERRB

IAI ROBOT
B C DE B C DE
78 9A

78 9A
F0 12

F0 12
6

6
5 3 5 3
4 4

+ +

- -
A A
0V 0V

FG FG

+ +

- -
B B
0V 0V

FG FG

Connection cable 1) 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS-232/RS-422
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
interface converter*2

EQUIPMENT
Number of
Cable model connectable
Cable model
Model Connection Max. Model Communication Max. Option equipment
Link unit*1 Connection diagram Model
name diagram distance name Type distance device
number
number
4

CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R21201- - (Built into

OMRON PLC
RS422 25P(3m) GOT)
TXU- or
- connection 500m RS-232 15m
2051
diagram 2) RS232
connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2- 5
9P

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
PC/CMP- GT09-C30R21201- - (Built into
PC3JG 25P(3m) GOT)
LINK RS422
PC3JG-P TXU- or 32 PLCs for
(THU-2755) connection 500m RS-232 15m
PC3JD
PC3JD-C
2PORT-LINK diagram 3)
2051
RS232
1 GOT
6
(THU-2927) connection diagram 1)

CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2-

KEYENCE PLC
9P

GT09-C30R21201- - (Built into

PC/CMP2- RS422
TXU-
25P(3m) GOT) 7
LINK 500m RS-232 or 15m
connection 2051
(THU-5139) diagram 4) RS232
CONNECTION TO

connection diagram 1)
KOYO EI PLC

GT15-RS2-
9P

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8-3

8.2 System Configuration
 8.2.2 Connecting to PC3J or PC3JL

 For the RS-422 connection

Communication driver

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC3J PC3J
Link unit Link unit GOT
PC3JL PC3JL

PC3J-CPU 2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB
PC3J-CPU 2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB
Connection cable 2)
POWER RXDA RXDB POWER RXDA RXDB
RUN ERRA ERRB RUN ERRA ERRB
ERR ERR
B C DE B C DE
I/F I/F
7 8 9 A

7 8 9 A
ALM ALM
F 0 1 2

F 0 1 2
PC2MOD PC2MOD
6

6
5 3 5 3
4 4

PRG.2 PRG.2
BATTERY BATTERY
PRG.3 PRG.3
+ +

L1
- L1
-
L1 L1
S+ + A S+ + A
L1 L2
4W 2W 0V L1 L2
4W 2W 0V
S- - L1RXD L2 S- - L1RXD L2

L1 L1
L1RXD L1 FG L1 L1
L1RXD L1 FG
R+ - R+ -
4W 4W
L1 L1
2W
+ L1 L1
2W
+
R- - R- -
4W ZW 4W ZW
- -
0V START B 0V START B
RESET RESET
BATTERY
0V BATTERY
0V
TIP-5426 TIP-5426
1st./ 1st./
FG 2nd./ FG FG 2nd./ FG

Connection cable 1)

Connection
PLC Connection cable 2) GOT
cable 1)
Number of
Cable model Max.
connectable
Model Communication Connection Cable model distance
Link unit*1 Option device Model equipment
name Type diagram Connection diagram number
number

RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)

GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT09-C30R41201-6C(3m)
RS422 GT09-C100R41201-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
- RS-422 connection GT09-C200R41201-6C(20m)
diagram 7) GT09-C300R41201-6C(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
500m
or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

PC3J 32 PLCs for

PC3JL 1 GOT
RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)

GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT09-C30R41201-6C(3m)
RS422 GT09-C100R41201-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
PC/CMP2-LINK
RS-422 connection GT09-C200R41201-6C(20m)
(THU-5139)
diagram 5) GT09-C300R41201-6C(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
500m
or
RS422 connection
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 8)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

8-4 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.2 System Configuration
 1
 For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

RS-232/
PC3J PC3J
2
Link unit Link unit RS-422
Interface GOT
PC3JL PC3JL
converter
2PORT-LINK 2PORT-LINK
Connection cable 2)

CONNECTION TO
PC3J-CPU PC3J-CPU

TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB

POWER RXDA RXDB POWER RXDA RXDB
RUN ERRA ERRB RUN ERRA ERRB
ERR ERR
B C DE B C DE
I/F I/F
7 8 9 A

7 8 9 A
ALM ALM
F 0 1 2

F 0 1 2
PC2MOD PC2MOD
6

6
5 3 5 3
4 4

PRG.2 PRG.2
BATTERY BATTERY

CONTROLLER
PRG.3 PRG.3
+ +

L1
- L1
-
L1 L1
S+ + A S+ + A
L1 L2
4W 2W 0V L1 L2
4W 2W 0V
S- - L1RXD L2 S- - L1RXD L2

L1 L1
L1RXD L1 FG L1 L1
L1RXD L1 FG
R+ - R+ -
4W 4W

IAI ROBOT
L1 L1
2W
+ L1 L1
2W
+
R- - R- -
4W ZW 4W ZW
- -
0V START B 0V START B
RESET RESET
BATTERY
0V BATTERY
0V
TIP-5426 TIP-5426
1st./ 1st./
FG 2nd./ FG FG 2nd./ FG

Connection cable 1)
3
RS-232/RS-422
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
interface converter*2

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Number of
Cable model connectable
Cable model

EQUIPMENT
Model Connection Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Link unit*1 Connection Option device Model
name diagram distance name Type distance
diagram number
number

GT09- 4
C30R21201- - (Built into
25P(3m)

CONNECTION TO
RS422 GOT)
TXU- or
connection 500m RS-232 15m

OMRON PLC
2051
diagram 2) RS232
connection
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

- 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
GT09-
C30R21201- - (Built into

CONNECTION TO
25P(3m)

CONTROLLER
RS422 GOT)
TXU- or
connection 500m RS-232 15m
2051
diagram 6) RS232
connection
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P 6
PC3J 32 PLCs for
PC3JL 1 GOT

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
GT09-
PC/CMP- C30R21201- - (Built into
LINK RS422 25P(3m) GOT)
TXU- or
(THU-2755) connection 500m RS-232 15m
2051
2PORT-LINK diagram 3) RS232
(THU-2927) connection 7
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

GT09-
C30R21201- - (Built into
PC/CMP2- RS422 25P(3m) GOT)
LINK
(THU-5139)
connection 500m
TXU-
2051
RS-232 or 15m 8
diagram 4) RS232
connection
CONNECTION TO

diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
JTEKT PLC

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8-5

8.2 System Configuration
 8.2.3 Connecting to PC2J, PC2JS or PC2JR

 For the RS-422 connection

Communication driver

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC2J PC2J
PC2JS Link unit PC2JS Link unit GOT
PC2JR PC2JR
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

Number of
Cable model Max.
Model Communication Cable model connectable
Link unit*1 Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number equipment
number

RS422 connection
500m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)

GT16-C02R4-9S
(0.2m)
GT09-C30R41201-6C(3m)
PC2J PC/CMP2- GT09-C100R41201-6C(10m)
RS422 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 32 PLCs for
PC2JS LINK RS-422 GT09-C200R41201-6C(20m)
connection diagram 5) 1 GOT
PC2JR (THU-5139) GT09-C300R41201-6C(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
500m
or
RS422 connection
diagram 8) - (Built into GOT)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation.For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

8-6 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.2 System Configuration
 1
 For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC2J PC2J RS-232/

RS-422
2
PC2JS Link unit PC2JS Link unit GOT
Interface
PC2JR PC2JR converter

CONNECTION TO
Connection cable 2)

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1) 3

CONNECTION TO
RS-232/RS-422

AZBIL CONTROL
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
interface converter*2

EQUIPMENT
Number of
Cable model connectable
Cable model
Model Connection Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Link unit*1 Connection diagram Option device Model
name diagram distance name Type distance
number
number
4

CONNECTION TO
GT09-C30R21201- - (Built into

OMRON PLC
PC/CMP-LINK 25P(3m) GOT)
RS422
(THU-2755) TXU- or
connection 500m RS-232 15m
2PORT-LINK 2051
diagram 3) RS232
(THU-2927)
connection diagram 1)

GT15-RS2-9P 5
PC2J

OMRON TEMPERATURE
32 PLCs for
PC2JS
1 GOT
PC2JR

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
GT09-C30R21201- - (Built into
PC/CMP2- RS422 25P(3m) GOT)
TXU- or
LINK connection 500m RS-232 15m
2051
(THU-5139) diagram 4) RS232
connection diagram 1)
6

CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS2-9P

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation. KEYENCE PLC
*2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8-7

8.2 System Configuration
 8.2.4 Connecting to PC2JC, PC216P or PC2J16PR

 For the RS-422 connection

Communication driver

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC2JC PC2JC
PC2J16P Link unit PC2J16P Link unit GOT
PC2J16PR PC2J16PR
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

Number of
Cable model Cable model Max.
Model Communication connectable
Link unit*1 Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type equipment
number number

RS422
connection diagram 500m - (Built into GOT)
1)

RS422
GT16-C02R4-9S
connection diagram 500m
(0.2m)
PC2JC RS422 8)
PC/CMP2-LINK 32 PLCs for
PC2J16P RS-422 connection diagram
PC2J16PR
(THU-5139) GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 1 GOT
5)
GT15-RS4-9S
RS422
connection diagram 500m
8)
- (Built into GOT)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

8-8 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.2 System Configuration
 1
 For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

PROCEDURES FOR
Communication driver

PREPARATORY

MONITORING
JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

PC2JC PC2JC RS-232/ 2

PC2J16P Link unit PC2J16P Link unit RS-422 GOT
Interface
PC2J16PR PC2J16PR

CONNECTION TO
converter
Connection cable 2)

CONTROLLER
IAI ROBOT
Connection cable 1) 3

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RS-232/RS-422
PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
interface converter*2

EQUIPMENT
Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max. Option equipment
Link unit*1 Connection Connection Model
name distance name Type distance device
diagram number diagram number

4
GT09-

CONNECTION TO
C30R21201- - (Built into
RS422 25P(3m) GOT)

OMRON PLC
TXU- or
- connection 500m RS-232 15m
2051
diagram 2) RS232
connection
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO
GT09-

CONTROLLER
C30R21201- - (Built into
PC/CMP-LINK 25P(3m) GOT)
PC2JC RS422
(THU-2755) TXU- or 32 PLCs for
PC2J16P connection 500m RS-232 15m
2PORT-LINK 2051 1 GOT
PC2J16PR diagram 3) RS232
(THU-2927)
connection 6
diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC
GT09-
C30R21201- - (Built into
PC/CMP2- RS422 25P(3m) GOT)
LINK connection 500m
TXU-
2051
RS-232 or 15m 7
(THU-5139) diagram 4) RS232
connection
CONNECTION TO

diagram 1)
KOYO EI PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.
*2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8-9

8.2 System Configuration
 8.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC. 8.3.2 RS-422 cable

 Connection diagram
8.3.1 RS-232 cable RS422 connection diagram 1)

Link unit
 Connection diagram GOT side*2 PLC side*1 side *1
RS232 connection diagram 1)
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 L1S+ S+

JTEKT PLC side RDB1(RXD1-) 4 L1S- S-

GOT side (RS-232/RS-422
Interface converter) SDA1(TXD1+) 1 L1R+ R+

- 1 1 FG SDB1(TXD1-) 2 L1R- R-

RD(RXD) 2 3 RD SG 13 0V 0V

SD(TXD) 3 2 TD SDA2(TXD2+) 5 FG FG

ER(DTR) 4 4 RS SDB2(TXD2-) 6

SG 5 7 0V RDA2(RXD2+) 7

DR(DSR) 6 RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RS(RTS) 7 RSA(RTS+) 9

CS(CTS) 8 RSB(RTS-) 10

NC 9 CSA(CTS+) 11

FG - CSB(CTS-) 12

NC 14 *3

 Precautions when preparing a cable SHELL

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC or Link

(1) Cable length unit which will be a terminal.
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a
terminal.
(2) GOT side connector ■ Connecting terminating resistors
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. *3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) JTEKT PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the JTEKT PLC side
module.
For details, refer to the JTEKT PLC user's manual.

8 - 10 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 2) 1
(For PC3JG-P/PC3JG/PC3JD/PC3JD-C)

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY
RS-232/RS-422

MONITORING
interface converter PLC side*1 PLC side*1

RD(+) L1+ L1+

RD(-) L1- L1-

0V 0V 0V 2
FG
*2 *2

CONNECTION TO
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.

CONTROLLER
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

IAI ROBOT
(For PC3J/PC3JL)

RS-232/RS-422
interface converter PLC side*1 PLC side*1 3
RD(+) L1+ L1+

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
RD(-) L1- L1-

EQUIPMENT
0V 0V 0V

FG FG FG

*2 *2
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. 4
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

CONNECTION TO
(For PC2JC/PC2J16P, PC2J16PR)

OMRON PLC
RS-232/RS-422
interface converter PLC side*1 PLC side*1

RD(+) + +

RD(-) - - 5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
0V 0V 0V

CONNECTION TO
FG FG FG

CONTROLLER
*2 *2
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS422 connection diagram 3) 6

CONNECTION TO
RS-232/RS-422
*1 Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1

KEYENCE PLC
interface converter

RD(+) + +

RD(-) - -

0V 0V 0V

FG FG FG
7
*2 *2
CONNECTION TO

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
KOYO EI PLC

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8 - 11

8.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 4)

RS-232/RS-422
interface converter *1 Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1

RD(+) S+ S+

RD(-) S- S-

TD(+) R+ R+

TD(-) R- R-

0V 0V 0V

FG FG FG

*2 *2
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS422 connection diagram 5)

Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1

S+ S+ S+

S- S- S-

R+ R+ R+

R- R- R-

0V 0V 0V

FG FG FG

*2 *2
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS422 connection diagram 6)

RS-232/RS-422
interface converter *1 PLC side*1 PLC side*1

RD(+) L1S+ L1S+

RD(-) L1S- L1S-

TD(+) L1R+ L1R+

TD(-) L1R- L1R-

0V 0V 0V

FG *2 FG *2 FG

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS422 connection diagram 7)

PLC side*1 PLC side*1 PLC side*1

L1S+ L1S+ L1S+

L1S- L1S- L1S-

L1R+ L1R+ L1R+

L1R- L1R- L1R-

0V 0V 0V

FG *2 FG *2 FG

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

8 - 12 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 8) 1

PROCEDURES FOR
Link unit

PREPARATORY
GOT side*2 PLC side*1 side*1

MONITORING
RDA 2 L1S+ S+

RDB 7 L1S- S-

SDA 1 L1R+ R+
2
SDB 6 L1R- R-

CONNECTION TO
SG 5 0V 0V

CONTROLLER
RSA 3 FG FG

IAI ROBOT
*3
CSA 4

RSB 8

CSB 9
3
FG -

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and

EQUIPMENT
an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be
terminals.
*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a
terminal.
■ Connecting terminating resistors
*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
4

CONNECTION TO
 Precautions when preparing a cable

OMRON PLC
(1) Cable length
The maximum length of the RS-422 cable must be
500m or less.
(2) GOT side connector 5
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.

OMRON TEMPERATURE
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
(3) JTEKT PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the JTEKT PLC side
module.
For details, refer to the JTEKT PLC user's manual.
6
 Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
(1) GOT side

KEYENCE PLC
When connecting a JTEKT PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
7
(b) For GT14, GT11
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8 - 13

8.3 Connection Diagram
 8.4 GOT Side Settings
8.4.1 Setting communication
8.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.

4.
Item Description Range

Set this item when change the 9600bps,

transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
Click! (Default: 19200bps) 115200bps

Set this item when change the data

length used for communication with
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
the connected equipment.
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the (Default: 8bits)

menu. Specify the stop bit length for

Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: 1bit)
channel to be used from the list menu. Specify whether or not to perform a
None
parity check, and how it is
3. Set the following items. Parity
performed during communication.
Even
Odd
• Manufacturer: JTEKT (Default: Even)
• Controller Type: JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC Set the number of retries to be
• I/F: Interface to be used performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
• Driver: JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC error occurs.
(Default: 0time)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Set the time period for a
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: 3sec)
environment. Specify the host address (station
8.4.2 Communication detail settings No. of the GOT to which the PLC is
00 to 37
Host Address connected) in the connected
(Octal)
network.
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (Default: 00)

Set this item to adjust the

transmission timing of the
POINT Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms
GOT.
The settings of connecting equipment can be (Default: 0)
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
Select the communication format.
For details, refer to the following.
(Default: 1)
1.1.2 I/F communication setting format 1: PC3J extended function
Format 1/2
incompliant
format 2: PC3J extended function
compliant

8 - 14 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.4 GOT Side Settings
 1
POINT

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
(1) Format setting
The compatible format of PLC differs depending
on model.

Model name Compatible format

2
PC2J, PC2JS, PC2JR, PC2JC, PC2J16P,
Format 1 only
PC2J16PR

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Format 1 or
PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC3J, PC3JL
Format 2

IAI ROBOT
For details of PC3J extended function, refer to the
following manual.
JTEKT PLC user's manual
(2) Communication interface setting by the Utility
3
The communication interface setting can be

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project

EQUIPMENT
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
(3) Precedence in communication settings
4
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the

CONNECTION TO
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

OMRON PLC
5

OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
6

CONNECTION TO
KEYENCE PLC

7
CONNECTION TO
KOYO EI PLC

8
CONNECTION TO
JTEKT PLC

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8 - 15

8.4 GOT Side Settings
 8.5 PLC Side Setting

8.5.2 Connecting to PC2JC

POINT
JTEKT PLC  Communication settings
For details of JTEKT PLCs, refer to the following Make the communication settings using each setting
manuals. switch.
JTEKT PLC user's manual For the detail settings, refer to the following manual.
JTEKT PLC user's manual

Model name Refer to Item Set value

PC3JG, PC3JG-P, Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

PC3JD, PC3JD-C, Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits
8.5.1
PC3J, PC3JL, PC2J,
PLC CPU PC2JS, PC2JR Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

PC2JC 8.5.2 Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)

PC2J16P, PC2J16RR 8.5.3 *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
RS-232/RS-422 RS-232/RS-422
8.5.4
interface converter interface converter  Settings by switch
PC/CMP-LINK Make the communication settings using each setting
Link unit 2PORT-LINK 8.5.5 switch.
PC/CMP2-LINK
P C 2 J C C P U
START
POWER
RESET
RUN
WR EM

Transmission speed ROM ERR

ALM

setting switch SW2

8.5.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD,
PC3JD-C, PC3JG-P, PC3J, I/F
/ BATTERY
/ Exchanged

PC3JL, PC2J, PC2JS or

1st. .
ST.NO.H BAUDRA 2 n d ./ .
F0 12 F0 12
3rd./ .
B C DE

B C DE

Station number switch

3

3
4

4
5

6 6

PC2JR
A A
9 8 7 9 8 7

ST.NO.L
SW3, SW4 F0 12 T E R M
B C DE

3
4
5

A 6
9 8 7

 Communication settings Data length,stop bit

length SW5
Make the communication settings using the PLC
peripheral device (PCwin).
(1) Setting of the station No.
Item Set value Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps
Switch name Station number setting
Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits
SW3 Upper digit
Parity bit Even (fixed) SW4 Lower digit
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*2 0 to 37 (Octal) (2) Transmission speed settings

2-wire/4-wire type*3 2-wire type or 4-wire type
Transmission
Switch name Switch position
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. speed (bps)
*2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units. 1 19200
SW2
*3 Make the settings referring to the following connection 2 9600
diagram.
8.3.2 RS-422 cable
(3) Settings of data length and stop bit length
Switch No.
Switch name Setting item Set value
2 1
8bits OFF
Data bit
7bits ON
SW5
Stop 2bits OFF
bit length 1bit ON

8 - 16 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.5 PLC Side Setting
 8.5.3 Connecting to PC2J16P or 8.5.4 RS-232/RS-422 interface 1
PC2J16PR converter setting

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
 Communication settings  Communication settings
Make the communication settings using each setting Make the communication settings by the setting switch
switch. of the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter.
For the detail settings, refer to the following manual.
Item Set value
2
JTEKT PLC user's manual
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

CONNECTION TO
Item Set value 2-wire/4-wire type *2 2-wire type or 4-wire type

CONTROLLER
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps Echo back OFF

IAI ROBOT
Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits *1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits *2 Set referring to the RS-422 connection diagram.For details,
refer to the following.
Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)
Selection of module type Computer link
8.3.2 RS-422 cable
3
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
 Settings by switch

CONNECTION TO
AZBIL CONTROL
Make the communication settings by each setting
 Settings by switch

EQUIPMENT
switch of the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter.
Make the communication settings using each setting
switch.

ON
POWER
CONNECTION

OFF
4
TXU 2051
Data length, stop bit length and 2WIRES,2W-AUTO
FG
1
module type setting switches SW 5 FG

TD 2
TM TD
(+)

4 A UTO
(-) RS 232C/RS 422 CONVERTER
RS
0V 0V

FG
P C 2 J 1 6 C P U RD 3
RS 232C

START (+) (+)

CONNECTION TO
POWER 7 RD
0V L
RESET (-) (-)
RUN POWER T D R D R S

(+)
WR EM
ROM ERR 4WIRES

TD

OMRON PLC
ALM N o . BAUD RATE

RS 422
FG

(-)
FG 1 1 19200 bps
(+) (+) ON 2WIRES
TD 2 TD RD 456 2 9600 bps

0V
23
78
(-) (-) 2W-AUTO
RS 4 9 1 3 4800 bps
0V 0V OFF 4WIRES
0
RD 3 4 2400 bps
ECHO BAUD

(+)
(+) (+)
7 RD BACK RATE 5 1200 bps
I/F 0V
(-)
TD

RD
(-)
6 600 bps
/ BATTERY
Station number switch SET 7 300 bps

(-)
/ Exchanged
1 s t. .
SW2, SW3 SW5

5
2 n d ./ .
4 3 2 1 OFF TOYODA MACHINE WORKS,LTD
3rd./ .

SW2 SW3 SW4

ON
ON
TE R M
F0 12 F0 12 F0 12
B C DE

B C DE

B C DE

OMRON TEMPERATURE
3

(1) Transmission speed settings

4

4
5

A 6 A 6 A 6
9 8 7 9 8 7 9 8 7

CONNECTION TO
Transmission
Switch position

CONTROLLER
speed (bps)
456
23
78
Transmission speed setting
switch SW4 9600 2 9 1
0
(1) Setting of the station No.
Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal). 19200 1
BAUD
RATE 6

CONNECTION TO
Switch name Station number setting

KEYENCE PLC
SW2 Upper digit (2) Mode setting switch
SW3 Lower digit
Mode Switch position
2WIRES
(2) Transmission speed settings 2-wire type 2W-AUTO
2W-AUTO
Switch name Switch position
Transmission 7
speed (bps) 4-wire type 4 WIRES 4WIRES
1 19200
CONNECTION TO

SW4
2 9600
KOYO EI PLC

(3) Echoback setting switch

(3) Settings of data length, stop bit length and module Setting Switch position ON
type

Switch name Setting item Set value

4
Switch No.
3 2 OFF OFF OFF 8
8bits OFF ECHO
Data bit
CONNECTION TO

BACK
7bits ON
SW5 Stop bit 2bits OFF
JTEKT PLC

length 1bit ON
Module type Computer link OFF

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8 - 17

8.5 PLC Side Setting
 8.5.5 Link unit setting (1) Setting of the station No.
Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).
 Communication settings Switch name Station number setting
Make the communication settings using each setting SW1 Upper digit
switch of the link unit. SW2 Lower digit
For the detail settings, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual of the JTEKT link unit (2) Transmission speed settings
Item Set value Transmission
Switch name Switch position
speed (bps)
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
2 9600
Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits SW3
1 19200
Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits
*1 0 to 37 (Octal)
Station No. (3) Data length, stop bit length, module type and 2-wire/
Selection of module type Computer link 4-wire type communication selection setting
Selection of 2-wire type or
2-wire type or 4-wire type
4- wire type*2 Switch No.
Switch name Setting item Set value
4 3 2 1
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*2 Set referring to the RS-422 connection diagram.For details, 8bits OFF
refer to the following. Data bit
7bits ON
8.3.2 RS-422 cable
2bits OFF
Stop bit length
1bit ON
 Settings by switch PLC link
OFF
PC/CMP-LINK PC/CMP2-LINK SW4 Module type unit
TXD RXD
TXD RXD

ERR
CODE
ERR
CODE Computer link ON
B C DE
Station number B C DE

2-wire type/4- 2-wire type

78 9A
78 9A

OFF
F0 12

SW1
Station number switch
F0 12

SW1 switch
6

5 3
6

5 3 4
4

wire type communication

B C DE
B C DE SW2
78 9A

SW2 Transmission speed

F0 12
78 9A

Transmission speed
F0 12

5 3
4
6

5 3

SW3 SW3
setting switch
4

B C DE
setting switch B C DE
78 9A

communication
78 9A

F0 12
F0 12

SW4-4

4-wire type
SW4-4
6

5 3
6

5 3 4
SW4-3
SW4-3
Data length, stop bit length,
4

Data length, stop bit length SW4-2

ON
SW4-2 SW4-1
SW4-1
and module type setting module type and
LT
switches S+ 2-wire/4-wire selection selection*1 communication
S-
setting switches
+
R+ *1 The setting is available only for the link unit (Model: PC/
-
R-
CMP2-LINK).
0V 0V

FG FG

(Model PC/CMP-LINK) (Model PC/CMP2-LINK)

2PORT-LINK
8.5.6 Station number setting
TXDA TXDB
RXDA RXDB
ERRA ERRB
B C DE

Set each station number so that no station number

78 9A

F0 12
6

5 3
4

Data length, stop bit length

-
A
overlaps.
and module type setting switches
SW4B SW4A
0V

FG
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
SW SW SW
+ connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
B C DE B C DE B C DE -
78 9A

78 9A

78 9A
F0 12

F0 12

F0 12

B
6

5 3 5 3 5 3
4

B C DE
4

B C DE
4

B C DE
0V
78 9A

78 9A

78 9A
F0 12

F0 12

F0 12

FG
6

5 3 5 3 5 3
4 4 4

SW SW SW

Transmission speed
Station Station Station Station Station
setting switch No.3 2PORT-LINK
No.0 2PORT-LINK
No.1 2PORT-LINK
No.15 2PORT-LINK
No.6 2PORT-LINK

TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB
RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB RXDA RXDB

Station number switch ERRA

B C DE
ERRB ERRA
B C DE
ERRB ERRA
B C DE
ERRB ERRA
B C DE
ERRB ERRA
B C DE
ERRB
78 9A

78 9A

78 9A

78 9A

78 9A
F0 12

F0 12

F0 12

F0 12

F0 12
6

5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3
4 4 4 4 4

+ + + + +

(Model 2PORT-LINK)
GOT -

0V

FG
A
-

0V

FG
A
-

0V

FG
A
-

0V

FG
A
-

0V

FG
A

+ + + + +

- - - - -
B B B B B
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V

FG FG FG FG FG

Examples of station number setting

(1) Direct specification

Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when
setting device.

Specification range
00 to 37 (Octal)

8 - 18 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.5 PLC Side Setting
 1
8.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

PROCEDURES FOR
PREPARATORY

MONITORING
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT
are as follows. 8.6.1 JTEKT PLC
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the (JTEKT TOYOPUC-PLC)
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device 2
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Device name Setting range
No.
represen
same series.

CONNECTION TO
tation
Please make the setting according to the specifications of

CONTROLLER
Input (X)*1 X000 to X7FF
the controller actually used.

IAI ROBOT
Output (Y)*1 Y000 to Y7FF
When a non-existent device or a device number outside Link relay (L) L000 to L7FF
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
Internal relay (M) M000 to M7FF
may not be monitored.
Keep relay (K) K000 to K2FF 3
 Setting item Edge detection (P) P000 to P1FF

Timer (T)*1

CONNECTION TO
T000 to T1FF

AZBIL CONTROL
Counter (C)*1 C000 to C1FF

EQUIPMENT
Special relay (V) V000 to V0FF

Extended input (EX)*1 EX000 to EX7FF

Extended output (EY)*1 EY000 to EY7FF

Bit device

Extended internal relay (EM) EM0000 to EM1FFF Hexadeci

mal 4
Extended keep-relay (EK) EK000 to EKFFF

Extended special relay (EV) EV000 to EVFFF

CONNECTION TO
Extended timer (ET)*1 ET000 to ET7FF

OMRON PLC
Extended counter (EC)*1 EC000 to EC7FF

Extended link relay (EL) EL0000 to EL1FFF

Extended edge detection (EP) EP000 to EPFFF

Extended input 2 (GX)*1*3 GX0000 to GXFFFF

5
Item Description Extended output 2 (GY)*1*3 GY0000 to GYFFFF

OMRON TEMPERATURE
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. Extended internal relay (GM)*3 GM0000 to GMFFFF
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of

CONNECTION TO
Specified bits of the following

CONTROLLER
Device word device. Word device bit word devices
(Excluding EB and TCS)
Sets the number of the program for which
Program No.
the device is set. Data register (D) D0000 to D2FFF

Displays the device type and setting range which are Link register (R) R0000 to R07FF
Information
selected in [Device].
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Current value register (N)

Special register (S)

N0000 to N01FF

S0000 to S03FF
6
Network Set this item when monitoring the PLC of File register (B) B0000 to B1FFF

CONNECTION TO
Station No.
the specified station No. (octal)

KEYENCE PLC
Extended present value
EN0000 to EN07FF
register (EN)
Word device

Extended setup value register Hexadeci

H0000 to H07FF
POINT (H) mal
Extended special register (ES) ES0000 to ES07FF
Program number setting (when PC3JG, PC3J or
PC3JD is used)
Extended data register (U) U0000 to U7FFF

EB00000 to EB07FFF
7
Extended buffer register EB08000 to EB0FFFF
Setting of a program number is allowed for the devices
(EB)*3 EB10000 to EB17FFF
CONNECTION TO

indicated below. EB18000 to EB1FFFF

Internal relay (M), keep relay (K), link relay (L), special
KOYO EI PLC

Setup value register (TCS)*2 TCS0000 to TCS01FF

relay (V), edge detection (P), timer (T), counter (C),
Word of bit devices above Converting bit devices into word
data register (D), link register (R), special register (S),
current value register (N) *1 Overlapped device designation of an input (X, EX, GX) and
an output (Y, EY, GY), or a timer (T, ET) and a counter (C,
EC) is not allowed.(Example: X0000 and Y0000, EX0000
and EY0000) 8
*2 To store a setting value of T (timer) or C (counter), use TCS.
Setting value of a timer and a counter is stored in TCS.
CONNECTION TO

(TCS cannot be used if a timer or a counter is not in a

program.)
*3 GX, GY, GM and EB can be used only in the PC3JG
JTEKT PLC

separate mode.
Access to GX, GY, GM and EB through a link module is not
possible.

8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 8 - 19

8.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 8.7 Precautions
 Station No. settings of the PLC side
In the system configuration, the PLC with the station
number set with the host address must be included.For
details of host address setting, refer to the following.
8.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

 GOT clock control

The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC
with the station number set with the host address.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following.
8.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

 System configuration
If the system is configured by mixing the PC3J
extended function compliant PLC with the PC3J
extended function incompliant PLC, normal
communication may not be performed.Unify the PLCs
into PC3J extended function compliant or PC3J
extended function incompliant to configure the system.

 System alarm
The system alarm can be displayed only for the PLC
set with a host address.When connected to the PC3J
extended function compliant PLC, only the system
alarm of program No. 1 can be displayed.

8 - 20 8. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC

8.7 Precautions
 9
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

CONTROLLER
9.

11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
12
9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

CONNECTION TO
9.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7

TOSHIBA PLC
9.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
9.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 11
9.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

9-1
9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Model name Clock Refer to
Type

JW-21CU RS-422

RS-232 9.2.1
JW-22CU
RS-422

JW-31CUH RS-422

JW-32CUH RS-232 9.2.2

JW-33CUH RS-422

JW-50CUH RS-422

JW-70CUH *1

RS-232 9.2.3
JW-100CUH *1
RS-422
JW-100CU

RS-232
Z-512J 9.2.4
RS-422

*1 When the link unit (ZW-10CM) is used in JW-70CUH/100CUH, the clock function is not available.

9-2 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.1 Connectable Model List
 9
9.2 System Configuration

CONNECTION TO
9.2.1 Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

10
JW-21CU
JW-22CU Link unit GOT
JW-31CU SHARP JW

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
Connection cable

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT

Model Communication Cable model Max. distance

Number of
connectable 11
Link unit*1 Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m)
or Differs according to - (Built into GOT)
RS-232 PLC side

CHINO
RS232 connection diagram
specifications.
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

Differs according to
12
RS422 connection diagram
PLC side - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
1) specifications.
JW-22CU -

TOSHIBA PLC
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m)
RS-422
GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) Differs according to GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) PLC side
or specifications.
GT15-RS4-9S
1 GOT for 1 PLC 13
RS422 connection diagram

TOSHIBA MACHINE
- (Built into GOT)
4)

CONNECTION TO
Differs according to
RS422 connection diagram
RS-422 PLC side - (Built into GOT)
3) specifications.

PLC
GT16-C02R4-9S

JW-21CU
GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m)
GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m)
(0.2m) 14
JW-21CM *2

PANASONIC SERVO
JW-22CU GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) Differs according to GT15-RS2T4-9P

CONNECTION TO
RS-422 GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) PLC side GT15-RS4-9S
or specifications.
RS422 connection diagram AMPLIFIER
- (Built into GOT)
6)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation.

For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation. 15
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9-3

9.2 System Configuration
 9.2.2 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH

Communication driver
JW-31CUH
JW-32CUH Link unit GOT
JW-33CUH SHARP JW
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. distance connectable
Model name Link unit*1 Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number

GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m)
or Differs according to - (Built into GOT)
RS-232 PLC side
RS232 connection diagram
specifications.
2)
GT15-RS2-9P

Differs according to
RS422 connection diagram
PLC side - (Built into GOT)
JW-32CUH 2) specifications.
-
JW-33CUH
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m) (0.2m)
GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m)
RS-422
GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) Differs according to GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) PLC side GT15-RS4-9S 1 GOT for 1
or specifications.
PLC
RS422 connection diagram
- (Built into GOT)
5)

RS422 connection diagram

- (Built into GOT)
3)

GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) (0.2m)
JW-31CUH GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) Differs according to
JW-32CUH JW-21CM RS-422 GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) PLC side GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
JW-33CUH GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) specifications.
GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram
- (Built into GOT)
6)

*1 Use the link unit supporting JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH.

The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation.
For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

9-4 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.2 System Configuration
 9.2.3 Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU 9

CONNECTION TO
Communication driver

SHARP PLC
JW-50CUH
JW-70CUH Link unit GOT
JW-100CUH SHARP JW
JW-100CU
Connection cable

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
PLC Connection cable GOT

CONTROLLER
Number of
Communication Cable model Max. distance connectable
Model name Link unit*1 Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number

GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m) Differs according 11

or - (Built into GOT)
to
RS-232

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram PLC side
specifications.

CONTROLLER
1)
GT15-RS2-9P

CHINO
Differs according
RS422 connection diagram to
JW-70CUH - (Built into GOT)
1) PLC side
JW-100CUH
JW-100CU
- specifications. 12
GT16-C02R4-9S
GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m)

CONNECTION TO
(0.2m)
RS-422 GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m)

TOSHIBA PLC
GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) Differs according GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) to
PLC side GT15-RS4-9S
or 1 GOT for 1
specifications. PLC
RS422 connection diagram
- (Built into GOT)
4)
13
Differs according

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram to
- (Built into GOT)
3) PLC side
specifications.

JW-50CUH GT16-C02R4-9S

PLC
GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) (0.2m)
JW-70CUH JW-10CM
RS-422 GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m)
JW-100CUH ZW-10CM
JW-100CU
GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m)
GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m)
Differs according
to
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2 14
GT15-RS4-9S

PANASONIC SERVO
or PLC side

CONNECTION TO
specifications.
RS422 connection diagram
- (Built into GOT)
6)
AMPLIFIER
*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation.
For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9-5

9.2 System Configuration
 9.2.4 Connecting to Z-512J

Communication driver

Z-512J GOT
SHARP JW
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. distance connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number

GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m) Differs according to - (Built into GOT)

RS-232 or PLC side
RS232 connection diagram 2) specifications.

GT15-RS2-9P

Differs according to
RS422 connection diagram 2) PLC side - (Built into GOT)
Z-512J specifications. 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m)
RS-422 GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) Differs according to
GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) PLC side GT15-RS4-9S
or specifications.

RS422 connection diagram 5) - (Built into GOT)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

9-6 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.2 System Configuration
 9
9.3 Connection Diagram

CONNECTION TO
The following diagram shows the connection between the

SHARP PLC
GOT and the PLC.
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
9.3.1 RS-232 cable The maximum length of the RS-232 cable differs
according to the specifications of the SHARP PLC.
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
For details, refer to the following manual.

TECHNOS INDICATING
 Connection diagram SHARP PLC user's Manual
RS232 connection diagram 1)

CONTROLLER
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
GOT side SHARP PLC side
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
(3) SHARP PLC side connector 11
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD Use the connector compatible with the SHARP PLC

CONNECTION TO
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD side module.

CONTROLLER
For details, refer to the SHARP PLC user's manual.
ER(DTR) 4 5 CTS

CHINO
SG 5 7 SG

DR(DSR) 6 4 RTS

RS(RTS) 7 12 - 12
CS(CTS) 8 14 -

CONNECTION TO
- 9

TOSHIBA PLC
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC

RS232 connection diagram 2)

13
GOT side SHARP PLC side

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG

RD(RXD) 2 2 SD

SD(TXD) 3 4 RD

PLC
ER(DTR) 4 12 CTS

SG 5 7 SG 14

PANASONIC SERVO
DR(DSR) 6 8 RTS

CONNECTION TO
RS(RTS) 7

AMPLIFIER
CS(CTS) 8

- 9

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9-7

9.3 Connection Diagram
 9.3.2 RS-422 cable RS422 connection diagram 3)
GOT side SHARP PLC side

 Connection diagram SDA1(TXD1+) 1

L3
RD(+)
RS422 connection diagram 1) L4
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RD(-)
GOT side SHARP PLC side L1
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SD(+)
L2
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 12 RXD(RD(+)) RDB1(RXD1-) 4 SD(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 13 RXD(RD(-)) SDA2(TXD2+) 5

RDA1(RXD1+) 3 10 TXD(SD(+)) SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDB1(RXD1-) 4 11 TXD(SD(-)) RDA2(RXD2+) 7

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 5 RDB2(RXD2-) 8

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 6 terminating*1
resistor RSA(RTS+) 9

RDA2(RXD2+) 7 1 RSB(RTS-) 10

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8 CSA(CTS+) 11

RSA(RTS+) 9 9 CSB(CTS-) 12
SHIELD*1
RSB(RTS-) 10 2 SG 13

CSA(CTS+) 11 3 NC 14

CSB(CTS-) 12 4 Shell

SG 13 7 SG
*1 Two SHIELD terminals are provided for JW-10CM and ZW-
NC 14 14 10CM.Connect to either SHIELD terminal.

Shell 15
RS422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Connect the terminating resistor at pin 6 with pin 13 (RXD) GOT side SHARP PLC side
only at the terminal station.
(Valid for JW-70CUH and JW-100CUH. The terminating RDA 2 10 TXD(SD(+))
resistor does not exist in JW-22CU and JW-100CU.)
RDB 7 11 TXD(SD(-))
RS422 connection diagram 2) SDA 1 12 RXD(RD(+))
GOT side SHARP PLC side SDB 6 13 RXD(RD(-))
Terminating *1
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 9 RD(+) RSA 3 6 resistor
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 RD(-) RSB 8

RDA1(RXD1+) 3 3 SD(+) CSA 4

RDB1(RXD1-) 4 11 SD(-) CSB 9

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 5 SG 5 7 SG

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 1 FG -

RDA2(RXD2+) 7 7 SG *1 Connect the terminating resistor at pin 6 with pin 13 (RXD)

only at the terminal station.
RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8
(Valid for JW-70CUH and JW-100CUH. The terminating
resistor does not exist in JW-22CU and JW-100CU.)
RSA(RTS+) 9 2

RSB(RTS-) 10 4

CSA(CTS+) 11 13

CSB(CTS-) 12 12

SG 13 6 SG

NC 14 14

Shell 15

9-8 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 5) 9
GOT side SHARP PLC side  Connecting terminating resistors

CONNECTION TO
RDA 2 3 SD(+) (1) GOT side

SHARP PLC
RDB 7 11 SD(-)
When connecting a SHARP PLC to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
SDA 1 9 RD(+)
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
SDB RD(-) Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
10
6 10

RSA 3
GOT main unit to "Disable".
(b) For GT14, GT11

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
RSB 8
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
CSA 4

CONTROLLER
CSB 9
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
to the following.
SG 5 6 SG
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
FG - 7 SG
(2) SHARP PLC side 11
Connect the terminating resistor on the SHARP PLC
side when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC.

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram 6)

CONTROLLER
GOT side SHARP PLC side
The PLC CPUs and the modules on the PLC CPU side
L1 requiring a terminating resistor are shown below.

CHINO
RDA 2 SD(+)

RDB 7
L2
SD(-) (a) JW-22CU
SDA 1
L3
RD(+) Turn "ON" the terminating resistor setting switch
(SW1) on the back of JW-22CU to validate the
12
L4
SDB 6 RD(-) terminating resistor.

CONNECTION TO
RSA 3
(b) JW-70CUH and JW-100CUH

TOSHIBA PLC
RSB 8
Connect the pin 6 (terminating resistor) of the
CSA 4 communication port connection connector with the
pin 13 (RXD) only at the terminal station to validate
CSB 9
the terminating resistor.
SG 5
SHIELD*
1

(c) JW-21CM, JW-10CM and ZW-10CM

13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
FG -
Turn "ON" the terminator switch (SW7) on the front

CONNECTION TO
panel only at the terminal station to validate the
*1 Two SHIELD terminals are provided for JW-10CM and ZW-
10CM.Connect to either SHIELD terminal. terminating resistor.

 Precautions when preparing a cable

PLC
(1) Cable length
The maximum length of the RS-422 cable differs
14

PANASONIC SERVO
according to the specifications of the SHARP PLC.
CONNECTION TO
For details, refer to the following manual.
SHARP PLC user's Manual
AMPLIFIER
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
15
(3) SHARP PLC side connector
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Use the connector compatible with the SHARP PLC

DEVICES SUNX PLC

side module.
CONNECTION TO

For details, refer to the SHARP PLC user's manual.

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9-9

9.3 Connection Diagram
 9.4 GOT Side Settings
9.4.1 Setting communication
9.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the transmission
4800bps,
4. Transmission speed used for communication with the
9600bps,
Speed connected equipment.
19200bps
(Default: 19200bps)
Set this item when change the data length
used for communication with the connected
Data Bit 7bit (fixed)
equipment.
(Default: 7bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
Click!
Stop Bit communications. 2bit (fixed)
(Default: 2bit)
Specify whether or not to perform a parity
check, and how it is performed during Even
Parity
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the
communication.
(Default: Even)
(fixed)

menu. Set the number of retries to be performed

0 to
Retry when a communication error occurs.
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the (Default: 0time)
5times

channel to be used from the list menu. Specify the time period from the GOT
startup until GOT starts the communication
Startup Time 3 to 30sec
3. Set the following items. with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
• Manufacturer: SHARP
Set the time period for a communication to
• Controller Type: SHARP JW Timeout
time out. 3 to 30sec
• I/F: Interface to be used Time*1
(Default: 3sec)
• Driver: SHARP JW Set this item to adjust the transmission
timing of the communication request from 0 to
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Delay Time
the GOT. 300ms
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. (Default: 0ms)
*1 When connecting to the communication port, set "Delay
Make the settings according to the usage Time" of the GOT side to 30ms or more.
environment.
9.4.2 Communication detail settings POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
POINT after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility, refer to the following
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. manual.
For details, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

9 - 10 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.4 GOT Side Settings
 9
9.5 PLC Side Setting

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
9.5.1 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-
POINT
70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-
SHARP PLC 100CU
For details of the SHARP PLC, refer to the following 10
manual.
 System memory setting

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
SHARP PLC user's Manual
Set the system memory.

CONTROLLER
System
Item Set value
Model name Refer to memory No.
JW-22CU 9.5.1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 to D0
JW-32CUH,
JW-33CUH
9.5.2 0 0 (3) (2) (1) 11
PLC CPU JW-70CUH,
Transmission (1) Transmission speed *1 *2

CONNECTION TO
JW-100CUH, 9.5.1 000: 19200bps
speed,

CONTROLLER
JW-100CU #236 001: 9600bps
parity and 010: 4800bps
Z-512J 9.5.2 stop bit
(2) Parity

CHINO
JW-21CM 9.5.3
10 (fixed): Even
Link unit JW-10CM,
9.5.4 (3) Stop bit
ZW-10CM
1 (fixed): 2 bits 12
#237 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)

CONNECTION TO
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.

TOSHIBA PLC
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
9.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
13
 Terminating resistor setting switch (For JW-

TOSHIBA MACHINE
22CU only)

CONNECTION TO
Set the terminating resistor setting switch.

(1) When using KV-L20R or KV-L20

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

terminator switch(SW1)

Settings
For RS-232
RS-422 communication
ON communication
OFF OFF (no terminating ON (terminating resistor
resistor) attached)

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9 - 11

9.5 PLC Side Setting
 9.5.2 Connecting to JW-32CUH, 9.5.3 Connecting to the link unit
JW-33CUH or Z-512J (JW-21CM)

 Settings for connecting to communication  Switch setting of the link unit (JW-21CM)
port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) Make setting for each switch.
Set the system memory. JW-21CM

System
CM 30 RO TERF

Item Set value 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

memory No.

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 to D0 Inside the front panel

0 0 (3) (2) (1) UNIT
No.
UNIT No.
Transmission (1) Transmission speed *1 *2 A
000: 19200bps 78 78 STA

4 56
90 1
456
90 1
L1 No.
speed, 001: 9600bps (1)
#234 23 23 10
parity and 010: 4800bps L2

stop bit (2) Parity

L3 (3)
LT
10 (fixed): Even L4 78 STA

4 56
90 1
SHIELD ON No.
(3) Stop bit (2) 23 1
1 (fixed): 2 bits FG OFF

#235 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side. Side view indicated by A
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
BCD
the following.

E
7 89A

SW4
F 012
(5)
9.4.1 Setting communication interface

6
34 5
(Communication settings)
4
3

 Settings for connecting to communication

BCD

SW3
(4)

E
7 89A

SW0
F 012
(6)
2

port 2 (PG/COMM2 port)

6
1

34 5

Set the system memory.

OFF
ON

System
Item Set value
memory No.

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 to D0 (1) Module No. switch (SW8)

The module No. switch is not used for communication
0 0 (3) (2) (1)
with the GOT.
Transmission (1) Transmission speed *1 *2

speed,
000: 19200bps (2) Terminator switch(SW7)
#236 001: 9600bps
parity and 010: 4800bps
Settings Setting details
stop bit (2) Parity LT
10 (fixed): Even
ON Terminating resistor
(3) Stop bit ON*1
OFF validated
1 (fixed): 2 bits
#237 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)
*1 Turn on only for the terminal station.
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
*2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. (3) Station number setting switch(SW1,SW2)
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following. Switch No. Settings Setting details
9.4.1 Setting communication interface 78 STA Station No.
4 56
90 1

(Communication settings) No.

lower digit
23
10 SW1 1 (fixed)
(100 digit)
78 STA Station No.
4 56
90 1

23 No. SW2 upper digit 0 (fixed)

1
(101 digit)

9 - 12 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.5 PLC Side Setting
(4) Operation mode setting switch(SW3) 9.5.4 Connecting to the link unit 9
(JW-10CM or ZW-10CM)

CONNECTION TO
Switch No. Settings Setting details

SW3-1 OFF (fixed) Invalid

SHARP PLC
4

 Switch setting of link unit (JW-10CM and ZW-

3

SW3

SW3-2 ON (fixed) 4-wire type 10CM)

2
1

SW3-3 OFF (fixed) Invalid

10
OFF
ON

SW3-4 ON (fixed) Even

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
(5) Transmission speed setting switch (SW4)
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

CONTROLLER
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side,
refer to the following.
Inside the cover of switch setting
9.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)
78
11

9 0 1
4 5 6
Setting*1 Setting details SW0 (1)

CONNECTION TO
BCD 23
E
7 89A

SW4

0 19200bps
F 012

CONTROLLER
78

9 0 1
4 5 6
1 9600bps SW2
6

34 5 23
2 4800bps (2)

CHINO
78

9 0 1
4 5 6
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that SW1
can be set on the GOT side.
23

12
78

9 0 1
(4)

4 5 6
SW4
(6) Function setting switch(SW0) 23

CONNECTION TO
3
Settings Setting details SW3 (3)
BCD

TOSHIBA PLC
2
E
7 89A

SW0

ON
F 012

4 (fixed) Computer link

6

ON
(5)
34 5
SW7 OFF

13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
(1) Function setting switch(SW0)

78
Settings Setting details

PLC
9 0 1
4 5 6

SW0 Computer link

23 4 (fixed)
(command mode)
14
(2) Station number switch(SW1,SW2)

PANASONIC SERVO
Switch No. Settings Setting details CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER
78 Station No.
9 0 1
4 5 6

SW2 SW1 lower digit 1 (fixed)

23

78
(100 digit)
9 0 1
4 5 6

SW1 Station No.

23
SW2 upper digit 0 (fixed) 15
(101 digit)
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

(3) Operation mode setting switch(SW3)

Switch No. Settings Setting details
4 SW3-1 OFF (fixed) Invalid
3
SW3 SW3-2 ON (fixed) 4-wire type
2
ON 1 SW3-3 OFF (fixed) Invalid
SW3-4 ON (fixed) Even

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9 - 13

9.5 PLC Side Setting
(4) Transmission speed setting switch (SW4)
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side,
refer to the following.
9.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

Setting*1 Setting details

78
0 19200bps
9 0 1
4 5 6

SW4
23 1 9600bps
2 4800bps
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can
be set on the GOT side.

(5) Terminator switch(SW7)

Settings Setting details
ON
SW7 OFF
ON*2 Terminating resistor validated

*2 Set to ON only for the terminal station.

9 - 14 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.5 PLC Side Setting
 9
9.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT

SHARP PLC
are as follows. (b) When setting a register and memory as a
word device.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
• I/O relay
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
Set a combination of the device address
The device specifications of controllers may differ (multiple of 16)+bit address format (fixed to 10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the
0).

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
same series.

TECHNOS INDICATING
Please make the setting according to the specifications of

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Even number The next line mu
may not be monitored. to 0,for it is bit ad
• Registers and file register 11
 Setting item Set the device address (multiple of 16).

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
Type Even number
(2) Monitoring the timer (T) and the counter (C)
(a) Address setting
12
Be sure not to set the same address range for

CONNECTION TO
the timer (T) and the counter (C).

TOSHIBA PLC
Even if these addresses are overlapped, GOT
Item Description
displays no error.
GOT monitors them according to the address
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit
instead of the device name.
Therefore, if a device which is invalid for the
of word device.
Displays the device type and setting range which are
SHARP PLC side parameter is set using GT 13
Information Designer3, GOT monitors other device (a

TOSHIBA MACHINE
selected in [Device].

CONNECTION TO
device corresponding to the address range of
the set device).
POINT Example:

PLC
(1) Device settings of SHARP PLC Content in SHARP PLC parameter setting
(a) When setting a register as a bit device
• Registers
T0000 to T1000
C1001 to C1777
14

PANASONIC SERVO
Set the type (first 2 digits) and the address.

CONNECTION TO
Even if GT Designer3 is
set to "C0000", GOT will
AMPLIFIER
Content in GT Designer3 also monitor "T0000".
parameter setting

Number Address
• File register
Set the file number and the address.
15
(b) Contact writing into timer (T) and the counter
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

(C)
DEVICES SUNX PLC

Writing the contact for the timer (T) and the

CONNECTION TO

counter (C) can only be done while the CPU is

in RUN (while the timer and counter is in
File number Address operation).

9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 9 - 15

9.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 9.6.1 SHARP PLC (SHARP JW)

Device No.
Device name Setting range
representation

..00000 to ..15777
I/O relay
..20000 to ..75777

Timer (Contact) (T) T0000 to T1777 Octal

Bit device

Counter (Contact)
C0000 to C1777
(C)

Specified bit of the word

Word device bit -
devices

Timer (Current
T0000 to T1777
value) (T)

Counter (Current
C0000 to C1777
value) (C)

09000 to 09776

19000 to 19776

29000 to 29776

39000 to 39776

49000 to 49776

59000 to 59776

69000 to 69776

79000 to 79776

89000 to 89776
Word device

Register (09 to E7)

99000 to 99776
Octal
E0000 to E0776

E1000 to E1776

E2000 to E2776

E3000 to E3776

E4000 to E4776

E5000 to E5776

E6000 to E6776

E7000 to E7776

1000000 to 1177776
2000000 to 2177776
3000000 to 3177776
File register
4000000 to 4177776
(1 to 7)
5000000 to 5177776
6000000 to 6177776
7000000 to 7177776

9 - 16 9. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC

9.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 10
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO SHINKO

CONTROLLER
10.

TECHNOS INDICATING 11
CONTROLLER

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
13
10.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
10.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13

PLC
10.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
10.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16 14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

10 - 1
10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communi
Series Model name Clock cation Refer to
Type
RS-232
ACS-13A Series ACS-13A / , ,C5*2 10.2.1
RS-485

JCS-33A- / ,C5*2
RS-232
JC Series JCR-33A- / ,C5*2 10.2.1
RS-485
*2
JCD-33A- / ,C5
RS-232
JCM-33A Series JCM-33A / , C5*2 10.2.1
RS-485
RS-232
JIR-301-M Series JIR-301-M ,C5*2 10.2.1
RS-485
RS-232
PCD-300 Series PCD-33A- /M,C5*2 10.2.1
RS-485

PC935- /M,C5*2 RS-232

RS-485 10.2.1
PC955- /M,C5*2
PC-900 Series
PC935- /M,C*1
RS-232 10.2.2
PC955- /M,C*1

FCD-13A- /M,C
FCD-100 Series*1 RS-232 10.2.2
FCD-15A- /M,C

FCR-13A- /M,C
FCR-100 Series*1 RS-232 10.2.2
FCR-15A- /M,C

FCR-23A- /M,C
FCR-23A Series*1 RS-232 10.2.2
FCR-23A- /M,C5

FIR Series*1 FIR-201-M,C RS-232 10.2.2

RS-232
DCL-33A Series DCL-33A- /M, ,C5*2 10.2.3
RS-485

*1 Only the indicating controller equipped with RS-232 communication function can be connected.
*2 The indicating controller of the following version or later can be connected.
Series Model name Version

ACS-13A Series ACS-13A / , ,C5

JCS-33A- / ,C5

JC Series JCR-33A- / ,C5

JCD-33A- / ,C5

JCM-33A Series JCM-33A- / , C5 Products manufactured in October 2007 or later

(Indicating controllers with the serial numbers 07Axxxxxx, 07Kxxxxxx, and 07Xxxxxxx or later)
JIR-301-M Series JIR-301-M ,C5 (The first two digits of the serial numbers show the last two digits of the year.)

PCD-300 Series PCD-33A- /M,C5

PC935- /M,C5
PC-900 Series
PC955- /M,C5

DCL-33A Series DCL-33A- /M, ,C5

10 - 2 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.1 Connectable Model List
 9
10.2 System Configuration

CONNECTION TO
10.2.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300 Series, PC-

SHARP PLC
900 Series (PC-955-[ ]/M,C5, PC-935-[ ]/M,C5)
 For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)
Communication driver
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
Shinko Technos Controller

CONTROLLER
ACS13A,JC, ACS13A,JC,
JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M,
Interface
PCD-300 series, PCD-300 series, GOT
PC-955-□/M,C5, PC-955-□/M,C5, converter
PC-935-□/M,C5 PC-935-□/M,C5
Connection cable 2)
11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1)

CHINO
Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of
12
Communication
Cable model Cable model connectable
Communication Max. converter*1 Max. Option
Model name Connection Connection Model equipment
Type distance distance device
diagram number diagram number

CONNECTION TO
ACS13A

TOSHIBA PLC
JC - (Built
JCM-33A 31
RS485 RS-232C CFP- into GOT) indicating
JIR-301-M RS-232 connection 1,200m IF-400 15m
PCD-300 Series C2*1 controllers
diagram 1) for 1 GOT
PC-955- /M,C5
13
GT15-
PC-935- /M,C5 RS2-9P
*1 The communication converter is a product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Technos Co., Ltd.

 For the RS-485 connection

Communication driver

PLC
14
Shinko Technos Controller

ACS13A,JC, ACS13A,JC,

PANASONIC SERVO
JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M,

CONNECTION TO
PCD-300 series, PCD-300 series, GOT
PC-955-□/M,C5, PC-955-□/M,C5,
PC-935-□/M,C5 PC-935-□/M,C5

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Connection cable
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

Indicating controller Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS485 connection diagram 2) 500m GT15-RS4-TE

ACS13A
JC
JCM-33A RS485 connection diagram 7) 500m - (Built into GOT)
31 indicating
JIR-301-M RS-485 controllers for 1
PCD-300 Series FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m) GOT
PC-955- /M,C5 RS485 connection diagram 6) 500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
PC-935- /M,C5 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 3

10.2 System Configuration
 10.2.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series
(PC-955[ ]/M,C, PC-935-[ ]/M,C)

Communication driver
FCD-100,FCR-100,
FCR-23A,
FIR series, GOT
PC-955-□/M,C, Shinko Technos Controller
PC-935-□/M,C
Connection cable

Indicating controller*1 Connection cable GOT

Number of connectable
Communication Cable model Max. equipment
Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance

FCD-100
FCR-100 GT09-C30R21401-4T(3m)
or - (Built into GOT)
FCR-23A 31 indicating controllers
RS-232 15m
FIR Series RS232 connection diagram for 1 GOT
PC-955- /M,C 1)
PC-935- /M,C GT15-RS2-9P

*1 Only the indicating controller equipped with RS-232 communication function can be connected.

10 - 4 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.2 System Configuration
10.2.3 When connecting to DCL-33A Series 9

CONNECTION TO
 For the RS-232 connection (via communication converter)

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

Shinko Technos Controller

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
DCL-33A DCL-33A Interface

TECHNOS INDICATING
GOT
series series converter

CONTROLLER
Connection cable 2)

11
Connection cable 1)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
Number of
Cable model Communication Cable model connectable

CHINO
Model Communication Max. converter*1 Max. Option
Connection diagram Connection diagram Model equipment
name Type distance distance device
number number

- (Built
12
into 31 indicating

CONNECTION TO
DCL-33A GOT)
RS-232 RS485-CPP *1 1,200m IF-400 RS-232CCFP-C2 *1 15m controllers

TOSHIBA PLC
Series
for 1 GOT
GT15-
RS2-9P
*1 Product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

 For the RS-485 connection 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Communication driver

Shinko Technos Controller

PLC
DCL-33A
series
DCL-33A
series
GOT 14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

15
Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Number of
Max.
DEVICES SUNX PLC

Cable model Cable model connectable

Model Communication
CONNECTION TO

Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model

name Type equipment
number number

RS485 connection
500m GT15-RS4-TE
diagram 3)

RS485 connection 31 indicating

DCL-33A 500m - (Built into GOT)
RS-485 RS-485 CPP*1 diagram 5)
controllers for
Series
1 GOT
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485 connection
500m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
diagram 4) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
*1 Product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 5

10.2 System Configuration
 10.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC.

10.3.1 RS-232 cable

 Connection diagram
RS232 connection diagram 1)
Indicating
GOT side
controller side

CD 1 COM

RD(RXD) 2 TX

SD(TXD) 3 RX

ER(DTR) 4

SG 5

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

NC 9

FG - *1

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable

shield line.

 Precautions when preparing a cable

(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos
indicating controller side.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the Shinko
Technos indicating controller.

10 - 6 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.3 Connection Diagram
 10.3.2 RS-485 cable 9

CONNECTION TO
 Connection diagram

SHARP PLC
RS485 connection diagram 1)

Terminating resistor*3
Interface converter Indicating Indicating
(IF-400) controller side controller side
4 YA(-) 10
YA(-) YA(-)

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
3 YB(+)

TECHNOS INDICATING
YB(+) YB(+)
1 SG
COM SG

CONTROLLER
6
COM
2 *2 *2
NC

11
5
NC

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model.

CONNECTION TO
Refer to the following table.

CONTROLLER
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
*3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

CHINO
Model of indicating controller
Signal
name
JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 12
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

CONNECTION TO
YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16 11 11 11

TOSHIBA PLC
YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17 14 12 12

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18 17 16 16

RS485 connection diagram 2) 13

GOT side*4 Indicating Indicating

TOSHIBA MACHINE
(terminal block) controller side controller side

CONNECTION TO
YA(-)
SDB1 2 YA(-)
YB(+)
SDA1 1 YB(+)
SG
RDA1 3 SG

PLC
RDB1 4
SDA2
SDB2
5

6
*2
Terminating resistor*3 14

PANASONIC SERVO
RDA2 7

CONNECTION TO
RDB2 8

SG 9

FG 10 AMPLIFIER
*2

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model.

*2
Refer to the following table.
Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

*3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.
DEVICES SUNX PLC

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

CONNECTION TO

*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

Model of indicating controller

Signal
JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935
name
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16 11 11 11

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17 14 12 12

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18 17 16 16

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 7

10.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 3) RS485 connection diagram 5)

GOT side*1 Shinko technos indicating Shinko technos indicating

controller side controller side
(terminal block) (Modular connector) GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
SDB1 2 4 YA(-) SDB1(TXD1-) 2 4 YA(-)
SDA1 1 3 YB(+) SDA1(TXD1+) 1 3 YB(+)
RDA1 3 2 NC RDA2(RXD2+) 7 2 NC
RDB1 4 5 NC RDA1(RXD1+) 3 5 NC
SDA2 5 1 COM RDB1(RXD1-) 4 1 COM
SDB2 6 6 COM SDA2(TXD2+) 5 6 COM
RDA2 7 SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDB2 8 RDB2(RXD2-) 8

SG 9 RSA(RTS+) 9

FG 10
*3 RSB(RTS-) 10

*1 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side. CSA(CTS+) 11

■ Connecting terminating resistors CSB(CTS-) 12

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual. SG 13

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating NC 14

controller
*3
*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable Shell
shield line.
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.
RS485 connection diagram 4) ■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
Shinko technos indicating manual.
GOT side*1
controller side
(terminal block) (Modular connector) User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating
controller
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 4 YA(-) *3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 3 YB(+)
NC 1 2 NC
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 5 NC
SDB2(TXD2-) 7 1 COM
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 6 COM
RDB1(RXD1-) 12

RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDB2(RXD2-) 11

NC 3

NC 4

NC 13

RSA(RTS+) 14

RSB(RTS-) 16

CSA(CTS+) 18

CSB(CTS-) 20

SG 2

NC 15
*3
NC 17

NC 19

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating
controller
*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.

10 - 8 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 6) 9
Terminating resistor**3

CONNECTION TO
Indicating Indicating
GOT side*4 controller side controller side

SHARP PLC
YA(-)
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 YA(-)
YB(+)
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 YB(+)

10
SG
SG 2 SG

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
NC 1

TECHNOS INDICATING
*2
NC 3

CONTROLLER
NC 4

SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 7

RDA2(RXD2+) 9 11
RDA1(RXD1+) 10

CONNECTION TO
RDB2(RXD2-) 11

CONTROLLER
RDB1(RXD1-) 12

CHINO
NC 13

RSA(RTS+) 14

NC 15 12
RSB(RTS-) 16

CONNECTION TO
NC 17

TOSHIBA PLC
CSA(CTS+) 18

NC 19

CSB(CTS-) 20

*2
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

CONNECTION TO
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
*3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

PLC
■ Connecting terminating resistors

Model of indicating controller

14

PANASONIC SERVO
Signal

CONNECTION TO
JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935
name
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16 11 11 11 AMPLIFIER

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17 14 12 12

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18 17 16 16
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 9

10.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 7)

Terminating resistor*3
Indicating Indicating
GOT side*4 controller side controller side
YB(+)
SDA1(TXD1-) 1 YB(+)
YA(-)
SDB1(TXD1+) 2 YA(-)
SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 SG

RDB1(RXD1-) 4
*2
SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RSA(RTS+) 9

RSB(RTS-) 10

CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13

NC 14

Shell

*2

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
*3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

Model of indicating controller

Signal
JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935
name
Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16 11 11 11

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17 14 12 12

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18 17 16 16

10 - 10 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.3 Connection Diagram
 9
 Precautions when preparing a cable

CONNECTION TO
(1) Cable length
(a) The length of the RS-485 cable used for direct

SHARP PLC
connecting the indicating controller to the
communication converter
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 1200m or
less. 10
(b) The length of the RS-485 cable used for direct

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
connecting the indicating controller to GOT

TECHNOS INDICATING
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or
less.

CONTROLLER
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
11
(3) Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos

CONNECTION TO
indicating controller side.

CONTROLLER
For details, refer to the user's manual of the Shinko
Technos indicating controller.

CHINO
 Connecting terminating resistors 12
(1) GOT side

CONNECTION TO
When connecting a Shinko Technos indicating

TOSHIBA PLC
controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be
connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
(b) For GT14, GT11
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330Ω".

CONNECTION TO
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer
to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

PLC
(2) Shinko Technos indicating controller side
When connecting a Shinko Technos indicating 14
controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
connected to the Shinko Technos indicating controller.
User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating
controller AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 11

10.3 Connection Diagram
 10.4 GOT Side Settings
10.4.1 Setting communication
10.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
settings)

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.

4. Item Description Range

9600bps,
Set this item when change the
19200bps,
Transmission transmission speed used for
38400bps,
Speed communication with the connected
57600bps,
equipment. (Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
Set this item when change the data
Click! length used for communication
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
with the connected equipment.
(Default: 7bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit 1bit/2bits
communications. (Default: 1bit)

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Specify whether or not to perform a
parity check, and how it is
None
menu. Parity
performed during communication.
Even
Odd
(Default: Even)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Set the number of retries to be
channel to be used from the list menu. Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times
error occurs. (Default: 0time)
3. Set the following items. Set the time period for a
• Manufacturer: Shinko Technos Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
• Controller Type: Shinko Technos Controller
Specify the host address (station
• I/F: Interface to be used No. of the GOT to which the
• Driver: Shinko Technos Controller Host Address indicating controller is connected) 0 to 94
in the connected network.
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 0)

Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the
transmission timing of the
Make the settings according to the usage Delay Time
communication request from the
0 to 300ms
environment. GOT. (Default: 5ms)

10.4.2 Communication detail settings

POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
POINT changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
The settings of connecting equipment can be data.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
For details, refer to the following. manual.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

10 - 12 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.4 GOT Side Settings
 9
10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10.5.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR-
POINT
100, FCR-23A, FIR Series,
(1) Shinko Technos indicating controller PC-900 Series (PC-955-[ ]/
For details of Shinko Technos indicating controller,
M,C, PC-935-[ ]/M,C) 10
refer to the following manual.

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating
controller  Communication settings

CONTROLLER
(2) Communication converter Make the communication settings by operating the key
For details on communication settings of the of the indicating controller.
communication converter, refer to the following
manual. Item Set value

User's Manual of communication converter Transmission speed *1 9600bps, 19200bps 11

Data bit 7bits (Fixed)

CONNECTION TO
Parity bit Even (fixed)
Model name Refer to

CONTROLLER
Stop bit 1bit (Fixed)
ACS-13A, DCL-33A, JC,
JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300 Series, Station No.*1*2 0 to 95

CHINO
10.5.1
PC-900 Series (PC-955- /M,C5, PC- Communication protocol Shinko protocol
Indicating
935- /M,C5)
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
controller
FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, *2 When setting the "95" to the station No., the read-out of data
cannot be performed.
12
FIR Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955- / 10.5.2
M,C, PC-935- /M,C)

CONNECTION TO
Communication

TOSHIBA PLC
converter
IF-400 10.5.3
10.5.3 Connecting to communication
converter (IF-400)
10.5.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, DCL-  Communication settings 13
33A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301- Make the communication settings by operating the key

TOSHIBA MACHINE
M, PCD-300 Series, PC-900 of the communication converter.

CONNECTION TO
Series (PC-955-[ ]/M,C5, PC- Item Set value

935-[ ]/M,C5) Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

PLC
Sending/Receiving
1 character, 2 character
switching period*2
 Communication settings 14
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT and the indicating controller
Make the communication settings by operating the key settings.

PANASONIC SERVO
of the indicating controller. *2 The setting of 1 character is recommended.

CONNECTION TO
Item Set value
AMPLIFIER
Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps
Data bit 7bits (Fixed)
Parity bit Even (fixed)
Stop bit 1bit (Fixed) 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

*2*3 0 to 95
Station No.
DEVICES SUNX PLC

Communication protocol Shinko protocol

CONNECTION TO

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
*3 When setting the "95" to the station No., the read-out of data
cannot be performed.

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 13

10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting
 10.5.4 Station No. settings (3) All station specification
Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
Set each station number so that no station number read-out operation.
overlaps. • For write-in operation, all station will be a target.
In the WORD BIT write-in operation, only the
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
indicating controller whose station No. is the same as
connection order. There is no problem even if station
host address is applicable. For details of host address
numbers are not consecutive.
setting, refer to the following.
Station Station Station Station Station 10.4.1 Setting communication interface
No.3 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6 (Communication settings)
• In the read-out operation, only the indicating controller
GOT whose station No. is the same as host address is
applicable.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
Examples of station number setting following.
(1) Direct specification 10.4.1 Setting communication interface
When setting the device, specify the station number of (Communication settings)
the indicating controller of which data is to be changed.

Specification range
0 to 94

(2) Indirect specification

When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
number of the indicating controller of which data is to be
changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register
(GD10 to GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the indicating controller.

Specification Compatible
Setting range
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13
104 GD14
105 GD15
106 GD16
0 to 94
107 GD17 For the setting other than the above, error
108 GD18 (dedicated device is out of range) will
occur.
109 GD19
110 GD20
111 GD21
112 GD22
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

10 - 14 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting
 9
10.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT

SHARP PLC
*1 The device name is displayed as follows when the memory
are as follows. number (0 to 7) is set.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the
Memory No. Displayed device name
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
None Device Number
The device specifications of controllers may differ
0 M0/Device Number 10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
1 M1/Device Number
same series.

TECHNOS INDICATING
2 M2/Device Number
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
3 M3/Device Number

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used.
4 M4/Device Number
When a non-existent device or a device number outside 5 M5/Device Number
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
6 M6/Device Number
may not be monitored.
7 M7/Device Number
11
 Setting item *2 The following shows the relation between station numbers of
the indicating controller and the GOT data register.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Station
GOT data register (GD) Setting range
No.
100 GD10

CHINO
0 to 94
101 GD11 (If setting a value
: : outside the range
114 GD24 above, a device range 12
error occurs.)
115 GD25

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
10.6.1 SHINKO indicating controller
(Shinko Technos Controller)
Item Description 13
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Device No.

CONNECTION TO
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Device name Setting range
representation
Device word device.
Bit device

Memory Set the memory number (None, 0 to 7) of the

Specified bit of the following
No.*1 device to be monitored. Word device bit*1 -
word devices

PLC
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information
selected in [Device].
14
Word device

Set the monitor target of the set device.

Data item (..) ..0001 to ..7901 Hexadecimal

PANASONIC SERVO
Select this item when writing data to all the

CONNECTION TO
indicating controllers connected.
During monitoring, the indicating controller which
*1 As bit specification of a word device is performed after the
AMPLIFIER
is set for [Host Address] of the communication GOT reads the value, do not change the value with the
detail setting is monitored. indicating controller during this period.
All
(When writing the data in numerical input, the
data is written to all connected indicating
controllers during input, and the indicating
controller that is set for [Host Address] is 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

monitored during other than input (displaying).)

Network
Select this item when monitoring the indicating
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

controller of the specified station No.

After selecting, set the station No. of the
indicating controller in the following range.
0 to 94: To monitor the indicating controller
Station
of the specified station No.
No.
95: Same as the setting of [All].
100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the
indicating controller to be
monitored by the value of GOT
data register (GD).*2

10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10 - 15

10.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 10.7 Precautions
 Station number settings of indicating
controller
In the system configuration, the indicating controller
with the station number set with the host address must
be included.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following.
10.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

 GOT clock control

Since the indicating controller does not have a clock
function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad
cast] by GOT clock control will be disabled.

 When using the communication converter IF-

400
When using the communication converter IF-400, some
communication error may occur.Set the number of
retries to more than one time.

 Disconnecting some of multiple connected

equipment
The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected
equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example,
the faulty station where a communication timeout error
occurs can be disconnected from connected
equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the
following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

10 - 16 10. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

10.7 Precautions
 11
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
11.

CHINO CONTROLLER 11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12
11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 2

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 3
11.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 10
11.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 25 13
11.5 Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 27

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
11.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 33
11.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 - 34

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

11 - 1
11. CONNECTION TO CHINO
CONTROLLER

11.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communi
Series Model name*1 Clock cation Refer to
Type

RS-232
LT230 Series LT230 11.2.1
RS-485

LT350 RS-232
LT300 Series RS-422 11.2.1
LT370 RS-485

LT450 RS-232
LT400 Series RS-422 11.2.1
LT470 RS-485

RS-232
LT830 Series LT830 11.2.1
RS-485

RS-232
DZ1000 Series DZ1000 RS-422 11.2.1
RS-485

RS-232
DZ2000 Series DZ2000 RS-422 11.2.1
RS-485

RS-232
DB1000 Series DB1000 RS-422 11.2.1
RS-485

RS-232
DB2000 Series DB2000 RS-422 11.2.1
RS-485

RS-232
KP1000
KP Series RS-422
KP2000
RS-485

RS-232
AL3000 Series AL3000 RS-422 11.2.2
RS-485

RS-232
AH3000 Series AH3000 RS-422
RS-485

RS-232
SE3000 Series SE3000 RS-422
RS-485

RS-422
JU Series JU
RS-485
11.2.3
RS-422
KE Series KE3000
RS-485

RS-422
LE5000 Series LE5000
RS-485

RS-232
GT120 Series GT120 11.2.4
RS-485

*1 From the models of controller, select the detailed model name which supports each communication type. For details of CHINO
controller detailed model names, refer to the following catalog.

Catalog of CHINO controllers

11 - 2 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.1 Connectable Model List
 9
11.2 System Configuration

CONNECTION TO
11.2.1 Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000,

SHARP PLC
DB2000 series

 When connecting to controller 10

Communication driver

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
LT230, LT830, LT230, LT830,

TECHNOS INDICATING
LT300, LT400, LT300, LT400,
DZ1000, DZ2000, DZ1000, DZ2000, GOT
DB1000, DB2000 DB1000, DB2000 CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

CONTROLLER
11
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Indicating controller Connection cable GOT
Number of connectable
Communication Cable model Max.

CHINO
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

- (Built into GOT)

12
RS232 connection
RS-232 15m 1 controller for 1 GOT

CONNECTION TO
diagram 1)

TOSHIBA PLC
GT15-RS2-9P

RS422 connection
LT300 1200m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)
LT400
DZ1000
DZ2000
RS422 connection
1200m GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m) 13
diagram 3)
DB1000

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
DB2000 GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS-422
GT15-RS4-9S
RS422 connection
1200m
diagram 3)
- (Built into GOT)

PLC
31 controllers for 1 GOT*2
RS422 connection
1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3
14
diagram 4)

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
LT230 RS485 connection
1200m - (Built into GOT)
LT300 diagram 1)
LT400
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m) AMPLIFIER
LT830 RS485 connection
RS-485 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
DZ1000 diagram 2) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
DZ2000
DB1000 RS485 connection
1200m GT15-RS4-TE
15
DB2000
diagram 4)
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
CONNECTION TO

*2 For GT11, the number of connectable controllers differs according to the hardware version. For the procedure to check the
hardware version, refer to the following manuals.

GT11 User's Manual

Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable controllers

C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10

GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 3

11.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to converter
Communication driver

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

LT230, LT830, LT230, LT830,

LT300, LT400, LT300, LT400, Interface GOT
DZ1000, DZ2000, DZ1000, DZ2000, converter
DB1000, DB2000 DB1000, DB2000
Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

Indicating
Connection cable 1) Converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT
controller Number of
Cable model Cable model connectable
Model Max. Model Communication Max. equipment
Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model
name distance name Type distance
number number

LT300
LT400 - (Built into
RS422 RS232
DZ1000 GOT)
connection diagram 1200m SC8-10 RS-232 connection diagram 15m
DZ2000
DB1000 2) 1)
DB2000 GT15-RS2-9P
31
LT230 controllers
LT300 - (Built into for 1 GOT
LT400 GOT)
RS485 RS232
LT830
connection diagram 1200m SC8-10 RS-232 connection diagram 15m
DZ1000
DZ2000 3) 1)
DB1000 GT15-RS2-9P
DB2000
*1 The converter is a product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.

11 - 4 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.2 System Configuration
11.2.2 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000, AL3000, AH3000 series 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to controller

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

Controller Controller GOT

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

Cable model*1 Cable model*1 Max.

Number of
connectable
11
Model Communication distance
Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment
name Type

CONNECTION TO
number number

CONTROLLER
RZ-CRS6
or - (Built into GOT)
1 controller for 1

CHINO
RS-232 - 15m
RS232 GOT
connection diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P

RS422
12
RZ-CRA1
connection diagram 1) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
RS422 connection diagram 1)

RS422
RZ-CRA1
connection diagram 3) 1200m GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

RS422 connection diagram 3)

13
GT15-RS2T4-9P*2

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S 31 controllers for
RS-422 RS422
RZ-CRA1 1200m 1 GOT*3
connection diagram 3)
- (Built into GOT)
KP1000

PLC
KP2000
AL3000 GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
AH3000 GT15-RS4-9S 14
RS422 connection diagram 3) 1200m

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
- (Built into GOT)

RS422 connection diagram 4) 1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*4 AMPLIFIER

RS485
RZ-LEC
connection diagram 1) 1200m - (Built into GOT)
15
RS485 connection diagram 1)
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC

RS485
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
CONNECTION TO

RZ-LEC
connection diagram 2) 31 controllers for
RS-485 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
1 GOT
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
RS485 connection diagram 2)

RS485
RZ-LEC
connection diagram 4) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE

RS485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 For GT11, the number of connectable controllers differs according to the hardware version.
For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 5

11.2 System Configuration
 GT11 User's Manual
Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable controllers
C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10

 When connecting to converter

Communication driver

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

Controller Controller Interface

GOT
converter
Connection cable 3)

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Indicating Connection Connection

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT
controller cable 1) cable 2)

Cable Cable Number of

Max. Cable model
model*1 model*1 connectable
Model distance Model Communication Connection Max.
Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
name name Type diagram distance
diagram diagram
number
number number

RZ- RZ-
RZ-CRS6
CRA1 CRA2 - (Built into
or
or or SC8 RS GOT)
1200m RS232 15m
RS422 RS422 -10 -232
connection
connection connection
diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 2) diagram 2)

RZ-
LEC - (Built into
KP1000 (only GOT)
KP2000 KP1000, 31 controllers
AL3000 RZ- KP2000) for 1 GOT
AH3000 RZ-CRS6
LEC RZ-
or
or LED SC8 RS
1200m RS232 15m
RS485 (only -10 -232
AL3000, connection
connection
AH3000) diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 3)
or
RS485
connection
diagram 3)
*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.

11 - 6 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.2 System Configuration
11.2.3 Connecting to SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000 series 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to controller

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

Controller Controller GOT

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

11
Number of
Cable model*1 Cable model*1 Max.
Model Communication connectable
Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type equipment
number number

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
RZ-CRS6
- (Built into GOT)
or 1 controller for 1
SE3000 RS-232 - 15m

CHINO
RS232 GOT
connection diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P

RZ-CRA1 *4 RS422 12
connection diagram 1) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram 1)

TOSHIBA PLC
*4 RS422
RZ-CRA1
connection diagram 3) 1200m GT16-C02R4-9S (0.2m)

RS422 connection diagram 3)

GT15-RS2T4-9P*2
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
GT15-RS4-9S 31 controllers
RS-422

CONNECTION TO
RS422
RZ-CRA1 *4 1200m for 1 GOT*3
connection diagram 3)
- (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2T4-9P*2

PLC
SE3000 RS422 connection diagram 3) 1200m
GT15-RS4-9S
14
JU

PANASONIC SERVO
KE3000 - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
LE5000

1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P*6
AMPLIFIER
RS422 connection diagram 4)

*4
RZ-LEC RS485
or connection diagram
RZ-CSS1Z2*5 1200m - (Built into GOT)
15
10)

RS485 connection diagram 10)

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC

RZ-LEC *4
RS485
CONNECTION TO

or connection diagram FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)

31 controllers
RS-485 RZ-CSS1Z2*5 11) 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
for 1 GOT
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
RS485 connection diagram 11)

RZ-LEC *4
RS485
or connection diagram
RZ-CSS1Z2*5 12) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE

RS485 connection diagram 12)

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.
*2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .
*3 For GT11, the number of connectable controllers differs according to the hardware version.

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 7

11.2 System Configuration
 For the procedure to check the hardware version, refer to the following manuals.
GT11 User's Manual

Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable controllers

C or later 31
GT1155-QTBD
B or earlier 10
GT1155-QSBD F or later 31
GT1150-QLBD E or earlier 10
*4 RZ-CRA1 and RZ-LEC can be used in SE3000, JU or LE5000 series only.
*5 RZ-CSS1Z2 can be used in JU series only.

 When connecting to converter

Communication driver

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

Controller Controller Interface

GOT
converter
Connection cable 3)

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Indicating Connection Connection

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT
controller cable 1) cable 2)

Cable Cable Number of

Max. Cable model
model*1 model*1 connectable
Model distance Model Communication Connection Max.
Connection Connection Option device Model equipment
name name Type diagram distance
diagram diagram
number
number number

RZ- RZ-
*2 *2 RZ-CRS6 - (Built into
CRA1 CRA2
or GOT)
or or
RS
1200m SC8-10 15m
-232 RS232
RS422 RS422
connection
connection connection GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1)
diagram 2) diagram 2)

RZ- RZ-
SE3000 LEC - (Built into
LEC 31
JU (only (only JU, GOT) controllers
KE3000 SE3000, JU, LE5000) for 1 GOT
LE5000 RZ-CRS6
LE5000) RZ-
or
or LED
RZ- RS
(only 1200m SC8-10 15m
*3 -232 RS232
CSS1Z2 SE3000)
or or connection
GT15-RS2-9P
diagram 1)

RS485 RS485
connection connection
diagram 13) diagram 13)
*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.
*2 RZ-CRA1 and RZ-CRA2 can be used in SE3000, JU or LE5000 series only.
*3 RZ-CSS1Z2 can be used in JU series only.

11 - 8 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.2 System Configuration
 11.2.4 Connecting to GT120 Series 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to controller

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

GT120 GT120 GOT

CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) GOT

Cable model Cable model Max.

Number of 11
Model Communication connectable
Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type equipment

CONNECTION TO
number number

CONTROLLER
RS485
1200m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 6)

CHINO
GT8-CDD(60mm)
or FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485 31 controllers for
GT120 RS-485 1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
RS485 connection
diagram 5)
connection diagram 7) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)
1 GOT
12
RS485
1200m GT15-RS4-TE

CONNECTION TO
connection diagram 8)

TOSHIBA PLC
 When connecting to converter
Communication driver
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CHINO Controllers(MODBUS)

CONNECTION TO
GT120 GT120 Interface
GOT
converter

PLC
Connection cable 3)
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) AMPLIFIER

Indicating Connection Connection

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT
controller cable 1) cable 2)

Cable model Cable model

Max.
distance Cable model
Number of
connectable 15
Model Model Communication Max. Option
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Connection Connection Connection Model equipment

name name Type distance device
diagram number diagram number diagram number
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

GT8- - (Built
GT8-CDM(3m)
CDD(60mm) into
or RS232 31
or GOT)
GT120 RS485 1200m SC8-10 RS-232 connection 15m controllers
RS485
connection diagram 1) for 1 GOT
connection
diagram 9)
diagram 5) GT15-
RS2-9P

*1 The converter is a product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation.

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 9

11.2 System Configuration
 11.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the PLC.
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.
11.3.1 RS-232 cable
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
 Connection diagram
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RS232 connection diagram 1)
(3) CHINO controller side connector
CHINO controller
side, Interface Use the connector compatible with the CHINO
GOT side
converter controller side module.
CD 1 - For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO
controller.
RD(RXD) 2 SD

SD(TXD) 3 RD

ER(DTR) 4 -

SG 5 SG

DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8

- 9

FG -

*1 Terminal number of the controller and the converter differ

depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

Controller Converter
DZ1000,
Signal LT300 LT400 DB1000 DB2000 SC8-10
DZ2000
name
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
No. No. No. No. No. No.
SD 11 11 19 13 27 2
RD 13 13 21 12 26 1
SG 15 15 23 14 28 3

Controller
AL3000
Signal KP1000 KP2000 SE3000
AH3000
name
Terminal Terminal No.*1 Terminal Terminal
No. R*2, B*2, C*2, D*2 B*2, E*2 name name

SD 13 27 30 SD SD
RD 12 26 29 RD RD
SG 14 28 31 SG SG
*1 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the
model.
*2 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of
the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)
For the symbol B, two terminal numbers are available. Select
as necessary.

11 - 10 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
11.3.2 RS-422 cable 9

CONNECTION TO
 Connection diagram

SHARP PLC
RS422 connection diagram 1)

Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

GOT side Controller*1 Controller*1 10

SDA SDA

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
RDA1(RXD1+) 3

TECHNOS INDICATING
SDB SDB
RDB1(RXD1-) 4
RDA RDA

CONTROLLER
SDA1(TXD1+) 1
RDB RDB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2
3 3
SG* SG* SG*3
SG*3 13

RSA(RTS+) 9 11
CSA(CTS+) 11

CONNECTION TO
RSB(RTS-)

CONTROLLER
10

CSB(CTS-) 12

CHINO
SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7
12
RDB2(RXD2-) 8

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
NC 14

Shell

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.
*3 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT. 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Controller type

CONNECTION TO
Signal name LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SDA 11 11 19 14 28

PLC
SDB 12 12 20 15 29

RDA 13 13 21 12 26
14

PANASONIC SERVO
RDB 14 14 22 13 27

SG 15 15 23 16 30 CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER
Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000
Signal name
AH3000
15
Terminal Terminal No.*4 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

No. name name No. name name

A*5 C*5, F*5
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG
*4 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*5 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 11

11.3 Connection Diagram
 RS422 connection diagram 2)
Interface
converter Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2
SC8-10 *4

Term 4 Controller*1 Controller*1

SDA SDA
RDA 5
SDB SDB
RDB 6
RDA RDA
SDA 7
RDB RDB
SDB 8
SG *3 SG*3

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.
*3 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the converter.
*4 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-422.

Controller type

Signal name LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SDA 11 11 19 14 28

SDB 12 12 20 15 29

RDA 13 13 21 12 26

RDB 14 14 22 13 27

SG 15 15 23 16 30

Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000
AH3000
Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

No. name name No. name name
A*6 C*6, F*6

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)

11 - 12 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 3) 9
Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

CONNECTION TO
GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1

SHARP PLC
SDA SDA
RDA 2
SDB SDB
RDB 7

10
RDA RDA
SDA 1
RDB RDB
SDB

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
6

TECHNOS INDICATING
4
SG*
4
SG* SG*4
SG*4 5

CONTROLLER
RSA 3

CSA 4

RSB 8

CSB 9 11
*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

CONNECTION TO
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.

CONTROLLER
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

CHINO
*4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Controller type
Signal name LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 12
Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

CONNECTION TO
SDA 11 11 19 14 28

TOSHIBA PLC
SDB 12 12 20 15 29
RDA 13 13 21 12 26
RDB 14 14 22 13 27
SG 15 15 23 16 30
13
Controller type

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
AL3000
KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000
AH3000
Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

PLC
No. name name No. name name
A*6 C*6, F*6

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA 14

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

AMPLIFIER
SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14) 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 13

11.3 Connection Diagram
 RS422 connection diagram 4)

Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1

SDA SDA
RDA
SDB SDB
RDB
RDA RDA
SDA
RDB RDB
SDB

4 SG*
4
SG*4 SG*4
SG*

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor as follows.
2-wire type/4-wire type : 4-wire type (2Pair)
Terminating resistor : 330
1.4.4 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor
*4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Controller type
Signal name LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000
Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.
SDA 11 11 19 14 28
SDB 12 12 20 15 29
RDA 13 13 21 12 26
RDB 14 14 22 13 27
SG 15 15 23 16 30

Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000
AH3000
Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

No. *6 *6 *6 name name No. name name
A C ,F

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)

11 - 14 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
 9
 Precautions when preparing a cable

CONNECTION TO
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less.

SHARP PLC
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
10
(3) CHINO controller side connector

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Use the connector compatible with the CHINO

TECHNOS INDICATING
controller side module.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO

CONTROLLER
controller.

 Connecting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side
11
When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a

CONNECTION TO
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.

CONTROLLER
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the

CHINO
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".
(b) For GT14, GT11
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ". 12
For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

CONNECTION TO
to the following.

TOSHIBA PLC
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) CHINO controller side
When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the CHINO
controller. 13
User's Manual of the CHINO controller

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 15

11.3 Connection Diagram
 11.3.3 RS-485 cable

 Connection diagram
RS485 connection diagram 1) (For GT16)

Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1

SA SA
SDA1(TXD1+) 1
SB SB
SDB1(TXD1-) 2
SG*4 SG*
4
SG*
4
SG*4 13

RDA1(RXD1+) 3

RDB1(RXD1-) 4

SDA2(TXD2+) 5

SDB2(TXD2-) 6

RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RSA(RTS+) 9

RSB(RTS-) 10

CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12

NC 14

Shell

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Controller type

DZ1000,
Signal name LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DB1000 DB2000
DZ2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000
AH3000
Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal

No. name
S*6, E*6, F*6, G*6 D*6, G*6

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)
For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

11 - 16 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 2) (For GT16) 9
Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

CONNECTION TO
GOT side*3 Controller*1

SHARP PLC
Controller*1
SA SA
SDA1(TXD1+) 6
SB SB
SDB1(TXD1-) 8

SG*4 2
*4
SG SG *4 SG*4
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
SDA2(TXD2+) 5

TECHNOS INDICATING
SDB2(TXD2-) 7

CONTROLLER
RDA1(RXD1+) 10

RDB1(RXD1-) 12

RSA(RTS+) 14

RSB(RTS-) 16
11
CSA(CTS+) 18

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CSB(CTS-) 20

NC 1

CHINO
NC 3

NC
12
4

RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDB2(RXD2-)

CONNECTION TO
11

TOSHIBA PLC
NC 13

NC 15

NC 17

NC 19
13
*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

TOSHIBA MACHINE
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.

CONNECTION TO
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

PLC
Controller type

Signal name LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830

DZ1000,
DB1000 DB2000
14
DZ2000

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26
AMPLIFIER
SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Controller type
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000
DEVICES SUNX PLC

AH3000
CONNECTION TO

Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal

No. name
S*6, E*6, F*6, G*6 D*6, G*6

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)
For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 17

11.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 3)

Interface converter Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

SC8-10 *4

Term 4 Controller*1 Controller*1

SA SA
RDA 5
SB SB
RDB 6
SG*3 SG*3
SDA 7

SDB 8

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.
*3 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.
*4 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485.

Controller type

DZ1000,
Signal name LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DB1000 DB2000
DZ2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000
AH3000
Signal name

Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal

No. *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 name
S ,E ,F ,G D ,G

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)
For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

11 - 18 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 4) (For GT16, GT15) 9
Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W)*2

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1
SA SA
SDA1 1
SB SB
SDB1 2

SG 9
SG*4 SG *4 SG*4 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
RDA1 3

RDB1 4

CONTROLLER
SDA2 5

SDB2 6

11
RDA2 7

RDB2 8

CONNECTION TO
FG 10

CONTROLLER
*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal.

CHINO
*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT. 12
Controller type

CONNECTION TO
DZ1000,

TOSHIBA PLC
Signal name LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DB1000 DB2000
DZ2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No.

SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27 13
SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Controller type

AL3000
KP1000 KP2000
AH3000
Signal name

PLC
Terminal Terminal No.*5 Terminal
No.
S*6, E*6, F*6, G*6 D*6, G*6
name 14

PANASONIC SERVO
SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB CONNECTION TO

SG 14 28 31 SG AMPLIFIER
*5 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model.
*6 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.
Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) – 12) 13) 14)
For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary. 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 19

11.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 5) RS485 connection diagram 7) (For GT16)

Controller*1 Controller*1 Controller*2

(Modular connector) (Modular connector) GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
YB(+) YB(+)
3 3 SDA1(TXD1+) 6 3
YA(-) YA(-)
4 4 SDB1(TXD1-) 8 4

SDA2(TXD2+) 5
*1 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual. SDB2(TXD2-) 7
User's Manual of the CHINO controller
RDA1(RXD1+) 10

RS485 connection diagram 6) (For GT16) RDB1(RXD1-) 12

RSA(RTS+) 14
Controller*2
GOT side*1 (Modular connector) RSB(RTS-) 16

SDA1(TXD1+) 1
YB(+)
3
CSA(CTS+) 18

SDB1(TXD1-) 2
YA(-)
4
CSB(CTS-) 20

RDA1(RXD1+) 3
NC 1

RDB1(RXD1-) 4
SG 2

SDA2(TXD2+) 5
NC 3

SDB2(TXD2-) 6
NC 4

RDA2(RXD2+) 7
RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDB2(RXD2-) 8
RDB2(RXD2-) 11

RSA(RTS+) 9
NC 13

RSB(RTS-) 10
NC 15

CSA(CTS+) 11
NC 17

CSB(CTS-) 12
NC 19

SG 13 *1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

NC 14 ■ Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
Shell manual.
User's Manual of the CHINO controller
*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.
■ Connecting terminating resistors RS485 connection diagram 8) (For GT16, GT15)
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual.
Controller*2
User's Manual of the CHINO controller GOT side*1 (Modular connector)
YB(+)
SDA1 1 3
YA(-)
SDB1 2 4

RDA1 3

RDB1 4

SDA2 5

SDB2 6

RDA2 7

RDB2 8

SG 9

FG 10

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of the CHINO controller

11 - 20 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 9) 9
Interface converter

CONNECTION TO
SCB-10 *1
Controller*2

SHARP PLC
Term 4 (Modular connector)
YB(+)
RDA 5 3
YA(-)
RDB 6 4

SDA 7 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
SDB 8

TECHNOS INDICATING
*1 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485.

CONTROLLER
*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the CHINO controller

RS485 connection diagram 10) 11

(For GT16)

CONNECTION TO
Terminating resistor (100Ω 1/4W)*2

CONTROLLER
GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1

CHINO
RDA RDA
SDA1 (TXD1+) 1
RDB RDB
SDB1 (TXD1-) 2

SG 13
SDA SDA
12
SDB SDB
RDA1 (RXD1+) 3

CONNECTION TO
4 SG
RDB1 (RXD1-) 4 SG*

TOSHIBA PLC
SDA2 (TXD2+) 5

SDB2 (TXD2-) 6

RDA2 (RXD2+) 7

RDB2 (RXD2-) 8
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
RSA (RTS+) 9

CONNECTION TO
RSB (RTS-) 10

CSA (CTS+) 11

CSB (CTS-)

PLC
12

14
NC 14

Shell

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors.

AMPLIFIER
*3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Controller type 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Signal name
DEVICES SUNX PLC

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

CONNECTION TO

name No. name name

RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 21

11.3 Connection Diagram
 RS485 connection diagram 11)
(only GT16)

Terminating resistor (100Ω 1/4W)*2

GOT side*3 Controller*1 Controller*1

RDA RDA
SDA1 (TXD1+) 6

SDB1 (TXD1-) 8 RDB RDB

SG 2 SDA SDA

SDA2 (TXD2+) 5 SDB SDB

SDB2 (TXD2-) 7 SG
SG*4
RDA1 (RXD1+) 10

RDB1 (RXD1-) 12

RSA (RTS+) 14

RSB (RTS-) 16

CSA (CTS+) 18

CSB (CTS-) 20

NC 1

NC 3

NC 4

RDA2 (RXD2+) 9

RDB2 (RXD2-) 11

NC 13

NC 15

NC 17

NC 19

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Controller type

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Signal name
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
name No. name name

RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

11 - 22 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 12) 9
Interface converter

CONNECTION TO
SC8-10
*3
Terminating resistor (100Ω 1/4W)*2

SHARP PLC
Term 4 Controller*1 Controller*1
RDA RDA
RDA 5
RDB RDB
RDB 6

SDA 7
SDA SDA
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
SDB SDB
SDB 8

TECHNOS INDICATING
SG
SG

CONTROLLER
*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485.

SE3000
Controller type
JU KE3000 LE5000
11
Signal name
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

CONNECTION TO
name No. name name

CONTROLLER
RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA
RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

CHINO
SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA
SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB
SG SG 5 SG SG
12

CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection diagram 13)

TOSHIBA PLC
(For GT16, GT15)
Terminating resistor (100Ω 1/4W)*2
*3
GOT side Controller*1 Controller*1

SDA1 1
RDA RDA 13
RDB RDB

TOSHIBA MACHINE
SDB1 2

CONNECTION TO
SDA SDA
RDA1 3
SDB SDB
RDB1 4

*4 SG
SDA2 5 SG

PLC
SDB2 6

RDA2 7
14

PANASONIC SERVO
RDB2 8

SG 9 CONNECTION TO

FG 10 AMPLIFIER

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.
*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors.
*3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side. 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

■ Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

Controller type
SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000
Signal name
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
name No. name name
RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA
RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB
SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA
SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB
SG SG 5 SG SG

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 23

11.3 Connection Diagram
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The maximum length of the RS-485 cable must be
1,200m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) CHINO controller side connector
Use the connector compatible with the CHINO
controller side module.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO
controller.

 Connecting terminating resistors

(1) GOT side
When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "100 OHM".

For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer

to the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(2) CHINO controller side
When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a
terminating resistor must be connected to the CHINO
controller.
User's Manual of the CHINO controller

11 - 24 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.3 Connection Diagram
 9
11.4 GOT Side Settings

CONNECTION TO
11.4.1 Setting communication

SHARP PLC
11.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
10
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
GOT.

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
2.

11
3.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
4.

CHINO
Item Description Range
Set this item when change the 9600bps, 12
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps,

CONNECTION TO
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,

TOSHIBA PLC
Click! (Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
with the connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Specify the stop bit length for
13
menu. Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
(Default: 1bit)
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Specify whether or not to perform a
channel to be used from the list menu. None
parity check, and how it is
Parity Even
performed during communication.
3. Set the following items. (Default: None)
Odd

PLC
• Manufacturer: CHINO Set the number of retries to be
• Controller Type: CHINO Controllers
Retry
performed when a communication
0 to 5times
14
• I/F: Interface to be used error occurs.

PANASONIC SERVO
(Default: 3times)
• Driver: CHINO Controller(MODBUS)
CONNECTION TO
Set the time period for a
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Timeout Time communication to time out. 1 to 30sec
(Default: 1sec) AMPLIFIER
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
Make the settings according to the usage Specify the host address (station
No. of the GOT to which the
environment.
11.4.2 Communication detail settings
Host Address controller is connected) in the
connected network.
1 to 99
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

(Default: 1)
DEVICES SUNX PLC

Set this item to adjust the

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
CONNECTION TO

transmission timing of the

Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms

POINT GOT.
(Default: 5ms)

The settings of connecting equipment can be Select the communication format.

confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. (Default: 1)
Format 1:
For details, refer to the following.
Accessible to LT230/300/400/830,
1.1.2 I/F communication setting Format 1/2
DZ1000/2000, Not accessible to
GT120
Format 2:
Accessible to GT120

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 25

11.4 GOT Side Settings
POINT
(1) Format
When connecting to GT120, specify format 2.
(2) Delay Time
When connecting to the following models, set the
send delay time to 30ms or more.

Model name

DZ1000, DZ2000

(3) Communication interface setting by the Utility

The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
(4) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

11 - 26 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.4 GOT Side Settings
 9
11.5 Controller Side Setting

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
11.5.2 Connecting to LT400, LT830
POINT
Series
(1) CHINO controller
For details of CHINO controller, refer to the  Key Lock setting 10
following manual.

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set

TECHNOS INDICATING
User's Manual of the CHINO controller thefollowing Key Lock setting
(2) Converter • LT400: Lock4

CONTROLLER
For details on communication settings of the • LT830: Lock3
converter, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for converter  Communication settings
Model name Refer to Set the communication settings with controller key 11
LT230, LT300 11.5.1 operation.

CONNECTION TO
LT400, LT830 11.5.2
Item Set value

CONTROLLER
DZ1000, DZ2000 11.5.3
Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU
DB1000, DB2000 11.5.4
Function Com: Upper communication

CHINO
GT120 11.5.5
Station No.*1 1 to 99
Controller KP1000, KP2000 11.5.6
Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps
AL3000, AH3000
SE3000
11.5.7
11.5.8 8N1: 8bit, None, 1bit
12
8N2: 8bit, None, 2bit
JU 11.5.9

CONNECTION TO
Character*2 8E1: 8bit, Even, 1bit
KE3000 11.5.10 8E2: 8bit, Even, 2bit

TOSHIBA PLC
(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit)
LE5000 11.5.11 8O1: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
Converter SC8-10 11.5.12 8O2: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
13
11.5.1 Connecting to LT230, LT300

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Series

CONNECTION TO
11.5.3 Connecting to DZ1000,
DZ2000 Series
 Key Lock setting
To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the

PLC
Key Lock setting to Lock 4.
 Key Lock setting
To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the 14
Key Lock setting to Lock 2.
 Communication settings

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
Set the communication settings with controller key
operation.
 Communication settings
Set the communication settings with controller key AMPLIFIER
Item Set value operation.
Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU
Item Set value
Function
Station No.*1
Com: Upper communication
1 to 99
Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Function Com: Upper communication

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps
Station No.*1
DEVICES SUNX PLC

1 to 31
CONNECTION TO

5: 8bit, None, 1bit

*2 9600bps, 19200bps
6: 8bit, None, 2bit Transmission speed
Character*2 7: 8bit, Even, 1bit Data bit 8bits (fixed)
(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) 8: 8bit, Even, 2bit Stop bit 1bit (fixed)
9: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
Parity bit None (fixed)
10: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units.
units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 27

11.5 Controller Side Setting
 11.5.4 Connecting to DB1000, 11.5.6 Connecting to KP1000,
DB2000 Series KP2000

 Communication settings  Key Lock setting

Set the communication settings with controller key To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the
operation. Key Lock setting.

Protocol
Item
MODBUS (RTU)
Set value
 Communication settings
Function Com: Upper communication
Set the communication settings with controller key
operation.
Station No.*1 01 to 99
*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps Item Set value
Transmission speed
7BIT/EVEN/STOP1 Protocol MODBUS (RTU)
7BIT/EVEN/STOP2 Function COM
7BIT/ODD/STOP1
Station No.*1 1 to 99
7BIT/ODD/STOP2
8BIT/NON/STOP1 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps,
Character Transmission speed*2
8BIT/NON/STOP2 19200bps, 38400bps
8BIT/EVEN/STOP1 8BIT/NON/STOP1
8BIT/EVEN/STOP2 8BIT/NON/STOP2
8BIT/ODD/STOP1 Character*2 8BIT/EVEN/STOP1
8BIT/ODD/STOP2 (Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) 8BIT/EVEN/STOP2
8BIT/ODD/STOP1
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units. 8BIT/ODD/STOP2
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

11.5.5 Connecting to GT120 Series

 Key Lock setting 11.5.7 Connecting to AL3000,

To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the AH3000
Key Lock setting to Lock 3.
 Key Lock setting
 Communication settings To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the
Release the controller lock function in advance and set Key Lock setting.
the following communication settings.
After completing the communication settings, set the  Communication settings
Key Lock setting to Lock 3. Set the communication settings with controller key
Item Set value
operation.
Communication protocol comr: MODBUS RTU
Item Set value
Station No.*1 1 to 95 Protocol MODBUS
96: 9600bps Transmission code rtu
Transmission speed*2
192: 19200bps
Communication type RS232C, RS-422A, RS-485
Data bit 8bits (fixed) *1
Station No. 1 to 31
Stop bit*2 1bit, 2bits
2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps,
nonE: None Transmission speed*2
19200bps
Parity bit*2 EVEn: Even
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit
odd: Odd
[8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other Character*2 [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
units. (Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
[8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
[8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

11 - 28 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.5 Controller Side Setting
 11.5.8 Connecting to SE3000 9
 Setting by Switch (SW2)

CONNECTION TO
 Key Lock setting DIN rail side
422A

SHARP PLC
To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the /485
Key Lock setting.

 Communication settings
Make the communication settings using the Upside 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
engineering software package (PASS)

TECHNOS INDICATING
232C
Item Set value
Terminal side
Protocol MODBUS RTU

CONTROLLER
*1*3 1 to 31
Station No. SW2
Transmission speed*2*3 9600bps, 19200bps Front side (Terminal side) Rear side (DIN rail side)
Data bit 8bits (fixed) RS232C RS422A/485

Parity bit*2 Even, Odd, Non 11

*2 1bit, 2bits
Stop bit

CONNECTION TO
Transmission code Binary (fixed)
11.5.9 Connecting to JU

CONTROLLER
Error check CRC-16 (fixed)

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other

 Key Lock setting

CHINO
units.
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the
*3 Station No. and Transmission speed can also be set by
switch SW1. Key Lock setting.
12
 Setting by Switch (SW1)  Communication settings

CONNECTION TO
Station No. and Transmission speed can be set.
Set the communication settings with controller key

TOSHIBA PLC
operation.

Item Set value

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Protocol rtU
Station No.*1 1 to 99 13
Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit
[8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
Character*2 [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
SW1 (Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit
[8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit

PLC
[8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
units.
14

PANASONIC SERVO
*2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

(1) Station No. CONNECTION TO

SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 Station No. AMPLIFIER

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2 15
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

:
DEVICES SUNX PLC

:
CONNECTION TO

ON OFF ON ON ON 29
OFF ON ON ON ON 30
ON ON ON ON ON 31

(2) Transmission speed

SW1-6 SW1-7 communication port Transmission speed
OFF OFF Upper communication 9600bps
OFF ON Upper communication 19200bps
ON OFF ENG -
ON ON User setting inhibited

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 29

11.5 Controller Side Setting
11.5.10 Connecting to KE3000 11.5.11 Connecting to LE5000

 Key Lock setting  Key Lock setting

To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the
Key Lock setting. Key Lock setting.

 Communication settings  Communication settings

Make the communication settings by operating the Set the communication settings with controller key
switches SW2 and SW3 of the module. operation.

Item Set value

RTU/ASCII RTU
Station No.*1 1 to 99
SW3 SW2
*2 9600bps, 19200bps
Transmission speed
[8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit
Printed wiring board
Front panel [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit
in main body
Character*2 [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit
(1) Setting by SW2 (Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit
[8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit
Item Set value SW2-2 SW2-3 [8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit
Transmission code*2 MODBUS RTU OFF - *1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other
9600bps - OFF units.
*1 *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
Transmission speed
19200bps - ON
Transmission character
8bits, None, 1bit (fixed) - -
structure*2

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

*2 When the transmission code is MODBUS RTU, the setting of
the transmission character structure is fixed.

(2) Setting by SW3

Set the station No. as follows.
SW3-4 SW3-5 SW3-6 SW3-7 SW3-8 Station No.*1
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3
:
:
ON OFF ON ON ON 29
OFF ON ON ON ON 30
ON ON ON ON ON 31

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other

units.

11 - 30 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.5 Controller Side Setting
 11.5.12 Connecting to converter SC8- 9
10

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
 Communication settings
Make the communication settings using setting
switches.

Item Set value

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Transmission speed select switch*1 9600bps, 19200bps

TECHNOS INDICATING
Communication type switch RS-485, RS-422
*1 Adjust the settings with GOT and controller settings.

CONTROLLER
 Settings by switch
11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
Transmission speed Communication
select switch type switch

(1) Transmission speed setting 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Setting Switch No.
Set value ON
item 1 2 3 4

9600bps OFF ON OFF OFF

Transmissi
on speed 1 2 3 4

PLC
19200bps OFF OFF ON OFF

(2) Communication type setting

14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
Setting item

RS-485/RS-422
RS-485 RS-422A AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 31

11.5 Controller Side Setting
 11.5.13 Station number setting (3) All station specification
Target station differs depending on write-in operation or
Set each station number so that no station number read-out operation.
overlaps. • For write-in operation, all station will be a target.
• For read-out operation, only one station will be a
The station number can be set without regard to the cable
target.
connection order. There is no problem even if station
• All station specification is not available for KE3000.
numbers are not consecutive.
Do not use the all station specification for systems
Station Station Station Station Station
No.3 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6
which include KE3000.

GOT

Examples of station number setting

(1) Direct specification

When setting the device, specify the station number of
the controller of which data is to be changed.

Specification
Model name Refer to
range
11.5.1
LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830 1 to 99
11.5.2
DZ1000, DZ2000 1 to 31 11.5.3
DB1000, DB2000 1 to 99 11.5.4
GT120 1 to 95 11.5.5
KP1000, KP2000 1 to 99 11.5.6
AL3000, AH3000 1 to 31 11.5.7
SE3000 1 to 31 11.5.8
JU 1 to 99 11.5.9
KE3000 1 to 31 11.5.10
LE5000 1 to 99 11.5.11

(2) Indirect specification

When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
number of the controller of which data is to be changed
using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
GD25).
When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT
Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to
the station No. specification will be the station No. of
the controller.

Specification Compatible
Setting range
station NO. device
100 GD10
101 GD11
102 GD12
103 GD13
104 GD14
1 to 99: LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830
105 GD15
DB1000, DB2000, KP1000,
106 GD16 KP2000, JU, LE5000
107 GD17 1 to 31: DZ1000, DZ2000, AL3000
108 GD18 AH3000, KE3000, SE3000
109 GD19 1 to 95: GT120
For the setting other than the above, error
110 GD20
(dedicated device is out of range) will occur.
111 GD21
112 GD22
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

11 - 32 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.5 Controller Side Setting
 9
11.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT

SHARP PLC
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the POINT
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ Device settings of CHINO controller
10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the Devices are set with reference numbers.

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
same series. For parameters corresponding to each reference

TECHNOS INDICATING
number, refer to the manual of the controller to be
Please make the setting according to the specifications of
used.

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings
may not be monitored.
11.6.1 CHINO controller (CHINO 11
 Setting item Controllers)

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Device No.

CHINO
Device name Setting range
representation

Digital parameter
00001 to 09999
12
Bit device

(0)
Decimal
Digital input data

CONNECTION TO
10001 to 19999
(1)*1

TOSHIBA PLC
Analog input data
Word device

30001 to 39999
(3)*1
Decimal
Item Description Analog parameter
40001 to 49999

Device
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of
(4)
13
*1 Only reading is possible.
word device.

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information
selected in [Device].
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Select this item when writing data to all

PLC
controllers connected.
During monitoring, the controller which is set for
[Host Address] of the communication detail
settings is monitored.
14
All
(When inputting data with the numerical input

PANASONIC SERVO
function, data is written to all the connected
CONNECTION TO
controllers during input. The controller set for
[Host Address] is monitored during other than
AMPLIFIER
Network
input (displaying).)
Select this item when monitoring the controller of
the specified station No.
After selecting, set the station No. of the

Station
controller in the following range.
1 to 99: To monitor the controller of the
15
No.
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

specified station No.

100 to 115: To specify the station No. of the
DEVICES SUNX PLC

controller to be monitored by the

CONNECTION TO

value of GOT data register (GD).*1

*1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of
the controller and the GOT data register.
Station
GOT data register (GD) Setting range
No.
100 GD10 1 to 99
101 GD11 (If setting a value
outside the range
: :
above, a device
114 GD24 range error
115 GD25 occurs.)

11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 11 - 33

11.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 11.7 Precautions
 Station number settings of temperature
controller
In the system configuration, the controller with the
station number set with the host address must be
included.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following.
11.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

 GOT clock control

Since the controller does not have a clock function, the
settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT
clock control will be disabled.

 Disconnecting some of multiple connected

equipment
The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected
equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example,
the faulty station where a communication timeout error
occurs can be disconnected from connected
equipment.
For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the
following manual.
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

11 - 34 11. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER

11.7 Precautions
 12
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

CONTROLLER
12.

11
12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 2

CONNECTION TO
12.2 Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 3

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12

CONNECTION TO
12.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9

TOSHIBA PLC
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
12.4 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13

CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

12 - 1
12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication *1
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type

T2 (PU224)

T3 RS-422

T3H
PROSEC
12.2.1
T Series RS-232
T2E
RS-422

RS-232
T2N
RS-422

model 2000(S2)

PROSEC model 2000(S2T) RS-422

12.2.2
V Series model 2000(S2E)

model 3000 (S3) RS-422

Unified
Controller type1
Controller Ethernet 12.3.1
PU811
nv Series

*1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455-QTBDE, GT1450-QMBDE and GT1450-QLBDE.

12 - 2 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.1 Connectable Model List
 9
12.2 Serial Connection

CONNECTION TO
12.2.1 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC T series

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

PROSEC
T series
GOT
TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Connection cable

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT

Communication Cable model Max.

Number of connectable
equipment
11
Model name Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number distance

CONNECTION TO
RS422 connection diagram 1) 1km - (Built into GOT)

CONTROLLER
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40501-15P(3m)

CHINO
T2 (PU224) GT09-C100R40501-15P(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
T3 RS-422 GT09-C200R40501-15P(20m)
1km
12
T3H GT09-C300R40501-15P(30m) GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 4) - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) - (Built into GOT)
RS-232 or 15m
RS232 connection diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
RS422 connection diagram 2) 1km - (Built into GOT)

CONNECTION TO
T2E
GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40502-6C(3m)
GT09-C100R40502-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS-422 GT09-C200R40502-6C(20m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

PLC
GT09-C300R40502-6C(30m) 1km GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 5) - (Built into GOT)
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER
GT09-C30R20502-15P(3m) - (Built into GOT)
RS-232 or 15m
RS232 connection diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P
15
RS422 connection diagram 3) 1km - (Built into GOT)
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

T2N
DEVICES SUNX PLC

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
CONNECTION TO

GT09-C30R40503-15P(3m)
GT09-C100R40503-15P(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
RS-422 GT09-C200R40503-15P(20m)
GT09-C300R40503-15P(30m) 1km GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 6) - (Built into GOT)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 3

12.2 Serial Connection
 12.2.2 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC V series

Communication driver

PROSEC
GOT TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
V series
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Communication Cable model Max. connectable
Model name Option device Model equipment
Type Connection diagram number distance

RS422 connection diagram 2) 1km - (Built into GOT)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40502-6C(3m)
model 2000 (S2) GT09-C100R40502-6C(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
model 2000 (S2T) RS-422 GT09-C200R40502-6C(20m)
model 2000 (S2E) GT09-C300R40502-6C(30m) 1km GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 5) - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 1 PLC

RS422 connection diagram 1) 1km - (Built into GOT)

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
GT09-C30R40501-15P(3m)
GT09-C100R40501-15P(10m) GT15-RS2T4-9P*1
model 3000 (S3) RS-422 GT09-C200R40501-15P(20m)
GT09-C300R40501-15P(30m) 1km GT15-RS4-9S
or
RS422 connection diagram 4) - (Built into GOT)

*1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

12 - 4 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.2 Serial Connection
 12.2.3 Connection Diagram 9
 RS-422 cable

CONNECTION TO
The following diagram shows the connection between the (1) Connection diagram
GOT and the PLC. RS422 connection diagram 1)

SHARP PLC
GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side

 RS-232 cable SDA1(TXD1+) RXA

10
1 2

(1) Connection diagram SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 RXB

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
RS232 connection diagram 1) R

TECHNOS INDICATING
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 3 TXA
GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side RDB1(RXD1-) 4 11 TXB

CONTROLLER
CD/NC*1 1 1 SG SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 FG

RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD SDB2(TXD2-) 6 4 CTSA

SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD RDA2(RXD2+) 7 5 RTSA

11
ER(DTR) 4 4 - RDB2(RXD2-) 8 8

CONNECTION TO
SG 5 5 SG RSA(RTS+) 9 9

CONTROLLER
DR(DSR) 6 6 5V RSB(RTS-) 10 6

RS(RTS) RTS CSA(CTS+) 11 12 CTSB

CHINO
7 7

CS(CTS) 8 8 - CSB(CTS-) 12 13 RTSB

- 9 9 5V SG 13 7 SG
12
NC 14 14
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC

CONNECTION TO
Shell 15

TOSHIBA PLC
RS232 connection diagram 2)

GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side RS422 connection diagram 2)

CD/NC*1 1 1 - GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side

RD(RXD) 2 5 TXD
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 RXA
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
SD(TXD) 3 12 RXD

CONNECTION TO
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 RXB
ER(DTR) 4 7 SG
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 TXA
SG 5 8 SG
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 TXB
DR(DSR) 6 15 SG

PLC
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 SG
RS(RTS) 7 6 RTS

CS(CTS) 8 14 CTS
SDB2(TXD2-) 6 TERM
14
RDA2(RXD2+) 7

PANASONIC SERVO
- -
CONNECTION TO
9 13
RDB2(RXD2-) 8

RSA(RTS+) 9
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC AMPLIFIER
RSB(RTS-) 10
(2) Precautions when preparing a cable
CSA(CTS+) 11
(a) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or CSB(CTS-) 12
15
less. SG
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

13
(b) GOT side connector
DEVICES SUNX PLC

NC 14
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
CONNECTION TO

1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Shell

(c) TOSHIBA PLC side connector

Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA
PLC.
For details, refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user's
manual.

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 5

12.2 Serial Connection
RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 6)

GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side

SDA1(TXD1+) 1 2 RXA RDA 2 3 TXA

R
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 10 RXB RDB 7 11 TXB

RDA1(RXD1+) 3 3 TXA SDA 1 2 RXA

R
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 11 TXB SDB 6 10 RXB

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 RSA 3 8 SG

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 4 RSB 8

RDA2(RXD2+) 7 5 CSA 4

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 6 CSB 9

RSA(RTS+) 9 7 SG 5

RSB(RTS-) 10 9 FG -

CSA(CTS+) 11 12
(2) Precautions when preparing a cable
CSB(CTS-) 12 13
(a) Cable length
SG 13 8 SG The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1km or
NC 14 14 less.
Shell 15
(b) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
RS422 connection diagram 4) (c) TOSHIBA PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA
GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side PLC.
For details, refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user's
RDA 2 3 TXA
manual.
RDB 7 11 TXB

SDA 1 2 RXA
(3) Setting terminating resistors
R (a) GOT side
SDB 6 10 RXB
• For GT16, GT15, GT12
RSA 3 13 RTSB Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
GOT main unit to "Disable".
RSB 8 1 FG
• For GT14, GT11
CSA 4 5 RTSA Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
CSB 9 4 CTSA
For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to
SG 5 7 SG the following.
FG - 12 CTSB 1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
(b) TOSHIBA PLC side
When connecting an TOSHIBA PLC to a GOT, a
RS422 connection diagram 5) terminating resistor must be set to the TOSHIBA
PLC.
GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side
For the setting of the terminating resistor, refer to
RDA 2 TXA the following manual.
TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual
RDB 7 TXB
• T2 (PU224), T2N, T3, T3H, model 3000 (S3)
SDA 1 RXA Connect the terminating resistor (1/2W-120 )
SDB 6 RXB across RXA and RXB.
• T2E, model 2000 (S2, S2T)
RSA 3 SG
Short across the RXA and TERM terminals.
RSB 8 TERM

CSA 4

CSB 9

SG 5

FG -

12 - 6 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.2 Serial Connection
 12.2.4 GOT Side Settings 9
 Communication detail settings

CONNECTION TO
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 Setting communication interface

SHARP PLC
(Communication settings)
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to
the GOT.

10
2.

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
3.
11
4. Item Description Range

CONNECTION TO
4800bps,
Set this item when change the

CONTROLLER
9600bps,
transmission speed used for
Transmission 19200bps,
communication with the connected
Speed 38400bps,

CHINO
equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps)
115200bps

Click!
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with the 7bit,
12
Data Bit
connected equipment. 8bit

CONNECTION TO
(Default: 7bits)

TOSHIBA PLC
Specify the stop bit length for
1bit,
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Stop Bit communications.
(Default: 2bit)
2bit
menu.
Specify whether or not to perform a
None,
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the Parity
parity check, and how it is performed
during communication.
Even,
13
channel to be used from the list menu. Odd
(Default: Even)

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Set the number of retries to be
3.

CONNECTION TO
Set the following items. performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
• Manufacturer: TOSHIBA error occurs.
• Controller Type: TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V (Default: 0time)
• I/F: Interface to be used Set the time period for a

PLC
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
• Driver: TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
(Default: 3sec)

4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,

Set this item to adjust the transmission 14
timing of the communication request

PANASONIC SERVO
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Delay Time
from the GOT.
0 to 300 (ms)

CONNECTION TO
Make the settings according to the usage (Default: 0ms)
environment.
AMPLIFIER
 Communication detail settings
POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. (1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]

POINT
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

The settings of connecting equipment can be data.

confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
For details, refer to the following. manual.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 7

12.2 Serial Connection
 12.2.5 PLC Side Setting
 Connecting to T3 or T3H
Enter the transmission parameters.

POINT Item Set value

Transmission speed*1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps
TOSHIBA PLC Data bit 7bit
For details of the TOSHIBA PLC, refer to the following Stop bit 2bit
manual. Parity bit Even

TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual Station No. 1

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
Model name Refer to *2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
T2 (PU224), For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
n
T2E, T2N the following.
PLC CPU T3, T3H n  Setting communication interface (Communication
model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E), settings)
n
model 3000 (S3)

 Connecting to model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E),

 Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E or T2N model 3000 (S3)
Enter the transmission parameters.
(1) Switch setting
Set the switches accordingly. Item Set value
(a) Operation mode setting switch Transmission method RS485*1
RS485 COM1
Switch No. Settings Setting details
Timeout time 5sec
OFF ON
1 Transmission speed*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps
4 OFF (fixed) Data bit 7bit
2
3 Stop bit 2bit
Computer link Parity bit Even
4
Station No. 1
5
5 OFF (fixed)
*1 Can be used as RS-422.
6
*2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
*3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
(b) DIP switch on module PCB (T2N only) of the GOT side.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
Set value the following.
Switch No. For RS-232 For RS-422  Setting communication interface (Communication
communication communication settings)
DIP switch: No. 1 ON (RS-232C) OFF (RS-485*1)
*1 Can be used as RS-422.

(2) Transmission parameter setting

Enter the transmission parameters.

Item Set value

Transmission speed*1*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps
Data bit 7bit
Stop bit 2bit
Parity bit Even
Station No. 1
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
*2 Fixed to 9600bps for T2E only.
*3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
 Setting communication interface (Communication
settings)

12 - 8 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.2 Serial Connection
 9
12.3 Ethernet Connection

CONNECTION TO
12.3.1 System configuration for connecting to Unified Controller nv Series

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

Ethernet 10
PLC GOT Ethernet(TOSHIBA nv), Gateway

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
module

TECHNOS INDICATING
Connection cable

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT 11
Maximum Number of connectable
Ethernet
Series Cable model segment Option device Model*3 equipment

CONNECTION TO
module*4
length*2

CONTROLLER
Twisted pair cable*1 When PLC:GOT is N: 1
• 10BASE-T - (Built into GOT)

CHINO
The number of PLCs for 1 GOT
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or 32 or less
Unified
unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP):
Controller nv EN811 100m
Series
Category 3, 4, and 5
• 100BASE-TX GT15-J71E71-100
When PLC:GOT is 1: N 12
The number of GOTs for 1 PLC
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):
No limit number*5

CONNECTION TO
Category 5 and 5e

TOSHIBA PLC
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.
Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network
system.
Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*2 A length between a hub and a node.
The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used.
The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used.
13
• 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m)

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
• 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m)
When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of
cascades.
For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE (-T/2/5) standard, use the switching

PLC
hub and operate in a 10Mbps/100Mbps mixed environment.
For how to check the function version, refer to the following.
GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) 14
*4 Product manufactured by TOSHIBA Corporation. For details of the product, contact TOSHIBA Corporation.

PANASONIC SERVO
*5 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-
loaded, and it may affect the communication performance. CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 9

12.3 Ethernet Connection
 12.3.2 GOT side setting
 Communication detail settings
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings) (1) GT16, GT14
Set the channel of the connected equipment.

2.

3.

4.

Item Description Range

Set the network No. of the GOT.
GOT NET No. 1 to 239
(Default: 1)
Set the station No. of the GOT.
GOT PLC No.*2 1 to 254
(Default: 1)
GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to
Address*1 (Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Click! Set the subnet mask for the sub
network. (Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
Subnet Mask*1 router) If the sub network is not
255.255.255.255
used, the default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Set the router address of the
menu. Default
default gateway where the GOT is
0.0.0.0 to
connected. (Only for connection via
Gateway*1 255.255.255.255
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the router)
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
channel to be used from the list menu.
1024 to 5010,
3. Set the following items. Ethernet
Download Port
Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet
download.
5014 to 65534
(Except for 5011,
• Manufacturer: TOSHIBA
No.*1 (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
• Controller Type: TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv 49153)
• I/F: Interface to be used 1024 to 5010,
Set the GOT port No. for the
• Driver: Ethernet (TOSHIBA nv), Gateway GOT 5014 to 65534
connection with the Ethernet
Communication (Except for 5011,
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, Port No.*2
module.
(Default: 5022)
5012, 5013 and
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. 49153)

Make the settings according to the usage Set the number of retries to be
performed when a communication
environment.
timeout occurs. When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times
12.3.2 Communication detail settings response after retries, the
communication times out. (Default:
3times)
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
POINT communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec)
Set the time period for a
The settings of connecting equipment can be
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting].
(Default: 3sec)
For details, refer to the following.
Set the delay time for reducing the
1.1.2 I/F communication setting 0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination
( 10ms)
PLC. (Default: 0ms)

12 - 10 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.3 Ethernet Connection
 *1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting in the [GOT
Item Description
Set the number of retries to be
Range
9
IP Address Setting] screen.
performed when a communication

CONNECTION TO
timeout occurs.When receiving no
Retry 0 to 5times
response after retries, the

SHARP PLC
communication times out. (Default:
3times)
Specify the time period from the
GOT startup until GOT starts the
Startup Time 3 to 255sec
communication with the PLC CPU.
(Default: 3sec) 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Set the time period for a

TECHNOS INDICATING
Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 90sec
(Default: 3sec)
Set the delay time for reducing the

CONTROLLER
0 to 10000
Delay Time load of the network/destination
( 10ms)
PLC. (Default: 0ms)

 Ethernet setting 11
*2 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail
setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set

CONNECTION TO
to different station numbers.

CONTROLLER
 Ethernet setting

(2) GT15, GT12

CHINO
12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
Item Description Set value
The host is displayed. (The host is
Host -
indicated with an asterisk (*).)

N/W No.
Set the network No. of the
connected Ethernet module. 1 to 127
13
(Default: blank)

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Set the station No. of the
PLC No.*1 connected Ethernet module. 1 to 254
(Default: blank)

Item Description Range Type TOSHIBA (fixed) TOSHIBA (fixed)

Set the IP address of the

PLC
Set the network No. of the GOT. PLC side IP
GOT NET No. 1 to 239 IP Address connected Ethernet module.
(Default: 1) address

GOT PLC No.

Set the station No. of the GOT.
1 to 254
(Default: blank)
Set the port No. of the connected
14
(Default: 1)

PANASONIC SERVO
Port No. Ethernet module. 256 to 65534
Set the IP address of the GOT. 0.0.0.0 to

CONNECTION TO
GOT IP Address (Default: 1024)
(Default: 192.168.3.18) 255.255.255.255
Communication UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)
Set the subnet mask for the sub
network. (Only for connection via
0.0.0.0 to
*1 Each of [GOT PLC No.] set in the communication detail AMPLIFIER
Subnet Mask router) If the sub network is not setting and [PLC No.] set in the Ethernet setting must be set
255.255.255.255 to different station numbers.
used, the default value is set.
(Default: 255.255.255.0)  Communication detail settings
Set the router address of the
default gateway where the GOT is
15
0.0.0.0 to
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Default Gateway connected. (Only for connection via

255.255.255.255 POINT
DEVICES SUNX PLC

router)
CONNECTION TO

(Default: 0.0.0.0)
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
1024 to 5010,
The communication interface setting can be
Ethernet Set the GOT port No. for Ethernet 5014 to 65534
changed on the Utility's [Communication setting]
Download Port download. (Except for 5011,
No. (Default: 5014) 5012, 5013 and
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
49153)
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
1024 to 5010,
GOT
Set the GOT port No. for the
5014 to 65534
manual.
connection with the Ethernet User's Manual of GOT used.
Communication (Except for 5011,
module.
Port No.*1 5012, 5013 and (2) Precedence in communication settings
(Default: 5022)
49153) When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 11

12.3 Ethernet Connection
 12.3.3 PLC side setting (2) Operation mode setting switch
Switch No.
Description Settings
1 2 3 6 7 8
POINT Normal OFF OFF OFF
Operation
ON OFF OFF
TOSHIBA PLC mode For maintenance
OFF ON OFF
For details of TOSHIBA PLCs, refer to the following Class B
manual. OFF OFF OFF
172.16.64.XX*1
TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual IP address Reserved OFF ON OFF
type Class C
OFF OFF ON
 Setting of operation mode switch and station 192.168.0.XX*2
Tool setting*3 ON ON ON
No. switch
*1 XX indicates the value of the station No. setting switches.
Subnet mask : 255.255.192.0
*2 XX indicates the value of the station No. setting switches.
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
*3 It can be set freely from the engineering tool, and the value
has precedence over the value of the station No. setting
switches.

Station No.
setting switch 12.3.4 Precautions

 Delay of device communication

Note that if a non-existent station, or a station which
power is turned OFF is monitored, the communication
of normal stations is also delayed.

 Redundant system
Operation mode When configuring a redundant system, the "Multicast
setting switch
address setting" for the configured PLC pair (System A:
Primary, System B: Secondary) is required.

(1) Station No. setting switch

The station No. setting switches are hexadecimal rotary
switches that determine the station No. on the Ethernet
network.
Set the station address (1 to 254) that has been
assigned upon system configuration in a HEX code.
Assign an address with a different value to each of the
nodes in the system.

Switch name Setting details Setting range

STN-H Upper address : 0 to F (Hex.)
01 to FE (Hex.)
STN-L Lower address : 0 to F (Hex.)

12 - 12 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.3 Ethernet Connection
 9
12.4 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT

SHARP PLC
are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the POINT
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ (1) Device settings of TOSHIBA PLC 10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the (a) When setting a relay as a bit device

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
same series. Set the device using the format of word

TECHNOS INDICATING
address (DEC) + bit address (HEX).
Please make the setting according to the specifications of

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside
the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Device number
Bit address (HEX)
may not be monitored.
Device name Word address (DEC)
11
(1) Setting item (b) When setting a relay as a word device
Set the device using the format of word

CONNECTION TO
address (DEC).

CONTROLLER
For the device name setting, enter "w" before
the bit device name.

CHINO
12
Device name Device number

CONNECTION TO
(adding "W")

TOSHIBA PLC
TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V Series
(2) Notation of device address (when using PROSEC
V series)
The notation of device address setting is different
between the TOSHIBA PLC peripheral software
and GOT. 13
For the difference of notations between peripheral

TOSHIBA MACHINE
softwares and GOT, refer to the following.

CONNECTION TO
 TOSHIBA PLC (TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V
Series)

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv Series

Item Description CONNECTION TO

Set the device name, device number, and bit number. AMPLIFIER
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the
bit of word device.
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information
selected in [Device]. 15
Set the station number of the controller to be
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

monitored.
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

Select this item for monitoring the host

Host
controller.
Network Select this for monitoring other controllers.
After selecting the item, set the station
Other number of the controller to be monitored.
NW No.: Set the network No.
Station No.: Set the station No.

12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 12 - 13

12.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 *7 For word data, the conversion from the address notation for
 TOSHIBA PLC the TOSHIBA PLC to that for the GOT is shown as follows.

(TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V Series) Communication Address notation

Address
notation
format for TOSHIBA PLC
Device for GOT
No. 16bit data DW10 D10
Device name Setting range
represen
tation DD10
(Integer) (Calculate the device D20
External input (X) X0000 to X511F
No. in 32-bit unit)
External output (Y) Y0000 to Y511F 32bit data
DF10
Internal relay (R)*6 R0000 to R4095F Hexadec (Real
(Calculate the device D20
imal number)
Special relay (S)*6 S0000 to S511F No. in 32-bit unit)
Link register relay (Z) Z0000 to Z999F
Bit device

Link relay (L) L0000 to L255F

Timer (Contact) (T) *1 T0 to T999  TOSHIBA PLC
Decimal
Counter (Contact) (C) *1 C0 to C511 (Unified Controller nv Series)
Specified bit of the following
Device
word devices
No.
Word device bit*2*6 Data register - Device name Setting range
represent
Link register
ation
File register
External input (X) X000000 to X16383F
External input (XW) XW0 to XW511
External input (X) Y000000 to Y16383F
External output (YW) YW0 to YW511
Bit device

Decimal
Internal relay (R) R00000 to R8191F
*5*7 RW0 to RW4095 +Hexade
Internal relay (RW)*
Input variable (I) I000000 to I16383F
cimal
Special relay (SW)*7 SW0 to SW511
Output variable (Q) Q000000 to Q16383F
Link relay (LW) LW0 to LW255
Special relay (S) S00000 to S1023F
Word device

Timer (Current value)

T0 to T999 External input (XW) XW0 to XW16383
(T)*1 Decimal
External output (YW) YW0 to YW16383
Counter (Current value) Decimal
C0 to C511 Internal relay (RW) RW0 to RW8191
(C)*1
Word device

Special relay (SW) SW0 to SW1023

Data register (D)
D0 to D8191 Data register (D) D0 to D8191
*3*5*7
File register (F) F0 to F32767
Link register (W) W0 to W2047
Input variable (IW) IW0 to IW16383 Decimal
*4 F0 to F32767
File register (F)
Output variable (QW) QW0 to QW16383
PROSEC T Series
User global (UG) UG0 to UG262143
*1 The writing of the timer (contact)/(current value) and counter
(contact)/(current value) are executed after being read by the
GOT. Therefore, do not edit it in the sequence program
during this period.
*2 As bit specification of a word device is performed after the
GOT reads the value, do not change the value in the
sequence program during this period.
*3 When the mode switch on the CPU module is set to "P-
RUN", writing to D0000 through D4095 is disabled.
*4 Extension file register is not supported.

PROSEC V Series
*2 As bit specification of a word device is performed after the
GOT reads the value, do not change the value in the
sequence program during this period.
*5 RW0000 and D0000 indicate the data register in the same
region although they are shown in different notations.
*6 For bit data, the conversion from the address notation for the
TOSHIBA PLC to that for the GOT is shown as follows.
Address notation for TOSHIBA PLC ÷ 16=Word address
(Quotient)...Bit address (Remainder)

Address
notation Address notation
Conversion
for TOSHIBA for GOT
PLC

S511F
S8191 (Decimal) 8191÷16= 511...15
(Hexadecimal)

R4095F
R65535 (Decimal) 65535÷16= 4095...15
(Hexadecimal)

12 - 14 12. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC

12.4 Device Range that Can Be Set
 13
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
13.

TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12
13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 2

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 3
13.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 4
13.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5 13
13.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 6

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
13.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 7

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

13 - 1
13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA
MACHINE PLC

13.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communication
Series Model name Clock Refer to
Type

TC3-01

TC3-02
TCmini Series*1 RS-232 13.2.1
TC6-00

TC8-00

TS2000
Robot controller RS-232 13.2.2
TS2100

*1 Connectable to the products only, which have RS-232 communication function.

13 - 2 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

13.1 Connectable Model List
 9
13.2 System Configuration

CONNECTION TO
13.2.1 Connecting to TC3, TC6, TC8

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

10
TC3
TC6 GOT TOSHIBA MACHINE
TC8 TCmini

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
Connection cable

CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT

Cable model Number of connectable 11

Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection diagram Option device Model
Type distance

CONNECTION TO
number

CONTROLLER
GT15-RS2-9P

CHINO
RS232 connection
15m
TC3, diagram 1) - (Built into GOT)
TC6, RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC
TC8 12
RS232 connection

CONNECTION TO
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 2)

TOSHIBA PLC
13.2.2 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100
13
Communication driver

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
TS2000
GOT
TS2100 TOSHIBA MACHINE
TCmini
Connection cable

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
Robot controller Connection cable GOT

CONNECTION TO
Cable model Number of connectable
Communication Max. equipment
Model name Connection diagram Option device Model
Type
number
distance AMPLIFIER

GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection
15m
15
TS2000 diagram 3)
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for

TS2100 RS-232
1 robot controller
DEVICES SUNX PLC

(POD port)
CONNECTION TO

RS232 connection
15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 4)

13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 13 - 3

13.2 System Configuration
 13.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
RS232 connection diagram 3)
GOT and the PLC.
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

GOT side TOSHIBA MACHINE

13.3.1 RS-232 cable PLC side

CD/NC*1 1 1 N.C.

 Connection diagram RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD

RS232 connection diagram 1) SD(TXD) 3 2 RXD

(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) ER(DTR) 4 6 N.C.

TOSHIBA MACHINE SG 5 5 SG
GOT side
PLC side
DR(DSR) 6 4 DTR
CD/NC*1 1 1 CI
RS(RTS) 7 8 CTS
RD(RXD) 2 2 TXD
CS(CTS) 8 7 RTS
SD(TXD) 3 3 RXD
- 9 9 N.C.
ER(DTR) 4 4 DSR
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,
SG 5 5 SG GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
DR(DSR) 6 6 DTR
RS232 connection diagram 4)
RS(RTS) 7 7 CTS
(For GT1030, GT1020)
CS(CTS) 8 8 RTS

CD GOT side TOSHIBA MACHINE

- 9 9
(terminal block) PLC side
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14: NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC, RXD
SD 2
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
RD 3 TXD
RS232 connection diagram 2)
ER 6 N.C.
(For GT1030, GT1020)
DR 4 DTR

GOT side TOSHIBA MACHINE SG 5 SG

(terminal block) PLC side
RS 8 CTS
SD 3 RXD CS 1 N.C.
RD 2 TXD NC 7 RTS
ER 4 DSR NC 9 N.C.
DR 6 DTR

SG 5 SG

RS 7 CTS  Precautions when preparing a cable

CS 1 CI (1) Cable length
NC 8 RTS
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

NC 9 CD (2) GOT side connector

For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC side connector
Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA
MACHINE PLC side module.
For details, refer to the TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
user's manual.

13 - 4 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

13.3 Connection Diagram
 9
13.4 GOT Side Settings

CONNECTION TO
13.4.1 Setting communication

SHARP PLC
13.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
Make the settings according to the usage environment.
settings)
10
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
GOT.

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
2.

11
3.

CONNECTION TO
Item Description Range

CONTROLLER
Set this item when change the 9600bps,
4. Transmission
transmission speed used for 19200bps,

CHINO
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps
Set this item when change the data 12
length used for communication with
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
the connected equipment.

CONNECTION TO
(Default: 8bit)

TOSHIBA PLC
Click!
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bits
(Default: 2bits)
Specify whether or not to perform a
None
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Parity
parity check, and how it is
performed during communication.
Even
13
menu. Odd
(Default: None)

TOSHIBA MACHINE
2. Set the number of retries to be

CONNECTION TO
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the performed when a communication
Retry 0 to 5times
channel to be used from the list menu. error occurs.
(Default: 3times)
3. Set the following items. Set the time period for a

PLC
• Manufacturer: TOSHIBA MACHINE Timeout Time communication to time out. 3 to 30sec
(Default: 3sec)
• Controller Type: TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini
• I/F: Interface to be used Specify the host address (station 14
No. of the GOT to which the PLC is

PANASONIC SERVO
• Driver: TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini Host Address connected) in the connected 0 to 63

CONNECTION TO
network.
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, (Default: 0)
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Set this item to adjust the AMPLIFIER
Make the settings according to the usage transmission timing of the
Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms)
environment. GOT.
13.4.2 Communication detail settings (Default: 0ms)
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. POINT

DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility

POINT The communication interface setting can be
changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
The settings of connecting equipment can be after writing [Communication Settings] of project
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. data.
For details, refer to the following. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting User's Manual of GOT used.
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 13 - 5

13.4 GOT Side Settings
 13.5 PLC Side Setting

POINT
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
For details of the TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC, refer to
the following manual.
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC user's Manual

Model name Refer to

TC3, TC8 13.5.1
PLC CPU
TC6 13.5.2
Robot controller TS2000, TS2100 13.5.3

13.5.1 Connecting to TC3, TC8 series

No communication settings.
Communication is available using default value of the PLC.

13.5.2 Connecting to TC6 series

The setting of transmission speed is changeable.

Set the following Special AUX Relay(A) using engineering
tool.
The communication may not work properly if the settings
are made using the GOT.

Transmission Special AUX Relay

speed*1 A158 A159 A15A
9600bps OFF OFF OFF
19200bps ON OFF OFF
38400bps - ON OFF
57600bps - OFF ON
115200bps - ON ON
*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that
of the GOT side.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following.
13.4.1 Setting communication interface
(Communication settings)

13.5.3 Connecting to TS2000,

TS2100

No communication settings.
Communication is available using the default value of the
robot controller.

13 - 6 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

13.5 PLC Side Setting
 9
13.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.

SHARP PLC
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored. 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
 Setting item

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
Item Description
12
Set the device name, device number, and bit number.

CONNECTION TO
Device
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device.

TOSHIBA PLC
Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].

POINT
13
(1) Device settings for TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
(a) When setting relay address or word register address as bit device
Set the device No. with the rack No. (Hex), module position (Octal), and terminal No. (Hex), in that order.

PLC
Device number

Device name
Terminal No. (hex)
Module position (octal) 14
Rack No. (hex)

PANASONIC SERVO
(b) When setting a relay address as a word device CONNECTION TO
Set the device No. with the rack No. (Hex) and module position (Octal), in that order. AMPLIFIER
For the device name setting, enter "w" before the bit device name.

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Device number
Device name Module position (octal)
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

(Bit device name with "W") Rack No. (hex)

13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 13 - 7

13.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 13.6.1 TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC (TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini)

Device No.
Device name Setting range
representation
Input relay 1 (X) X000 to XF7F
Input relay 2 (I) I000 to IF7F
Output relay 1 (Y) Y000 to YF7F
Output relay 1 (O) O000 to OF7F
Internal relay (R) R000 to R77F
Extended internal relay 1 (GR) GR000 to GRF7F
Extended internal relay 2 (H) H000 to HF7F
Bit device

Hexadecimal + Octal
Extended internal relay 3 (J) J000 to JF7F
+ Hexadecimal
Extended internal relay 4 (K) K000 to KF7F
Timer (Contact) (T) T000 to T77F
Counter (Contact) (C) C000 to C77F
Shift relay (S) S000 to S07F
Latch relay (L) L000 to L07F
Edge relay (E) E000 to E77F
Special auxiliary relay (A) A000 to A16F
Input register 1 (XW) XW00 to XWF7
Input register 2 (IW) IW00 to IWF7
Output register 1 (YW) YW00 to YWF7
Output register 2 (OW) OW00 to OWF7
Internal register (RW) RW00 to RW77
Extended internal register 1 (GW) GW00 to GWF7
Extended internal register 2 (HW) HW00 to HWF7
Hexadecimal + Octal
Extended internal register 3 (JW) JW00 to JWF7
Extended internal register 4 (KW) KW00 to KWF7
Timer (Contact) register (TW) TW00 to TW77
Word device

Counter (Contact) register (CW) CW00 to CW77

Shift register (SW) SW00 to SW07
Latch register (LW) LW00 to LW07
Edge register (EW) EW00 to EW77
Special auxiliary register (AW) AW00 to AW16
Generic register 1 (D) D000 to DF7F
Generic register 2 (B) B000 to BF7F
Generic register 3 (U) U000 to UF7F Hexadecimal + Octal
Generic register 4 (M) M000 to MF7F + Hexadecimal
Generic register 5 (Q) Q000 to QF7F
Timer/Counter current value (P) P000 to P77F
Timer/Counter set value (V) V000 to V77F+

13 - 8 13. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC

13.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 14
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC

CONTROLLER
14.

SERVO AMPLIFIER 11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12
14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 2

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 2
14.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 4
14.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9 13
14.5 Servo Amplifier Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 10

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
14.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 - 11
14.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 13

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

14 - 1
14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC
SERVO AMPLIFIER
14.1 Connectable Model List
The following table shows the connectable models.
Model name Clock Communication Type Refer to

MINAS A4

MINAS A4F RS-232 14.2.1

MINAS A4L RS-485

MINAS A5 14.2.2

14.2 System Configuration

14.2.1 Connecting to MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L series
Communication driver

MINAS MINAS GOT

PANASONIC MINAS

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

Connection
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier Connection cable 2) GOT
cable 1)
Max. Number of
Cable model total connectable
Model Communication Cable Model Communication Connection Max. distance equipment
Option device Model
name Type model*1 name Type diagram distance
number

DVOP1970 MINAS DVOP1960*1

(0.2m) A4 or - (Built into GOT) 16 servo
DVOP1971 MINAS
RS-485 RS-232 RS232 2m 17m amplifiers for
(0.5m) A4F
connection 1 GOT
DVOP1972 MINAS
(1m) A4L diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P

RS485
connection 1m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 1)

MINAS RS485
A4 connection 1m GT15-RS4-TE
MINAS diagram 2)
A4F
MINAS DVOP1970 MINAS FA-LTBGTR4CBL05
A4L (0.2m) A4 (0.5m)
RS422 FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 15 servo
DVOP1971 MINAS 1m
RS-485 RS-485 connection (1m) 16m amplifiers for
(0.5m) A4F
diagram 3) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 1 GOT
DVOP1972 MINAS
(1m) A4L (2m)
GT16-C02R4-
9S(0.2m)
RS422 GT15-RS4-9S
connection 1m
diagram 4)
- (Built into GOT)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by PANASONIC Corporation.

For details of this product, contact PANASONIC Corporation.

14 - 2 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.1 Connectable Model List
14.2.2 Connecting to MINAS A5 series 9

CONNECTION TO
Communication driver

SHARP PLC
MINAS MINAS GOT
PANASONIC MINAS

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
Connection cable 1)

Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) GOT

Number of
Cable model Max. total
Model name
Communication
Type
Connection diagram
Max.
distance
Option device Model distance
connectable
equipment 11
number

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
• Between MINAS and
- (Built into GOT) 32 servo
GOT:RS-232 RS232/485
*2 33m amplifiers for
• Between MINAS and

CHINO
connection diagram 1) 1 GOT
MINAS:RS-485
GT15-RS2-9P

RS485 connection
12
- (Built into GOT)
diagram 5)

CONNECTION TO
RS485 connection

TOSHIBA PLC
GT15-RS4-TE
MINAS A5 diagram 6)

FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m)
RS485 connection 31 servo
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m)
RS-485 diagram 7) *3 FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m) 32m amplifiers for

GT16-C02R4-9S(0.2m)
1 GOT 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
GT15-RS4-9S
RS485 connection
diagram 8)
- (Built into GOT)

PLC
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Corporation. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Corporation.
*2 The following shows the maximum distance.
• Between MINAS and GOT : 2m
14

PANASONIC SERVO
• Between MINAS and MINAS : 1m

CONNECTION TO
*3 The following shows the maximum distance.
• Between MINAS and GOT : 1m
• Between MINAS and MINAS : 1m
AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 3

14.2 System Configuration
 14.3 Connection Diagram
The following diagram shows the connection between the
GOT and the Servo amplifier. 14.3.2 RS-485 cable

 Connection diagram
14.3.1 RS-232 cable RS485 connection diagram 1)
GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side
 Connection diagram SDA1(TXD1+) 1 7 RS485+
RS232 connection diagram 1)
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 8 RS485-
GOT side(9-pin) PANASONIC servo amplifier side
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 1
CD/NC*1 1 1 RDB1(RXD1-) 4 2
RD(RXD) 2 3 TXD SDA2(TXD2+) 5 3 TXD
SD(TXD) 3 5 RXD SDB2(TXD2-) 6 4 G
ER(DTR) 4 2 RDA2(RXD2+) 7 5 RXD
SG 5 4 G RDB2(RXD2-) 8 6
DR(DSR) 6 6 RSA(RTS+) 9
RS(RTS) 7 7 RS485+ RSB(RTS-) 10
CS(CTS) 8 8 RS485- CSA(CTS+) 11
- 9 CSB(CTS-) 12
*1 GT16/15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC SG 13

NC 14

Shell
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-232 cable must be 2m or less. RS485 connection diagram 2)

(2) GOT side connector GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
SDA1 1 7 RS485+
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
SDB1 2 8 RS485-
(3) PANASONIC servo amplifier side connector
RDA1 3 1
Use the connector compatible with the PANASONIC
servo amplifier. RDB1 4 2
For details, refer to the user's manual of the
SDA2 5 3 TXD
PANASONIC servo amplifier.
SDB2 6 5 RXD

RDA2 7 6

RDB2 8

SG 9 4 G

FG 10

14 - 4 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 3) 9
GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side

CONNECTION TO
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 7 RS485+

SHARP PLC
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 8 RS485-

SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1

SDB2(TXD2-) 7 2
10
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 3 TXD

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
RDB1(RXD1-) 12 4 G

RSA(RTS+) 14 5 RXD

CONTROLLER
RSB(RTS-) 16 6

CSA(CTS+) 18

CSB(CTS-) 20
11
NC 1

CONNECTION TO
SG 2

CONTROLLER
NC 3

CHINO
NC 4

RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDB2(RXD2-) 11 12
NC 13

CONNECTION TO
NC 15

TOSHIBA PLC
NC 17

NC 19

RS422 connection diagram 4) 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side

CONNECTION TO
SDA 1 7 RS485+

SDB 6 8 RS485-

PLC
RDA 2 1

14
RDB 7 2

RSA 3 3 TXD

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
RSB 8 5 RXD

CSA 4 6

CSB 9 AMPLIFIER

SG 5 4 G

FG -
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 5

14.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 5) (For GT16)

GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side
RS485+
SDA1(TXD1+) 1 6 6 RS485+
RS485-
SDB1(TXD1-) 2 5 5 RS485-
RS485+
RDA1(RXD1+) 3 8 8 RS485+
RS485-
RDB1(RXD1-) 4 7 7 RS485-
GND
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 1 1 GND

SDB2(TXD2-) 6 NC 2 2 NC

RDA2(RXD2+) 7 TXD 3 3 TXD

RDB2(RXD2-) 8 RXD 4 4 RXD

RSA(RTS+) 9 FG Shell Shell FG

RSB(RTS-) 10

CSA(CTS+) 11

CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13

NC 14

Shell

RS485 connection diagram 6)

GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side
RS485+
SDA1 1 6 6 RS485+
RS485-
SDB1 2 5 5 RS485-
RS485+
RDA1 3 8 8 RS485+
RS485-
RDB1 4 7 7 RS485-
GND
SDA2 5 1 1 GND

SDB2 6 NC 2 2 NC

RDA2 7 TXD 3 3 TXD

RDB2 8 RXD 4 4 RXD

SG 9 FG Shell Shell FG

FG 10

14 - 6 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.3 Connection Diagram
RS485 connection diagram 7) (For GT16) 9
GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side

CONNECTION TO
RS485+
SDA1(TXD1+) 6 6 6 RS485+

SHARP PLC
RS485-
SDB1(TXD1-) 8 5 5 RS485-
RS485+
SDA2(TXD2+) 5 8 8 RS485+
RS485-

10
SDB2(TXD2-) 7 7 7 RS485-
GND
RDA1(RXD1+) 10 1 1 GND

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
RDB1(RXD1-) 12 NC 2 2 NC

RSA(RTS+) 14 TXD 3 3 TXD

CONTROLLER
RSB(RTS-) 16 RXD 4 4 RXD

CSA(CTS+) 18 FG Shell Shell FG

CSB(CTS-) 20
11
NC 1

CONNECTION TO
SG 2

CONTROLLER
NC 3

NC 4

CHINO
RDA2(RXD2+) 9

RDB2(RXD2-) 11
12
NC 13

CONNECTION TO
NC 15

TOSHIBA PLC
NC 17

NC 19

RS485 connection diagram 8)

13
GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
RS485+
SDA 1 6 6 RS485+
RS485-
SDB 6 5 5 RS485-
RS485+
RDA 2 8 8 RS485+

PLC
RS485-
RDB 7 7 7 RS485-

RSA 3
GND
1 1 GND 14

PANASONIC SERVO
RSB 8 NC 2 2 NC

CONNECTION TO
CSA 4 TXD 3 3 TXD

AMPLIFIER
CSB 9 RXD 4 4 RXD

SG 5 FG Shell Shell FG

FG -

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 7

14.3 Connection Diagram
 Precautions when preparing a cable  Connecting terminating resistors
(1) Cable length (1) GOT side
The length of the RS-485 cable must be 1m or less. When connecting a PANASONIC servo amplifier to the
(2) GOT side connector GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the
GOT.
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the
(3) PANASONIC servo amplifier side connector GOT main unit to "Disable".
Use the connector compatible with the PANASONIC (b) For GT14, GT11
servo amplifier. Set the terminating resistor selector to "110 ".
For details, refer to the user's manual of the
PANASONIC servo amplifier. For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to
the following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT

14.3.3 RS-232/RS-485 cable

 Connection diagram
RS232/485 connection diagram 1)

GOT side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side PANASONIC servo amplifier side
*1
CD/NC 1 1 GND 1 GND 1 GND

RD(RXD) 2 2 NC 2 NC 2 NC

SD(TXD) 3 3 TXD 3 TXD 3 TXD

ER(DTR) 4 4 RXD 4 RXD 4 RXD

RS485- RS485-
SG 5 RS485- 5 5 5
RS485+ RS485+
DR(DSR) 6 RS485+ 6 6 6
RS485- RS485-
RS(RTS) 7 RS485- 7 7 7
RS485+ RS485+
CS(CTS) 8 RS485+ 8 8 8
FG FG
- 9 FG Shell Shell Shell

*1 GT16/15:CD, GT11:NC

 Precautions when preparing a cable

(1) Cable length
• The length of the cable between GOT and MINAS
must be 2m or less.
• The length of the cable between MINAS and MINAS
must be 1m or less.
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) PANASONIC servo amplifier side connector
Use the connector compatible with the PANASONIC
servo amplifier.
For details, refer to the user's manual of the
PANASONIC servo amplifier.

14 - 8 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.3 Connection Diagram
 9
14.4 GOT Side Settings

CONNECTION TO
14.4.1 Setting communication

SHARP PLC
14.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.
10
Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
GOT.

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
2.

11
3.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
Item Description Range
4. Set this item when change the 9600bps,

CHINO
transmission speed used for 19200bps,
Transmission
communication with the connected 38400bps,
Speed
equipment. 57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps) 115200bps 12
Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with the

CONNECTION TO
Data Bit 7bit/8bit
Click! connected equipment.

TOSHIBA PLC
(Default: 8bits)
Specify the stop bit length for
Stop Bit communications. 1bit/2bit
(Default: 1bit)
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the Specify whether or not to perform a parity
menu. Parity
check, and how it is performed during
None
Even
13
communication.
Odd

TOSHIBA MACHINE
2. (Default: None)

CONNECTION TO
The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the
Set the number of retries to be performed
channel to be used from the list menu. Retry when a communication error occurs. 0 to 5times
(Default:3times)
3. Set the following items.
Timeout
Set the time period for a communication

PLC
• Manufacturer: PANASONIC to time out. 3 to 30sec
Time*1
• Controller Type: Set the option according to the (Default: 3sec)
Controller Type to be connected. Specify the station No. of the servo 14
Host Address amplifier to connect the GOT. 0 to 31
• PANASONIC MINAS-A4 series

PANASONIC SERVO
(Default: 0)

CONNECTION TO
• PANASONIC MINAS-A5 series Set this item to adjust the transmission
• I/F: Interface to be used timing of the communication request from
AMPLIFIER
Delay Time 0 to 300ms
• Driver: PANASONIC MINAS the GOT.
(Default: 0ms)
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer,
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set.
Make the settings according to the usage
POINT 15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

environment.
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
DEVICES SUNX PLC

14.4.2 Communication detail settings The communication interface setting can be

CONNECTION TO

changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]

Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. after writing [Communication Settings] of project
data.
For details on the Utility, refer to the following
POINT manual.
User's Manual of GOT used.
The settings of connecting equipment can be (2) Precedence in communication settings
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
For details, refer to the following. Utility, the latest setting is effective.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 9

14.4 GOT Side Settings
 14.5 Servo Amplifier Side Setting

14.5.3 Station number setting

POINT
PANASONIC Servo Amplifier Set each station number so that no station number overlaps.
For details of the PANASONIC Servo Amplifier, refer to The station number can be set without regard to the cable
the following manual. connection order. There is no problem even if station
numbers are not consecutive.
PANASONIC Servo Amplifier user's Manual
• When connecting the GOT and servo amplifier with RS-232
Set the station number (axis number) of the servo
amplifier connected to the GOT to 0. Set the station
numbers (axis numbers) of other servo amplifiers
14.5.1 Connecting to MINAS A4/A4F/ connected to the GOT to other than 0.
• When connecting the GOT and servo amplifier with RS-485
A4L The GOT will be the station number (axis number) 0. Set
the station numbers (axis numbers) of other connected
 MINAS A4/A4F/A4L communication settings servo amplifiers to other than 0.
Set them from the main unit front panel of MINAS A4/ Example of RS-232 connection between GOT-servo
amplifier
A4F/A4L or using the setup support software.
Station Station Station Station Station
Pr No. Set value No.0 No.7 No.1 No.15 No.6
Address of axis
0 to 15 GOT
(Parameter No.00)
*1 2:9600bps 3:19200bps
Baud rate setup of RS232
(Parameter No.0C) 4:38400bps 5:57600bps

Baud rate setup of RS485*1 2:9600bps 3:19200bps Examples of station number setting
(Parameter No.0D) 4:38400bps 5:57600bps
(1) Direct specification
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are When setting the device, specify the station number of
shown. Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed.
Model name Specification range
POINT MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L 0 to 15
MINAS A5 0 to 31
Axis name setting
• The axis name is determined according to the rotary (2) Indirect specification
switch ID set value when the power supply to the When setting the device, indirectly specify the station
servo amplifier is turned on. This value will be the number of the inverter of which data is to be changed
station number (axis number) during communication. using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to
• The axis name setting can be changed only with the GD25).
rotary switch ID. When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on
drawing software, the value of GD10 to GD25
compatible to the station No. specification will be the
station No. of the servo amplifier.
14.5.2 Connecting to MINAS A5
Specification Compatible
Setting range
Station No. device
 MINAS A5 communication settings 100 GD10
101 GD11
Set them from the main unit front panel of MINAS A5 or
102 GD12
using the setup support software.
103 GD13
Pr No. Set value 104 GD14
105 GD15 • MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L
Address of axis
0 to 31 0 to 15
(Parameter No.00) 106 GD16
• MINAS A5
107 GD17
Baud rate setup of RS232*1 2:9600bps 3:19200bps 0 to 31
4:38400bps 5:57600bps 108 GD18
(Parameter No.5.29) For the setting other than the above, a
109 GD19 communication
Baud rate setup of RS485*1 2:9600bps 3:19200bps
110 GD20 timeout error will occur.
(Parameter No.5.30) 4:38400bps 5:57600bps
111 GD21
*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are 112 GD22
shown. Adjust the settings with GOT settings.
113 GD23
114 GD24
115 GD25

14 - 10 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.5 Servo Amplifier Side Setting
 9
14.6 Device Range that Can Be Set

CONNECTION TO
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT

SHARP PLC
are as follows. 14.6.1 PANASONIC servo amplifier
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the (PANASONIC MINAS-A4
maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
Series)
The device specifications of controllers may differ 10
depending on the models, even though belonging to the

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
same series.

TECHNOS INDICATING
Device No.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of Device name*1 Setting range represen-

CONTROLLER
the controller actually used. tation

When a non-existent device or a device number outside Status (STS)*2 STS0 to STS7

the range is set, other objects with correct device settings Input signal (INP) *2 INP0 to INP31
may not be monitored. Output signal (OTP)*2 OTP0 to OTP47
11
 Setting item Absolute encoder
(Status)(AEST)*2
AEST0 to AEST15

CONNECTION TO
Bit device
Writing of parameter to

CONTROLLER
EPRW0 Decimal
EEPROM (EPRW)*3
Clear of user alarm history (in

CHINO
EEPROM as well) ALHC0
(ALHC)*3
Alarm clear (ALMC)*3 ALMC0 12
*3 ABSC0
Absolute clear (ABSC)

CONNECTION TO
Status (Control modes)
STCM0

TOSHIBA PLC
(STCM)*2
Present speed (SPD)*2 SPD0
*2 TRQ0
Present torque output (TRQ)
Decimal
Item Description Absolute encoder (Encoder

13
AEID0
Set the device name, device number, and bit number. ID)(AEID)*2
Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Absolute encoder (Multi-turn
AEMD0

TOSHIBA MACHINE
word device.
data)(AEMD)*2

CONNECTION TO
Displays the device type and setting range which are
Information Hexa-
selected in [Device]. Parameter (PRM) PRM0000 to PRM007F
decimal
Set the monitor target of the set device.
Present alarm data (ALM)*2 ALM0
Network Station Set this item when monitoring the Servo amplifier of Decimal

PLC
user alarm history (ALHI)*2 ALHI1 to ALHI14
Word device

No. the specified station No.

User parameter (MIN. value)
(PRMN)*2
PRMN0000 to PRMN007F 14

PANASONIC SERVO
User parameter (MAX. value) Hexa-

CONNECTION TO
PRMX0000 to PRMX007F
(PRMX)*2 decimal
User parameter
AMPLIFIER
PRPR0000 to PRPR007F
(Property)(PRPR)*2
Feedback pulse counter
FBPC0
(FBPC)*2
Present deviation counter
DVC0
15
(DVC)*2
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

Decimal
Absolute encoder (Single turn
DEVICES SUNX PLC

AESD0
data)(AESD)*2
CONNECTION TO

External scale deviation and

ESA0 to ESA1
sum of pulses (ESA)*2
*1 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
devices.
*2 Only reading is possible.
*3 Only writing is possible.

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 11

14.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 14.6.2 PANASONIC servo amplifier Device No.
(PANASONIC MINAS-A5 Device name*1 Setting range represen-
tation
Series) User parameter (Class 0,
PRMX00 to PRMX017
MAX. value)(PRMX0)*2
User parameter (Class 1,
Device No. PRMX10 to PRMX127
*1 MAX. value)(PRMX1)*2
Device name Setting range represen-
tation User parameter (Class 2,
PRMX20 to PRMX223
*2 STS0 to STS7 MAX. value)(PRMX2)*2
Status (STS)
User parameter (Class 3,
Input signal (INP)*2 INP0 to INP31 PRMX30 to PRMX329
MAX. value)(PRMX3)*2
*2 OTP0 to OTP47
Output signal (OTP)
User parameter (Class 4,
Absolute encoder PRMX40 to PRMX442
AEST0 to AEST15 MAX. value)(PRMX4)*2
*2
(Status)(AEST)
User parameter (Class 5,
Bit device

Writing of parameter to PRMX50 to PRMX535

EPRW0 Decimal MAX. value)(PRMX5)*2
*3
EEPROM (EPRW)
User parameter (Class 6,
Clear of user alarm history (in PRMX60 to PRMX639
MAX. value)(PRMX6)*2
EEPROM as well) ALHC0
User parameter (Class 0,
(ALHC)*3 PRPR00 to PRPR017
Property)(PRPR0)*3
Alarm clear (ALMC)*3 ALMC0
Word device User parameter (Class 1,
PRPR10 to PRPR127
Absolute clear (ABSC)*3 ABSC0 Property)(PRPR1)*3
Decimal
Status (Control modes) User parameter (Class 2,
STCM0 PRPR20 to PRPR223
(STCM)*2 Property)(PRPR2)*3
Present speed (SPD)*2 SPD0 User parameter (Class 3,
PRPR30 to PRPR329
Present torque output (TRQ)*2 TRQ0 Property)(PRPR3)*3

Absolute encoder (Encoder User parameter (Class 4,

AEID0 PRPR40 to PRPR442
ID)(AEID)*2 Property)(PRPR4)*3

Absolute encoder (Multi-turn User parameter (Class 5,

AEMD0 PRPR50 to PRPR535
data)(AEMD) *2 Property)(PRPR5)*3

Parameter (Class 0)(PRM0) PRM00 to PRM017 User parameter (Class 6,

PRPR60 to PRPR639
Parameter (Class 1)(PRM1) PRM10 to PRM127 Property)(PRPR6)*3

Parameter (Class 2)(PRM2) PRM20 to PRM223 Feedback pulse counter

FBPC0
Parameter (Class 3)(PRM3) PRM30 to PRM329 (FBPC)*2

Parameter (Class 4)(PRM4) PRM40 to PRM442 Present deviation counter

DVC0
Parameter (Class 5)(PRM5) PRM50 to PRM535 (DVC)*2

Parameter (Class 6)(PRM6) PRM60 to PRM639 Absolute encoder (Single turn

AESD0
data)(AESD)*2
Present alarm data (ALM)*2 ALM0
Word device

External scale deviation and

Present alarm data (Sub) ESA0 to ESA1
ALMS0 Decimal sum of pulses (ESA)*2
(ALMS)*2
user alarm history (ALHI)*2 ALHI1 to ALHI14 *1 The GOT cannot read or write data from/to consecutive
devices.
user alarm history *2 Only reading is possible.
ALHS1 to ALHS14
(Sub)(ALHI)*2 *3 Only writing is possible.

User parameter (Class 0, MIN.

PRMN00 to PRMN017
value)(PRMN0)*2
User parameter (Class 1, MIN.
PRMN10 to PRMN127
value)(PRMN1)*2
User parameter (Class 2, MIN.
PRMN20 to PRMN223
value)(PRMN2)*2
User parameter (Class 3, MIN.
PRMN30 to PRMN329
value)(PRMN3)*2
User parameter (Class 4, MIN.
PRMN40 to PRMN442
value)(PRMN4)*2
User parameter (Class 5, MIN.
PRMN50 to PRMN535
value)(PRMN5)*2
User parameter (Class 6, MIN.
PRMN60 to PRMN639
value)(PRMN6)*2

14 - 12 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

14.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
 9
14.7 Precautions

CONNECTION TO
 Station number setting in the servo system

SHARP PLC
Configure the servo system so that there is a servo
amplifier with a station number set with a host address.
For details of host address setting, refer to the
following manual. 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
14.4.2 Communication detail settings

TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
 Monitor speed
When monitoring multiple station devices placed on the
same GOT screen, the monitor speed is slow. Even
when monitoring a single station, the monitor speed is 11
slow if the device points is large.

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
 Mixing of MINAS A4 series and MINAS A5
series

CHINO
MINAS A4 series and MINAS A5 series cannot be
mixed. The multiple MINAS A4 series can be used
together. 12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 14 - 13

14.7 Precautions
14 - 14 14. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
14.7 Precautions
 15
9

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
15.

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL 11
DEVICES SUNX PLC

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
CHINO
12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3
13
15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 18
15.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 19

PLC
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 20
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15 - 1
15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC
INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.1 Connectable Model List

The following table shows the connectable models.
Communic
Model name Clock Refer to
ation Type

FP0-C16CT

FP0-C32CT RS-232 15.2.1

FP0R

FP1-C24C
RS-232 15.2.2
FP1-C40C

FP2 *1
RS-232 15.2.3
FP2SH

FP3 *2
RS-232 15.2.4
FP5

FP10(S) RS-232 15.2.5

FP10SH RS-232 15.2.6

FP-M(C20TC)
RS-232 15.2.7
FP-M(C32TC)

FP- RS-232 15.2.8

RS-232
FP-X 15.2.9
RS-422

*1 Any of the extension memory unit FP2-EM1, FP2-EM2 or FP2-EM3 is required.

*2 The clock function is available for the AFP3210C-F, AFP3211C-F, AFP3212C-F and AFP3220C-F.

15 - 2 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.1 Connectable Model List
 9
15.2 System Configuration

CONNECTION TO
15.2.1 Connecting to FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, or FP0R

SHARP PLC
Communication driver
FPO-C16CT
FPO-C32CT GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP
10
FP0R
Connection cable

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Max.
Communication Cable model connectable
Model name distance Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number equipment
11
- (Built into GOT)
FP0-C16CT AFC8503(3m)*1 3m

CONNECTION TO
FP0-C32CT
RS-232

CONTROLLER
FP0R GT15-RS2-9P
(Tool port)
RS232
AFC8503(3m)*1 + 3.5m - (Built into GOT)

CHINO
connection diagram 9) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT09-C30R20904-3C(3m)
FP0-C16CT
FP0-C32CT
or 15m
- (Built into GOT)
12
RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 4)
FP0R GT15-RS2-9P

CONNECTION TO
(RS232C port)
15m - (Built into GOT)

TOSHIBA PLC
RS232 connection diagram 12)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15.2.2 Connecting to FP1-C24C or FP1-C40C

Communication driver
13
FP peripheral RS422/232C

TOSHIBA MACHINE
FP1-C24C device

CONNECTION TO
conversion GOT
FP1-C40C connection
adapter Panasonic MEWNET-FP
cable
Connection cable

PLC
14
FP peripheral

PANASONIC SERVO
device

CONNECTION TO
PLC Connection cable GOT
connection
RS422/232 Number of
cable*1 Max.
conversion connectable
AMPLIFIER
Cable model distance
adapter*1 Cable model equipment
Model Communication Connection
Connection diagram Option device Model
name Type diagram
number
number
GT09-C30R20901-
25P(3m) - (Built into GOT)
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

or 15.5m
FP1-C24C
AFP15205
DEVICES SUNX PLC

FP1-C40C RS-232 AFP8550 RS232 connection

GT15-RS2-9P
CONNECTION TO

(0.5m) diagram 1)
(Tool port)
RS232 connection 15.5m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 8) 1 GOT for 1
GT09-C30R20903- PLC
9P(3m) - (Built into GOT)
FP1-C24C or 15m
FP1-C40C RS232 connection
RS-232 - - GT15-RS2-9P
(RS232C diagram 3)
port)
RS232 connection 15m - (Built into GOT)
diagram 13)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 3

15.2 System Configuration
 15.2.3 Connecting to FP2 or FP2SH
 When connecting to tool port or RS232C port
Communication driver

FP2
GOT
FP2SH Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Max.
Communication Cable model connectable
Model name distance Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number equipment

- (Built into
GOT)
AFC8503(3m)*1 3m
FP2
FP2SH RS-232 GT15-RS2-9P
(Tool port)

RS232 - (Built into

AFC8503(3m)*1 + 3.5m
connection diagram 9) GOT)

AFC85853(3m)*1 - (Built into

GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) GOT)
15m 1 GOT for 1
or
PLC
RS232 connection diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P

FP2 AFC85853(3m)*1
FP2SH RS-232 GT09-C30R20902-
(RS232C port) 9P(3m) RS232
- (Built into
+ connection diagram 15m
or GOT)
11)
RS232 connection
diagram 2)

- (Built into
RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m
GOT)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

 When connecting to computer communication unit

Communication driver
Computer
FP2
communication GOT
FP2SH Panasonic MEWNET-FP
unit
Connection cable

PLC Computer Connection cable GOT Number of

Max.
Communication communication Cable model connectable
Model name distance Option device Model
Type unit*1 Connection diagram number equipment

AFC85853(3m)*1 - (Built into

GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) GOT)
or 15m 1 GOT for 1
FP2 RS232 connection computer
RS-232 AFP2462 GT15-RS2-9P
FP2SH diagram 2) communication
unit
RS232 connection - (Built into
15m
diagram 10) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15 - 4 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.2 System Configuration
15.2.4 Connecting to FP3 or FP5 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to tool port

SHARP PLC
Communication driver
FP peripheral RS422/232C
FP3 device conversion GOT
FP5 connection Panasonic MEWNET-FP
adapter
cable
Connection cable 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
FP peripheral
device
PLC Connection cable GOT
connection
cable*1
RS422/232C
conversion
Max.
Number of
connectable
11
*1
distance
Cable model adapter equipment

CONNECTION TO
Model Communication Cable model
Connection Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number

CONTROLLER
diagram number

GT09-C30R20901-25P(3m) - (Built into

CHINO
or GOT)
15.5m 1 GOT for 1
RS232 connection
12
FP3 AFP5520 RS422/232
RS-232 AFP8550 diagram 1) GT15-RS2-9P
FP5 (0.5m) conversion
adapter
RS232 connection - (Built into

CONNECTION TO
15.5m
diagram 8) GOT)

TOSHIBA PLC
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

 When connecting to computer communication unit 13

Communication driver

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
Computer
FP3
communication GOT
FP5 Panasonic MEWNET-FP
unit
Connection cable

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
PLC Computer Connection cable GOT Number of
Max.
communication connectable
Model Communication Cable model distance
AMPLIFIER
unit*1 Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number

AFC85853(3m)*1
- (Built into GOT)
GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m)

FP3 RS-232 AFP3462

or
15m
15
RS232 connection diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC

1 GOT for 1
CONNECTION TO

RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m - (Built into GOT)

computer
communication
AFC85853(3m)*1 unit
- (Built into GOT)
GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m)
15m
or
FP5 RS-232 AFP5462
RS232 connection diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m - (Built into GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 5

15.2 System Configuration
 15.2.5 Connecting to FP10(S)

 When connecting to tool port

Communication driver
FP peripheral RS422/232C
device
FP10(S) connection conversion GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP
cable adapter
Connection cable

FP peripheral
device
PLC Connection cable GOT
connection RS422/232 Number of
cable*1 Max.
conversion connectable
distance
Cable model adapter*1 Cable model equipment
Model Communication
Connection Connection diagram Option device Model
name Type
diagram number number

GT09-C30R20901-25P - (Built into

or GOT)
15.5m 1 GOT for 1
RS232 connection RS422/232
FP10(S) RS-232 AFP5520(0.5m) AFP8550 diagram 1)
GT15-RS2-9P conversion
adapter

RS232 connection - (Built into

15.5m
diagram 8) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

 When connecting to RS232C port

Communication driver

FP10(S) GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Max.
Model Communication Cable model connectable
distance Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number equipment

AFC85853(3m)*1 - (Built into

GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) GOT)
15m
or
RS232 connection diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P

AFC85853(3m)*1 1 GOT
FP10(S) RS-232
GT09-C30R20902- for 1 PLC
9P(3m) RS232
- (Built into
+ connection diagram 15m
or GOT)
11)
RS232 connection
diagram 2)

- (Built into
RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m
GOT)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15 - 6 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.2 System Configuration
 9
 When connecting to computer communication unit

CONNECTION TO
Communication driver
Computer

SHARP PLC
FP10(S) communication GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP
unit
Connection cable

10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
PLC Computer Connection cable GOT Number of
Max.
communication connectable
Model Communication Cable model distance
unit*1 Option device Model equipment
name Type Connection diagram number

AFC85853(3m)*1
GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m)
- (Built into 11
GOT)
or 15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection 1 GOT for 1 computer
FP10(S) RS-232 AFP3462

CONTROLLER
diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P communication unit

CHINO
RS232 connection - (Built into
15m
diagram 10) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
12

CONNECTION TO
TOSHIBA PLC
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 7

15.2 System Configuration
 15.2.6 Connecting to FP10SH

 When connecting to tool port or RS232C port

Communication driver

FP10SH GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Max.
Model Communication Cable model connectable
distance Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number equipment

AFC85853(3m)*1 - (Built into

GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) GOT)
15m
or
RS232 connection diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P

AFC85853(3m)*1
FP10SH RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC
GT09-C30R20902-
9P(3m) RS232
- (Built into
+ connection diagram 15m
or GOT)
11)
RS232 connection
diagram 2)

- (Built into
RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m
GOT)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

 When connecting to computer communication unit

Communication driver
Computer
FP10SH communication GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP
unit
Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of

Computer Max.
Model Communication Cable model connectable
communication unit*1 distance Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number equipment

AFC85853(3m)*1
- (Built into
GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m)
GOT)
or 15m
1 GOT for 1
FP10SH RS-232 AFP3462 RS232 connection computer
diagram 2) GT15-RS2-9P communication unit

RS232 connection - (Built into

15m
diagram 10) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15 - 8 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.2 System Configuration
15.2.7 Connecting to FP-M(C20TC) or FP-M(C32TC) 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to tool port or RS232C port

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

FP-M(C20TC)
GOT
FP-M(C32TC) Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Max.
Communication Cable model connectable
Model name distance Option device Model
Type Connection diagram number equipment
11
- (Built into

CONNECTION TO
GOT)

CONTROLLER
AFC8503(3m)*1 3m

FP-M(C20TC),

CHINO
GT15-RS2-9P
FP-M(C32TC) RS-232
(Tool port)
RS232 - (Built into
AFC8503(3m)*1 +
connection diagram 9)
3.5m
GOT) 12
- (Built into
15m

CONNECTION TO
RS232 connection diagram 10)
GOT)

TOSHIBA PLC
AFC85853(3m)*1 - (Built into 1 GOT for 1
GT09-C30R20902-9P(3m) GOT) PLC
15m
or
RS232 connection diagram 2)
GT15-RS2-9P 13
FP-M(C20TC),

TOSHIBA MACHINE
AFC85853(3m)*1

CONNECTION TO
FP-M(C32TC) RS-232
GT09-C30R20902-
(RS232C port) RS232
9P(3m) - (Built into
+ connection diagram 15m
or GOT)
11)
RS232 connection

PLC
diagram 2)

RS232 connection diagram 10) 15m

- (Built into 14
GOT)

PANASONIC SERVO
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
CONNECTION TO
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 9

15.2 System Configuration
 15.2.8 Connecting to FP

 When connecting to tool port

Communication driver

FPΣ GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Max. Number of connectable
Model Communication Cable model distance equipment
Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number

- (Built into
*1
GOT)
AFC8503(3m) 3m

FP RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection - (Built into

AFC8503(3m)*1 + 3.5m
diagram 9) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

 When connecting to COM port

Communication driver

FPΣ COM port GOT Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable

PLC Connection cable GOT

Max. Number of connectable
Model Communication Cable model distance equipment
COM port*1 Option device Model
name Type Connection diagram number

- (Built into
RS232 connection GOT)
15m
diagram 5)
AFPG801 RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection - (Built into

15m
diagram 14) GOT)
FP 1 GOT for 1 PLC

- (Built into
RS232 connection GOT)
15m
diagram 6)
AFPG802 RS-232
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection - (Built into

15m
diagram 15) GOT)

*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

15 - 10 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.2 System Configuration
15.2.9 Connecting to FP-X 9

CONNECTION TO
 When connecting to tool port

SHARP PLC
Communication driver

FP-X GOT
Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
CONTROLLER
PLC Connection cable GOT Number of
Max.
Communication Cable model connectable
distance
Model name
Type Connection diagram number
Option device Model equipment
11

CONNECTION TO
- (Built into
GOT)

CONTROLLER
AFC8503(3m)*1 3m

FP-X RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC

CHINO
GT15-RS2-9P

RS232 connection - (Built into

AFC8503(3m)*1 +
diagram 9)
3.5m
GOT) 12
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial

CONNECTION TO
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

TOSHIBA PLC
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO

PLC
14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 11

15.2 System Configuration
  When connecting to communication cassette
Communication driver

Communication
FP-X GOT
cassette Panasonic MEWNET-FP

Connection cable
COM1

PLC Connection cable GOT

Number of
Cable model Max.
Model Communication Communication cassette*1 connectable
Connection diagram distance Option device Model
name Type equipment
number

- (Built into GOT)

RS232
15m
connection diagram 5)
AFPX-COM1
(RS232C one channel type) GT15-RS2-9P

RS232
connection diagram 15m - (Built into GOT)
14)
RS-232

- (Built into GOT)

RS232
15m
connection diagram 6)
AFPX-COM2*2
(RS232C two channel type) GT15-RS2-9P

RS232
connection diagram 15m - (Built into GOT)
15)

RS422
1200m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 1) 1 GOT for 1
FP-X
PLC
GT16-C02R4-
9S(0.2m)

AFPX-COM3 RS422 - (Built into GOT)

RS-422 1200m
(RS485/RS422 one channel type) connection diagram 2)

GT15-RS2T4-9P*3

GT15-RS4-9S

RS422
1200m - (Built into GOT)
connection diagram 3)

- (Built into GOT)

RS232
15m
AFPX-COM4*2 connection diagram 7)
RS-232 (RS485 one channel and GT15-RS2-9P
RS232C one channel mixed type)
RS232
connection diagram 15m - (Built into GOT)
16)
*1 Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd. For details of this product, contact Panasonic Industrial
Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
*2 To connect C30 and C60, USB port may set at the COM2 port on AFPX-COM2 and AFPX-COM4. In this case, set the COM2 port
to RS232C.
*3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 .

15 - 12 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.2 System Configuration
 9
15.3 Connection Diagram

CONNECTION TO
The following diagram shows the connection between the

SHARP PLC
RS232 connection diagram 3)
GOT and the PLC.
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

GOT side PLC side

15.3.1 RS-232 cable 10
CD/NC*1 1 1 FG

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
TECHNOS INDICATING
RD(RXD)
 Connection diagram 2 2 SD
SD(TXD) 3 3 RD
RS232 connection diagram 1)

CONTROLLER
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) ER(DTR) 4 8 -
SG 5 7 SG
GOT side PLC side

CD/NC*1 1 1 FG
DR(DSR) 6 6 - 11
RS(RTS) 7 5 CS
RD(RXD) 2 3 RD

CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8 4 RS

CONTROLLER
SD(TXD) 3 2 SD
- 9 9 -
ER(DTR) 4 4 RS

CHINO
*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,
SG 5 7 SG
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
DR(DSR) 6 5 CS
RS232 connection diagram 4) 12
RS(RTS) 7 6 DR
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

CONNECTION TO
CS(CTS) 8 8 CD

TOSHIBA PLC
- 9 20 ER GOT side PLC side

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC, CD/NC*1 1

GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC SD
RD(RXD) 2 S

RS232 connection diagram 2) SD(TXD) 3

RD
R 13
SG
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) ER(DTR) 4 G

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
GOT side PLC side SG 5

DR(DSR) 6
CD/NC*2 1 1 FG
RS(RTS) 7
RD(RXD) SD

PLC
2 2
CS(CTS) 8
SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)
3 3 RD
- 9 14
4 8 CD

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
SG 5 7 SG *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC
DR(DSR) 6 9 ER

RS(RTS) 7 5 CS AMPLIFIER

CS(CTS) 8 4 RS

- 9 6 RI
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,

DEVICES SUNX PLC

GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC

CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 13

15.3 Connection Diagram
RS232 connection diagram 5) RS232 connection diagram 7)
(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )

GOT side PLC side GOT side PLC side

CD/NC*1 1 RS CD/NC*1 1 +

RD(RXD) 2 SD RD(RXD) 2 SD

SD(TXD) 3 RD SD(TXD) 3 RD

ER(DTR) 4 CS ER(DTR) 4 -

SG 5 SG SG 5 SG

DR(DSR) 6 DR(DSR) 6

RS(RTS) 7 RS(RTS) 7

CS(CTS) 8 CS(CTS) 8

- 9 - 9

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC, *1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,
GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC

RS232 connection diagram 6) RS232 connection diagram 8)

(For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 ) (For GT1030, GT1020)

GOT side
GOT side PLC side (terminal block) PLC side

CD/NC*1 1
SD 2 SD
RD(RXD) 2 S1
Serial port*2 RD 3 RD
SD(TXD) 3 R1 ER 1 FG
ER(DTR) 4
DR 4 RS
SG 5 SG SG 7 SG
DR(DSR) 6
RS 6 DR
RS(RTS) 7 S2
Serial port*2 CS 5 CS
CS(CTS) 8 R2 NC 8 CD
- 9
NC 20 ER

*1 GT16: CD, GT15: CD, GT14:NC, GT12:NC, GT11: NC,

GT105 : NC, GT104 : NC RS232 connection diagram 9)
*2 PANASONIC PLC Side has two serial ports. S1 and R1, S2
and R2 constitute the serial port, respectively.Use one of the (For GT1030, GT1020)
serial ports.
GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side

SD 3 SD

RD 2 RD

ER 4 DTR

DR 6 DSR

SG 5 SG

RS 7 RS

CS 8 CS

NC 1 CD

NC 9 -

15 - 14 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.3 Connection Diagram
RS232 connection diagram 10) RS232 connection diagram 13) 9
(For GT1030, GT1020) (For GT1030, GT1020)

CONNECTION TO
GOT side GOT side
PLC side

SHARP PLC
(terminal block) (terminal block) PLC side

SD 3 RD SD 3 RD
RD 2 SD RD 2 SD
ER 8 CD ER 1 FG 10

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
DR 9 ER DR 6

TECHNOS INDICATING
SG 7 SG SG 7 SG

CONTROLLER
RS 5 CS RS 5 CS
CS 4 RS CS 4 RS
NC 1 FG NC 8

NC 6 RI NC 9
11

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
RS232 connection diagram 14)
RS232 connection diagram 11) (For GT1030, GT1020)
(For GT1030, GT1020)

CHINO
GOT side
GOT side (terminal block) PLC side
(terminal block) PLC side
SD RD
12
SD 3 SD
RD SD

CONNECTION TO
RD 2 RD

TOSHIBA PLC
ER RS
ER 4 DTR
DR CS
DR 6 DSR
SG SG
SG 5 SG

RS 7 RS
RS
13
CS

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CS 8 CS

CONNECTION TO
NC
NC 1 CD
NC
NC 9 -

PLC
RS232 connection diagram 15)
RS232 connection diagram 12) (For GT1030, GT1020)
(For GT1030, GT1020) 14
GOT side

PANASONIC SERVO
GOT side (terminal block) PLC side

CONNECTION TO
(terminal block) PLC side
RD
SD R1(RD)
AMPLIFIER
RD
SD R SD
RS RD S1(SD)
RD S SG
SG ER SG
ER G

DR
DR 15
SG
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

SG
DEVICES SUNX PLC

RS
CONNECTION TO

RS
CS
CS
NC
NC
NC
NC

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 15

15.3 Connection Diagram
RS232 connection diagram 16) 15.3.2 RS-422 cable
(For GT1030, GT1020)

GOT side  Connection diagram

(terminal block) PLC side
RS422 connection diagram 1)
Receive data (For GT16)
SD RD
Send data
RD SD GOT side PLC side
Grounding for
signals
ER SG SDA1(TXD1+) 1 R+ Receive data(+)
DR SDB1(TXD1-) 2 R- Receive data(-)
SG RDA1(RXD1+) 3 S+ Send data(+)
RS RDB1(RXD1-) 4 S- Send data(-)
CS SDA2(TXD2+) 5

NC SDB2(TXD2-) 6

NC RDA2(RXD2+) 7

RDB2(RXD2-) 8

 Precautions when preparing a cable RSA(RTS+) 9

(1) Cable length RSB(RTS-) 10

The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or CSA(CTS+) 11

less.The length of the cable must be 3m or less with a
transmission speed of 38400bps. CSB(CTS-) 12

SG 13
(2) GOT side connector
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. NC 14

1.4.1 GOT connector specifications Shell

(3) Connector for Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX

PLC
RS422 connection diagram 2)
Use the connector applicable to the Panasonic
Industrial Devices SUNX PLC. (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT105 , GT104 )
For details, refer to the Panasonic Industrial Devices
GOT side PLC side
SUNX PLC user's manual.
SDA 1 R+ Receive data(+)
RDA 2 S+ Send data(+)
RSA 3 R- Receive data(-)
CSA 4 S- Send data(-)
SG 5

SDB 6

RDB 7

RSB 8

CSB 9

FG -

15 - 16 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.3 Connection Diagram
RS422 connection diagram 3) 9
(For GT1030, GT1020)

CONNECTION TO
GOT side
(terminal block) PLC side

SHARP PLC
R+
SDA Receive data(+)
R-
SDB Receive data(-)
RDA
S+
Send data(+) 10
S-

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
RDB Send data(-)

TECHNOS INDICATING
SG

CONTROLLER
RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB 11
*1

CONNECTION TO

CONTROLLER
*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable
shield line.

CHINO
 Precautions when preparing a cable
(1) Cable length
The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less.
12
(2) GOT side connector

CONNECTION TO
For the GOT side connector, refer to the following.

TOSHIBA PLC
1.4.1 GOT connector specifications
(3) Connector for Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX
PLC
Use the connector applicable to the Panasonic
Industrial Devices SUNX PLC.
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
For details, refer to the Panasonic Industrial Devices

CONNECTION TO
SUNX PLC user's manual.

 Connecting terminating resistors

PLC
(1) GOT side
(a) For GT16, GT15, GT12
Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the 14
GOT main unit to "Disable".

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO
(b) For GT14, GT11, GT10
Set the terminating resistor selector to "330 ".
AMPLIFIER
For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the
following.
1.4.3 Terminating resistors of GOT
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 17

15.3 Connection Diagram
 15.4 GOT Side Settings
15.4.1 Setting communication
15.4.2 Communication detail settings
interface (Communication
settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the

GOT.

2.

3.

4. Item Description Range

4800bps,
Set this item when change the
9600bps,
transmission speed used for
Transmission 19200bps,
communication with the connected
Speed 38400bps,
equipment.
57600bps,
(Default: 9600bps)
115200bps
Click! Set this item when change the data
length used for communication with
Data Bit 7bits/8bits
the connected equipment.
(Default: 8bits)
Set the number of retries to be
1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the performed when a communication
menu. Retry
timeout occurs.
0 to 5times
When receiving no response after
2. The Controller Setting window is displayed. Select the retries, the communication times out.
(Default: 0time)
channel to be used from the list menu.
Set the time period for a
3. Set the following items. Timeout Time communication to time out.
(Default: 3sec)
3 to 30sec

• Manufacturer: Panasonic
Specify the host address (station No.
• Controller Type: Panasonic MEWNET-FP
of the PLC to which the GOT is
• I/F: Interface to be used Host Address 1 to 31
connected) in the network of the GOT.
• Driver: Panasonic MEWNET-FP (Default: 1)
Set this item to adjust the
4. The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer, transmission timing of the
Controller Type, I/F, and Driver are set. Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 (ms)
GOT.
Make the settings according to the usage
(Default: 0ms)
environment.
15.4.2 Communication detail settings
POINT
Click the [OK] button when settings are completed.
(1) Communication interface setting by the Utility
The communication interface setting can be
POINT changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings]
after writing [Communication Settings] of project
The settings of connecting equipment can be data.
confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details on the Utility, refer to the following
manual.
For details, refer to the following.
User's Manual of GOT used.
1.1.2 I/F communication setting
(2) Precedence in communication settings
When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
Utility, the latest setting is effective.

15 - 18 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.4 GOT Side Settings
 9
15.5 PLC Side Setting

CONNECTION TO
SHARP PLC
POINT  Connecting to the computer communication
unit
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX PLC
For details of the Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Item Set value 10
PLC, refer to the following manual. speed*1

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Transmission 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

TECHNOS INDICATING
Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX PLC user's Data bit 7bit, 8bit
Manual Stop bit 1bit

CONTROLLER
Parity bit Odd
Parity check Yes
Control signal Invalidate CS, CD

 Connecting to the tool port of the PLC CPU

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
11
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

CONNECTION TO
Item Set value the following.

CONTROLLER
*1
4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 15.4.1 Setting communication interface
Transmission speed
38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps (Communication settings)

CHINO
Data bit 7bit, 8bit The setting range varies with the connected PLC.
Stop bit 1bit
 Connecting to the communication cassette
Parity bit
Modem connection
Odd
No
12
(1) Communication settings
Module No. 1
Set the commnumication settings for the COM 1 port

CONNECTION TO
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on and COM2 port to connect GOT.

TOSHIBA PLC
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
Item Set value
For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to
the following. Communication mode Computer link
15.4.1 Setting communication interface 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps,
Transmission speed*1
(Communication settings)
The setting range varies with the connected PLC. Modem connection
38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps
No
13

TOSHIBA MACHINE
Data bit 7bit, 8bit
 Connecting to the RS232C and COM port of

CONNECTION TO
Parity check Odd
the PLC CPU Stop bit 1bit
Unit No. 1
Item Set value
Port selection*2

PLC
Communication cassette
4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps,
Transmission speed*1 *1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
Data bit
38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps
7bit, 8bit
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
14

PANASONIC SERVO
Stop bit 1bit For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

CONNECTION TO
the following.
Parity bit Odd
15.4.1 Setting communication interface
Modem connection No
AMPLIFIER
(Communication settings)
Serial port action selection*2 1 (Computer link) *2 Set the COM2 port only.
Module No. 1
(2) Switch setting on the Communication cassette
*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on
the GOT side.
Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.
(AFPX-COM3)
Set the switch on the back.
15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to

the following.
Switch No. Setting Setting details
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15.4.1 Setting communication interface

1 OFF 1 O
(Communication settings)
N
The setting range varies with the connected PLC. 2 OFF RS422 2
*2 Set when connecting to FP0, FP1, FP2 or FP-M.
3 OFF 3

Terminating resistor 4
4 OFF
OFF

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 19

15.5 PLC Side Setting
 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3.
The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models, even though belonging to the same series.
Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used.
When a non-existent device or a device number outside the range is set, other objects with correct device settings may
not be monitored.

 Setting item

Item Description

Set the device name, device number, and bit number.

Device
The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device.

Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in [Device].

POINT
Device settings of PANASONIC PLC
(1) When setting a contact as a bit device
Set the device using the format of word address (DEC) + bit address (HEX).

Device number
Device name Bit address (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
(2) When setting a contact as a word device
Set the device number.
Enter "W" before the device name, not including the bit address.

Device name
("W" added) Device number

15 - 20 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
15.6.1 Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX PLC (Panasonic MEWNET-FP) *1 9

CONNECTION TO
Device No.
Device name Setting range
representation

SHARP PLC
Input relay (X)*2*3 X0000 to X511F

Output relay (Y)*3 Y0000 to Y511F

Decimal +
Internal relay (R) R0000 to R886F
Special relay (R)*2 R9000 to R911F
Hexadecimal
10
Bit device

CONNECTION TO SHINKO
Link relay (L)*5 L0000 to L639F

TECHNOS INDICATING
Timer contact (T)*2*4 T0 to T3071
Decimal
Counter contact (C)*2*4

CONTROLLER
C0 to C3071
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit*7 (except input relay, output relay, internal relay, special relay -
and link relay)
Input relay (WX)*2 WX000 to WX511 11
Output relay (WY) WY000 to WY511

CONNECTION TO
Internal relay (WR) WR000 to WR886

CONTROLLER
Special relay (WR)*2 WR900 to WR911
Link relay (WL) WL000 to WL639

CHINO
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value) (EV) *4 EV0 to EV3071
Word device

Decimal
Timer/Counter (Set value) (SV)*4 SV0 to SV3071
Data register (DT) DT0 to DT10239 12
DT0 to DT32764
Special data register (DT)
DT90000 to DT90511

CONNECTION TO
Link register (LD)*5 LD0 to LD8447

TOSHIBA PLC
File register (FL)*5*6 FL0 to FL32764
Converting bit devices into word
Bit device word*7 -
(Except Timer contact and Counter contact)

*1 The above device range is for the case where FP10SH is used.
For FP0, FP1, FP2, FP3, FP5, FP-10(S), or FP-M, device ranges are different in individual CPUs.
13
*2 Writing to device is not allowed.

TOSHIBA MACHINE
CONNECTION TO
*3 Only those devices that have been assigned to I/O contacts by peripheral software can be used.
*4 The device points of the timer and counter differs depending on the head numbers of the counter set by the value of the system
register (No. 5).
*5 This device does not exist in FP0, FP1, and FP-M.
*6 When FP2SH is used, one bank of "32765 3 banks" can be monitored.

PLC
*7 This is not supported by GT10.

14

PANASONIC SERVO
CONNECTION TO

AMPLIFIER

15
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL
DEVICES SUNX PLC
CONNECTION TO

15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 15 - 21

15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
15 - 22 15. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC
15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set
INDEX
[A] CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC .................... 4-18
AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE

INDEX
AUR350C, AUR450C....................................... 3-17 CONTROLLER................................................... 5-6
CMC10B .......................................................... 3-18 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC........... 15-13
CMF015, CMF050 ........................................... 3-14 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC................ 9-7,14-4
CML, PBC201-VN2.......................................... 3-16 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX ............................ 3-13 INDICATING CONTROLLER........................... 10-6
DMC10............................................................... 3-4 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
DMC50............................................................... 3-5 ......................................................................... 13-4
SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 .......................... 3-6 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC .................. 12-5
SDC20/21 .......................................................... 3-7 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
SDC30/31 .......................................................... 3-9 ............................................................................... 3-1
SDC40A/40B/40G............................................ 3-10 CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER ........ 11-1
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER.... 2-1
SDC45/46 ........................................................ 3-12
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC............................. 8-1
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC ...................... 6-1
[C] CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC......................... 7-1
CHINO CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC.......................... 4-1
GT120 .............................................................. 11-9 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
KP1000, KP2000, AL3000, AH3000 ................ 11-5 CONTROLLER ...................................................... 5-1
LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ1000, CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC ................ 15-1
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000 .............................. 11-3
............................................................................. 14-1
SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000......................... 11-7 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC ........................... 9-1
Coaxial cable ....................................................... 1-28 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
Communication module....................................... 1-16 INDICATING CONTROLLER .............................. 10-1
Connectable Model List CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC .... 13-1
CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC...................... 12-1
........................................................................... 3-2 Control Equipment Side Setting
CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER..... 11-2 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER ......................................................................... 3-48
........................................................................... 2-2 Controller Side Setting
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC......................... 8-2 CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER... 11-27
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC................... 6-2 Controller Type ...................................................... 1-5
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ..................... 7-2 Conversion cables ............................................... 1-17
CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC ...................... 4-2
CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE [D]
CONTROLLER .................................................. 5-2 Device Range that Can Be Set
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC............. 15-2 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO ......................................................................... 3-54
AMPLIFIER ...................................................... 14-2 CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER... 11-33
CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC ....................... 9-2 CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS ......................................................................... 2-24
INDICATING CONTROLLER........................... 10-2 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC ....................... 8-19
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC................. 6-20
......................................................................... 13-2 CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-27
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC .................. 12-2 CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC .................... 4-41
CONNECTION ...................................................... 5-1 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
Connection Diagram CONTROLLER................................................. 5-16
CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC........... 15-20
......................................................................... 3-22 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC...................... 9-15
CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER... 11-10 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER INDICATING CONTROLLER......................... 10-15
......................................................................... 2-14 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC....................... 8-10 ......................................................................... 13-7
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC................. 6-10 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC ................ 12-13
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-14

Index-1
[G] CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1.......... 4-4
GOT connector specifications ............................. 1-25 CQM1H .............................................................. 4-6
GOT Side Settings CS1H, CS1G, CS1D ........................................ 4-14
CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1 .................... 4-17
......................................................................... 3-46 OMRON temperature controller
CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER... 11-25 INPANEL NEO ................................................... 5-5
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC ....................... 8-14 THERMAC NEO................................................. 5-3
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC................. 6-14 Option unit ........................................................... 1-17
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-22
CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC .................... 4-23 [P]
CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE PANASONIC EW PLC
CONTROLLER................................................. 5-12 FP Σ ............................................................... 15-10
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC........... 15-18 FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, FP0R...................... 15-3
CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC.............. 9-10,14-9 FP10 (S) ........................................................... 15-6
CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS FP10SH............................................................ 15-8
INDICATING CONTROLLER......................... 10-12 FP1-C24C, FP1-C40C ..................................... 15-3
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC FP2, FP2SH ..................................................... 15-4
......................................................................... 13-5 FP3, FP5 .......................................................... 15-5
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC .................. 12-7 FP-M (C20TC), FP-M (C32TC) ........................ 15-9
FP-X ............................................................... 15-11
[I] PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER
MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L............... 14-2
I/F .......................................................................... 1-7
I/F communication setting.................................... 1-11 MINAS A5 ........................................................ 14-3
IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER PLC Side Setting
PCON, ACON, SCON ........................................ 2-4 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC ....................... 8-16
Z-SEL, SSEL...................................................... 2-3 CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC ................. 6-15
Indicating Controller Side Setting CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-23
CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC .................... 4-24
INDICATING CONTROLLER......................... 10-13 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC ........... 15-19
CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC............ 9-11,14-10
[J] CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
......................................................................... 13-6
JTEKT PLC CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC .................. 12-8
PC2J, PC2JS, PC2JR........................................ 8-6
Precautions
PC2JC, PC2J16P, PC2J16PR........................... 8-8 CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PC3J, PC3JL...................................................... 8-4 ......................................................................... 3-58
PC3JG, PC3JG-P .............................................. 8-2 CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER ... 11-34
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
[K] ......................................................................... 2-35
KEYENCE PLC CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC ....................... 8-20
KV-1000 ............................................................. 6-6 CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-28
KV-3000 ............................................................. 6-4 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
KV-5500, KV-5000 ............................................. 6-3 CONTROLLER................................................. 5-17
KV-700 ............................................................... 6-8 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO
KOYO EI PLC AMPLIFIER .................................................... 14-13
D2-240, D2-250-1, D2-260............................... 7-11 CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
DirectLOGIC 05.................................................. 7-7 INDICATING CONTROLLER ......................... 10-16
DirectLOGIC 06.................................................. 7-9 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR
PZ .................................................................... 7-13 MONITORING ....................................................... 1-1
SU-5E, SU-6B .................................................... 7-3
SU-5M, SU-6M................................................... 7-5 [R]
Robot Controller Side Setting
[O] CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
OMRON PLC ......................................................................... 2-21
C1000H, C2000H............................................. 4-16
C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE [S]
......................................................................... 4-12 Servo Amplifier Side Setting
CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H................................. 4-7 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO
CP1H, CP1L , CP1E ........................................ 4-10 AMPLIFIER .................................................... 14-10

Index-2
 SHARP PLC
JW-21CU, JW-22CU.......................................... 9-3
JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH ................ 9-4
JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, JW-100CU
........................................................................... 9-5
Z-512J................................................................ 9-6

INDEX
SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER
ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300
Series, PC-900 Series(PC-955-□/M,C5, PC-935-□/
M,C5) ............................................................... 10-3
DCL-33A Series ............................................... 10-5
FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR Series,PC-900
Series(PC-955-□/M,C, PC-935-□/M,C) ............ 10-4
Station No. settings
CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
......................................................................... 3-53
CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER... 11-32
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC....................... 8-18
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ................... 7-26
CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER ................................................ 5-15
CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
INDICATING CONTROLLER......................... 10-14
System Configuration
CONNECTION TO AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
........................................................................... 3-4
CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER..... 11-3
CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER
........................................................................... 2-3
CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC......................... 8-2
CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC................... 6-3
CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC ..................... 7-3
CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC ...................... 4-4
CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER .................................................. 5-3
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC............. 15-3
CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO
AMPLIFIER ...................................................... 14-2
CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC ....................... 9-3
CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS
INDICATING CONTROLLER........................... 10-3
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
......................................................................... 13-3
CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC .................. 12-3

[T]
Temperature Controller Side Setting
CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER ................................................ 5-14
Terminating resistors of GOT .............................. 1-29
TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
TC3, TC6, TC8................................................. 13-3
TS2000, TS2100.............................................. 13-3
TOSHIBA PLC
PROSEC T....................................................... 12-3
PROSEC V ...................................................... 12-4
Unified Controller nv ........................................ 12-9

Index-3
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080869ENG-A First edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.01B
Jan., 2010 SH(NA)-080869ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.10L
• Correction of writing errors
• Station monitoring function (Ethernet multiple connection compatible, temperature controller connection
compatible), OMRON PLC compatible, (SYSMAC CJ2, CP1E, Ethernet connection compatible), PANASONIC
PLC (FP0R compatible)
• In the communication detail settings for the Ethernet connection, the setting range of the GOT communication
port No. is changed.
May., 2010 SH(NA)-080869ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.14Q
• In the communication detail settings for the Ethernet connection, the setting range of the GOT communication
port No. is changed.
June., 2010 SH(NA)-080869ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.17T
• GT1675-VN, GT1672-VN, and GT1662-VN are added.
• IAI Corporation robot controller connection compatible, OMRON PLC (CJ1W-CIF11 compatible, CP1W-CIF12
compatible), PANASONIC servo amplifier compatible.
Oct., 2010 SH(NA)-080869ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.19V
• OMRON PLC (CJ2M) compatible.
Jan., 2011 SH(NA)-080869ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.23Z
• IAI Corporation robot controller (PCON, ACON, SCON) compatible
• CHINO controller (KP, AL3000, AH3000, SE3000, JU, KE, LE5000) compatible
• TOSHIBA PLC (Unified Controller nv Series) compatible
Apr., 2011 SH(NA)-080869ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.28E
• GT1655-V is added.
• KEYENCE PLC (KV-5500) compatible.
Jul., 2011 SH(NA)-080869ENG-H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.31H
• PANASONIC servo amplifier (MINAS-A5) compatible
Oct., 2011 SH(NA)-080869ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.37P
• GT14, GT12 are added.
• IAI Corporation robot controller (ASEL, PSEL, ERC2) compatible.
Jan., 2012 SH(NA)-080869ENG-J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.40S
• "I/F Communication Setting" is compatible with "5V power supply".
• Connectable model GT14 is added for the following:
JTEKT PLC, SHARP PLC, TOSHIBA PLC, TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC
• RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor is added.
Apr., 2012 SH(NA)-080869ENG-K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.45X
• Connectable model GT14 is added.
Jun., 2012 SH(NA)-080869ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.54G
• Description of the temperature controller manufactured by Azbil (former Yamatake) Corporation is moved from
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) to this manual.
• The following temperature controller models manufactured by Azbil (former Yamatake) Corporation are
additionally compatible.
SDC45/46, CMS, CMF, CML, MQV, MPC, MVF, PBZ, AUR, RX, CMC
• Compatible with the company name change of Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd. to Panasonic Corporation.
• Ping test at the GT14 main unit compatible
Sep., 2012 SH(NA)-080869ENG-M M edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.58L
• Note about the IAI robot controller is added.
• JTEKT PLC (PC3JD, PC3JD-C) models are added.
Nov., 2012 SH(NA)-080869ENG-N N edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.63R
• SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
• OMRON PLC (CJ1W-SCU31-V1) compatible
Feb., 2013 SH(NA)-080869ENG-O O edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.67V
• IAI Corporation robot controller (SCON-CA, PCON-CA) models are added.

Jun., 2013 SH(NA)-080869ENG-P P edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.74C

• Ethernet connection is compatible for KEYENCE PLC.
• Company name change PANASONIC PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX

REVISIONS - 1
 * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Jan., 2014 SH(NA)-080869ENG-Q Q edition: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.108N

• Azbil (former Yamatake) temperature controller (AHC2001) compatible

Apr., 2014 SH(NA)-080869ENG-R Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.111R

• The enlargement of the communication setting range of the TOSHIBA PLC is supported.

Oct., 2014 SH(NA)-080869ENG-S Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.122C

• GT14 is added. (GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD)

Oct., 2015 SH(NA)-080869ENG-T Some corrections

Jun., 2017 SH(NA)-080869ENG-U Partial corrections.

Oct., 2020 SH(NA)-080869ENG-V Partial corrections.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result
of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

REVISIONS - 2
REVISIONS - 3
WARRANTY
Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.
■1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion.
Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the
failed module.
(1) Gratis Warranty Term
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest
gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months.
The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
(2) Gratis Warranty Range
(a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customer’s expense.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the
conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.
• Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's
hardware or software design.
• Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
• When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures,
judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had
been provided.
• Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or
replaced.
• Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse.
• Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as
earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
• Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
• Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
■2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.
■3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center.
Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
■4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
■5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
■6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident
even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are
systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be
excluded from the graphic operation terminal.
Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided
that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.
GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation, Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SH(NA)-080869ENG-V
 Series

Connection Manual
(Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) for GT Works3

MODEL SW1-GTD3-U(CON2)-E

MODEL 1D7MC3
CODE

SH(NA)-080869ENG-V(2010)MEE

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in Japan, October 2020.